System Manual Industrial Controls SIRIUS Classic Edition 05/2017 siemens.com Safety guidelines This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as well as to protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are highlighted in the manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger: Safety note Contains important information for the acceptance test and the safety-related use of the product. Danger Indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken. Warning Indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. Warning Indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. Caution indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. Important Draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a particular part of the documentation. Qualified personnel Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground, and to tag circuits, equipment, and systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards. Correct usage Note the following: Warning This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalogue or the technical descriptions, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by SIEMENS. This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended. Brands SIMATIC(R), SIMATIC HMI(R) and SIMATIC NET(R) are brands of SIEMENS AG. Some other designations used in these documents are also brands; the owner's rights may be violated if they are used by third parties for their own purposes. Copyright SIEMENS AG 2001 All rights reserved Disclaimer of liability The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved. We have checked this manual to ensure that its contents are correct and applicable in relation to the hardware and software it describes. Despite all our endeavors, however, discrepancies cannot be wholly excluded and so we cannot guarantee complete correctness and applicability. However, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed. SIEMENS AG Telephone: +49 (911) 895-5900 (8 - 17 CET) Technical Assistance Fax: +49 (911) 895-5907 Breslauer Str. 5 E-mail: technical-assistance@siemens.com D-90766 Furth Internet: www.siemens.com/sirius/technical-assistance Siemens AG Division Digital Factory PO Box 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 05/2017 Subject to changes Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2001 All rights reserved Contents 1 System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.4 1.5 1.5.1 1.5.2 1.5.3 1.5.4 1.6 1.6.1 1.6.2 1.6.3 1.6.4 Specifications/regulations/approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components and combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting methods and terminal systems . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screw-type terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cage Clamp terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection cross-sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication-capable low-voltage switching technology . . Parameterization of PROFIBUS-DP and bus-capable low-voltage Actuator-sensor interface (AS-Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . SIRIUS NET Communication-capable motor starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 1-5 1-10 1-11 1-11 1-12 1-16 1-16 1-18 1-19 1-21 1-22 1-22 1-23 1-24 1-29 2 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 2.1 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 2.3.6 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . switching devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifications/regulations/approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information on configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application and areas of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transformer protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starter protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor protection with overload relay function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching direct current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main and emergency stop switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attachable accessories: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary contacts 3RV19 01-.., alarm switch 3RV19 21-111 and auxiliary release 3RV19 .2-.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.3 Motorized remote-control mechanism 3RV19 .6-.... . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.4 Disconnecting/isolator module 3RV19 .8-1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.5 Thru-the door rotary operators 3RV19 .6-.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.6 Terminals for "Combination Motor Controller Type E" in acc. with UL 508 2.4.7 Enclosures and mounting accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.8 Busbar adapter 8US1 (Fastbus system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.9 Isolated 3-phase busbar system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.10 Link module for connection to a contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 Mounting and connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.2 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.3 Device circuit diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 Dimensional drawings (dimensions in mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-10 2-13 2-13 2-13 2-13 2-14 2-15 2-15 2-16 2-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 2-22 2-25 2-27 2-33 2-34 2-39 2-43 2-46 2-47 2-47 2-48 2-50 2-52 i 2.7 2.7.1 2.7.2 2.7.3 2.7.4 2.8.1 2.8.2 Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Permissible rating of approved devices for North America, u s . . . . . . . . . Short-circuit breaking capacity Icn in acc. with IEC 60 947-2 . . . . . . . . . . Limiter function with standard devices for 500 V AC and 690 V AC in acc. with IEC 60 947-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application notes for the use of 3RV1 downstream from frequency converters/ inverter with pulsing voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Influences of high frequency currents upon the thermal overload release . . . Other possible influences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72 2-72 2-73 3 3RT1 Contactors/ 3RH1 Control relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.1.4 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.3.1 3.2.3.2 3.2.3.3 3.2.3.4 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 3.3.5.1 3.3.5.2 3.3.5.3 Specifications/regulations/approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Utilization categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positively driven operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safe isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explanation of terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coil systems S00 to S3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Short-circuit protection for SIRIUS contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contact reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application and areas of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3RT10 contactors with 3 main contacts for switching motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3RT14 contactors with 3 main contacts for switching resistive loads (AC-1) . . . . . . 3RT13 and 3RT15 contactors with 4 main contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3RT16 capacitor contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contactors with an extended operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contactors with series resister (3RH11...-0LA0/3RT10...-0LA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contactors with electronic control module frame sizes S0 to S3 (3RT10..-.X40-0LA2) . . . Contactors with an extended operating range (3RH1122-2K.40, 3RT1017-2K.4., 3RT102.-3K.40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3RH1 control relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3RT10 contactor relays for switching motors (interface) and 3RH11 control relays for switching auxiliary circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3RA13 Contactor combinations for reversing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3RA14 Wye-delta combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attachable auxiliary switches for extending the auxiliary contacts . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal markings of the contactors frame sizes S00 to S3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal markings of the contactors and control relays combined with auxiliary switch blocks Auxiliary switches that can be attached to 3RH1 control relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time-delay auxiliary switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame size S00 (3RT1916-2E, -2F, -2G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame sizes S0 to S3 (3RT1926-2E, -2F, -2G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solid-state time relay blocks with semiconductor output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame size S00 (3RT1916-2C, -2D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame sizes S0 to S3 (3RT19 26-2C, -2D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.5 2.7.6 2.8 3.3.6 3.3.7 3.3.8 3.3.9 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.1.1 3.4.1.2 3.4.1.3 3.4.2 3.4.2.1 3.4.2.2 3.4.3 3.4.3.1 3.4.3.2 ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63 2-63 2-66 2-68 . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70 2-70 2-71 3-3 3-3 3-7 3-7 3-9 3-10 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-14 3-15 3-16 3-20 3-23 3-23 3-24 3-25 3-26 3-28 3-28 3-30 3-31 3-32 3-33 3-35 3-46 3-54 3-57 3-62 3-64 3-66 3-69 3-69 3-71 3-72 3-73 3-74 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3.4.4 3.4.5 3.4.6 3.4.7 3.4.7.1 3.4.7.2 3.4.7.3 3.4.7.4 3.4.7.5 3.4.7.6 3.4.7.7 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.6 3.7 Additional load module (3RT1916-1GA00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coupling element for frame sizes S0 to S3 (3RH1924-1GP11) . . . . . . . . . . . Surge suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED module for indicating contactor control (3RT19 26-1QT00) . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary connecting lead terminal, 3-pole for frame size S3 (3RT19 46-4F) . . . . . . . EMC interference suppression module (3RT19 16-1P..) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soldering pin adapter for frame size S00 (3RT19 16-4KA.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paralleling links (3RT19 .6-4B.31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sealing cover (3RT19 .6-4MA10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal covers for frame sizes S2 to S3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting and connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the magnetic coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the contact pieces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional drawings (dimensions in mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75 3-76 3-78 3-83 3-83 3-83 3-84 3-85 3-87 3-88 3-89 3-91 3-91 3-94 3-98 3-103 3-106 3-122 4 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 4.1 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.5 4.5.1 4.5.1.1 4.5.1.2 4.5.2 4.5.3 4.6 4.7 4.7.1 4.7.2 4.7.3 4.7.4 Specifications/regulations/approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detailed device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application and use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overload relay in the motor circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3RU11 thermal overload relays and 3RB10 electronic overload relays 3RB12 electronic overload relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical remote RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical thru-the-door reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting and connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3RU11 thermal overload relays and 3RB10 electronic overload relays . . 3RB12 electronic overload relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional drawings (dimensions in mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3RU11 thermal overload relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3RB10 electronic overload relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3RB12 electronic overload relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal bracket for stand-alone installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 4-4 4-4 4-5 4-10 4-10 4-15 4-22 4-30 4-30 4-31 4-33 4-34 4-34 4-34 4-40 4-41 4-43 4-46 4-49 4-49 4-54 4-61 4-66 iii 5 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders/Combination starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.3 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.6 5.7 Specifications/regulations/approvals . . . . . . . . Device descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting kits for self-assembly . . . . . . . . . . . Complete devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application and areas of use . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories for the individual devices . . . . . . . Accessories specifically for the SIRIUS 3RA fuseless Instructions for self-assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting and connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional drawings (dimensions in mm) . . . . . Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-5 5-7 5-8 5-8 5-8 5-9 5-18 5-18 5-21 5-23 5-24 5-28 6 3RH, 3TX, LZX Coupling links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 6.1 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5 6.2.6 6.2.7 6.2.8 6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.4 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.5 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 6.6 6.7 Specifications/regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relay coupling modules versus semiconductor coupling modules Coupling links in two-tier and box terminal format . . . . . . . . Plug-in relay coupling links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coupling links for direct attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIRIUS contactor relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes on configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explanation of terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application and areas of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Criteria for selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories for two-tier coupling links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories for LZX plug-in relay coupling links . . . . . . . . . . Mounting and connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device circuit diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional drawings (dimensions in mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . load feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-7 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-12 6-13 6-14 6-14 6-14 6-16 6-20 6-22 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 7 3RP20, 3RP15 Solid-state time relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 7.2 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.4 7.2.5 7.3 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.3 7.3.4 7.3.5 7.3.6 7.3.7 7.4 7.4.1 7.5 7.5.1 7.5.2 7.5.3 7.6 7.7 Specifications/regulations/approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes on configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explanation of terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application and areas of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multifunction (3RP20 05 solid-state time relay) . . . . . . . Multifunctional (3RP15 05 solid-state time relay) . . . . . . On-delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off-delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock pulse generator (3RP15 55 solid-state time relay) . . . Wye-delta function (3RP15 74/76 solid-state time relay) . . . Wye-delta function with overtravel (3RP15 60 solid-state time Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories for 3RP15 05, 3RP20 05 . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting and connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional drawings (dimensions in mm) . . . . . . . . . Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 7-3 7-3 7-5 7-5 7-6 7-7 7-8 7-8 7-12 7-18 7-19 7-20 7-21 7-21 7-22 7-22 7-24 7-24 7-25 7-26 7-27 7-28 8 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 8.1 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 Specifications/regulations/approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Comparison of the 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit (soft starter) with the SIKOSTART 3RW22 and SIKOSTART 3RW34 motor control units . . . . . . . . . . . Comparison of the 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit (soft starter) with the 3RA star-delta combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes on configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application and use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Areas of application and criteria for selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview tables: correction factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3RW30/31 soft starters in a stand-alone installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3RW30/31 soft starters in combination with the 3RV1 circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . Combining the 3RT contactor with the 3RU1 thermal overload relay and 3RW3 soft starter Combining the 3RT contactor with the 3RB10 electronic overload relay and 3RW3 soft starter Circuit example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Event messages and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timing diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting and connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.4 8.2.5 8.3 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.3.1 8.3.3.2 8.3.3.3 8.3.3.4 8.3.4 8.3.5 8.3.6 8.3.7 8.4 8.5 8.5.1 8.5.2 8.5.3 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . relay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 8-3 8-5 8-6 8-10 8-14 8-16 8-16 8-18 8-18 8-18 8-21 8-21 8-22 8-24 8-26 8-29 8-30 8-32 8-33 8-35 8-37 8-37 8-37 8-38 v 8.6 8.7 8.7.1 8.7.2 8.7.3 8.7.4 8.7.5 Dimensional drawings (dimensions in mm) . Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Control electronics/power electronics . . . . Short-circuit protection and fuse coordination Site altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifications in acc. with IEC . . . . . . . Specifications in acc. with NEMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41 8-42 8-42 8-45 8-50 8-51 8-52 9 3RE Enclosed starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.3.1 9.3.2 9.4 9.5 9.5.1 9.5.2 9.5.3 9.6 9.7 Specifications/regulations/approvals . Device description . . . . . . . . . . Application and areas of use . . . . . The enclosed starter in motor branches Planning and operation . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting and connection . . . . . . . Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional drawings . . . . . . . . Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 9-3 9-5 9-5 9-5 9-6 9-7 9-7 9-7 9-8 9-9 9-10 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1 vi SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 1 System overview Section Subject Page 1.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals 1-3 1.2 Product range 1-5 1.3 System features 1-10 1.3.1 Environmental requirements 1-11 1.3.2 Environmental protection 1-11 1.4 Components and combinations 1-12 1.5 Mounting methods and terminal systems 1-16 1.5.1 Mounting the equipment 1-16 1.5.2 Screw-type terminals 1-18 1.5.3 Cage Clamp terminals 1-19 1.5.4 Connection cross-sections 1-21 1.6 Communication 1-22 1.6.1 Communication-capable low-voltage switching technology 1-22 1.6.2 Parameterization of PROFIBUS-DP and bus-capable low-voltage switching devices 1-23 1.6.3 Actuator-sensor interface (AS-Interface) 1-24 1.6.4 SIRIUS NET Communication-capable motor starter 1-29 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 1-1 System overview Introduction SIEMENS is one of the leading manufacturers of control products. The product range extends from devices that switch a few mA to circuit breakers used in power distribution. Throughout the continuing development of these products we have always striven to ensure that requirements in terms of fundamental performance features, electrical and mechanical service life, dimensions, and ease of installation and maintenance are met or exceeded. We have been able to meet the demands resulting from increased environmental awareness, particularly in the last ten years or so, by developing and using environment-friendly and recyclable materials. As a result, we have developed modern industrial switching devices, particularly in the field of low-voltage switchgear, that meet all the relevant demands in terms of environment-friendliness. Building on decades of experience, we have created a completely new generation of circuit breakers, contactors, auxiliary contactors, overload relays, contactor relays, time relays, and 3RW3 semiconductor motor control devices (referred to below as soft starters) under the name SIRIUS for the large and continuously growing number of motor drives in the range up to 250 kW (400 HP). These new SIRIUS devices fulfill all the demands placed on them in practice and can be used as stand-alone devices or modular components of complete load feeders, or integrated in low-voltage distribution cabinets or lowvoltage switching stations. SIRIUS System Manual 1-2 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 System overview 1.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals ALPHA/LOVAG The Low Voltage Controls and Distribution Division of Siemens AG is a member of "Gesellschaft zur Prufung und Zertifizierung von Niederspannungsgeraten e.V. ALPHA" (Society for Testing and Certification of LowVoltage Equipment), Frankfurt am Main. The responsibility of manufacturers and the high quality of products are promoted by ALPHA by means of supportive procedural guidelines for testing equipment in accordance with the currently valid standards. Providing specific conditions are fulfilled, ALPHA can also issue officially recognized product certificates if required. As a member of LOVAG, ALPHA is also working towards obtaining international recognition for declarations of conformity and certificates. In LOVAG (Low Voltage Agreement Group), international specialists from certification bodies and industry are working together to create a standardized European certificate. List of LOVAG members ALPHA ASEFA ACAE CEBEC CESI KEMA SEMKO Explosion protection Germany France Italy Belgium Italy Netherlands Sweden Motor protection devices that protect a motor installed in a potentially explosive atmosphere against overloading must comply with certain special requirements. These requirements are laid down in the following standards: * * * * * EN EN EN EN EN 60947-1 60079-14 60947-4-1 50014 50019. Certification On July 1, 2003 a new era began in the area of explosion protection. Since this date, within the European Union, only those devices and protection systems that have been certified for use in potentially explosive atmospheres in accordance with directive 94/9/EU can be brought into circulation. Only those motor protection devices that have been constructed in accordance with the above-mentioned standards and which have a conformity declaration from the manufacturer based on a prototype test certificate are permitted to be brought into circulation within the member states of the EU. The quality management system of the manufacturer is also subjected to certain requirements and a "QM certificate" must be obtained for the manufacturer from a recognized authority. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 1-3 System overview Certification of the QM system A certificate of approval for quality assurance production has been issued by DMT 1) with the DMT 1) number 02 ATEX ZQS/EM, in accordance with directive 94/9/EU. This certificate is valid for equipment groups I and II and categories M2 and 2: Safety and control devices for electrical equipment. Certificates For the 3RV, 3RU, 3RB, 3UF5 and 3RN motor protection devices, the corresponding conformity declarations and prototype test certificates for Category 2G and partly 2D are available and can be supplied on request. Identifying markings All equipment must be marked in accordance with the ATEX guideline. The ATEX identification code contains the equipment group, the approved environment, the number of the certification authority and other technical data that was determined from the type test. UL/CSA Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) and the Canadian Standards Association (CSA) are authorized to grant approvals acording to US or Canadian regulations and standards. These standards typically apply to the control product as a componient and not the installation or the use of the product. It is the responsibility of the end user of the control product to make sure each installation complies with all of the applicable safety requirements, laws, regulations, codes and standards (examples: N.E.C., the C.E.C. and OSHA regulations. 1) DMT The certification authority of the Deutschen Montan Technologie GmbH, numbered as authority number 0158 in accordance with Article 9 of Directive 94/9/EU of the European Parliament dated March 23, 1994, certifies that Siemens Amberg and Cham maintains a quality system for production that satisfies Appendix IV of this directive. SIRIUS System Manual 1-4 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 System overview 1.2 Product range SIRIUS system The SIRIUS product range consists of 3RV circuit breakers/Motor Starter Protectors, 3RT contactors, 3RH/3RT control relays and auxiliary contacts, 3RU thermal overload relays, 3RB10/3RB12 electronic overload relays, 3RP time relays, 3RW3 semiconductor motor control devices (referred to below as soft starters), and combinations of these devices, which form the 3RA load feeders (combination starters). The individual devices are developed and built in such a way that it is very easy to put them together to make load feeders. This is possible because the devices are all built to work together on both an electrical and a mechanical level. 4 5 3 3 1 a NSB00296 2 b Fig. 1-1: SIRIUS System SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 1-5 System overview Circuit breaker (MSP) with a frame size of S00 and attachable accessories: 4 2 1.1 6.1 3 1.2 NSB00005d 5 Fig. 1-2: Circuit breaker (MSP), accessories (frame size S00) Circuit breakers (MSPs) with frame sizes of S0, S2, and S3 and attachable accessories: 8 2 4 7 1.1 6.2 3 1.2 NSB00006d 5 Fig. 1-3: Circuit breakers (MSPs), accessories (frame sizes S0, S2, and S3) Attachable accessories for frame sizes S00, S0, S2, and S3: 1.1) Transverse auxiliary switch with 1 changeover contact 1.2) Transverse auxiliary switch with 1 NO + 1 NC or 2 NO contacts 2) Lateral auxiliary switch with 2 contacts 3) Lateral auxiliary switch with 4 contacts 4) Shunt release 5) Undervoltage release 6.1) Undervoltage release with leading auxiliary contacts (S00) 6.2) Undervoltage release with leading auxiliary contacts (S0 to S3) 7) Alarm switch (S0 to S3) 8) Disconnecting module (S0 and S2) SIRIUS System Manual 1-6 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 System overview Contactors with a frame size of S00 and accessories: 17 3 18 4 5 12 1 6 19 13 20 7 2 8 9 10 11 14 15 NSB00448 16 Fig. 1-4: Contactors, accessories (frame size S00) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Contactor Control relay Solid-state time relay block, on-delay Solid-state time relay block, off-delay Auxiliary switch block, time-delay (on-delay or off-delay or wye-delta function) 6) 1-pole auxiliary switch block, infeed from above 7) 2-pole auxiliary switch block, infeed from above 8) 1-pole auxiliary switch block, infeed from below 9) 2-pole auxiliary switch block, infeed from below 10) 4-pole auxiliary switch block (terminal markings in acc. with DIN EN 50 012 or DIN EN 50 005) 11) 2-pole auxiliary switch block, standard or electronic type (terminal markings in acc. with DIN EN 50 005) 12) Soldering pin adapter for contactors with 4-pole auxiliary switch block 13) Soldering pin adapter for contactors and contactor relays 14) Additional load module to increase the permissible residual current 15) Surge suppressor with LED 16) Surge suppressor without LED 17) 3-phase feed-in terminal 18) Parallel link (neutral bridge), 3-pole, without terminal 19) Parallel link, 3-pole, with terminal 20) Parallel link, 4-pole, with terminal SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 1-7 System overview Contactors with frame sizes of S0 to S3 with accessories: 4 5 17 20 11 18 21 10 16 2 12 1 14 1 6 9 15 7 19 8 16 20 13 21 22 3 NSB00449 23 Fig. 1-5: Contactors, accessories (frame sizes S0 toS3) 1) Contactor, frame size S0 2) Contactor, frame size S2 3) Contactor, frame size S3 For frame sizes S0 to S3: 4) Solid-state time relay block, on-delay 5) Solid-state time relay block, off-delay 6) Auxiliary switch block, time-delay (on- or off-delay or wye-delta function) 7) 2-pole auxiliary switch block, infeed from above 8) 2-pole auxiliary switch block, infeed from below 9) 4-pole auxiliary switch block (terminal markings in acc. with DIN EN 50 012 or DIN EN 50 005) 10) Parallel link (neutral bridge), 3-pole, without terminal 11) Parallel link, 3-pole, with terminal 12) 2-pole auxiliary switch block, attachable on the right or left side (terminal markings in acc. with DIN EN 50 012 or DIN EN 50 005) 13) 1-pole auxiliary switch block (a maximum of 4 can be snapped on) 14) Mechanical interlock, attachable at the side SIRIUS System Manual 1-8 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 System overview 15) Mechanical interlock, attachable at the front 16) Wiring blocks above and below (reversing mode) 17) Surge suppressor (varistor, RC element, diode combination), attachable above or below (varies for S0 and S2/S3) 18) Coupling link for direct connection to the contactor coil 19) LED block to display contactor function For frame sizes S2 and S3 only: 20) Terminal for contactor coil for setting up contactor combinations 21)Terminal cover for box terminals For frame size S3 only: 22)Terminal cover for terminal end and bar connection 23)Auxiliary connecting lead terminal, 3-pole SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 1-9 System overview 1.3 System features The entire SIRIUS range of devices is divided up into only four frame sizes (S00 to 5.5 kW (7.5 HP), S0 to 11 kW (15 HP), S2 to 22 kW (40 HP), S3 to 45 kW (75 HP) at 400 V) with three different frame widths (45 mm for S00 and S0, 55 mm for S2 and 70 mm for S3) and has a uniform range of accessories for all frame sizes. Modular system The individual components of the SIRIUS range are building blocks in a modular system that are harmonized in terms of both their frame size and their technical specifications. This ensures that individual requirements can be met quickly and cost-effectively. Uniformity The devices are harmonized with regard to their ratings and their technical specifications: * The same width ensures rapid installation. * The terminal systems are standardized, and devices with the same rated current have the same terminals. Performance capability All SIRIUS devices can be mounted side by side without derating in an ambient air temperature of up to 60 C. Accessories All accessories, such as the auxiliary switches and surge suppressors, can be mounted and removed without tools. You can use link modules that connect devices both mechanically and electrically to put together combinations of devices and build fuseless load feeders. Communication The interface of SIRIUS-control components with a high level control system is in addition to the conventional wiring is possible over networking systems: * AS-Interface * PROFIBUS-DP Using these networking systems SIRIUS-control components are incorporated in the SIEMENS automation concept Totally Integrated Automation. Totally Integrated Automation offers the user threeway continuity in planing/ programing, data management and communication. Safety technology SIRIUS-control components are often used in safety related installations. With the Safety Integrated-concept, solutions ranging from safety relays up to fail safe communication over AS-Interface or PROFIBUS-DP can be achieved. SIRIUS System Manual 1-10 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 System overview 1.3.1 Environmental requirements SIRIUS-control components are made for any climate and are suitable and tested for global usage. The related environmental requirements are described in DIN EN 60721-3-3 Important environmental requirements: Ambient temperature: -25 to +60 C Relative humidity: 10 to 100 % (occasional condensation) Additional information to the subject environmental requirements can be found in the handbook "Switching, Protection, and Distribution in Low-Voltage Networks" (1994), P. 65. 1.3.2 Environmental protection SIRIUS-control components do not contain Halogen, Asbestos, or Cadmium. The manufacturing of SIRIUS devices complies with, as one of the very few manufacturing locations, the stringent requirements of the EU-Oko-AuditDirective. All SIRIUS devices work energy efficient and are close to being completely recyclable. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 1-11 System overview 1.4 Components and combinations This section describes the components of the SIRIUS system and the device combinations that are possible with these components. Components of the SIRIUS system The following table contains a list of the components of the SIRIUS system together with the most important accessories: Components Brief description/features Accessories 3RV1 circuit breakers (in USA/Canada: Motor Starter Protector) - Switch and protect motors up to 100 A - Auxiliary switches (transverse, lateral) - Undervoltage releases - Shunt releases - Alarm switches - Housing - 3-phase busbar system 3RT10 motor contactors - Switch motors up to 45 kW (75 HP) and currents up to 95 A - Types: 3-pole for switching - 4-pole, with 4 NO or 2 NO + 2 NC contacts - Soldering pin adapter - Capacitor switching contactor - -Reversing and wye-delta combinations - 3RH11 control relays - Same type of construction as the 3RT - Basic version: 4-pole, expandable to 8 pins by means of auxiliary switch blocks - High contact stability (1 mA; 17 V) 3RT10/3RH11 contactor relays - Switch motors and auxiliary contactors with an extended operating range (17 V to 30 V) 3RU11 overload relays - CLASS 10 - Phase loss sensitivity - Series auxiliary contacts 1 NO + 1 NC contact - Frame size S00: repetition terminal for the auxiliary contact and coil connection for attachment to contactors - Integrated, transparent and sealable cover for the adjusting knob and test function - Remote RESET, electrical - Mechanical RESET - Terminal bracket for stand-alone installation 3RB10 overload relays - CLASS 10 and CLASS 20 - Rapid tripping operation in the event of phase loss (< 3 s) - Series auxiliary contacts 1 NO + 1 NC - Low power loss, energy-saving - Wide adjustment ranges for simple configuration, selection, and less storage - Extremely low energy requirements, approx. 50 mW - Remote RESET, electrical - Mechanical RESET - Terminal bracket for stand-alone installation Auxiliary switch blocks Surge suppressors Parallel links Time relay blocks Link modules Wiring blocks Table 1-1: Components and combinations with accessories SIRIUS System Manual 1-12 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 System overview Components Brief description/features Accessories 3RB12 overload relays - - Summation current transformer for external ground fault monitoring - DC adapter - Terminal cover - CLASS 5 to CLASS 30 can be set Phase loss sensitivity 2 outputs per 1 NO + 1 NC contact Integrated current transformers in all sizes Motor protection due to the connection of a thermistor sensor circuit Internal ground fault monitoring Overload warning Remote and automatic reset possible High tripping accuracy Wide adjustment ranges Self-monitoring 3RA1 load feeders (combination starters) - Load feeder (combination starter) consisting of a circuit breaker (MSP) and contactor - Simple assembly with link modules and wiring blocks - Reversing combination (link modules) - Wye-delta combination - Accessories for the basic devices (contactors and circuit breakers) - Special accessories: Auxiliary switches connectable from above or below 3RP20/15 solid-state time relays - 8 adjustable time ranges from 0.05 seconds to 10 hours - Constantly high repeatability - Type with combination voltage (24 V DC and 110 to 240 V AC) - 2 device types: on-delay and multifunctional (7 functions) - Long mechanical and electrical service life - Coding plug sets - Locking device 3RW30/31 soft starters - Reduction of the starting current for a smooth start - Soft coasting down function - Only 3 motor supply leads are required - System adaptation using setting options: starting time, starting voltage, coasting down time - Fans Load feeders (combination starters) with communication capability Complete pre-wired Load feeders (combination starters)/Motor starters - for AS-Interface in degree of protection IP20: AS-Interface Load feeders (combination starters) 3RA5 - AS-Interface system accessories - for AS-Interface in degree of protection IP65: AS-Interface compact starter - Supply modules/-wiring / AS-Interface system accessories - for PROFIBUS-DP in degree of protection IP20: distributed I/O ET 200S - System accessories ET 200S - for PROFIBUS-DP in degree of protection IP65: discredited I/O ET 200X - Supply modules/-wiring / system accessories ET 200X - for AS-Interface and PROFIBUS-DP in degree of protection IP65: ECOFAST motor starter - Supply modules/-wiring / system accessories ECOFAST Table 1-1: (cont.) Components and combinations with accessories SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 1-13 System overview Device combinations The following diagrams show you the possible device combinations, using the S00 frame size as an example Fuseless load feeder (combination starter) 3RV10 Circuit breaker (MSP) Fused load feeder 3RT10 Contactor 3RA19 link module 3RT10 Contactor 3RU11 Overload relay 3RA13 reversing combination 3RA14 Wye-delta combination Fig. 1-6: Device combinations SIRIUS System Manual 1-14 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 System overview Contactor combination for reversing the S00 frame size (with accessories) 6 1 14 14 13 14 NSB00459 2 14 4 5 14 16 13 6 Fig. 1-7: Contactor combination for reversing Individual parts: 1/2) Contactors 4/5/6) Kit The kit includes: 4) Mechanical interlock 5) 2 connection clips for 2 contactors 6) Wiring blocks above and below to connect the main conducting paths with electrical interlock (NC contact interlock - can be removed if required) Attachable accessories: 13) Soldering pin adapter 14) Auxiliary switch block, on the front (only an auxiliary switch block that complies with DIN EN 50 005 can be used) 16) Surge suppressor SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 1-15 System overview 1.5 Mounting methods and terminal systems 1.5.1 Mounting the equipment The method of mounting the equipment is uniform within each frame size. Frame size Mounting Removal S00 to S3 Panel Mount Removed with a screwdriver S00, S0 Snapped onto a 35 mm rail (in acc. with DIN EN 50 022) Removed without a tool S2 Snapped onto a 35 mm rail (in acc. with DIN EN 50 022) The snap-on spring can be opened with a screwdriver S3 Snapped onto a 35 mm rail (in acc. with DIN EN 50 022) Snapped onto a 75 mm rail The snap-on spring can be opened with a screwdriver Table 1-2: Mounting methods Panel mounting The SIRIUS switching devices can be screwed on to a flat surface. Please note the following points with some of the devices: * 3RV1 circuit breaker (MSP), frame sizes S00/S0: Push-in lugs are required for screw-type panel mounting * 3RP15 time relay: Push-in lugs are required for screw-type panel mounting * Coupling links: No screw-type panel mounting * Soft starters: No screw-type panel mounting Snap-on mounting (DIN rail mounting) The SIRIUS switching devices are snapped onto 35 mm DIN rails in acc. with DIN EN 50 022 without a tool. The devices with a frame size of S3 require a rail with an installation height of 15 mm. Alternatively, they can also be snapped onto 75 mm rails. SIRIUS System Manual 1-16 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 System overview The following table shows you how to mount the device onto the DIN rail: Frame size Procedure S00/S0 Place the device on the upper edge of the rail, and press it downwards until it snaps onto the lower edge of the rail. S2/S3 Place the device on the upper edge of the rail, and tilt it towards the rail until it snaps onto the lower edge of the rail. Illustration 1 2 Table 1-3: Mounting the device on the DIN rail The following table shows you how to remove the device from the DIN rail: Frame size Procedure S00/S0 Push the device downwards to release the tension of the mounting spring, and remove the device by tilting it. S2/S3 Using a screwdriver, push the clip on the lower rear side of the device downwards to release the tension of the mounting spring (1), and remove the device by tilting it (2). Illustration 2 1 1 Table 1-4: Removing the device from the rail You will find notes on mounting the different devices onto DIN rail in the relevant parts of the fifth section of any chapter entitled "Mounting and connection". SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 1-17 System overview 1.5.2 Screw-type terminals The terminals used do not vary within a frame size. The current switched by the different devices of a single frame size does not vary either. This means you can use the same tool, torque, and conductor cross-section for the circuit breakers, contactors, and overload relays of a single frame size. The stripping lengths of the conductors are also the same. This is important in the case of prefabricated wiring. Screw-type terminals All the devices have screw-type terminals, either a terminal with a top washer or a box terminal, depending on the frame size. Devices with frame sizes S00 and S0 have terminals with captive screws and terminal washers that enable you to connect 2 conductors, even if they have different cross-sections. The box terminals of frame sizes S2 to S3 can also take 2 conductors with different cross-sections. Connection tools Use the following tools to make the connection: * Frame sizes S00 to S2: Screws are available for rated currents of up to 50 A for Pozidriv2 screwdrivers. * Frame size S3: To obtain the required torques for the frame size for up to 95 A, Allen screws are used. - Frame size S3: Allen screw SW4 The screwdriver guides around the terminal allow screw driving machines to be used. Lugs and connecting bars You can remove the box terminals from the devices with a frame size of S3 to connect conductors with lugs or connecting bars. A terminal cover is available as shock protection and to ensure that you comply with the required creepage and clearance distances when the box terminals are removed. You can find a detailed description in the forth section of an individual chapter entitled "Accessories". SIRIUS System Manual 1-18 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 System overview 1.5.3 Cage Clamp1 terminals The Cage Clamp terminal system is now available for circuit breakers (MSPs), contactors, overload relays, and time relays. Cage-type clamping units, known as Cage Clamp terminals in the case of SIRIUS products, facilitate quick and maintenance-free wiring. Design The Cage Clamp terminal consists of two parts: * A power rail for conducting current * A spring cage-type clamp for clamping strength Clamp Power rail Single-core Finely stranded Stranded Finely stranded with wire end ferrule Fig. 1-8: Cage Clamp terminal Conductors The Cage Clamp terminal on the switching devices clamps all copper wires (single-core, stranded and finely stranded) from 0.25 mm2 to 2.5 mm2. The conductors can be clamped directly or with some protection for splicing. To this end, wire end ferrules or pin-end connectors can be placed on the conductor ends. The best solution is an ultrasonically condensed conductor. 1. Cage Clamp is a registered trademark of the Wago Corporation SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 1-19 System overview The devices are equipped with a two-wire connection. In other words, there are two independent connections for each conducting path. Only one conductor is connected to each clamping unit. The clamp presses the conductor against the power rail, which is curved at this point. A highly specific compressive load per area is achieved making it gas tight. The clamp presses its flat surface against the conductor, thus avoiding damage to it. The spring force of the clamp is designed so that it automatically adjusts to the radius of the conductor. This allows any deformation of the conductor to be dealt with. It is not possible for the clamping unit to loosen by itself. This connection is vibration- and shock-proof. These types of stress do not damage the conductor or cause any loss in contact. Machines and systems in which this type of stress occurs, such as vibrators, rail vehicles and elevators, are particularly suitable applications for this connection. Transfer accuracy The contact pressure between the conductor and power rail is optimal, making this clamp terminal suitable for high-voltage installations and also for the transfer of voltages and currents in the mV and mA ranges in measuring technology and electronics. Tool Screwdrivers for opening the Cage Clamp terminals can be obtained from the SIEMENS low voltage controls catalog. Procedure The following table shows you how to use the Cage Clamp Procedure 1 Insert the screwdriver into the rectangular opening until it stops. The screwdriver head automatically keeps the clamp open. 2 Insert the conductor into the oval terminal opening. 3 Remove the screwdriver. The terminal closes, and the conductor is thus securely clamped. NSJ 00003 NSJ 00002 Step NSJ 00001 Safety Table 1-5: How to use a Cage Clamp terminal SIRIUS System Manual 1-20 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 System overview Small conductor cross-section With conductor cross-sections that are 1 mm2, you should use an insulating stop to avoid contact between a terminal and the conductor insulation. The illustration below shows the procedure: 3RT1916-4JA02 1mm Fig. 1-9: Conductor cross-sections 1 mm 1.5.4 Connection cross-sections Because SIRIUS is a modular system, the connection cross-sections are the same for all devices of a single frame size. The following tables specify the permissible conductor cross-sections for main and auxiliary conductor connections. The example shown is frame size S0: Frame size S0 Coil terminals: A1/A2 Auxiliary conductor: NO/NC 5 ... 6 mm / PZ2 Main conductor Screw-type terminals Cage Clamp terminals L1 L2 L3 T1 T2 T3 0.8 to 1.2 Nm 7 to 10.3 lb*in -- 2 to 2.5 Nm 18 to 22 lb*in 10 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm) 2 x (1 to 2.5 mm) 2 x (0.25 to 2.5 mm) 2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm) 2 x (2.5 to 6 mm) 10 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm) 2 x (1 to 2.5 mm) 2 x (0.25 to 1.5 mm) 2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm) 2 x (2.5 to 6 mm) 10 AWG -- 2 x (0.25 to 2.5 mm) -- 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (24 to 14) 2 x (14 to 10) Table 1-6: Connection cross-section for frame size S0 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 1-21 System overview 1.6 Communication Distributed I/O device ET 200S HMI/Visualization COROS/WIN CC SIMATIC S7/C7 PROFIBUS-DP SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Distributed I/O device ET 200X Circuit breaker SENTRON WL/VL Motor protection and control device SIMOCODE-DP 3UF50 CP 343-2 DP/AS-Interface Link S7-300 NT NT Motor starter 3RA5 Safety monitor M 3 M 3 Signal column AS-Interface Input/output modules in IP20 M 3 LOGO! Proximity switch BERO Command Membrane keyboard devices 3SB4 SIGNUM NSA00001b digital analog Input/output modules in IP67 secure digital input modules AS-Interface Motor starter M 3 Fig. 1-10: Communication 1.6.1 Communication-capable low-voltage switching technology The communication-capable control components from SIEMENS ensures the user a continuous Automation solution from network up to the control panel. The concept is based on using AS-Interface and PROFIBUS-DP, the two standardized and open networking systems, which can be connected to by virtually all of the known control system manufacturers. Actuator-sensor interface (AS-Interface) AS-Interface is a standardized, non-proprietary networking system (IEC 62026-2) for simple and usually binary actuators and sensors. It is possible to connect it to SIMATIC programmable logic controllers via different master modules. A DP/AS-Interface link also ensures direct integration in a PROFIBUS-DP system or connection to other field buses via couplers. Up to 248 sensors and 186 actuators can be connected to an AS-Interface network over a maximum of 300 m. Safety-related signals can now also be networked with AS-Interface, thus dispensing with the wiring of emergency stop signals that were previously needed. PROFIBUS PROFIBUS is a standardized, non-proprietary networking system (IEC 61158) to which most PLCs of leading manufacturers can be connected. Up to 125 nodes can be incorporated in one bus segment. Distances of up to 9.6 km can be bridged with copper conductors and up to 100 km with fiber-optic conductors. SIRIUS System Manual 1-22 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 System overview PROFIBUS-DP PROFIBUS-DP (DP being a German abbreviation for distributed I/O) is used for switching devices with higher communication requirements (e.g. the transmission of a large volume of data with extremely fast response times). It is also used to link individual AS-Interface segments. PROFIsafe PROFIBUS-DP can also transfer safe signals. The PROFIsafe-Protocol can be used to communicate safe inputs and outputs with a fail safe controller. 1.6.2 Parameterization of PROFIBUS-DP and bus-capable low-voltage switching devices Before commissioning, PROFIBUS-DP must be configured, and the individual bus nodes must be parameterized. There are user-friendly tools available to the user for configuration and parameter assignments. Parameter assignment tools * For SIMATIC S7 masters, all the functions are integrated in the STEP 7 programming language. * For SIMATIC S5 masters and various non-SIEMENS masters, the COM PROFIBUS parameter assignment software is required. * Manufacturers of non-SIEMENS masters offer other configuration and parameter assignment programs. There are various product specific software packages available that allow you to easily parameterize and diagnose your low voltage control devices with a variety of functions. COM SIMOCODE for the motor protection- and control device SIMOCODE-DP. SWITCH ES motor starter for ECOFAST Motor starter and ET 200S High Feature motor starter. These Software packages are either completely incorporated in STEP 7, communicated via PROFIBUS-DP or directly via a serial interface with the respective field device Applications The above program packages make it easy to carry out the following for PROFIBUS-DP and its nodes: * Configuration * Parameter assignment * Documentation * Commissioning * Testing * Diagnostics For additional information on communication-capable low-voltage switching devices, as well as system components and accessories, see the following catalogs: * Industrial Controls Catalog (PC 6000) * IK PI "Industrial Communication and Field Devices" * CA01 "Automation- and Drives technology" (CD-ROM) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 1-23 System overview 1.6.3 Actuator-sensor interface (AS-Interface) Actuator-sensor interface (AS-Interface) is a modular networking system for sensors and actuators in the lowest field range. It makes no difference to the program in the programmable controller whether parallel wiring with input/output modules or AS-Interface is used. It is therefore possible for existing systems to change to AS-Interface because you can continue to use the same programs. The entire system can be operated without additional software. It is not necessary to be familiar with the internal workings of AS-Interface. Replacement for the cable harness Process signals that occur locally are normally transferred to the open loop control using extensive parallel wiring and input/output modules. This means that each sensor or actuator in the field is connected to the input/ output modules with its own cable. AS-Interface makes it possible to replace this cable harness with a simple two-wire cable for all sensors and/ or actuators. Data and power on a two-wire cable The master communicates with the nodes via the AS-Interface cable. As well as data, this cable also transfers the supply voltage for node operation and node inputs, i.e. sensors. The voltage is supplied to the AS-Interface cable from a special AS-Interface power supply unit with a data link. Setting up different structures The AS-Interface cable is installed in the same way as for an electrical installation. A new node can be inserted at any point. This makes it possible to set up network structures (e.g. tree, star or line structures). No shielding or terminating resistors are required. The wiring can be adapted individually to the system or machine. Maximum System configuration Detailed configuration and installation guidelines can be found in the installation guideline "Installation of the AS-Interface networking system" (on mounting the AS-Interface networking system). Up to 62 nodes can be connected to the AS-Interface cable. A node is, for example, an AS-Interface module (digital or analog) or a BERO (proximity switch) with an integrated AS-Interface chip. A maximum of 4 binary sensors and/or 4 actuators can be connected to an AS-Interface module. This produces a maximum configuration of 248 inputs and 186 outputs (62 nodes x 4 inputs and 3 outputs). Degree of protection AS-Interface is a networking system for direct use on the machine. The AS-Interface compact module has an IP67 degree of protection. They can be used without an enclosure. There are also AS-Interface modules with IP20 protection for use in enclosures or distribution panels. SIRIUS System Manual 1-24 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 System overview Installation system All compact modules are placed on a mounting plate. The mounting plate takes the AS-Interface cable and keeps it in place. Polarity reversal is virtually impossible due to the profile of the cable. The compact modules are simply hooked on at the top of the mounting plate and secured with just one screw. When you secure the modules, contact is made with the ASInterface cable. You do not have to strip or screw on the cable. Coding prevents errors All the modules are mechanically and electrically coded. The coding system prevents errors occurring in the event of replacement. At replacement, only one module of the same type can ever be mounted. This stops digital or analog modules (or even inputs or outputs) getting mixed up. Addressing To participate in data transfer with the master, each node must be assigned an address before commissioning of the AS-Interface network. Addressing devices are available for this. Addressing an installed module There is an additional feature which makes new SIEMENS modules even more user-friendly: the addressing socket. Using this socket you can address a module after it has been installed. It is not necessary to unscrew the module. Installation can be carried out in the system by personnel who are not familiar with the AS-Interface. The commissioning engineer can address the modules easily when they are already installed. For the first time, this type of addressing is also possible with IP67 protection. Diagnostics at a glance The new generation of AS-Interface modules (compact modules, analog modules, and SlimLine modules) has the new display system developed by SIEMENS. The status of a module is displayed by two LEDs lighting up continuously or flashing. This simple diagnostic feature directly on the module makes it possible for the user to find the error quickly and efficiently. This in turn reduces downtimes. Certificates of the AS-Interface association All SIEMENS AS-Interface products are tested in accordance with the relevant testing regulations in an accredited test laboratory and certified by the AS-Interface association. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 1-25 System overview Digital compact modules with IP67 protection AS-Interface modules in the compact range are characterized by optimized operating features and improved user-friendliness. This can reduce mounting and commissioning times for AS-Interface by up to 40 %. Additional LEDs provide information on the most important operating modes of the module, resulting in a considerable increase in system availability. The modules of the compact range consist of two components: Mounting plate and compact module The mounting plate mechanically fixes the AS-Interface profile cables, takes the compact module, and serves as a template with drill holes. The compact module contains the electronic components for communication and the M12 standard connections for inputs/outputs. Up to four sensors and four actuators can be easily and reliably connected to the compact module using the M12 standard connection. The mounting plate and compact module are connected to each other by means of a single screw. Contact is established with the AS-Interface cable by means of the proven insulation displacement method. AS-Interface modules in the compact range with an M12 connection can have a protective conductor (PE) connected to them. Using an addressing socket integrated in the compact module, you can also allocate addresses when the module is in place. Analog compact modules with IP67 protection The design of the analog modules has been adapted for the compact modules. The analog input and output modules each have two channels. You can connect measuring sensors and analog actuators using standard M12 connectors. The following groups of analog modules exist: * Input module for two current sensors * Input module for two voltage sensors * Input module for two thermal resistors * Output module for two current actuators * Output module for two voltage actuators All the measured values - except for the thermal resistance value of Pt 100 (not linear) - are available in linear form. In other words, the non-linear transmission curve of the thermal resistor sensor is automatically linearized in the analog module, and measured values can be processed directly in the programmable controller. The input and output channels are isolated. Two-wire and four-wire sensors can be connected. Differential inputs produce considerable suppression of common-mode interference. The integrating sigma-delta converter ensures high measurement accuracy. SIRIUS System Manual 1-26 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 System overview Safety first - emergency-Stop via AS-Interface AS-Interface is a system that can transmit both standard signals and safetyrelated input signals (e.g. Emergency stop) via the same cable. Only an additional safety monitor and safe modules are required to use AS-Interface as a safety bus. This enables category 4 in acc. with EN 954-1 to be achieved. A failsafe programmable controller or special master is not necessary. The concept and implementation of AS-Interface Safety at Work (AS-Interface SaW) have been tested and certified by TUV (technical testing association). This means that the system can be converted to the considerably more flexible AS-Interface network, which is already available, thus eliminating the need for the complex, separately implemented emergency stop wiring that has been necessary up to now. The following components for direct connection to AS-Interface are available: * Safety monitors * Safety modules * Emergency-Stop devices * Light curtains * Laser scanners SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 1-27 System overview A/B-Technique The new AS-Interface-specification allows the doubling of the number of nodes on the network from 31 to 62. The 31 addresses that are possible in an AS-Interface network can be subdivided into two separately independent subaddresses e.g. in 1A and 1B . If one uses this feature for all 31 slaves, then it is possible to have a maximum of 62 nodes on one AS-Interface network. The so-called A/B-Slaves can have a maximum of four inputs and three outputs. Another function of the new AS-Interface specification V2.1 is the integrated analog value transfer. Integrated means that a special function block is not required in order to be able to access the analog values. Accessing data of analog values is therefore just as easy as with digital values. The use of integrated analog value transfer is possible with analog nodes, that support Profiles 7.3 and 7.4. So far 31 devices: Slave 1 Slave 31 With A/B slaves max. 62 stations: Slave 1A Slave 1B Slave 31A Slave 31B Mixed operation is also possible: Slave 1 Slave 2A Slave 2B Slave 31 NSA00004 Fig. 1-11: A/B-Technique SIRIUS System Manual 1-28 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 System overview 1.6.4 SIRIUS NET Communication-capable motor starter SIRIUS NET is the name of the family of communication-capable motor starters from SIEMENS. SIRIUS NET motor starters are available with AS-Interface and PROFIBUS-interface, in IP20 degree of protection for use inside the control panel or distribution panel, and in IP65 degree of protection for use outside the panel and mounted directly on the machine. SIRIUS NET motor starters consist of completely pre-wired SIRIUS load feeders/combination starters. This reduces the installation time and wiring time to a minimum. All of the necessary inputs and outputs are already on board. Depending on the design there are many Diagnostic functions that support the user and owner. This reduces downtime and improves efficiency. SIMATIC ET 200X SIMATIC ET 200S ECOFAST Motor Starter Load Feeder 3RA5 3RA5 AS-Interface load feeder/combination starter AS-Interface Compact Starter The preferred use of AS-Interface 3RA5 load feeder/combination starter is in central control panels (IP65 degree of protection). It's busbar (Fastbus) adapter for 40 mm and 60 mm systems allows for quick installation. With the connection via busbars, a whole range of 3RA5 load feeders/combination starters can be supplied with power. AS-Interface and auxiliary power are simply connected by using a plug with insulation piercing connection technology. The conductor to the motor can be attached without a terminal strip by using a 5-pole power connector that attaches directly to the starter. Due to its consistent plug-in technology a 3RA5 load feeder/combination starter can quickly be changed out. The 3RA5 load feeder/combination starters are available as direct or reversing starters up to 7.5 kW. For larger loads, devices can be easily assembled by the customer by using standard SIRIUS and AS-Interface components. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 1-29 System overview AS-Interface compact starter The AS-Interface compact starter is a starter designed to mount directly on the machine (IP65 degree of protection). The durable plastic housing also makes it suitable for use in the roughest industrial environment. With only two screws it can be mounted on to a mounting plate with very little effort and at the same time it makes contact with the AS-Interface- and auxiliary power flat cable through the proven AS-Interface penetration technique. The main power circuit side is quickly connected to the power bus cable and the motor circuit. Assemblies with a contactor and circuit breaker (MSP) are available up to 5.5 kW and with electronic contact element and electronic overload relay are available up to 2.2 kW either as a direct and as reversing starter. Two inputs on the starter can accept process signals via M12-socket and route them to the PLC. Starters with brake contacts for an electrically operated motor brakes are also optional. ET 200X The ET 200X distributed I/O system with the wide variety of expansion modules offers the possibility to provide all of the machines functions directly on the machine - in IP65/IP67 degree of protection. Whether motor starter, frequency converter, pneumatic or input/output module, whether in harsh environments, in extreme time critical applications or a large number of sensors and loads in one place - the modular SIMATIC ET 200X distributed I/O system offers the corresponding decentralized solution for every application in the field. ET 200X consistently provides optimal communication with the high level system via PROFIBUS-DP. A single basic module allows the addition of up to 6/7 expansion modules. With the AS-InterfaceMaster module in the ET 200X, a mixture of networks can be very easily attained at a reasonable price. The distributed signals in the installation can also be optimally incorporated with very little set-up effort. With the intelligent basic module for data preprocessing and control, distribution of selfsupporting and time-critical functions can be realized independent from the higher level PLC. Only the most important control signals and diagnosis data is then sent over PROFIBUS. This relieves the network as well as the high level control. The programing and planning of these types of stations is done with SIMATIC standard tool STEP7. ET 200X motor starter The ET 200X motor starter is available in the same designs as the AS-Interface compact starter. That means, as an electro-mechanical starter up to 5.5 kW, electronic starter to 2.2 kW. For further details see above. There is a hand-held controller available that can also be used with both motor starter families for activation at prestart-up and for service use. ET 200S The ET 200S distributed I/O system, using PROFIBUS-DP, offers a plurality of 2- and 4-channel input/output modules, Technology modules, such as Standard motor starter, High Feature motor starter and safety technology that can be configured almost any way you want in a fine modular form. The modules with IP20 degree of protection are used in central control panels as well as decentralized panels. All of the voltage potential only needs to be supplied once. Through simple side-by-side mounting of the terminal modules the auxiliary power as well as the main power voltage are automatically transferred. The purely passive terminal modules are the basis for the electronic modules that mount on them. These electronic modules can also be removed or added while in the system is running. This safeguards the accessibility of the machines and installation. SIRIUS System Manual 1-30 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 System overview ET 200S motor starter The ET 200S motor starters are completely pre-wired SIRIUS load feeders/ combination starters with short-circuit protection and overload protection. The required inputs and outputs for control and monitoring are already integrated in the motor starter. The correct function of the motor starter is monitored without any additional programming and will initiate a clear error signal via PROFIBUS-DP if needed. ET 200S SIGUARD The motor starters can be expanded for technical safety applications (EN 954-1) with the SIGUARD power modules. Emergency-stop buttons, safety limit switches or other floating contacts from safety devices use a two channel connection. The functions on the sensor side are in accordance with the standard and are monitored for, among other things, cross-circuit or short-circuit. The integrated safety relays also check the proper switching of the motor starters listed below. Additionally ET 200S Standard motor starter requires a so-called F-Kit - a front mounted auxiliary contact- (return circuit). The High Feature motor starter comes with these contacts already factory installed. A special Connection module needs to be installed at the end of a safety segment with one or more motor starters. For applications that require category 3 or 4 (EN 954-1) a redundant infeed contactor needs to be connected to the connection module (control and monitoring). For applications that require category 2 the return circuit needs to be closed on the Connection module by using a jumper. ET 200S Standard motor starter ET 200S Standard motor starter consists of a circuit breaker (MSP) and contactor combination from the SIRIUS S00-Frame size. At a maximum rating of 5.5 kW, the motor starter gets power from the terminal module on the selfestablishing power bus (40 A). All that remains per motor starter is simply adding the three conductors of the motor load and optional neutral/ground connection. Distribution wiring on pre-stored terminal blocks is no longer necessary, since the terminal modules already provide this function. ET 200S High Feature motor starter The ET 200S High Feature motor starter is a new class of load feeder/combination starter up to 7.5 kW. Motor circuit breaker (MSP) for short-circuit protection, electronic overload relay for the overload protection, and contactor or soft start for switching the circuit offer a range of new features: * The devices in frame size S0 have achieved Type 2 coordination for the current ratings up to 16 Amps (7.5 kW). That means, that even after a short circuit in the range of 50 kA the motor starter will not be destroyed and can still be used. Only light welding of the contacts, without any deformity worth mentioning and which can be separated by the user, is permitted. * The current monitoring in all three phases serves as both the overload evaluation and as the processing in the high level control. As an alternative to cyclic current value transmission it is also possible to set of an upper and a lower limit value for each. These can be used, for example, for the load dependent, autonomous shutting off of the starter. * All of the settings, as well as the rated motor current are automatically transferred to the new starter by the high level controller in the event a starter needs to be exchanged. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 1-31 System overview * In the case of an exchange you only need to choose between two starter types. The electronic overload relay offers an extraordinary adjustment range (0.3 to 3.0 A and 2.4 to 16 A). * In some critical applications the process can be more important than the protection of the motor. That is why under the estimation and supervision of the user there is the possibility with the High Feature motor starter to suppress the overload tripping function and continue operation of the motor starter with the emergency start function. The quickest assembly through completely pre-wired and simple plug-in technology were added so that a range of functions could lead to increased system availability. This makes the starter especially suitable for applications that contain both time-critical and valuable processes. ET 200S Failsafe motor starter The ET 200S Failsafe motor starter takes the advantages of the High Feature motor starter and supplements them with the requirements from the Safety technology. An integrated monitoring function checks whether or not the contactor opens properly when the motor starter is turned off. For example, should the contactor be welded and therefore can't open, the circuit will be automatically opened by the motor circuit breaker (MSP). It therefore meets the required redundancy of EN 954-1 for category 4 without any additional mounting or wiring time. You can assign up to 6 separate safety circuits of different motor starters inside of a single station to each upstream power module. The control takes place either over a Safety related control system, for example SIMATIC S7-300F and PROFIBUS-DP (PROFIsafe) or over a separate safety switching device, for example the safety monitor from AS-Interface Safety at Work. The advantage in using the Failsafe motor starter solution lies in the flexible order of various safety circuits and the integrated switching redundancy in every starter. The cost to achieve this type of installation with conventional technology would be much higher. However, if a larger group of motor starters in one safety segment is needed, then a solution with ET 200S SIGUARD could be the more favorable one. For its safety function, the Failsafe motor starter requires that the contactor contacts are electrically isolated from each other. Therefore, a design with a softstarter function is not available. Switch ES motor starter The Switch ES motor starter, the easy to use configuration and diagnoses tool, not only lets you comfortably configure and diagnose the High Feature motor starter while in operation with an on the spot point-to-point connection, but also supplies a range of additional information, such as statistics data. That way the operating hours or the motor current during the last overload trip can be called up. Important information on the condition of the installation can then be derived. The control function also comfortably lets you test the motor starter without high level control, such as at prestart-up. SIRIUS System Manual 1-32 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP 1) Section Subject Page 2.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals 2-3 2.2 Device description 2-5 2.2.1 General description 2-6 2.2.2 Operation 2-7 2.2.3 Information on configuration 2-10 2.3 Application and areas of use 2-13 2.3.1 Motor protection 2-13 2.3.2 Transformer protection 2-13 2.3.3 Starter protection 2-13 2.3.4 Motor protection with overload relay function 2-14 2.3.5 Switching direct current 2-15 2.3.6 Main and emergency stop switches 2-15 2.4 Accessories 2-16 2.4.1 Attachable accessories: Overview 2-16 2.4.2 Auxiliary contacts 3RV19 01-.., alarm switch 3RV19 21-111 and auxiliary release 3RV19 .2-.... 2-17 2.4.3 Motorized remote-control mechanism 3RV19 .6-.... 2-22 2.4.4 Disconnecting/isolator module 3RV19 .8-1A 2-25 2.4.5 Thru-the door rotary operators 3RV19 .6-.. 2-27 2.4.6 Terminals for "Combination Motor Controller Type E" in acc. with UL 508 2-33 2.4.7 Enclosures and mounting accessories 2-34 2.4.8 Busbar adapter 8US1 (Fastbus system) 2-39 2.4.9 Isolated 3-phase busbar system 2-43 2.4.10 Link module for connection to a contactor 2-46 1) 3RV1 is known in the North America as a Motor Starter Protector (MSP) and is not UL Listed as a circuit breaker SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-1 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP Section Subject Page 2.5 Mounting and connection 2-47 2.5.1 Installation 2-47 2.5.2 Connection 2-48 2.5.3 Device circuit diagrams 2-50 2.6 Dimensional drawings (dimensions in mm) 2-52 2.7 Technical specifications 2-63 2.7.1 General specifications 2-63 2.7.2 Permissible rating of approved devices for North America, u s 2-66 2.7.3 Short-circuit breaking capacity Icn in acc. with IEC 60 947-2 2-68 2.7.4 Limiter function with standard devices for 500 V AC and 690 V AC in acc. with IEC 60 947-2 2-70 2.7.5 Characteristics 2-70 2.7.6 Installation guidelines 2-71 2.8 Application notes for the use of 3RV1 downstream from 2-72 frequency converters/inverter with pulsing voltage 2.8.1 Influences of high frequency currents upon the thermal overload release 2-72 2.8.2 Other possible influences 2-73 SIRIUS System Manual 2-2 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP 2.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals Standards * The 3RV1 circuit breaker/MSPs comply with the specifications for circuit breaker/MSPs in acc. with IEC 60947-2/DIN VDE 0660, Part 101. * The circuit breaker/MSPs for motor protection comply with the specifications in acc. with IEC 60947-4-1/DIN VDE 0660, Part 102. * The auxiliary switches comply with IEC 60947-5-1/DIN VDE 0660 Part 200. Approvals/ test reports Confirmation of approvals, test certificates, and characteristics can be obtained on the Internet/intranet. under www.siemens.com/sirius/technical-assistance Terminal markings The terminal markings comply with DIN EN 50 011. Utilization categories Circuit breaker in acc. with IEC 60947-2: A Motor starter in acc. with IEC 60947-4-1: AC-3 (main conducting paths) DC - 11 / AC - 15 (control and auxiliary conducting paths) Main and emergency stop switches The specifications for the main and emergency switches comply with IEC 60204/DIN VDE 0113 Part 1. Disconnector specifications Disconnector specifications comply with IEC 60947-3. Shock protection 3RV1 circuit breaker/MSPs are shockproof in acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 100, even without accessories. You can find additional information on the subject of shock protection in the "Switching, Protection and Distribution in Low-Voltage Networks" manual, p. 37 ff. Degree of protection The degree of protection of the 3RV1 circuit breaker/MSP is IP20. In the terminal area of frame sizes S2 and S3, the degree of protection is IP00, when the lug kits are removed. Characteristics The time-current characteristics, the current limitation characteristics and the I2t characteristics have been determined in acc. with IEC 60947 and DIN VDE 0660. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-3 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP Conditions of application Explosion-proof motors For motor protection circuit breaker/MSP 3RV10, CLASS 10 and for motor protection circuit breaker/MSP with overload function 3RV11, CLASS 10: DIN VDE 0165 and EN 50 019, DMT-Certificate according to directive 94/9 EG (ATEX-Approval). Nuclear power plants KTA certificate Railway vehicles DIN EN 50 155 Ships and docks Shipbuilding certificates of classes GL, LRS or DNV. SIRIUS System Manual 2-4 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP 2.2 Device description 3RV1 circuit breaker/MSPs are used to switch and protect three-phase induction motors of up to 45 kW at 400 V AC (100 HP at 600 V AC) and for loads with rated currents of up to 100 A. The 3RV1 circuit breaker/MSPs have 3 poles. To achieve the highest degree of flexibility, auxiliary switches, alarm switches, auxiliary releases, and other accessories can be easily attached to the circuit breaker/MSPs without tools. 3RV1 circuit breaker/MSPs and 3RT1 contactors work together both electrically and mechanically. This enables them to be easily and quickly put together to make load feeders. Frame sizes S00 3RV1 circuit breaker/MSPs are available in 4 frame sizes (S00 to S3). S0 S2 S3 Fig. 2-1: 3RV1 circuit breaker/MSPs (frame sizes S00 to S3) The following table shows you the frame sizes and the corresponding maximum rated operational current at a voltage of 400 V AC. The last column in the table tells you which three-phase induction motor is suitable for which particular size. Frame size Width Max. rated operational current Output power of the three-phase induction motor S00 45 mm 12 A 5.5 kW S0 45 mm 25 A 11 kW S2 55 mm 50 A 22 kW S3 70 mm 100 A 45 kW Table 2-1: Circuit breaker/MSPs, frame sizes S00 to S3 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-5 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP 2.2.1 General description Fields of application The 3RV1 circuit breaker/MSPs are suitable for: * Motor and plant protection * Starter protection (short-circuit protection) * Transformer protection The 3RV16 11-0BD10 circuit breaker/MSP, frame size S00, is used for fuse monitoring. Releases 3RV1 circuit breaker/MSPs have: * Inverse-time delay, thermal overload releases * Instantaneous short-circuit releases The overload releases can be set to the load current. The short-circuit releases are set permanently to 13 times the rated current, which allows motors to start up without problems. Circuit breaker/MSPs used for transformer protection are set to 19 times the rated current to avoid being tripped by the high inrush current. When the circuit breaker/MSPs are tripped, in the case of frame size S00 the toggle switch goes into the tripped position, and in the case of frame sizes S0 to S3 the rotary switch switches to the tripped position. Before it is switched on again, the rotary switch must be put in the 0 position manually (reset) to avoid switching to the fault inadvertently. In the case of circuit breaker/MSPs with a rotary switch, the tripping operation can also be reported electrically by means of an alarm switch. Tripping classes In acc. with IEC 947-4-1: * Frame sizes S00 to S3: class 10 * Frame sizes S2/S3: class 20 Auxiliary release The circuit breaker/MSPs can also be equipped with one of the following auxiliary releases: * Shunt release * Undervoltage release * Undervoltage release with leading auxiliary contacts Auxiliary contacts The 3RV1 can use a transverse auxiliary contacts and/or a side mounted auxiliary contacts (Section 2.4 Accessories). Shock protection All frame sizes S00 to S3 are touch safe according to DIN VDE 0106 part 100. Additional protection covers are offered for frame sizes S2 and S3. * Frame size S2, S3: terminal covers for box terminals * Frame size S3: terminal covers for lug and bar connection SIRIUS System Manual 2-6 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP Other accessories Other accessories for circuit breaker/MSPs: * Alarm switch * Disconnecting module * Isolated 3-phase busbar system * Busbar adapter * Rotary switches * Terminals for "Combination Motor Controller Type E" in acc. with UL 508 * Housing and front plates 2.2.2 Operation Current setting Using a screwdriver, set the load rated current (current setting) Ie on the scale of the 3RV1. The proper dial setting will depend how the 3RV1 will be installed. There are two determining factors: 1. Stand-alone installation: without a directly mounted contactor and clearance left and right of a minimum 10 mm. 2. Side-by-side installation: with a directly mounted contactor and clearance left and right of less than 10 mm. This is the typical installation method. Note the two possible dial markings on the dial: * Dash mark: Is the dial marking used when the 3RV1 is being applied in stand-alone installation * Triangle mark: Is the dial marking used when the 3RV1 is being applied in side-by-side installation In both cases the ambient temperature may be +60 C and the complete current range can be used up to the highest setting. The relevant dial marking (Dash or Triangle) should be set according to the required current setting. At temperatures over +60 C current derating is necessary. The maximum allowable current setting for an ambient temperature of +70 C can be determined by a slightly longer setting line on the current scale. max. + 60 C A RV-00222 max. + 70 C Ie 360 o.k. Fig. 2-2: Current adjustment Ie adjustment (example: frame size S00) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-7 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP Warning The adjusting knob can be turned 360 clockwise. You can only turn it counterclockwise within the adjustment range. A setting over the marked current scale is not permitted Sealing the adjustment scale You can prevent unauthorized adjustment of the current setting by placing a transparent cover over it and sealing it. 3RV19 08-0P Fig. 2-3: Sealing the adjustment scale (example: frame size S00) Switches The state of the circuit breaker/MSP can be determined by the position of the switch: Frame size Switch STOP ON Tripped S00 Toggle switch OFF ON OFF S0, S2, S3 Rotary switch OFF ON TRIPPED RV-01050 Table 2-2: Contact position indicators of the circuit breaker/MSPs Fig. 2-4: Tripped position, 3RV (example: frame size S0) SIRIUS System Manual 2-8 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP You can prevent the circuit breaker/MSP from being switched on by unauthorized persons by securing the switching mechanism (toggle switch or rotary switch) with a padlock (shackle diameter 3.5 to 4.5 mm) The device can only be locked in the Off position. RV-00251 Locking the circuit breaker/MSPs O 3.5... 4.5 mm S0 S00 Fig. 2-5: Locking the toggle and rotary switch (example: frame size S00 and S0) Resetting after a tripping operation When the circuit breaker/MSP trips, the switch goes into the tripped position. You use the switch to close the circuit again. In the case of frame sizes S0 to S3, the rotary switch must be manually turned to the OFF position after the device trips. Then the circuit breaker/ MSP can be turned on again. In the case of frame sizes S2 and S3, it is possible to switch on and off using a motorized remote-control mechanism (see Section 2.4, Accessories). Testing overload tripping The following table shows you how overload tripping of the circuit breaker/ MSP can be tested: RV -00223 Drawing 2 1 Step Procedure 1 Switch the toggle switch/rotary switch from 0 to 1. 2/3 Put a screwdriver in the test opening and push it to the left. Overload tripping is in working order when the toggle switch switches from 1 to 0 (frame size S00) or goes into the tripped position (frame sizes S0 to S3). Table 2-3: Testing overload tripping (example: frame size S00) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-9 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP 2.2.3 Information on configuration Short-circuit protection The short-circuit releases of the 3RV1 circuit breaker/MSPs execute a threephase isolation of the faulty branch circuit from the network and prevent any further damage. With a short-circuit breaking capacity of 50 kA or 100 kA a voltage of 400 V AC, the switches are considered to be short circuit-proof, since higher short-circuit currents are not to be expected where the switches are installed. Backup fuses are only required if the short-circuit current at the point of installation exceeds the rated short-circuit breaking capacity of the circuit breaker/MSPs. You will find the short-circuit breaking capacity for other voltages and the sizing of any required fuse listed in Section 2.7, Technical specifications. Conditions of application 3RV1 circuit breaker/MSPs are climate-proof. They are intended for use in closed areas where there are no hazardous operating conditions such as dust, corrosive fumes or destructive gases. Appropriate housings are available as an accessory for use in dusty and damp areas (see Section 2.4). Selection Operational currents and starting currents can vary even in motors of the same power. The motor powers listed in the tables are to serve only as guide values. Most important when selecting the correct circuit breaker/ MSPs are the specific starting data and rating of the motor to be protected. This also applies to circuit breaker/MSPs used for transformer protection. Phase loss sensitivity The phase loss sensitivity of the circuit breaker/MSP ensures that it trips in the event of the loss of a phase and the resulting overcurrents in the other phases. During normal operation, the device should have a three-pole load. To protect single-phase loads or direct current loads, all 3 main conducting paths should be switched in series Explosion protection Note In the case of a three-pole load, at 3 to 8 times the set current, the release time deviates by a maximum of 20 % and therefore complies with the requirement of DIN VDE 0165 and EN 50019. The 3RV10 circuit breakers (MSP) for motor protection, CLASS 10, and the 3RV11 circuit breakers for motor protection with overload relay function, CLASS 10, have ATEX-Approval according to EU-requirement 94/9/EG (DMT-Certificate). SIRIUS System Manual 2-10 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP Characteristics The tripping characteristic of the inverse-time delayed overload release (thermal overload release, a-release) is valid for direct current and alternating current with frequencies of 0 to 400 Hz. The characteristics are valid for tripping operations from a cold state. From a warm state, the release times can be reduced up to 75 % depending on the motor current and the ambient temperature. The tripping characteristics of the instantaneous electromagnetic overcurrent releases (short-circuit release, n-release) is based on the rated current In, which in the circuit breaker/MSPs with adjustable overload releases is also the upper value of the adjustment range. The following is a chart of the time-current characteristic: Opening time 10 000 100 min 60 40 10 5 2 1 NSB 00004a 5000 s 2000 1000 500 three-pole load Class 20 200 100 50 three-pole load Class 10 20 10 5 two-pole load Class 10 2 1 0,5 0,2 0,1 0,05 0,02 0,01 0,005 0,002 0,001 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80 x n Current Fig. 2-6: Time-current characteristic, chart Time-current characteristics, current-limiting characteristics and I2t characteristics can be requested directly from your sales representative, if necessary. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-11 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP Frequency sensitivity of the short-circuit releases The characteristics of the short-circuit releases apply to frequencies of 50/60 Hz. For lower frequencies, such as 16 2/3 Hz, for higher frequencies up to 400 Hz, and for direct current, appropriate correction factors have to be taken into account. The following characteristic curve illustrates the frequency sensitivity of the short-circuit releases: 40 Tripping current Change in % 30 20 10 0 -10 -20 -30 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 Hz Fig. 2-7: Frequency sensitivity of the short-circuit releases The increase in tripping current is approximately 40 % for DC voltage. SIRIUS System Manual 2-12 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP 2.3 Application and areas of use The tripping characteristics of the 3RV1 circuit breaker/MSPs are designed primarily to protect three-phase induction motors. The circuit breaker/MSPs are therefore also referred to as motor protecting switches. In Europe, the 3RV10 circuit breaker/MSPs for motor protection can also be used in the protection of systems. 2.3.1 Motor protection Current setting The current of the motor that is to be protected is set on the adjustment scale. This sets the integrated overload protection of the motor current. The short-circuit release is set at the factory to 13 times the value of the rated current (the highest value on the current scale) of the circuit breaker/MSP. This ensures problem-free startup and reliable protection of the motor. Phase loss sensitivity The phase loss sensitivity of the circuit breaker/MSP ensures that it trips in the event of the loss of a phase and the resulting overcurrents in the other phases. CLASS10/CLASS20 Circuit breaker/MSPs of frame sizes S00 to S3 (0-100 A) with thermal overload releases comply with tripping class 10 (CLASS 10). Circuit breaker/ MSPs with the CLASS 20 tripping characteristic are also available for frame sizes S2 and S3 (11-100 A) for longer startup conditions. 2.3.2 Transformer protection Inrush current In the case of primary protection of control transformers, the high inrush currents that occur when the transformers are switched on often result in the unwanted tripping of the protective devices. Therefore, the 3RV14 circuit breaker/MSPs have overcurrent releases for the protection of transformers that are set at the factory to approximately 19 times the rated current. This makes it possible to protect transformers in which the inrush currents reach peak values of up to 30 times the rated current with circuit breaker/MSPs in the primary circuit. The 3RV14 for transformer protection come in frame sizes S0 and S2 (0 to 40 A). In the case of control transformers with low inrush current (SIEMENS 4AM control transformers, for example), this is not required. 3RV10 circuit breaker/MSPs can be used. In these lower inrush applications the 3RV14 devices are not UL listed for the protection of transformers. 2.3.3 Starter protection The 3RV13 starter protection switches are circuit breakers without overload releases. They are used together with a contactor and overload relay if the circuit breaker/MSP is not to be triggered in the case of overload tripping. Like the 3RV10 the short-circuit release is set at 13 times the rated current. The 3RV13 are available in frame sizes S0 to S3 (0 to 100 A). SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-13 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP 2.3.4 Motor protection with overload relay function 3RV11 circuit breakers/MSPs with the overload relay function are available for frame sizes S0, S2, and S3. Description The 3RV11 devices have the same overload and short-circuit trip characteristics as the 3RV10. However the overload release doesn't effect the switching mechanism of the circuit breaker/MSP. In the event of an overload, the circuit breaker/MSP remains switched on. The overload release uses two side mounted auxiliary contacts (1NO + 1NC), that switch in the event of an overload. The auxiliary contacts can be used for signalling or can be used to disconnect a downstream contactor. After the circuit breaker/MSP has cooled down, the auxiliary contacts are reset automatically. Caution In the overload range, the circuit breaker/MSP does not protect itself with the overload relay function. You must therefore ensure that the power is safely disconnected by means of a downstream switching device (e.g. a contactor). Fixed link: auxiliary contacts with circuit breaker/MSP Note The auxiliary contacts are factory mounted to the 3RV11 circuit breaker/MSP on the right side and cannot be removed. Diagrams S2: 3RV11 31-.... S3: 3RV11 42-.... RV-00588 S0: 3RV11 21-.... RV TEST TEST 5 -00 89 TEST Fig. 2-8: Circuit breaker/MSP with overload relay function (frame sizes S0 to S3) SIRIUS System Manual 2-14 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP 2.3.5 Switching direct current The 3RV1 circuit breaker/MSPs for alternating current are suitable for switching direct current. However, you must note the maximum permissible DC voltage per conducting path. In the case of higher voltages, series connection of 2 or 3 conducting paths is required. Response thresholds Circuit breaker/ MSP Suggestion L+ The response thresholds of the overload releases remain unchanged. The response thresholds of the short-circuit releases are increased with direct current by approximately 40 %. The following table lists suggestions for switching direct current: Frame size Max. permissible direct voltage EI 3RV1. S00 to S3 150 V DC 2-pole switching Ungrounded system If a ground fault can be excluded, or if every ground fault is immediately corrected (ground-fault monitoring), the maximum permissible DC voltage can be tripled. 3RV1. S00 to S3 300 V DC 2-pole switching Grounded system The grounded pole must always be assigned to the individual conducting path so that in the event of a ground fault there are always 2 conducting paths in series. 3RV1. S00 to S3 450 V DC 1-pole switching Grounded system 3 conducting paths in series. The grounded pole should be assigned to the non switched conducting path. LM L+ LM L+ L- Meaning M Table 2-4: Suggestions for switching direct current Double ground fault Note In the case of the circuit with 2-pole switching and an ungrounded system, it is assumed that even in the event of a double ground fault that bridges two contacts, safe disconnection still occurs. 2.3.6 Main and emergency stop switches Since the circuit breaker/MSPs meet the requirements for disconnectors in acc. with IEC 60947-3 and the additional test requirements for circuit breaker/MSPs with disconnector features in acc. with IEC 60947-2, they can be used with the appropriate accessories as main and emergency stop switches. They must also comply with DIN VDE 0113. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-15 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP 2.4 Accessories 2.4.1 Attachable accessories: Overview Auxiliary switches, alarm switches, auxiliary releases and other accessories can be easily attached to the circuit breaker/MSPs without tools, as required. Accessories Function/use Transverse auxiliary switch The contacts of the auxiliary switches close and open together with the main contacts of the circuit breaker/MSP. Variants: * 1 changeover contact * 1 NO + 1 NC contact * 2 NO contacts Electronically optimized transverse auxiliary switch One transverse auxiliary switch can be attached for each circuit breaker/MSP: Variants: * 1 changeover contact Lateral auxiliary switch One lateral auxiliary switch can be attached for each circuit breaker/MSP: * 1 NO + 1 NC contact * 2 NO contacts * 2 NC contacts * 2 NO + 2 NC contacts Alarm switch for frame sizes S0, S2 and S3 One alarm switch can be attached at the side of the circuit breaker/MSPs with rotary switches. Width Width of the circuit breaker/ MSP remains the same Attach to Front Left side 9 mm 9 mm 9 mm 18 mm 18 mm The alarm switch has two contact systems: * One contact system (1 NO + 1 NC) reports a general tripping operation, irrespective of whether it was caused by a short circuit, overload or auxiliary release. * The other contact system (1 NO + 1 NC) only switches in the event of a short circuit tripping operation. To reset the circuit breaker/MSP after a short circuit, the alarm switch must be reset manually after the cause of the error has been eliminated. Shunt release Remote release of the circuit breaker/MSP: * Via PLC: The coil of the release should be connected to the voltage only briefly. * Especially suitable for emergency stop disconnection by means of appropriate emergency stop switches in acc. with DIN VDE 0113. Undervoltage release Trips the circuit breaker/MSP in the event of a voltage interruption (e.g. when the power plug is removed) and prevents the motor starting up inadvertently when the voltage returns. Undervoltage release with leading auxiliary contacts 2 NO Function and use, see undervoltage release. Additional function: The auxiliary contacts isolate the undervoltage release from the power system on both sides in the event of breaking or a tripping operation and thus prevent voltage distortion to the control circuit when the switch is in the off position. It is possible to reset the circuit breaker/MSP because the contacts reset. 18 mm Right side Accessories cannot be attached on the right of a circuit breaker/ MSP with a relay function (3RV11). Table 2-5: Attachable accessories SIRIUS System Manual 2-16 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP Accessories Function/use Width Attach to Disconnecting module for frame sizes S0 and S2 The supply is fed to the circuit breaker/MSP via the disconnecting module. A connector which can only be removed when the circuit breaker/MSP is switched off isolates the circuit breaker/MSP from the power system on 3 poles. The shock-protected isolation position is easily visible and is secured by a padlock to ensure that the connector cannot be used during maintenance work, for example. Width of the circuit breaker/ MSP remains the same Upper side/ line side Motorized remote-control mechanism for frame sizes S2 and S3 The circuit breaker/MSPs can be opened and closed via the remote-controlled mechanism by means of electrical commands. This enables a load or system to be disconnected from and then reconnected to the power system from an operator control panel. The circuit breaker/MSP can be locally disconnected from and reconnected to the remote-control mechanism. 148 mm -- Rotary switch extension for the door The rotary switch extension for the door consists of a knob, a drive coupling and an extension shaft. They comply with IP65. The door interlock prevents the enclosure door being opened inadvertently when the switch is in the on position. The off position can be secured with a maximum of 3 padlocks. Depends on the application Front mount Table 2-5: (cont.) Attachable accessories 2.4.2 Auxiliary contacts 3RV19 01-.., alarm switch 3RV19 21-111 and auxiliary release 3RV19 .2-.... The maximum configuration for each 3RV1 circuit breaker/MSP is one transverse auxiliary contact, one side mounted auxiliary contact with 2 contacts, one alarm switch, and one auxiliary release. An alternative to the transverse auxiliary contacts and one side mounted auxiliary contact with 2 contacts would be to use a side mounted auxiliary contact with 2 NO + 2 NC. So with any one circuit breaker/MSP a maximum of 4 auxiliary contacts with auxiliary release can be used. Possible combinations The following combinations of auxiliary switches and alarm switches or of auxiliary switches are possible: * Auxiliary contacts with 2 contacts and alarm switches can be installed individually or together. The side-mounted auxiliary contact is installed on the left of the alarm switch. * Transverse and lateral auxiliary switches can be combined. Maximum of 4 auxiliary contacts is possible. * One auxiliary release can be attached on the right for each circuit breaker/ MSP SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-17 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP Mounting the auxiliary contacts The auxiliary switches, alarm switches, and auxiliary releases are mounted in the same way for all frame sizes: Transverse auxiliary contacts (3RV19 01-1D, -1E, -1F, -1G, -2E) 1 2 4 RV -01084 3 2 1 3RV1901-1D 3RV1901-.E 3RV1901-1F 3RV1901-1G Fig. 2-9: Mounting the transverse auxiliary switch (frame size S00) Side-mounted auxiliary contacts (3RV19 01-..) Undervoltage release (3RV19 .2-....) 2 1 3 1 2 3RV1901-.A 3RV1901-.B 3RV1901-.C 3RV1901-.J 1 3 1 3 2 3RV19.2-1A.. 3RV19.2-1C.. 3RV19.2-1D.. Fig. 2-10: Mounting/removing the side mount auxiliary contacts/undervoltage release (example: frame size S00) SIRIUS System Manual 2-18 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP Voltage ranges of the auxiliary releases One undervoltage release or shunt release can be installed for each circuit breaker/MSP. The following voltage ranges are possible: Auxiliary release Frequency Undervoltage release DC 24 V Undervoltage release with leading auxiliary contacts 2NO Shunt release AC 50 Hz AC 60 Hz 24 V 110 V -- 230 V 400 V 415 V 500 V -- 120 V 208 V 240 V -- 480 V -- 230 V 400 V 415 V 240 V -- 480 V AC 50/60 Hz; DC 5 sec.. ED 2) AC 50/60 Hz 100 % ED 1) 20 - 24 90 - 110 200 - 240 350 - 415 500 V V V V V 20 - 70 70 - 190 190 - 330 330 - 500 500 V V V V V Table 2-6: Voltage ranges of the auxiliary releases 1) Transformer operational voltage of the lower mark of the voltage range at 0.85 (Tu = 60 C) is valid for 100 % (continuous) duty cycle only at AC 50/60 Hz 2) Transformer operational voltage of the lower mark of the voltage range at 0.9 (Tu = 60 C) is valid for 5 seconds duty cycle at AC 50/60 Hz and DC SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-19 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP Mounting the alarm switch The following table explains how the 3RV19 21-1M alarm switch is mounted onto the circuit breaker/MSP (frame sizes S0, S2 and S3): Drawing Step 3RV 19 21-1M 1 Press and hold down the transport safety button on the inside of the alarm switch. 2 Then press the blue RESET button on the front of the alarm switch. 3 Hook the alarm switch onto the circuit breaker/MSP. 4 Move the alarm switch towards the circuit breaker/MSP until you hear it click into place. 3 4 2 3 1 2 Procedure Table 2-7: Testing overload tripping (example: frame size S0) SIRIUS System Manual 2-20 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP Alarm switch (signalling switch) signals The alarm switch has two signals: * Tripped (short-circuit, overload or tripping through a shunt trip) * Short circuit signal (short circuit only) The following table lists the signals, the status of the alarm switch, and the procedure required: Drawing 1 Status Procedure Tripped signal Circuit breaker/MSP is in the tripped position Alarm switch: LED is Red RESET button (blue): remains depressed Switch off (Off position) and then switch on again (On position of the circuit breaker/ MSP) Short circuit Circuit breaker/MSP is in the tripped position Alarm switch: LED is Red RESET button (blue): pushed out Push in the RESET-button (blue) on the Alarm switch then switch the circuit breaker/MSP off (Off position) and 2 then switch it back on again (On position of the circuit breaker/MSP) Table 2-8: Alarm switch with tripped signal and short circuit signal SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-21 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP 2.4.3 Motorized remote-control mechanism 3RV19 .6-.... The motorized remote-control mechanism is available for 230 V AC, 50/60 Hz and 24 V DC * Frame size S2: Inmax = 50 A * Frame size S3: Inmax = 100 A Mounting and connection The following table shows you how to mount and connect the motorized remote-control mechanism: Drawing Step 4 3 Procedure 1 Remove the Allen key from the cover of the motorized remotecontrol mechanism. 2 Use the Allen key to change the selector switch to "Manual". 3/4 Undo the 2 screws and remove the cover. 5/6 Undo the 4 screws on the remotecontrolled mechanism, and remove it. (Pozidriv 2). 1 2 AUTOMATIC MANUAL 3 2 6 5 (4 x) Table 2-9: Mounting the remote-control mechanism (example: frame size S2) SIRIUS System Manual 2-22 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP Drawing Step 7 M5 (4 x) 7 8/9 S2: M4 / S3: M5 Procedure Screw the frame onto the mounting surface using 4 screws M4 (Frame size S2), M5 (Frame size S3) Attach the circuit breaker/MSP using 2 screws. Attention: Use screws 14 mm in length. 9 8 7 9 11 10 10 Attach the ground wire. 11 Connect the main and control wires to the circuit breaker/MSP. 12 If desired, set MANUAL RESET: Remove the screw from the RESET lever. 13 13-15 Put the remote-control mechanism module into place, making sure that the driver covers the knob on the circuit breaker/ MSP, and screw it on. 15 (4 x) 3RV19 21-1M ManualRESET AutomaticRESET 12 14 Table 2-9: (cont.) Mounting the remote-control mechanism (example: frame size S2) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-23 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP Drawing Step 16-18 17 UC 16 19 20/21 18 22 20 Procedure Screw the control wires for the remote-control mechanism onto the connector, and insert it. Set the current. Put the cover on, and screw it tightly. Use the Allen key to switch to AUTOMATIC and replace the Allen key in the cover. 21 (22) 19 21 22 Table 2-9: (cont.) Mounting the remote-control mechanism (example: frame size S2) Warning Do not set the "Automatic" position or operate the remote-control mechanism when open! There is a risk of injury! Manual RESET Remove the screw from the RESET lever (step 12) SIRIUS System Manual 2-24 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP 2.4.4 Disconnecting/isolator module 3RV19 .8-1A The disconnecting/isolator module is suitable for creating a visible isolating distance. The isolating connector can only be removed in a deenergized state. The isolating distance can be secured with padlocks when open. Disconnecting modules are available for the circuit breakers/MSPs of frame sizes S0 and S2. Mounting sequence for the disconnecting/ isolator module and Transverse auxiliary contacts Mounting Attention The disconnecting/isolator module covers the terminal screws of the transverse auxiliary switch. We therefore recommend that you use the lateral auxiliary switches or that you only install the disconnecting module once the transverse auxiliary switch has been wired. The modules are mounted in the same way for frame sizes S0 and S2. The following diagrams show you how to mount the disconnecting module. Example shown for frame size S0 (3RV1928-1A): 3RV19 28-1A 3 2 3RV1. 2 4 5 1 8 6 8 7 Fig. 2-11: Mounting the disconnecting module (example: frame size S0) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-25 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP Disconnecting and locking The disconnecting/isolator module can be locked and sealed or secured with two padlocks if the connector is removed during maintenance work, for example. The disconnecting/isolator module for frame size S0 (3RV19 28-1A) can use a padlock with a max. locking arm diameter of 6 mm, for frame size S2 (3RV19 38-1A) a padlock with a max. locking arm diameter of 9 mm can be used. The circuit breaker/MSP itself can also be secured with a third padlock. 3 5 2 1 4 5 4 Fig. 2-12: Locking the disconnecting module (example: frame size S0) Terminal cover (frame size S2) A terminal cover (3RT1936-4EA2) is available for the disconnecting module in frame size S2 (3RV1938-1A) that protects the contacts from dirt and provides additional shock protection. 3 3RV19 38-1A 3RT19 36-4EA2 4 3RV1. 3 2 1 Fig. 2-13: Locking the disconnecting module and mounting the cover (frame size S2) SIRIUS System Manual 2-26 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP 2.4.5 Thru-the door rotary operators 3RV19 .6-.. Thru-the-door rotary operators are available for frame sizes S0, S2, and S3. They consist of a lockable rotary handle with a detachable door coupling, an extension shaft, and a connector for the switch drive. There are two basic designs available. The thru-the-door rotary operator 3RV19 26-0. for standard applications and the thru-the-door rotary operator 3RV19 .6-2. for harsh conditions. Both designs have an IP65 rating and can be locked in the OFF-position with up to three padlocks. Both operators are available with either black/grey and/or red/yellow for emergency-stop handle styles. The thru-the-door rotary operator for harsh conditions also meet the disconnection requirements according to IEC 60 947-2. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-27 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP Thru-the door rotary operator 3RV19 26-0. Mounting 1 4 3 2 5 0.7 ... 0.9 Nm 3RV19 26-0B, -0C: 130 mm 3RV19 26-0K, -0L: 330 mm min. 16 mm max. 20 mm 6 7 Fig. 2-14: Mounting the thru-the-door rotary operator 3RV19 26-0. (example: frame size S2) SIRIUS System Manual 2-28 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP Opening the door The following table shows you how the cubicle door can be opened using the thru-the-door rotary operator: Drawing Procedure To open the cubicle door, set the circuit breaker/MSP to O (OFF). This releases the extension shaft from the rotary switch and allows the door to be opened. 1 2 If you want to open the enclosure door during operation, you can override the procedure by pressing the button at the side of the rotary knob (step 1). To close it during operation, press the button again so that the extension shaft snaps into place again. 1 2 Table 2-10: Opening a enclosure door using the thru-the-door rotary operator Opening the door with great force Note If the circuit breaker/MSP is in the ON position and the door is opened with a force >150 N to 200 N, the cap of the extension shaft is separated from the rotary switch of the circuit breaker/MSP to prevent the circuit breaker/ MSP being destroyed. The circuit breaker/MSP remains in the ON position. ca.150 ... 200 N Fig. 2-15: Operation note: Thru-the-door rotary operator 3RV19 26-0. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-29 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP The extension shaft must then be remounted on the circuit breaker/MSP and the rotary switch extension for the door as follows: Drawing Step 1 Procedure 1 Switch the circuit breaker off, and turn the rotary switch on the door to OFF. 2 Put the cap of the extension shaft on the rotary switch of the circuit breaker/MSP, and put the extension shaft in the cap. 3 Close the enclosure door. 2 1 3 Table 2-11: Mounting the extension shaft Locking When the rotary switch is in the OFF position, it can be secured with up to 3 padlocks (e.g. during maintenance work on the system). max. o 8 mm 1 2 Fig. 2-16: Locking the thru-the-door rotary operator SIRIUS System Manual 2-30 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP Thru-the door rotary operator for harsh conditions 3RV19 .6-2. Mounting RV-00590 RV-00591 Frame size S0 6 RV-00592 3 1 4 2 3RV19 26 3RV19 36 3RV19 46 Frame sizes S2/S3 A (mm) 50 60 60 B (mm) 111 160 185 Mount the 3RV1 frame size S0 by simply snapping it on the DIN rail RV-00593 3RV19 36: M4 3RV19 46: M5 RV-00594 5 1.2 ... 1.5 Nm 7 8 1.2 ... 1.5 Nm RV-00596 Mount the 3RV1 frame size S2/S3 by panel mounting (2 x) 11 M4: 2.6 - 3 Nm 9 10 3RV19 26 3RV19 36 3RV19 46 C (mm) 163 215 240 D (mm) 463 515 540 4.5 (4 x) 1.1 - 1.3 Nm 46 4 Fig. 2-17: Mounting the thru-the-door rotary operator 3RV19 .6-2. (example: frame sizes S0 and S2) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-31 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP Opening the door In order to open the enclosure door, turn the handle in the Off position. The extension shaft disengages from the handle in this position and the door can be opened. Opening the door with great force Note When the circuit breaker/MSP is in the On position ("I"-position) and the door is opened with a force of 800 Nm, the operator can be destroyed. In this case the circuit breaker/MSP remains turned on. Anything under a force of 800 Nm, the operator will remain locked to the door. RV-00595 Locking 2 1 3.5 ... 4.5 mm Fig. 2-18: Locking the thru-the-door rotary operator (example: frame size S0) The operator handle can be padlocked inside the enclosure. To do this the circuit breaker/MSP must be in the Off position. 1 2 Fig. 2-19: Locking the thru-the-door rotary operator outside the enclosure The operator can also be locked from outside the enclosure on the rotary handle. To do this the circuit breaker/MSP must first be in the Off position. Then pull out the retractable locking device that is built in the handle. This locking device can hold up to five padlocks with a maximum locking arm diameter of 6 mm or three padlocks with a maximum locking arm diameter of 8.5 mm. SIRIUS System Manual 2-32 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP 2.4.6 Terminals for "Combination Motor Controller Type E" in acc. with UL 508 Since July 16, 2001, 1 inch air clearance and 2 inch creepage distance is required for "Combination Motor Controller Type E" on the input side in acc. with UL 508. For the 3RV10 circuit breakers/MSPs frame size S0 use terminal block 3RV1928-1H and for frame sizes S3 use terminal block 3RT1946-4GA07. The 3RV10 in frame size S2 complies with the required air clearance and creepage distance without a terminal block. These terminal blocks cannot be used in the S0 frame size at the same time as the 3RV19.5 3-phase busbars or in the S3 frame size at the same time as a transverse auxiliary switch. Attention Terminal blocks are not required for use in acc. with CSA. S0 Self-Protected Combination Controller Type E S3 3RT19 46-4GA07 3RV19 28-1H 2 1 Fig. 2-20: Terminals for "Combination Motor Controller Type E" SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-33 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP 2.4.7 Enclosures and mounting accessories Molded-plastic enclosures (IP55) are available if you want to install circuit breakers/MSPs as single units. All the enclosures are equipped with neutral and ground terminals. Above and below are two openings that can be knocked out for cable glands. On the back of the enclosure there are 2 precut openings. All the cable bushings have metric dimensions. The surface casings can be sealed. There is space in the enclosure on the rail for additional modular terminal blocks. Moldedplastic... Width Enclosure with actuator membrane for toggle switch Surface mount 54 mm, 72 mm S00 Flush mount 72 mm S00 Lockable enclosure with rotary switch Surface mount 54 mm, 72 mm 82 mm S0 S2 Flush mount 72 mm S0 Surface mount 54 mm, 72 mm 82 mm S0 S2 Flush mount 72 mm S0 Model Lockable enclosure with emergency stop rotary switch (red/yellow) Frame size Table 2-12: Enclosures for 3RV1 circuit breakers/MSPs Widths The widths of the enclosures depend on whether auxiliary releases are used: * 54 mm: circuit breaker/MSP + side-mount auxiliary contact * 72 mm/82 mm: circuit breaker/MSP + side-mount auxiliary contact+ auxiliary release Mounting the surface mount enclosure 2 3 Neutral/ground terminals 4 1 Fig. 2-21: Molded-plastic surface mount enclosure (example: frame size S00) SIRIUS System Manual 2-34 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP Mounting the flush mount enclosure 1 1 2 2 4 3 3 5 4 Fig. 2-22: Molded plastic flush mount enclosure (example: frame size S00) Front plates Molded-plastic-front plates with IP55 degree of protection are suitable for any housing: Front plates and accessories Front plates Accessories Model Frame size With actuator membrane and support for switch S00 With lockable rotary switch S0, S2, S3 With lockable emergency-stop rotary switch (red/yellow) S0, S2, S3 Support for front plate S0 Table 2-13: Front plates for any housings SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-35 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP Mounting the front plates Frame size S00 M3 6 VU-01015 3RV19 13-4C 5 1 3RV19 13-4B M3 6 e.g. Enclosure door 5 M6 3 M6 3 4 4 5 5 2 2 Fig. 2-23: Mounting the front plate (example: frame size S00) Frame sizes S0, S2, S3 3RV19 23-4. + 3RV19 23-4G (only for frame size S0) M3 4 e.g. Enclosure door 3RV19 23-4. M3 3RV1. 2 3RV1. 3 3RV1. 4 2 a 86.5 139.0 164.5 2 3RV19 23-4G 3 1 1 Fig. 2-24: Mounting the front plate (example: frame size S0) SIRIUS System Manual 2-36 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP Accessories for the housings and front plates The following accessories are available for the housings and front plates of the circuit breakers/MSPs: * * * * Replacement actuator membrane 3RV19 13-7F (for frame size S00) Locking device for 3 padlocks 3RV19 13-6B (for frame size S00) Emergency-stop button (red/yellow) 3RV19 13-7D (for frame size S00) Emergency-stop button (red/yellow) with safety lock 3RV19 13-7E (for frame size S00) * Indicator lights 3RV19 03-5. (for frame sizes S00, S0, S2) 3RV19 13-7F 3RV19 13-7D 1 2 3RV19 13-7E 3RV19 13-6B Fig. 2-25: Accessories for the enclosures and front plates (frame size S00) Locking device 3RV19 13-6B (for frame size S00) The locking device can be used on the inside of the housings or front plates. To do this, remove the frame of the actuator membrane. The locking device can be secured with up to 3 padlocks that can prevent the circuit breaker/ MSP from being switched on during maintenance work, for example. Emergency-stop button 3RV19 13-7. (for frame size S00) The emergency-stop button is attached to the actuator membrane. When hit, the circuit breaker/MSP is switched off and the button locks into position. You can release the button by turning it or using a key. The circuit breaker/MSP can then be switched on again. Indicator lights 3RV19 03-5B (for frame sizes S00, S0, S2) Indicator lights are available for the housings and front plates of circuit breakers/MSPs in frame sizes S00, S0, and S2. They contain a glow lamp and red, green, yellow, orange, and transparent lenses. Indicator lights are available for the following voltage ranges: 110-120 V, 220-240 V, 380-415 V and 480-500 V. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-37 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP Installation of the indicator lights There is a precut opening on the front of the housing that can be knocked out to install an indicator light 2 16 mm 1 3RV19 03-5. Fig. 2-26: Indicator light installation in a molded-plastic housing (example: frame size S00) SIRIUS System Manual 2-38 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP 2.4.8 Busbar adapter 8US1 (Fastbus system) To enable the circuit breakers/MSPs to be mounted without using up too much space, and to ensure that the infeed is economical in terms of both time and money, the switches can be mounted directly onto busbar systems using busbar adapters. The circuit breakers/MSPs are snapped onto the adapter and connected at the input side. This prepared unit is mounted directly onto the busbar systems, thus both attaching it mechanically and establishing electrical contact. Busbar systems The adapters are suitable for the following systems: Busbar systems with center-to-center spacing For copper busbars in acc. with DIN 46 433 Width Depth 40 mm systems 12 mm and 15 mm 5 mm and 10 mm 60 mm systems 12 mm to 30 mm 5 mm and 10 mm Table 2-14: Busbar systems Accessories The following accessories are available for busbar adapters: * * * * Measurements Modules that can be mounted on either side to widen the adapters Busbar holder for 3 rails Molded-plastic covers for 3 terminals (40 mm system) Molded-plastic cover profiles for shock protection The following table lists the dimensions of the busbar adapters and accessories. System 40 mm Busbar adapter and accessories Length Width For circuit breakers/MSPs in frame size Circuit breaker/MSP + lateral auxiliary switch 121 mm 121 mm 45 mm 55 mm S00, S0 S00, S0 139 mm 55 mm S2 Circuit breaker/MSP 182 mm 182 mm 70 mm 72 mm S3 (to 400 V)1) S3 (480 to 690 V)2) Side module 139 mm 182 mm 13.5 mm 13.5 mm S2 S3 Circuit breaker/MSP 182 mm 45 mm S00, S0 182 mm 55 mm S2 182 mm 182 mm 70 mm 72 mm S3 (to 400 V)1) S3 (480 to 690 V)2) 182 mm 13.5 mm S00 to S3 Circuit breaker/MSP 60 mm Side module Table 2-15: Dimensions of the busbar adapters and accessories 1) Up to 460 V AC with max. short-circuit breaking capacity of 25 kA 2) Not to be used for voltages < 480 V short-circuit breaking capacity 480/500/525 V AC - Up to In=25 A: max. 30 kA - Up to In=90 A: max. 16 kA short-circuit breaking capacity 690 V AC: max. 12 kA SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-39 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP You can find additional information about load feeders on busbar systems in Chapter 5. Mounting circuit breakers/MSPs on a busbar system Frame sizes S00/S0 The following illustrations show you how to mount circuit breakers/MSPs in frame sizes S00 and S0 onto busbar adapters (8US1) and how to remove them again, using frame size S00 as an example: 8US1. .1-5D 10 mm Link module Fig. 2-27: Mounting circuit breakers/MSPs on busbar adapters (frame sizes S00 and S0) SIRIUS System Manual 2-40 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP Mounting circuit breakers/MSPs on a busbar system Frame sizes S2/S3 The following illustrations show you how to mount circuit breakers/MSPs in frame sizes S2 and S3 onto a busbar adapter: S2 S3 8US1. 61-5FP08 8US11 11-4SM00 1 2 4 3 6-9 Nm 5 6 8 (3x) 7 Fig. 2-28: Mounting circuit breakers/MSPs on busbar adapters (frame sizes S2 and S3) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-41 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP Mounting accessories The following illustration shows you how to mount accessories for busbar adapters for frame sizes S00 to S2: * * * * Side module Device holder Extension piece Outgoing terminal rail (for frame sizes S00 and S0 only) 40 mm Device holder Side module 2 1 1 Extension piece 2 Outgoing terminal rail Fig. 2-29: Accessories for busbar adapters (frame sizes S00 to S2) SIRIUS System Manual 2-42 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP 2.4.9 Isolated 3-phase busbar system For 3RV1 frame sizes S00, S0, and S2, 3-phase busbars can be used to quickly and easily provide line side feeding when mounting circuit breakers/ MSPs on to DIN rail. There is only one power supply, via a feed-in terminal. The 3-phase busbar systems are safe from fingers and are shock protected DIN VDE 0106 Part 100. They are rated for the short-circuit stress that can occur on the output side of the connected circuit breakers/MSPs. Feeder lugs, connecton from above (3RV1915-5A)) 3-phase busbar 3RV19 15-1CB Spacer Protective cap 3RV19 15-6AB Feeder lugs, connecton from below 3RV19 15-5B Fig. 2-30: 3-phase busbar system (example: frame size S00) Rated operational voltage/current Rated operational voltage 690 V Rated current Frame sizes S00, S0: 63 A Frame size S2: 108 A Table 2-16: Rated operational voltage/current Versions The 3-phase busbars take 2 to 5 circuit breakers/MSPs, depending on the model. There are busbars with more generous spacing for circuit breakers/ MSPs with accessories attached on the side Frame size of the circuit breaker/MSP S00, S0 S2 Spacing Models 45 mm For 2, 3, 4, or 5 circuit breakers/MSPs 55 mm For 2, 3, 4, or 5 circuit breakers/MSP + acc. 63 mm For 2 or 4 circuit breakers/MSPs + accessories 55 mm For 2, 3, or 4 circuit breakers/MSPs 75 mm For 2, 3, or 4 circuit breakers/MSPs + accessories Table 2-17: Types of 3-phase busbars SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-43 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP Combination of frame sizes S00 and S0 Circuit breakers/MSPs in frame sizes S00 and S0 vary in height and depth. They therefore cannot be combined on one busbar. You can combine two busbars for circuit breakers/MSPs in frame sizes S0 and S00 using an extension piece. Extending the bus It is possible to extend the busbars by clamping the connecting lugs of a another bus (turned 180) under the terminals of the last circuit breaker/MSP (see the section on mounting). Attention Note the current-carrying capacity of the busbars when you extend them. Accessories The following accessories are available for the isolated 3-phase busbar system: * Feeder lugs from above (3RV1915-5A for S00, 3RV1925-5AB for S0, 3RV1935-5A for S2) * Feeder lugs from below (3RV1915-5B for S00, S0) * Connector A connector links two 3-phase busbars over a space of 45 mm for circuit breakers/MSPs in frame size S0 (left) and frame size S00 (right). * Protective cap for connecting lugs (3RV19 15-6AB) Protective caps provide shock protection for spare slots. To extend the bus, remove the protective caps. Feeder lugs 3-phase feeder lugs make it possible to have greater conductor cross-sections than on the circuit breaker/MSP itself. Tightening torque: 2 to 4 Nm (17.6 to 35.2 lb*in). Frame size of the circuit breaker/MSP Connection Conductor cross-section Conductors S00, S0 From above Single- or multi-core Finely stranded with wire end ferrule AWG 2.5 to 25 mm2 4 to 16 mm2 12 to 4 S00, S0 From below Single- or multi-core Finely stranded with wire end ferrule AWG 6 to 25 mm2 4 to 16 mm2 10 to 4 S2 From above Single- or multi-core Finely stranded with wire end ferrule AWG 2.5 to 50 mm2 1.5 to 35 mm2 14 to 0 Table 2-18: Conductor cross sections of the 3 phase feeder lugs Feeder lugs - connection from below Attention The feeder lugs with connection from below is clamped on instead of a circuit breaker/MSP. Make sure you check how much space you require when planning the 3-phase busbars. SIRIUS System Manual 2-44 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP Mounting the 3-phase busbars Frame size S00 Screw connection 3RV19 15-1CB Turned 180 3RV19 15-5A 3RV19 15-6AB 3RV19 15-5B 3RV19 15-1CA Frame size S00 Cage-clamp 1 1 2 8WA20 11-1DG30 3 3b 3a 3c Frame size S0 Screw connection 3RV19 15-1CB Turned 180 3RV19 25-5AB 3RV19 15-6AB 3RV19 15-5B Fig. 2-31: Mounting the isolated 3-phase busbar system (frame sizes S00 to S0) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-45 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP Frame size S2 Screw connection 3RV19 35-1C 3RV19 35-1. 3RV19 35-5A 3RV19 35-6A Fig. 2-32: Mounting the isolated 3-phase busbar system (frame size S2) 2.4.10 Link module for connection to a contactor Link Module Circuit breaker/ MSP-Contactor When assembling a combination starter (load feeder) a link module between the circuit breaker/MSP and the contactor is needed to provide both an electrical and mechanical connection. The following types of link modules are available: Operating voltage Contactor Frame size Contactor Frame size Circuit breaker/MSP AC and DC S00 S00 S00 S0 S0 S0 S2 S2 S3 S3 Table 2-19: Link module circuit breaker/MSP - contactor SIRIUS System Manual 2-46 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP 2.5 Mounting and connection 2.5.1 Installation Mounting position You can install the 3RV1 circuit breakers/MSPs in almost any position. Snap-on mounting The circuit breakers/MSPs are mounted by snapping them onto 35 mm rails that comply with DIN EN 50 022. The circuit breakers/MSPs with a frame size of S3 require a rail with an installation height of 15 mm. Alternatively, they can also be snapped onto 75 mm rails. DIN EN 50022/23 DIN EN 50022 RV-00226 1 RV-00298 S3 S00 2 2 1 1 Fig. 2-33: Mounting the circuit breakers/MSPs onto the rail Panel mounting The circuit breakers/MSPs can be attached to a flat surface with 2 screws. For circuit breakers/MSPs in frame sizes S00 and S0, two push-in lugs (3RB1900-0B) (pack of 10) are also required. Circuit breakers/MSPs in frame sizes S2 and S3 can be screwed directly onto a base plate. 3RB19 00-0B Fig. 2-34: Screw-on mounting of the 3RV1 (example: frame size S00) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-47 Circuit breaker/MSP 3RV1 2.5.2 Connection Tools The following items are required to connect the circuit breakers/MSPs: * Frame sizes S00 to S2: Pozidriv 2 screwdriver * Frame size S3: Allen key (4 mm) Conductor cross-sections The typical SIRIUS conductor cross-sections apply (see Section 1.5.4 "Conductor cross-sections"). Screw-type terminals 3RV1 circuit breakers/MSPs with frame sizes S00 and S0 have terminals with captive screws and terminal washers that enable you to connect 2 conductors, even if they have different cross-sections. The box terminals of the circuit breakers/MSPs of frame sizes S2 and S3 can also take 2 conductors with different cross-sections. With the exception of circuit breakers/MSPs of frame size S3, which have terminal screws with a 4 mm Allen screw, all the terminal screws can be tightened using a standard screwdriver or a Pozidriv screwdriver (size 2). You can remove the box terminals from circuit breakers/MSPs with a frame size of S3 to connect conductors with ring-tongue or connecting bars. A terminal cover 3RT19 46-4EA1 is available as shock protection and to ensure that you comply with the required creepages and clearances when the box terminals are removed. Soldering pin connector Circuit breakers/MSPs in frame size S00 can be soldered onto printed circuit boards by means of a soldering pin connector. A soldering pin connector is available for the main contacts only (3RV19 18-5A) or for the main contacts and the transverse auxiliary contacts 1 NO +1 NC (3RV19 18-5B). SIRIUS System Manual 2-48 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 Circuit breaker/MSP 3RV1 Mounting the soldering pin adapters The soldering pin adapters are clamped above and below in the screw-type terminals of the circuit breakers/MSPs. The power supply can also be taken to the printed circuit boards via cables. 1 3 2 4 1 1 2 1 Fig. 2-35: Circuit breaker/MSP, soldering pin connector (frame size S00) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-49 Circuit breaker/MSP 3RV1 2.5.3 Device circuit diagrams Frame size S00 13 23 3RV1901-1F 14 24 13 21 3RV1902-.D.. C1 3RV1901-.E C2 14 22 3RV1901-1G 3RV1901-1D 11 3RV1902-.A.. D1 U D2 3RV1901-.J 14 12 3RV1901-.A 3RV1901-.B 3RV1901-.C 13 21 31 43 33 41 33 43 31 41 14 22 32 44 34 42 34 44 32 42 L1 1 L2 3 L3 5 I >> I >> I >> 3RV1912-.C.. T1 2 T2 4 T3 6 D1 07 max. 10 A U D2 08 Fig. 2-36: Device circuit diagram (frame size S00, example: circuit breaker (MSP) for motor protection 3RV10) 13 23 Frame sizes S0 to S3 3RV1901-1F 14 24 13 21 3RV1902-.D.. C1 3RV1901-.E C2 14 22 3RV1902-.A.. 11 3RV1901-1G 3RV1901-1D D1 U D2 3RV1901-.J 3RV1901-.A 3RV1901-.B 3RV1901-.C 13 21 31 43 33 41 33 43 31 41 14 22 32 44 34 42 34 44 32 42 14 12 3RV1921-1M 57 65 L1 1 L2 3 L3 5 58 66 77 85 I >> I >> I >> T1 2 T2 4 T3 6 max. 10 A 3RV1922-.C.. 78 86 D1 07 D2 08 U Fig. 2-37: Device circuit diagram (frame sizes S0 to S3, example: circuit breaker (MSP) for motor protection 3RV10) SIRIUS System Manual 2-50 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 Circuit breaker/MSP 3RV1 Circuit breaker/MSP with overload relay function Frame sizes S0 to S3 13 23 3RV1901-1F 14 24 13 21 3RV1901-.E 14 22 11 3RV1901-1G 3RV1901-1D 3RV1901-.J 13 21 31 43 3RV1901-.A 3RV1901-.B 3RV1901-.C 33 41 33 43 31 41 14 12 L1 1 L2 3 L3 5 97 95 14 22 32 44 34 42 34 44 32 42 max. 10 A I >> I >> I >> T1 2 T2 4 T3 6 98 96 Fig. 2-38: Circuit breaker/MSP with overload relay function, device circuit diagrams (frame sizes S0 to S3) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-51 Circuit breaker/MSP 3RV1 2.6 Dimensional drawings (dimensions in mm) Circuit breaker/MSP 3RV1 5) 3) 4) 2) 11) 5) 1) 25 NSB00027b NSB 00026c 62 70 6) 76 11) 20 25 7) 18 45 18 5 56 69 80 91 Fig. 2-40: 3RV10 21, 3RV13 21, 3RV14 21 (frame size S0) 30 121 3) 4) 130 5 45 85 140 125 89 4) 8) 9 Fig. 2-39: 3RV10 11, 3RV16 (frame size S00) 2) 12 7) 3,5 18 5 1) 45 90 97 105 45 12 45 90 45 72 5 5 8) 9 18 3) 14 106 11) 45 2) 1) 7) 8) 9 18 55 18 109 127 132 144 5 NSB00028a 8 Fig. 2-41: 3RV10 31, 3RV13 31, 3RV14 31 (frame size S2) 11) 8 146 4) 30 3) 2) 5 155 45 116 150 165 1) 10) 7) 18 9 70 18 7 5 132 153 157 169 NSB00029b 9) Fig. 2-42: 3RV10 4, 3RV13 4 (frame size S3) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Side-mount auxiliary contacts, 2-pole Alarm switch (S0 to S3) or side-mount auxiliary contacts, 4-pole (S00 to S3) Auxiliary release Transverse auxiliary switch Push-in lugs for screw mounting Only with undervoltage release with leading auxiliary switch 7) Drilling pattern 8) 35 mm rail in acc. with EN 50022 9) Mounting onto 35 mm rail, 15 mm high, in acc. EN 50 022 or with EN 50 022 or 75 mm rail in acc. with EN 50023 10)4 mm Allen screw 11)Lockable in 0 position with shackle (3.5 to 4.5 mm in diameter SIRIUS System Manual 2-52 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 Circuit breaker/MSP 3RV1 3RV11 circuit breaker/MSP with overload relay function 3) 5) 72 25 4) 1) 2) 11) 45 90 140 6) 125 106 45 45 90 97 NSB00030b 45 18 20 5 9) 55 69 80 91 9 3) 18 55 20 5 8 109 127 132 144 Fig. 2-44: 3RV11 (frame size S2) 146 8 4) 30 2) 5 155 45 90 116 150 165 1) 6) 7) Fig. 2-43: 3RV11 21, 3RV16 (frame size S0) 10) 30 5 7) 9 4) 3) 5 12 121 20 130 11) 2) NSB00031c 1) 6) 8) 70 20 5 7 132 153 157 169 NSB00032c 9 18 Fig. 2-45: 3RV11 42 (frame size S3) 1) Side-mount auxiliary contacts, 2-pole 2) Alarm switch or side-mount auxiliary contacts, 4-pole 3) Block for overload relay function 4) Transverse auxiliary switch 5) Push-in lugs for screw-type mounting 6) Drilling pattern 7) 35 mm rail in acc. with EN 50 022 8) Mounting onto 35 mm rails, 15 mm high, in acc. with EN 50 022 or 75 mm rails in acc. with EN 50 023 9) 4 mm Allen screw 10)Lockable in 0 position with shackle (3.5 to 4.5 mm in diameter) Disconnecting/isolator module 55 149 Fig. 2-46: 3RV19 28-1A (for frame size S0) 121 190 NSB00034a 96 144 NSB00033a 51 57 94 45 Fig. 2-47: 3RV19 38-1A (for frame size S2) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-53 Circuit breaker/MSP 3RV1 Molded-plastic panel/surface mount enclosure 45 19 55 11 2) 105 c) 13 5) 4,5 NSB 00035c 1) 4) 145 - 148 3) 77,5 6) 7) b) 99 a) b) 100,5 88 b) b) 143 d) 190 Fig. 2-48: 3RV19 13-1.... (for frame size S00) a) 3RV19 13-1CA00: 85 mm 3RV19 13-1DA00: 105 mm 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) b) with 3RV19 13-7D: 146.5 mm with 3RV19 13-7E: 166.5 mm The dimensions relate to the mounting surface c) with 3RV19 13-7D: 64 mm with 3RV19 13-7E: 84 mm Knockout opening for M25 Knockout opening for rear M20 cable routing With safety lock Max. shackle diameter for padlock is 8 mm Indicator light 3RV19 03-5. Locking device 3RV19 13-6B Emergency-stop button 3RV19 13-7 d) The dimensions relate to the mounting surface 32 25 29 1) 2) 4) 19 7 45 1) 2) 4,5 4) 3) 126 18 150 NSB 00037c NSB 00036c a) 250 235 155 145 - 148 3) 18 181 Fig. 2-49: 3RV19 23-1.... (for frame size S0) Fig. 2-50: 3RV19 33-1.... (for frame size S2) a) 3RV19 23-1CA00: 85 mm 3RV19 23-1DA00: 105 mm 1) 2) 3) 4) 1) 2) 3) 4) Knockout opening for M25 Knockout opening for rear M20 cable entry Opening for padlock with a max. shackle diameter of 8 mm Indicator light 3RV19 03-5. Knockout opening for M32 (left) and M40 (right) Knockout opening for rear M32 cable entry Opening for padlock with a max. shackle diameter of 8 mm Indicator light 3RV19 03-5. SIRIUS System Manual 2-54 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 Circuit breaker/MSP 3RV1 Cast-Aluminum panel/surface mount enclosure 2) 2) 1) I ON O 1) Indicator light 3RV19 03-5. 2) Knockout opening for M25 160 170 1) Leuchtmelder 3RV19 03-5. 2) Ausbrechoffnungen fur Verschraubung M25 O OFF 116 135 105 2) NSB 01088a 52 M 25 M 25 Fig. 2-51: 3RV19 23-1.A01 for circuit breaker/MSP, frame size S0 Molded-plastic flush mount enclosure 3) 2) 105 3) 2) 1) max. 7 95 12 87 1) Leuchtmelder 3RV19 03-5. 1) Indicator light 3RV1903-5 2) Ausbrechoffnungen fur M25 2) Knockout opening for M25 3) Ausbrechoffnungen fur M20 3) Knockout opening for M20 105 max. 6 95 1) 12 87 1) Leuchtmelder 3RV19 03-5. 1) Indicator light 3RV1903-5 2) Ausbrechoffnungen fur M25 2) Knockout opening for M25 3) Ausbrechoffnungen fur M20 3) Knockout opening for M20 Fig. 2-52: 3RV19 13-2DA00 (frame size S00) Fig. 2-53: 3RV19 23-2DA00/-2GA00 (frame size S0) Molded-plastic front plate 40 12 1) NSB 00039a 85 56,5 10 o7 4,5 62 70 1) Indicator light 3RV1903-5. Fig. 2-54: 3RV19 13-4C (frame size S00) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-55 Circuit breaker/MSP 3RV1 Molded-plastic Front plate and Support 12 18 1) NSB 00042a 85 56,5 40 o 3,5 7,4 10 62 70 1) Indicator light 3RV1903-5. Fig. 2-55: 3RV19 23-4B, 3RV19 23-4E (frame sizes S0, S2, S3); 3RV19 23-4G (only for frame size S0) Soldering pin adapters for main and auxiliary contacts 13,4 5 59 2 9 9 45 13,1 12 5 8,4 14,4 97,4 103 14,4 NSB00041 8,4 49 14,4 14,4 Fig. 2-56: 3RV19 18-5A/-5B (frame size S00) SIRIUS System Manual 2-56 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 Circuit breaker/MSP 3RV1 Thru-the-door rotary operators 66 45 15 19 1 ... 4 1) NSB 01089b 34,5 5 max. 327 min. 55 2) 33 17 1) Lockable in 0 position with shackle (max. 8 mm in diameter) 1) Abschliebar in Nullstellung mit Bugeldurchmesser max. 8 mm 2) Affixed with screw caps 2) Befestigung mit Uberwurfmutter 3 24,3 4) NSB01107 22,5 max. 130 min. 45 Lieferzustand Wellenlange mmadaptable durch Kurzen der Welle anpassbar 4)4)Supplied with mit a shaft length ofvon 130130 mm: by shortening of the shaft Fig. 2-57: 3RV19 26-0. (short shaft for circuit breaker/MSP, frame sizes S0, S2, S3) 66 16 45 19 15 1 ... 4 34,5 NSB 01090b 1) 5 max. 327 min. 55 5) 2) 33 17 1)1)Lockable in 0 position with shackle (max. 8 mm inmax. diameter) Abschliebar in Nullstellung mit Bugeldurchmesser 8 mm 2)2)Affixed with mit screw caps Befestigung Uberwurfmutter 2 5)5)Ground terminal 35 35 mm mm2 und andHaltewinkel support bracket 330 mm shaft Erdungsklemme fur 330for mm Welle 3 NSB01108 24,3 3) 22,5 max. 330 min. 45 Lieferzustand Wellenlange 330 mmadaptable durch Kurzen der Welle anpassbar 3)3)Supplied with mit a shaft length ofvon 330 mm: by shortening of the shaft Fig. 2-58: 3RV19 26-0. (long shaft (with support) for circuit breaker/MSP, frame sizes S0, S2, S3) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-57 Circuit breaker/MSP 3RV1 Thru-the-door rotary operators for harsh conditions G NSB01091a Drilling pattern Door Drilling pattern Ground J B 65 A 75 6 40 D E F max. 341 min. 42 62 6 14 H Type min. 11 mm without shaft max. 330 min. 31 3RV1926-2 3RV1936-2 3RV1946-2 Frame Measurements Size A C B S0 S2 S3 125 170 194 111 144 180 D E 77 112 50 87 162 60 60 100 187 C F G H 9 50 27 50 27 10 48 25 10 J 42 47 53 Fig. 2-59: 3RV19 .6-2. (frame sizes S0, S2, S3) SIRIUS System Manual 2-58 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 Circuit breaker/MSP 3RV1 Terminals for "Combination Motor Controller Type E" in acc. with UL 508 10 70 74 121 168 72 84 27 45 NSB 01228 NSB 01229 Fig. 2-60: 3RV19 28-1H (frame size S0) Fig. 2-61: 3RT19 46-4GA07 (frame size S3) Motorized remote-control mechanism NSB00044 112 5 SI EMENS I 224 182 RESET I> MANUAL AUTOMATIC REVISION 87 148 a) Fig. 2-62: 3RV19 .6-3AP0 for circuit breaker/MSP a) 3RV19 36-3AP0, frame size S2, 211 mm b) 3RV19 46-3AP0, frame size S3, 236 mm SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-59 Circuit breaker/MSP 3RV1 Busbar adapter shoes 40 142 139 1 40 68 2 55 13,5 Fig. 2-63: 8US10 .1-5DJ07 (for circuit breaker/MSP, frame sizes S00/S0) Adapter width: 8US10 51-5DJ07: 45 mm 8US10 61-5DJ07: 55 mm 32 50 NSK-8187 NSK-8186 1) Fig. 2-64: 8US10 61-5FK08 (for circuit breaker/MSP, frame size S2) 1) for 40-mm-busbar system 2) Side module 8US19 98-2KB00 1) for 40-mm-busbar system: width: 12 to 15 mm thickness: 5 and 10 mm 13,5 55 32 60 Fig. 2-65: 8US12 51-5DM07 (for circuit breaker/MSP, frame sizes S00/S0) 1) for 60-mm-busbar system 2) Side module 8US19 98-2BM00 NSK-8189 NSK-8188 60 185 182 1 60 68 2 Fig. 2-66: 8US12 61-5FM08 (for circuit breaker/MSP, frame size S2) 1) for 60-mm-busbar system 2) Side module 8US19 98-2BM00 70 NSE00449 116 60 182 40 40 60 42 14 23 23 44 137 162 174 Fig. 2-67: 8US11 11-4SM00 (for circuit breaker/MSP, frame size S3) for 40- and 60-mm-systems SIRIUS System Manual 2-60 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 Circuit breaker/MSP 3RV1 3-phase busbar systems 13 13 NSB 00056b 128 173 55 93 148 218 108 83 108 45 64 64 21 21 NSB 00055b 203 258 Fig. 2-68: 3RV19 15-1... (frame size S00) Separation distance 45 mm: 3RV19 15-1AB for 2 circuit breakers/MSPs (length 83 mm) Fig. 2-69: 3RV19 15-1... (frame size S0) Separation distance 55 mm: 3RV19 15-2AB for 2 circuit breakers/MSPs with accessories (length 93 mm) 3RV19 15-2BB for 3 circuit breakers/MSPs with accessories (length 148 mm) 3RV19 15-2CB for 4 circuit breakers/MSPs with accessories (length 203 mm) 3RV19 15-2DB for 5 circuit breakers/MSPs with accessories (length 258 mm) 3RV19 15-1BB for 3 circuit breakers/MSPs (length 128 mm) 3RV19 15-1CB for 4 circuit breakers/MSPs (length 173 mm) 3RV19 15-1DB for 5 circuit breakers/MSPs (length 218 mm) 13 63 101 108 64 21 NSB 01092b 227 Fig. 2-70: 3RV19 15-3.. Separation distance 63 mm: 3RV19 15-3AB for 2 circuit breakers/MSPs (length 101 mm) 3RV19 15-3CB for 4 circuit breakers/MSPs (length 227 mm) 111 165 221 166 55 NSB00057b 96 31 15 Fig. 2-71: 3RV19 35-1. (for circuit breaker/MSP, frame size S2) Separation distance 55 mm: 3RV19 35-1A for 2 circuit breakers/MSPs (length 111 mm) 3RV19 35-1B for 3 circuit breakers/MSPs (length 166 mm) 3RV19 35-1C for 4 circuit breakers/MSPs (length 221 mm) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-61 Circuit breaker/MSP 3RV1 121 196 271 166 75 NSB00058b 96 31 15 Fig. 2-72: 3RV19 35-3. (for circuit breaker/MSP, frame size S2) Separation distance 75 mm: 3RV19 35-3A for 2 circuit breakers/MSPs with accessories (length 121 mm) 3RV19 35-3B for 3 circuit breakers/MSPs with accessories (length 196 mm) 3RV19 35-3C for 4 circuit breakers/MSPs with accessories (length 271 mm) 3-phase feeder lugs 44 14 14 14 14 44 71 114 25 NSB00059a 24 NSB00060b 73 44 92 25 NSB01093a 54 a 31 a) 19 mm for 3RV1.1 a) 23 mm for 3RV1.2 Fig. 2-73: 3RV19 15-5A Connection from above (for frame size S00) Fig. 2-74: 3RV19 15-5B Connection from below (frame sizes S00/S0) Fig. 2-75: 3RV19 25-5AB Connection from above (frame size S0) Connector 112 161 Fig. 2-76: 3RV19 35-5A Connection from above (for frame size S2) 81 64 108 42,5 21 NSB 00062c 13 91 34 NSB00061b 55 Fig. 2-77: 3RV19 15-5DB Frame size S0 (left) and frame size S00 (right) SIRIUS System Manual 2-62 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 Circuit breaker/MSP 3RV1 2.7 Technical specifications 2.7.1 General specifications Type 3RV1. 1 3RV1. 2 3RV1. 3 3RV1. 4 S0 S2 S3 25 50 100 10 10/20 10/20 -- -- -- Specifications * IEC 60 947-1, EN 60 947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100) Yes * IEC 60 947-2, EN 60 947-2 (VDE 0660 Part 101) Yes * IEC 60 947-4-1, EN 60 947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102) Yes Frame size S00 Pole number 3 Max. rated current Inmax (= max. rated operational current Ie) A 12 Permissible ambient temperature Storage/transportation C -50 to +80 Operation C -20 to +70 1) * +60 C % 100 * +70 C % 87 Permissible rated current with the following internal cubicle temperature: Circuit breaker in housing Permissible rated current with the following ambient housing temperature: * +35 C % 100 * +60 C % 87 Rated operational voltage Ue V 690 2) Rated frequency Hz 50/60 Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690 Rated impulse strength Uimp kV 6 Utilization category * IEC 60 947-2 (circuit breaker) A * IEC 60 947-4-1 (motor starter) AC-3 CLASS In acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1 10 Direct current short-circuit breaking capacity (time constant = 5 ms) (time constant t = 5 ms) * 1 conducting path 150 V DC kA 10 * 2 conducting paths in series 300 V DC kA 10 * 3 conducting paths in series 450 V DC kA 10 W 5 Power loss (Pv) per circuit breaker In -> to 1.25 A Depends on rated current In In -> 1.6 A to 6.3 A W 6 -- -- -- (Upper setting range) In -> 8 A to 12 A W 7 -- -- -- In -> to 0.63 A W -- 5 -- -- 2 Rper conducting path = P/I x 3 In -> 0.8 A to 6.3 A W -- 6 -- -- In -> 8 A to 16 A W -- 7 -- -- -- In -> 20 A to 25 A W -- 8 -- In -> to 25 A W -- -- 12 -- In -> 32 A W -- -- 15 -- -- In -> 40 A to 50 A W -- -- 20 In -> to 63 A W -- -- -- 20 In -> 75 A and 90 A W -- -- -- 30 In -> to 100 A W -- -- -- 38 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-63 Circuit breaker/MSP 3RV1 Type 3RV1. 1 g/ms 3RV1. 2 3RV1. 3 Shock resistance In acc. with IEC 68 Part 2-27 Degree of protection In acc. with IEC 60 529 IP20 Shock protection In acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 protected against touching by fingers Temperature compensation In acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1 Phase loss sensitivity In acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1 Explosion protection In acc. with DIN VDE 0165 and EN 50 019 Yes for 3RV10 (Class 10), 3RV11(Class 10) Isolating function In acc. with IEC 60 947-2 Yes Main and emergency-stop switch features4) In acc. with IEC 60 204-1 (VDE 0113) Yes Safe isolation between the main circuit and the auxiliary circuit required for PELV applications In acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 C 25/11 (rectangular and sine pulse) IP20 3) -20 to +60 Yes * to 400 V + 10 % Yes * to 415 V+ 5 % (higher voltage on request) Mechanical life Electrical life Max. switching frequency per hour (motor startups) 1) Reduction in current above +60 C 2) With molded-plastic housing 500 V 3RV1. 4 Yes Operating cycles 100,000 50,000 100,000 25,000 1/h 15 3) Connection room IP00 4) With corresponding accessories SIRIUS System Manual 2-64 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 Circuit breaker/MSP 3RV1 Conductor cross-sections - main circuit Type 3RV1. Connection type Screw-type terminal Screw-type terminal with box terminal Pozidriv size 2 Terminal screw Specified tightening torque 3RV1. 2 3RV1. 3 3RV1. 4 Pozidriv size 2 Allen screw 4 mm Nm 0.8 to 1.2 Nm 2 to 2.5 3 to 4.5 4 to 6 mm 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) 2 x (1 to 2.5) 2 x (0.75 to 16) 2 x (2.5 to 16) mm 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) (max. 4) 2 x (2.5 to 6) - - Conductor cross-sections, 1 or 2 conductors Single-core Finely stranded with wire end ferrule: Stranded mm 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) 2 x (1 to 2.5) 2 x (0.75 to 16) 2 x (2.5 to 35) mm 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) 2 x (2.5 to 6) (max. 10) 1 x (0.75 to 25) 1 x (2.5 to 50) mm 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) 2 x (1 to 2.5) 2 x (0.75 to 25) 2 x (10 to 50) mm 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) (max. 4) 2 x (2.5 to 6) (max. 10) 1 x (0.75 to 35) 1 x (10 to 70) AWG 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (14 to 10) 2 x (18 to 3) 2 x (10 to 1/0) AWG - - 1 x (18 to 2) 1 x (10 to 2/0) mm - - 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) With copper busbars mm - - - 18 x 10 With lug mm - - - to 2 x 70 2 x (0.25 to 2.5) 2 x (0.25 to 1.5) 2 x (0.25 to 2.5) 2 x (24 to 14) - AWG cables, single- or multi-core Ribbon cables (number x width x depth) Removable box terminal 1) Cage Clamp connections2)3)4) (1 or 2 conn. can be connected) Single-coil mm Finely stranded with wire end ferrule mm Finely stranded without wire end ferrule mm AWG cables, single-core or stranded AWG Max. outer diameter of the conductor insulation: 3.6 mm Permissible service position Any In acc. with IEC 60 447 start command "I" right or above Auxiliary contacts Front transverse auxiliary contacts with 1 changeover contact Switching capacity with different voltages Rated operational voltage Ue V AC 24 230 400 690 A 4 3 1.5 0.5 A 10 10 10 10 V DC 24 110 220 A 1 0.22 0.1 AC voltage Rated operational current Ie/AC-15 Rated operational current Ie/AC-12 Ith Rated operational voltage Ue DC voltage L/R 200 ms Rated operational current Ie/DC-13 Front transverse electronically optimized auxiliary contacts with 1 changeover contact AC voltage Rated operational voltage Ue Rated operational current Ie/AC-14 DC voltage L/R 200 ms Rated operational voltage Ue Rated operational current Ie/DC-13 V AC 3 to 60 mA 1 to 300 V DC 3 to 60 mA 1 to 300 Front transverse auxiliary contacts with 1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO contacts AC voltage Rated operational voltage Ue Rated operational current Ie/AC-15 Rated operational current Ie/AC-12 Ith DC voltage L/R 200 ms Rated operational voltage Ue Rated operational current Ie/DC-13 V AC 24 230 A 2 0.5 A 2.5 2.5 V DC 24 48 60 A 1 0.3 0.15 Side-mount auxiliary contacts with 1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO, 2 NC, 2 NO + 2 NC and alarm switch AC voltage Rated operational voltage Ue Rated operational current Ie/AC-15 Rated operational current Ie/AC-12 Rated operational voltage Ue Rated operational current Ie 1) 2) 3) 4) Ith DC voltage L/R 200 ms V AC 24 230 400 690 A 6 4 3 1 A 10 10 10 10 V DC 24 110 220 440 A 2 0.5 0.25 0.1 After the box terminals have been removed, lug or busbar connections are also possible. For notes on the Cage Clamp system, see page 1-19. Use an insulation stop for a conductor cross-section 1 mm2. Associated opening tool 8WA28 03/8WA28 04 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-65 Circuit breaker/MSP 3RV1 2.7.2 Permissible rating of approved devices for North America, u s In North America the 3RV1 is not approved as a "circuit breaker" and is commonly known as a Motor Starter Protector (MSP). The SIRIUS 3RV1 series are approved for u/s and can also be used in acc. with UL 508 and C22.2 No.14 with a contactor as a Type F combination starter. You can use these MSPs as a "Manual Motor Starter" for "Group Fusing" or for "Group Installation" or as a "Combination Motor Controller Type E". 3RV1 as a "Manual Motor Starter" When the 3RV1 is used as a "Manual Motor Starter", it is always with a device for short-circuit protection (upstream short-circuit protection device). Any fusible link ("group fusing") or UL 489 listed circuit breaker ("group installation") can be used as a device for shortcircuit protection. The type and size are selected in acc. with the American NFPA 70 standard, Article 430-53 (c) for adequate protection of supply wiring. Accreditation was issued under the following file numbers with the listed data: u File No. E47705, Product Class NLRV s Master Contract 165071, Product Class 3211 05 Motor Starter Protector Hp rating Rated current Type V For FLA max. 1-phase 3-phase 115 200 230 460 575/600 1/2 11/2 2 - 3 3 71/2 10 115 200 230 460 575/600 2 3 5 - 71/2 71/2 15 20 115 200 230 460 575/600 3 71/2 10 - 15 20 40 50 115 200 230 460 575/600 10 20 20 - 30 40 75 100 In A 0.11 to 2 2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 8 10 12 0.11 to 3.2 4 5 6.3 8 10 12.5 16 20 22 25 11 to 16 20 25 32 40 45 50 11 to 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 75 90 100 (99) 3RV10 11 3RV16 11-0BD10 Frame size S00 FLA max. 12 A, 600 V 3RV10 21/3RV11 21 3RV13 21 Frame size S0 FLA max. 25 A, 600 V 3RV10 31/3RV11 31 3RV13 31 Frame size S2 FLA max. 50 A, 600 V 3RV10 41/3RV10 42 3RV11 42 3RV13 41/3RV13 42 Frame size S3 FLA max. 99 A, 600 V To 240 V AC 1 Icu kA 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 ) To AC 480 Y/277 V 1 Icu ) kA 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 50 65 65 65 65 65 50 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 To AC 600 Y/347 V 1 Icu kA 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 ) Hp rating = output power in horse power (maximum motor power) FLA = full load amps 1) Corresponds to "short circuit breaking capacity" in acc. with UL SIRIUS System Manual 2-66 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 Circuit breaker/MSP 3RV1 3RV10.A as "Combination Motor Controller Type E" Since July 16th 2001, 1 inch air clearance and 2 inch creepage distance is required for a "Combination Motor Controller Type E" on the input side with UL 508 The 3RV10 in frame sizes S0 and S3 are therefore approved with the terminal blocks listed below in acc. with UL 508. The 3RV10 in frame size S2 already complies with the required air clearance and creepage distance as a basic unit. These extended air clearances and creepage distances are not required for CSA. The terminal blocks are therefore not required for use as a "Combination Motor Controller Type E" in acc. with CSA. 3RV10's are certified as "Combination Motor Controller Type E" under the following file numbers with the listed data: u File No. E156943, Product Class NKJH s Master Contract 165071, Product Class 3211 08 Motor Starter Protector Hp rating Rated current Type V For FLA max. 1-phase 3-phase 115 200 230 460 575/600 2 3 3 -- -- -- 71/2 71/2 15 10 115 200 230 460 575/600 3 71/2 10 -- -- -- 15 20 40 50 115 200 230 460 575/600 10 20 20 -- -- -- 30 40 75 75 In A 0.11 to 1.6 2 2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 8 10 12.5 16 20 22 11 to 16 20 25 32 40 45 50 11 to 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 75 90 100 3RV10 21 + 3RV19 28-1H2) Frame size S0 FLA max. 22 A, 480 V 12.5 A, 600 V 3RV10 31 Frame size S2 FLA max. 50 A, 600 V 3RV10 41 + 3RV1946-4GA07 2) Frame size S3 FLA max. 100 A, 480V 75 A, 600 V To 240 V AC 1 Icu ) kA 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 To AC 480 Y/277 V 1 Icu ) kA 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 To AC 600 Y/347 V 1 Icu ) kA 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 -- -- -- 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 -- -- Hp rating = output power in horse power (maximum motor power) FLA = full load amps 1) Corresponds to "short circuit breaking capacity" in acc. with UL 2) Not required by CSA Rating of the control switches and alarm switches Side-mount Transverse Transverse auxiliary contact with auxiliary contact with auxiliary contact with 1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO, 1 changeover contact 1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO 2 NC, 2 NO + 2 NC and alarm switch Max. rated voltage * In acc. with NEMA u V AC 600 600 240 * In acc. with NEMA s V AC 600 600 240 Continuous current A 10 5 2.5 A600 B600 C300 Q300 R300 R300 Switching capacity SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-67 Circuit breaker/MSP 3RV1 2.7.3 Short-circuit breaking capacity Icn in acc. with IEC 60 947-2 The table lists the rated limit short-circuit breaking capacity Icu and the rated service short-circuit breaking capacity Ics of 3RV1 circuit breakers with different inception voltages and related to the rated current In of the circuit breakers. The incoming supply of the circuit breakers is permissible at the upper or lower terminals irrespective of the rating. If the short-circuit current at the installation location exceeds the rated short-circuit breaking capacity of the circuit breaker specified in the table, a backup fuse is required. You can also use an upstream circuit breaker with a limiter function. The maximum rated current of this backup fuse is specified in the tables. The rated short-circuit breaking capacity specified for the fuse then applies. Circuit breaker/contactor combinations for short-circuit currents of up to 50 kA can be used as fuseless load feeders in acc. with Part 5. Circuit breaker Type 3RV10, 3RV16 110BD10 frame size S00 3RV1. 2 Frame size S0 3RV1. 3 Frame size S2 Rated current In A To 240 V AC 2) Icu Ics Max. To 400 V AC 2)/415 V 3) To 440 V AC 2)/460 V3) To 500 V AC 2)/525 V3) Icu Ics Max. Icu Ics Max. Icu Ics Max. To 690 V AC 2) Icu Ics Max. Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse (gL/gG) (gL/gG) (gL/gG) (gL/gG) (gL/gG) kA kA A kA kA A kA kA A kA kA A kA kA A 0.16 to 0.8 100 100 * 100 100 * 100 100 * 100 100 * 100 100 * 1 100 100 * 100 100 * 100 100 * 100 100 * 100 100 * 1.25 100 100 * 100 100 * 100 100 * 100 100 * 2 2 20 1.6 100 100 * 100 100 * 100 100 * 100 100 * 2 2 20 2 100 100 * 100 100 * 100 100 * 10 10 35 2 2 35 2.5 100 100 * 100 100 * 100 100 * 10 10 35 2 2 35 3.2 100 100 * 100 100 * 50 10 40 1) 3 3 40 2 2 40 4 100 100 * 100 100 * 50 10 40 1) 3 3 40 2 2 40 5 100 100 * 100 100 * 50 10 50 1) 3 3 50 2 2 50 6.3 100 100 * 100 100 * 50 10 50 1) 3 3 50 2 2 50 8 100 100 * 50 12.5 80 1) 50 10 63 1) 3 3 63 2 2 63 10 100 100 * 50 12.5 80 1) 10 10 63 3 3 63 2 2 63 12 100 100 * 50 12.5 80 1) 10 10 80 3 3 80 2 2 0.16 to 1.25 100 100 * 100 100 * 100 100 * 100 100 * 100 100 * 1.6 100 100 * 100 100 * 100 100 * 100 100 * 100 100 * 2 100 100 * 100 100 * 100 100 * 100 100 * 8 8 25 2.5 100 100 * 100 100 * 100 100 * 100 100 * 8 8 25 3.2 100 100 * 100 100 * 100 100 * 100 100 * 8 8 32 4 100 100 * 100 100 * 100 100 * 100 100 * 6 3 32 5 100 100 * 100 100 * 100 100 * 100 100 * 6 3 32 6.3 100 100 * 100 100 * 100 100 * 100 100 * 6 3 50 8 100 100 * 100 100 * 50 25 63 1) 42 21 63 6 3 50 10 100 100 * 100 100 * 50 25 80 1) 42 21 63 6 3 50 12.5 100 100 * 100 100 * 50 25 80 1) 42 21 80 6 3 63 16 100 100 * 50 25 100 1) 50 10 80 1) 10 5 80 4 2 63 20 100 100 * 50 25 125 1) 50 10 80 1) 10 5 80 4 2 63 22 100 100 * 50 25 125 1) 50 10 100 1) 10 5 80 4 2 63 25 100 100 * 50 25 125 1) 50 10 100 1) 10 5 80 4 2 63 16 100 100 * 50 25 100 1) 50 25 100 1) 12 6 63 5 3 63 20 100 100 * 50 25 125 1) 50 25 100 1) 80 12 6 80 5 3 63 25 100 100 * 50 25 125 ) 50 15 100 1) 12 6 80 5 3 63 32 100 100 * 50 25 125 1) 50 15 125 1) 10 5 100 4 2 63 40 100 100 * 50 25 160 1) 50 15 125 1) 10 5 100 4 2 63 45 100 100 * 50 25 160 1) 50 15 125 1) 10 5 100 4 2 63 50 100 100 * 50 25 160 1) 50 15 125 1) 10 5 100 4 2 80 1 SIRIUS System Manual 2-68 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 Circuit breaker/MSP 3RV1 Circuit breaker Type 3RV1. 41 Frame size S3 3RV1.42 Frame size S3 With increased switching capacity Rated current In A To 240 V AC 2) Icu Ics Max. To 400 V AC 2)/415 V 3) To 440 V AC 2)/460 V 3) To 500 V AC 2)/525 V 3) Icu Ics Max. Icu Ics Max. Icu Ics Max. To 690 V AC 2) Icu Ics Max. Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse (gL/gG) (gL/gG) (gL/gG) (gL/gG) (gL/gG) kA kA A 40 100 100 * kA 50 kA 25 A 125 1) kA 50 kA 20 A 125 1) kA 12 kA 6 A 100 kA 6 kA 3 A 63 50 100 100 * 50 25 125 1) 50 20 125 1) 12 6 100 6 3 80 63 100 100 * 50 25 160 1) 50 20 160 1) 12 6 100 6 3 80 75 100 100 * 50 25 160 1) 50 20 160 1) 8 4 125 5 3 100 90 100 100 * 50 25 160 1) 50 20 160 1) 8 4 125 5 3 125 100 100 100 * 50 25 160 1) 50 20 160 1) 8 4 125 5 3 125 16 100 100 * 100 50 * 100 50 * 30 15 80 12 7 63 20 100 100 * 100 50 * 100 50 * 30 15 80 12 7 63 25 100 100 * 100 50 * 100 50 * 30 15 80 12 7 63 32 100 100 * 100 50 * 100 50 * 22 11 100 12 7 63 40 100 100 * 100 50 * 100 50 * 18 9 160 12 6 80 50 100 100 * 100 50 * 100 50 * 15 7.5 160 10 5 100 63 100 100 * 100 50 * 70 50 200 1) 15 7.5 160 7.5 4 100 75 100 100 * 100 50 * 70 50 200 1) 10 5 160 6 3 125 90 100 100 * 100 50 * 70 50 200 1) 10 5 160 6 3 160 100 100 100 * 100 50 * 70 50 200 1) 10 5 160 6 3 160 * No backup fuse required because it is short circuit-proof up to 100 kA. 1 2 3 Short circuit-proof up to min. 50 kA. A backup fuse is only required if the short-circuit current at the installation location is > Icu. 10 % overvoltage 5 % overvoltage SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-69 Circuit breaker/MSP 3RV1 2.7.4 Limiter function with standard devices for 500 V AC and 690 V AC in acc. with IEC 60 947-2 The table lists the rated limit short-circuit breaking capacity Icu and the rated service short-circuit breaking capacity Ics with an upstream standard circuit breaker that fulfills the limiter function at 500 V AC and 690 V AC. The short-circuit breaking capacity can be significantly increased using the upstream standard circuit breaker with a limiter function. The circuit-breaker connected downstream, should be set to the rated current of the load. Be sure when you set up circuit breaker combinations to note to the distances between the grounded parts and the distances between the circuit breakers. Make sure that the cabling between the circuit breakers is short circuit-proof. You can mount the circuit breakers side by side. Standard circuit breaker with limiter function Standard circuit breaker Type To 500 V AC 1)/ 525 V 2) To 690 V AC 1) Rated current In Icu Ics Icu Rated current In Type A kA kA kA kA 3RV13 21-4DC10 3RV10 2 to 1 * * * * Frame size S0 Frame size S0 In = 25 A Ics 1.25 * * * * 1.6 * * * * 2 * * 50 25 2.5 * * 50 25 3.2 * * 50 25 4 * * 50 25 5 * * 50 25 6.3 * * 50 25 8 100 50 20 10 10 100 50 20 10 12.5 100 50 20 10 16 100 50 20 10 20 100 50 20 10 22 100 50 20 10 25 100 50 20 10 3RV13 31-4HC10 3RV10 3 16 100 50 50 25 Frame size S2 Frame size S2 20 100 50 50 25 25 100 50 50 25 32 100 50 50 25 40 100 50 50 25 50 100 50 50 25 In = 50 A 3RV13 41-4HC10 3RV10 4 32 100 50 50 25 Frame size S3 Frame size S3 40 100 50 50 25 50 100 50 50 25 In = 50 A 3RV13 41-4MC10 3RV10 4 50 100 50 50 25 Frame size S3 Frame size S3 63 100 50 50 25 75 100 50 50 25 90 100 50 50 25 100 100 50 50 25 In = 100 A * No backup fuse required because it is short circuit-proof up to 100 kA. Short circuit proof up to 100 kA. 1) 10 % overvoltage 2) 5 % overvoltage 2.7.5 Characteristics You can obtain the characteristics for all the setting ranges from our Technical Assistance team by e-mail: technical-assistance@siemens.com or over the Internet under: www.siemens.com/sirius/technical-assistance SIRIUS System Manual 2-70 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 Circuit breaker/MSP 3RV1 2.7.6 Installation guidelines Rules for installing circuit breakers/MSPs When mounting circuit breakers/MSPs, the following clearance must be maintained to grounded or live parts. Clearance to grounded or live parts Y X mm mm to 690 V 20 70 9 S0 to 500 V to 690 V 30 50 90 90 9 30 3RV1. 3 S2 to 690 V 50 140 10 3RV1. 4 S3 to to to to 50 70 110 150 167 167 167 167 10 10 10 30 Frame size 3RV1. 1 S00 3RV1. 2 240 V 440 V 500 V 690 V side Z mm Z Z 1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3 3RV1... 3RV1... X Y Type 3RV1... Y Circuit breaker/MSP 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3 NSB 01304a Rules for installing circuit breakers/MSPs with limiter function Standard installation for frame sizes S0, S2 and S3 Installation of frame size S0 for the setting ranges 5.5 - 8 to 20 - 25 A at 690 V Infeed side Wiring module 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 Frame size S0: 3RV1915-1A Frame size S2: 3RV1935-1A Frame size S3: 3RV1943-3D 1L1 3L2 5L3 3RV1... 3RV1... 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3 3RV1... NSB01069 (NOTICE! Due to the wiring module always 10 mm gap between the circuit-breakers) 3RV1... 3L2 5L3 2T1 4T2 6T3 Infeed side 2T1 4T2 6T3 NSB01070 1L1 Load side Load side Clearance to grounded or live parts for limiter function in mm Ue [V] 500 Z 1L1 3L2 5L3 690 3RV1... 3RV1... S2 10 10 S3 10 Y 40 50 110 X 90 140 167 Z (side) 30 10 30 Y 50 50 150 X 90 140 167 Y 3RV1... 1L1 3L2 5L3 X Y Z S0 Z (side) 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3 NSB01071 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-71 Circuit breaker/MSP 3RV1 2.8 Application notes for the use of 3RV1 downstream from frequency converters/inverter with pulsing voltage The use of thermal motor protection devices downstream from frequency converters/inverters with pulsing voltage results in influences on the switching devices that could lead to the nuisance tripping of those devices. In the following examples, practical guidelines are provided for such applications. 2.8.1 Influences of high frequency currents upon the thermal overload release The thermal overload release on the circuit breakers/MSPs and overload relays generally consists of a bimetal strip and a heating winding, that heat up when motor current runs through them. The excessive bending of the bimetal strip (such as with high motor current) results in the breaking of the motor circuit. This style of thermal overload release is set for 50 Hz AC current. So that the trip point is also only for currents which have the same thermal effect (r.m.s. value) or are similar to the set current in the required range of the standard. This would be the case for AC current from 0 to 400 Hz and for DC current. With high frequency currents, as occurs downstream of converters, the bimetal strip becomes increasingly hot. This can be attributed to eddy current loses induced by harmonics and to the Skin effect in the heater windings. Both lead to the tripping of the overload release even with lower currents (nuisance tripping!). The influences are dependent on the frequency of the current. The higher the frequency of the converter and the lower the adjustable range/rated current, the higher the reduction of the trip current. In order for the trip limits to once again fall into the standard range, the overload release setting needs to be corrected. The following table shows the correction factors for the various setting ranges depending on the pulse frequency of the converters. Pulse frequency [kHz] Setting range / Rated current 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 3.2 - 50 A 1.00 1.07 1.12 1.16 1.18 1.19 1.21 1.22 1.23 0.5 - 2.5 A 1.00 1.08 1.13 1.17 1.21 1.24 1.26 1.28 1.29 0.32 - 0.4 A 1.00 1.09 1.15 1.21 1.25 1.29 1.33 1.35 1.37 0.16 - 0.25 A 1.00 1.10 1.17 1.24 1.28 1.33 1.38 1.42 1.46 Table 2-20: Correction factors for the various setting ranges SIRIUS System Manual 2-72 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 Circuit breaker/MSP 3RV1 Example Circuit breaker/MSP with the setting range of 1.1 - 1.6 A behind a frequency converter with a pulse frequency of 8 kHz and a r.m.s. value of the motor current at rated load: 1.2 A. Set to: 1.2 A x 1.21 = 1.45 A This compensates for the influences of the high frequency current. The trip current lays within the standard range. Attention Harmonics can cause the r.m.s. value of the motor current to be higher than the rated motor current. In this case nuisance tripping can still occur despite the use of the correction factors. In order to remedy this, the r.m.s. value of the motor current at rated load needs to be ascertained and used as the basis current for the above described correction procedure. Only measuring instruments suitable to ascertain the values are those that can measure the true r.m.s. value up to the frequencies that appear and can also reproduce them. Devices well suitable for this would be hot-wire instruments for example. Moving-iron measuring elements are in fact r.m.s. measuring instruments, but can only be used for frequencies up to 1 kHz and therefore can't be used in most of the above described cases. Common instruments such as a multimeter or a clipon ammeter are not suitable for measuring in the above described cases. 2.8.2 Other possible influences a) Capacitive leakage currents Despite adjusting the setting, nuisance tripping can still occur in individual installations. Extensive investigations have shown that installations with pulsing voltage can also lead to other effects that lower the trip current of the overload release, such as an increase of current flowing through the trip element. A practical example: Consider an installation that is fed from an inverter with 3 kHz pulse frequency and has motors connected with a 80 m long cable. An analysis of the actual flowing current shows a ripple amplitude of the motor current with very high frequency currents (up to 150 kHz) and a peak value of 1.5 A. The influence on the thermal overload release is still significantly higher than described in example 1 at these frequencies. Moreover, capacitive leakage currents appear in this installation due to the length of the cable and the high frequency. These increase the current that flows through the trip element and can lead to nuisance tripping. In cases where high frequency currents of well over 16 kHz appear and the procedure described in example 1 no longer leads to success, then you can proceed as follows. In an overload free operation of the motor the overload release needs to be set so high that the unit will not trip. After that the motor needs to run for about 1.5 h at full load. Then the overload release needs to be reduced to the trip limit and then set about 10 % higher than SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 2-73 Circuit breaker/MSP 3RV1 the trip limit. That will compensate for the influences of the installation. You can then can use the achieved value as a correction factor for similar installations. b) Rotational speed control of motors with a response characteristic controlled Frequency converter With the adjustment of the linear voltage-frequency-characteristic and a continual increase in current (see for example operating instructions Micromaster parameter P077 and P078), decreased rotational speed (< 50 Hz) and constant load torque can lead to the increase of the motor current. With this adjustment the frequency converters output voltage is not reduced to the same scale as the output frequency. If this results in nuisance tripping and can't be compensated for by a higher setting of the trip release (watch for motor overload), then minimizing of the current increase or a readjustment to a quadratic voltage-frequency-characteristic could provide a remedy. SIRIUS System Manual 2-74 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3 3RT1 Contactors/ 3RH1 Control relays Section Subject Page 3.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals 3-3 3.1.1 Utilization categories 3-3 3.1.2 Positively driven operation 3-7 3.1.3 Safe isolation 3-7 3.1.4 Explanation of terms 3-9 3.2 Device description 3-10 3.2.1 Coil systems S00 to S3 3-12 3.2.2 Short-circuit protection for SIRIUS contactors 3-13 3.2.3 Operation 3-14 3.2.3.1 General information 3-14 3.2.3.2 Contact reliability 3-15 3.2.3.3 Electrical service life 3-16 3.2.3.4 Ambient temperature 3-20 3.3 Application and areas of use 3-23 3.3.1 3RT10 contactors with 3 main contacts for switching motors 3-23 3.3.2 3RT14 contactors with 3 main contacts for switching resistive loads (AC-1) 3-24 3.3.3 3RT13 and 3RT15 contactors with 4 main contacts 3-25 3.3.4 3RT16 capacitor contactors 3-26 3.3.5 Contactors with an extended operating range 3-28 3.3.5.1 Contactors with series resister (3RH11...-0LA0/3RT10...0LA0) 3-28 3.3.5.2 Contactors with electronic control module frame sizes S0 to S3 (3RT10..-.X40-0LA2) 3-30 3.3.5.3 Contactors with an extended operating range (3RH1122-2K.40, 3RT1017-2K.4., 3RT102.-3K.40) 3-31 3.3.6 3RH1 control relays 3-32 3.3.7 3RT10 contactor relays for switching motors (interface) and 3RH11 control relays for switching auxiliary circuits 3-33 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-1 3RT1 Contactors/ 3RH1 Control relays Section Subject Page 3.3.8 3RA13 Contactor combinations for reversing 3-35 3.3.9 3RA14 Wye-delta combinations 3-46 3.4 Accessories 3-54 3.4.1 Attachable auxiliary switches for extending the auxiliary contacts 3-57 3.4.1.1 Terminal markings of the contactors frame sizes S00 to S3 3-62 3.4.1.2 Terminal markings of the contactors and control relays combined with auxiliary switch blocks 3-64 3.4.1.3 Auxiliary switches that can be attached to 3RH1 control relays 3-66 3.4.2 Time-delay auxiliary switches 3-69 3.4.2.1 Frame size S00 (3RT1916-2E, -2F, -2G) 3-69 3.4.2.2 Frame sizes S0 to S3 (3RT1926-2E, -2F, -2G) 3-71 3.4.3 Solid-state time relay blocks with semiconductor output 3-72 3.4.3.1 Frame size S00 (3RT1916-2C, -2D) 3-73 3.4.3.2 Frame sizes S0 to S3 (3RT19 26-2C, -2D) 3-74 3.4.4 Additional load module (3RT1916-1GA00) 3-75 3.4.5 Coupling element for frame sizes S0 to S3 (3RH1924-1GP11) 3-76 3.4.6 Surge suppression 3-78 3.4.7 Other accessories 3-83 3.4.7.1 LED module for indicating contactor control (3RT1926-1QT00) 3-83 3.4.7.2 Auxiliary connecting lead terminal, 3-pole for frame size S3 (3RT19 46-4F) 3-83 3.4.7.3 EMC interference suppression module (3RT19 16-1P..) 3-84 3.4.7.4 Soldering pin adapter for frame size S00 (3RT19 16-4KA.) 3-85 3.4.7.5 Paralleling links (3RT19 .6-4B.31) 3-87 3.4.7.6 Sealing cover (3RT19 .6-4MA10) 3-88 3.4.7.7 Terminal covers for frame sizes S2 to S3 3-89 3.5 Mounting and connection 3-91 3.5.1 Mounting 3-91 3.5.2 Connection 3-94 3.5.3 Changing the magnetic coils 3-98 3.5.4 Changing the contact pieces 3-103 3.6 Dimensional drawings (dimensions in mm) 3-106 3.7 Technical data 3-122 SIRIUS System Manual 3-2 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/ 3RH1 Control relays 3.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals Regulations The following regulations apply to 3RT contactors: * IEC 60 947-1, EN 60 947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100), which includes the general specifications for low-voltage switching devices. * IEC 60 947-4-1, EN 60 947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102), which contains, in particular, the requirements for contactors and motor starters. The following regulations apply to 3RH contactor relays: * IEC 60 947-1, EN 60 947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100), which includes the general specifications for low-voltage switching devices. * IEC 60 947-5-1, EN 60 947-5-1 (VDE 0660 Part 200) which includes, in particular, the requirements for control equipment and switching elements for the control, signaling, locking, etc. of switchgear and controlgear. Standards The following standards apply to the terminal markings of the contactors: * EN 50 012: terminal markings and identification numbers for auxiliary contact elements of particular contactors (also applies to contactors with a built-in auxiliary switch block) * EN 50 011: terminal markings, identification numbers, and identification letters for particular auxiliary contactors (also applies to auxiliary contactors with a built-in auxiliary switch block) * EN 50 005: terminal markings and identification numbers, general rules Approvals/ test reports Confirmation of approvals and test certificates and characteristics can be obtained on the Internet/intranet: https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/16027/cert Shock protection The shock protection provided is in acc. with DIN VDE 0106, Part 100. 3.1.1 Utilization categories In acc. with EN 60 947-4-1, the purpose of the contactors and the stress placed on them is indicated by the utilization category together with details of the rated operational current or motor output and the rated voltage. The following tables list the definitions of the utilization categories for lowvoltage switching devices and contactors from IEC 60 947 (VDE 0660). The rated operational voltages for the various utilization categories are listed in the low-voltage switching devices catalog. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-3 3RT1 Contactors/ 3RH1 Control relays Utilization category for AC voltages AC Utilization category for AC voltages Switching capacity I/Ie On Off Electrical service life I/Ie On Off AC-1 Non-inductive load or a slightly inductive load 1.5 1.5 1 1 AC-2 Slip ring motors: switch on, switch off 4 4 2.5 2.5 AC-3 Squirrel-cage motors: 10 switch on, switch off during the run 8 6 1 AC-4 Squirrel-cage motors: switch on, plugging or reversing, inching 10 6 6 AC-6b Switching of capacitor banks 12 -- -- Table 3-1: Utilization categories, test conditions for AC voltage Definition of AC-1 to AC-6b The definitions of the utilization categories AC-1 to AC-6b for main circuits can be found in the relevant regulations. The main areas of application for contactors are: * AC-3 operation: switching of squirrel-cage motors * AC-1 operation: switching of resistive loads * AC-4 operation: plugging, reversing, inching * AC-6b operation: switching of capacitor banks Test conditions Test conditions for the various utilization categories: * In AC-1 operation, the contactor must be able to switch 1.5 times the rated operational current on and off. * In AC-3 operation, the starting currents of the motors must be controlled. In other words, the contactor must be able to switch on 10 times the rated operational current (Ie), and switch off 8 times the Ie. * In AC-4 operation, the contactor must be able to switch off or on 12 times the rated operational current (Ie) and 10 times the Ie. This represents extremely high stress for contactors because the high starting currents of the motors have to be switched off. * In AC-6b operation, the rated values of capacitor loads may be derived from capacitor switching tests or on the basis of existing experience and research. The breaking current is decisive in calculating the electrical service life: * In AC-1 and AC-3 operation, 1 x Ie must be assumed. * In AC-4 operation, 6 x Ie must be assumed because the contactor also has to switch off the motor during startup. SIRIUS System Manual 3-4 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/ 3RH1 Control relays Utilization category for DC voltages DC Utilization category for DC voltages Switching capacity I/Ie Make/break Time constant L/R (ms) DC-1 Non-inductive load or a slightly inductive load, resistance furnaces 1.5 1 DC-3 Shunt motors: switching on, plugging, reversing, inching 4 2.5 DC-5 Series motors: switching on, plugging, reversing, inching 4 15 Table 3-2: Utilization categories, test conditions for DC voltages Definition of DC-1 to DC-5 The definitions of the utilization categories DC-1 to DC-6 apply to main circuits for switching DC voltage. The main areas of application for contactors are: * DC-3/DC-5 operation: switching of shunt or series motors * DC-1 operation: switching of resistive loads, resistance furnaces Note In the information on DC switching capacity in previous documents, the utilization categories DC-2 and DC-4 correspond to the current utilization categories DC-3 and DC-5. Utilization category for AC voltage (auxiliary contact elements) Switching capacity AC Utilization category for AC voltage (auxiliary contact elements) Make Break I/Ie I/Ie cos AC-12 Control of resistive load and semiconductor load in the input circuits of optocouplers 1 1 0.9 AC-14 Control of a small electromagnetic load (max. 72 VA) 6 1 0.3 AC-15 Control of an electromagnetic load (greater than 72 VA) 10 1 0.3 Table 3-3: Utilization categories, test conditions for AC voltage (auxiliary contact elements) Definition of AC-12 to AC-15 IEC 60 947-5-1/EN 60 947-5-1 (VDE 0660 Part 200) contains the definitions of the utilization categories AC-12 to AC-15 for switching elements for the control, signaling, locking, etc. of switchgear and controlgear. The main areas of application for auxiliary contactors are: * AC-14/AC-15 operation: switching of contactor coils, solenoid valves, for example. * AC-14/AC-12 operation: switching of resistive loads, for example. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-5 3RT1 Contactors/ 3RH1 Control relays Rated operational currents The rated operational currents for the various utilization categories are listed in the low-voltage switching devices catalog. The test specifications given in the table for each utilization category represent the scale for the making and breaking capacity of the auxiliary contacts. Example 3RT1016 contactor: Ie/AC-15 of the auxiliary contact: 6 A/230 V Making capacity: 10 x Ie/AC-15 = 60 A * This enables the contactor coil with the current consumption of 60 A to be switched on. * Only the holding current is decisive for switching off the contactor coil. According to regulations, the auxiliary contact must normally be able to switch off the rated operational current. Utilization category for DC voltage (auxiliary contact elements) Switching capacity DC Utilization category for DC voltage (auxiliary contact elements) Make Break L/ I/Ie I/Ie DC-12 Control of resistive load and semiconductor load in the input circuits of optocouplers 1 1 1 DC-13 Control of solenoids 1 1 300 R (ms) Table 3-4: Utilization categories, test conditions for DC voltage (auxiliary contact elements) Definition of DC-12 and DC-13 The DC voltage switching capacity of auxiliary contacts is defined in utilization categories DC-12 and DC-13. The main areas of application for contactors are: * DC-12: switching of resistive loads (typical application) * DC-13: switching of inductive loads, such as contactor coils and solenoid valves In DC operation, the difference in stress is also determined by the L/R time constant. This must be specified by the user. SIRIUS System Manual 3-6 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/ 3RH1 Control relays 3.1.2 Positively driven operation Regulations The regulations for positively driven operation are: * For contactors IEC 60 947-4-1, Appendix H (draft 17B/996/DC) * For control relays IEC 60 947-5-1, Amendment 2, Annex L, edition 10.1999 * ZH 1/457 Safety rules for controllers on power-operated presses * SUVA Accident prevention guidelines of the Schweizer Unfallversicherungsanstalt (Swiss institute for accident insurance) SIRIUS contactors comply with these regulations. Definition: positively driven contacts Positively driven contacts are contacts that are mechanically connected with one another in such a way that the NC contacts and NO contacts can never be closed at the same time. This means ensuring that there is a distance between the contacts of at least 0.5 mm throughout the entire service life of the contactor, even when there is a defect, such as when the contact has been wrongly welded (ZH 1/457). Positively driven operation in the case of 3RT1/3RH11 Positively driven operation occurs in: * 3RT101. contactors and 3 RH11 auxiliary contactors in frame size S00 in both the basic unit and in the auxiliary switch block and also between the basic unit and the built-on auxiliary switch block * 3RT1 contactors in frame sizes S0 to S3 between the main contacts and the normally closed auxiliary contacts. In other words, if the main contact is welded, the normally closed auxiliary contact will not close. Positively driven operation does not occur in the case of: * Electronically optimized auxiliary switch blocks in frame size S00 Positively driven operation is not compulsory for normal controllers. It is, however, imperative for protective circuits. 3.1.3 Safe isolation The term "safe isolation" occurs in connection with safety/protective extralow voltage (SELV/PELV) and functional extra-low voltage (FELV). Safe isolation reliably prevents voltage that is capable of causing electric shock from transferring to the safely isolated voltage (e.g. to safety extra-low voltage that is applied to or switched to the same device). Safe isolation is also becoming increasingly important due to the more widespread use of electronic systems in high-voltage installations. Definition Circuits are safely isolated when a single fault does not result in a transfer of voltage from one circuit to another. Faults to be taken into account are, for example, a bent or loose conductive part, a bent soldering pin, broken winding wire, a screw that has fallen out, or a broken partition wall in a device. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-7 3RT1 Contactors/ 3RH1 Control relays Regulations IEC 61 140 (replacing VDE 0106 Part 101/IEC 536) lists basic requirements that can be met using safe isolation between circuits in electrical equipment. Basic requirements are, for example: * Double or reinforced insulation * Protective screening * Combination of double or reinforced insulation and protective screening The insulation must be resistant to aging throughout the expected service life. Circuits without protective extra-low voltage or functional extra-low voltage do not require safe isolation. Safe isolation in the case of 3RT1 and 3RH1 contactors If the conducting paths of a contactor are operated with different voltages, the requirements for safe isolation must be met. In the case of the 3RT1 and 3RH1 contactors, safe isolation is ensured up to the following voltage: * The values for the safe isolation between the main power circuit and the auxiliary circuit/coil connection are found in the following tables: I Main power circuit - Control circuit S00 Contactor/ Control relay S0 S2 S3 3-pole devices 690 V* 400 V 400 V 690 V 4-pole devices 400 V 400 V 400 V 690 V -- -- *with unused auxiliary circuit II Main power circuit - Auxiliary circuit S00 S0 S2 S3 Integ. auxiliary circuit 400 V -- -- -- Front mount auxiliary circuit 690 V* 500 V 500 V 500 V Side mount auxiliary circuit No 690 V 500 V 690 V *4-pole auxiliary contact block III Control circuit - Auxiliary circuit S00 S0 S2 S3 Integ. auxiliary circuit 400 V -- -- -- Front mount auxiliary circuit 690 V* 690 V 690 V 690 V Side mount auxiliary circuit No 500 V 690 V 690 V *4-pole auxiliary contact block SIRIUS System Manual 3-8 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/ 3RH1 Control relays IV Auxiliary circuit - Auxiliary circuit (contactor relay) S00 Basic unit - contact block 690 V* Basic unit 400 V Contact block 400 V *4-auxiliary contact block V Main power circuit - Main power circuit S00 S0 S2 S3 400 V 400 V 400 V 400 V All the data are power system specifications with 10 % overvoltage in volts [V]. 400 V + 10 % corresponds to 415 V + 5 % and 500 V + 10 % corresponds to 525 V + 5 %. Attention In the table, the voltage that can cause electric shock and that must be safely isolated is critical. If the voltages 400 V and 24 V are to be safely isolated from one another, contactors with safe isolation up to 400 V must be used between the two points of connection used. 3.1.4 Explanation of terms Safety extra-low voltage Safety extra-low voltage (SELV) allows circuits with a rated voltage of up to 50 V AC or 120 V DC to be operated ungrounded. The higher voltage is safely isolated from the SELV circuits. Safety extra-low voltage helps protect people. Functional extra-low voltage Functional extra-low voltage (FELV) allows circuits with a rated voltage of up to 50 V AC or 120 V DC to be operated. It does not, however, meet the requirements of safety extra-low voltage and is therefore subject to additional conditions. FELV is implemented using a ground terminal. Functional extra-low voltage helps protect devices (e.g. programmable controllers). PELV PELV (protective extra-low voltage) has the same requirements as safety extra-low voltage, except for the fact that the circuit and/or exposed conductive part is/are grounded (so it is basically grounded SELV). SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-9 3RT1 Contactors/ 3RH1 Control relays 3.2 Device description The SIRIUS contactors are components of the SIRIUS modular system and can therefore offer the typical benefits of SIRIUS when it comes to the selection of components and the assembly and operation of controllers and load feeders. The SIRIUS range of contactors encompasses the following: * Contactors for switching motors of up to 45 kW/400 V (75 HP/460 V) * Auxiliary contactors with the contact variants 4 NO, 3 NO +1 NC, and 2 NO + 2 NC * Contactor relays for system-specific cooperation with electronic controllers * Contactors for particular applications: - Contactors with 4 main contacts - Capacitor switching contactors - Contactors for switching resistive loads up to 140 A - Contactors with an extended operating range - Contactor combinations The SIRIUS range of contactors covers everything up to 45 kW (75 HP) in 4 sizes. Each frame size covers multiple standard motor ratings: Frame sizes S0 S00 S3 S2 Fig. 3-1: Frame sizes of the 3RT10 contactors The following table specifies the performance ranges for the frame sizes of the 3RT10 and 3RT12 contactors: Performance ranges Frame size Order-Number P/AC-3/400 kW S00 S0 S2 S3 3RT10.. 3RT10.. 3RT10.. 3RT10.. 15 16 17 23 24 25 26 34 35 36 44 45 46 3 4 5,5 4 5,5 7,5 11 15 18,5 22 30 37 45 80 95 up to 400 V: up to 500 V: Ie/AC-3 A Width mm 7 9 12 9 12 45 17 45 25 32 40 55 50 65 70 Table 3-5: Performance ranges of the 3RT10/3RT12 contactors SIRIUS System Manual 3-10 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/ 3RH1 Control relays The following table provides an overview of the existing variants of the 3RT contactors and 3RH control relays: Design Frame size 3RT10 contactors AC/DC operation To operate motors, 3-pole, up to 45 kW/400 V (75 HP/460 V) Ie/AC-1 up to 40 C: up to 120 A up to 690 V S00 to S3 3RT14 contactors AC/DC operation To switch resistive loads, 3-pole Ie/AC-1 up to 40 C: up to 140 A to 690 V S3 3RT13 contactors AC/DC operation, 4 main contacts (NO contacts) To switch resistive loads, up to 92 kW/400 V Ie/AC-1 up to 40 C: up to 140 A to 690 V S00 to S3 3RT15 contactors AC/DC operation, 4 main contacts (2 NO contacts + 2 NC contacts) To switch three-phase induction motors up to 18.5 kW/400 V Ie/AC-3 up to 60 C: up to 40 A to 400 V S00 to S2 3RT16 contactors AC operation To switch three-phase capacitors up to 50 kvar/400 V S00, S0 and S3 3RH control relays/3RT contactors DC operation with an extended operating range: 0.7 to 1.25 x US 3RT: to switch motors up to 45 kW/400 V Ie/AC-3 up to 70 C: 95 A to 400 V 3RH: to switch auxiliary circuits Ie/AC-15/AC-14 up to 70 C: 6 A/230 V S00 to S3 3RT contactor relays (interface) DC operation with an extended operating range: 0.7 to 1.25 x US To switch motors, 3-pole, up to 11 kW/400 V Ie/AC-3 up to 60 C: 25 A to 400 V S00 and S0 3RA13 contactor combinations AC/DC operation To reverse up to 45 kW/400 V, Ie/AC-3: 95 A/400 V S00 to S31) 3RA14 contactor combinations AC/DC operation, for wye-delta startup up to 75 kW/400 V, I e/AC-3: 150 A/400 V S00-S00-S00 to S3-S3-S21) 3RH11 auxiliary contactors AC/DC operation, to switch auxiliary circuits, 4-pole (basic unit) Ie/AC-15/AC-14 up to 60 C: 6 A/230 V S00 3RH14 latched auxiliary contactors AC/DC operation, to switch auxiliary circuits, 4-pole (basic unit) Ie/AC-15/AC-14 up to 60 C: 6 A/230 V S00 3RH11 control relays (interface) DC operation with an extended operating range, 0.7 to 1.25 x US to switch auxiliary circuits, 4-pole Ie/AC-15/AC-14 up to 60 C: 6 A/230 V S00 Table 3-6: 3RT/3RH, designs 1) Pre-wired and tested SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-11 3RT1 Contactors/ 3RH1 Control relays Auxiliary contacts and snap-on accessories * A uniform and diverse range of auxiliary switches and accessories that can be quickly upgraded and replaced is available for 3RT1 contactors up to 45 kW for various applications. * The 3RH auxiliary contactors can be extended to form variants with a maximum of 8 poles using attachable 2 or 4-pole auxiliary switch blocks. * Wiring kits with and without mechanical interlocking are available for putting together 3RA contactor combinations for reversing and for wye-delta starting. The accessories are described in detail in Section 3.4, "Accessories". 3.2.1 Coil systems S00 to S3 AC coil for AC-control DC coil for DC-control * Automatic reduction from high closing power to low holding power * Short switching times * Larger unit volumes (to achieve a tensile force comparable to that of an AC coil) * Closing power = holding power * Longer switching times Table 3-7: Coil systems SIRIUS System Manual 3-12 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/ 3RH1 Control relays 3.2.2 Short-circuit protection for SIRIUS contactors Section 3.7, "Technical specifications", has information on short-circuit protection. Fuses and circuit breakers can be used as short-circuit protective devices for the contactors. The test criteria that apply in this case are stipulated by EN 60 947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102). Coordination types Two types of assignment are defined in the standards that correspond to two different levels of damage. The following applies to both types of assignment: In the event of a short-circuit, the short-circuit protective device used must be able to disconnect the overcurrent that occurs. Persons or other parts of the system must not be put at risk. Coordination type 1 The load feeder (e.g. motor starter) can be inoperable after each short-circuit. Damage to the contactor and the overload relay is permissible and it is only possible to continue operation after defective devices have been repaired or replaced. Coordination type 2 After a short-circuit, there must be no damage to the load feeder devices. However, the contactor contacts can weld if they can be easily separated again without distorting the contact pieces. "weld free" There is information in the catalog, for weld free protection of the contactors that needs to be taken into account. Contactors with overload relay If contactors are combined with an overload relay, a smaller fuse should be used as specified in the controls catalog for permissible short-circuit protection fuses for motor starters. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-13 3RT1 Contactors/ 3RH1 Control relays 3.2.3 Operation 3.2.3.1 General information Degree of protection The degree of protection of the SIRIUS contactors is IP00/IP20. Warning When the supply voltage and load are present, the contactor must not be actuated by pressing the contact support. It is permissible, however, to carry out tests with an extra-low test voltage (e.g. 24 V). Mechanical life A significant criteria for the economical use of contactors is their mechanical endurance. This is expressed in the number of operations that are possible without placing a load on the conducting path. You cannot expect too much in terms of mechanical endurance from switches that have to work with a relatively high contact load, such as isolators and circuit breakers, without neglecting their cost-efficiency. Contactors, on the other hand, are switching devices designed specifically for very high numbers of on/off operations. The following table shows you the mechanical endurance of 3RT1 contactors: Device Mechanical endurance Basic unit, frame size S00 30 mill. operating cycles Basic unit, frame size S00 with builton auxiliary switch block 10 mill. operating cycles Basic unit, frame sizes S0 to S3 10 mill. operating cycles Basic units, frame sizes S00 to S3 with built-on, electronically optimized auxiliary switch block 5 mill. operating cycles Table 3-8: Mechanical service life When there is no arcing during switching the mechanical endurance can be optimized if low current is used (for example, 17 V/5 mA). Display of the contactor function The 3RT19 26 LED indicator block can be connected to the coil connections of the contactors in frame sizes S00 to S3. It indicates the status of the contactors by means of the yellow LED. The indicator block can be snapped onto the front in the opening intended for the inscription plate. The advantage is that the LED indicator block can be used for AC/DC voltages of 24 V to 240 V and that it is protected against polarity reversal. SIRIUS System Manual 3-14 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/ 3RH1 Control relays 3.2.3.2 Contact reliability In industrial control engineering, conventional contactor controls are often combined with electronic control systems. Combining these systems gives rise to higher demands than those when using only conventional contactor controls. An important requirement is that the signal generators (auxiliary contacts of contactors, for example) display high contact reliability at low voltages and currents, while retaining their full switching capacity at high voltages. Switching with auxiliary contacts ( 110 V and 100 mA) The following applies to the contactors of the SIRIUS range: If voltages 110 V and currents 100 mA are to be switched, the auxiliary contacts of the 3RT1 contactors or the 3RH1 auxiliary contactors should be used instead of the main contacts because of their contact reliability. This comes from their high contact stability due, in particular, to the shape of the contact pieces (cross-ribbing). This ensures that the points of contact remain conductive in spite of surface contamination. These auxiliary contacts are suitable for electronic circuits (programmable controllers) with voltages > 17 V and currents in the milliampere range (test circuit: 17 V, 5 mA). Cross-ribbing Surface contamination is the most common cause of control circuit contact faults. Cross-ribbing the contact areas is an extremely effective way of increasing contact reliability. All the auxiliary contacts of the SIRIUS contactors have this feature. The following illustration show you how cross-ribbing is particularly effective against surface contamination due to the high number of contact areas and high surface pressure: Accumulated surface contamination Isolated contact areas Here: 13 contact surfaces Depression Lip Fig. 3-2: Contact areas SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-15 3RT1 Contactors/ 3RH1 Control relays Contact reliability of the auxiliary contacts The contact areas of the SIRIUS auxiliary contacts display a high degree of contact reliability. Fault frequency rates of HF 10-8 (i. e. < 1 fault per 100 mill. operating cycles at 17 V, 1 mA) have been registered. These values apply to auxiliary contacts that are either integrated in the contactor housing or can be snapped on as auxiliary switch blocks. In the case of built-on auxiliary switch blocks at the side, fault frequency rates are between 10-6 and 10-8. The tests are based on the requirements placed on signal generators by electronic controllers. This means that with the auxiliary contacts of the SIRIUS contactors or auxiliary contactors, the permissible contact resistance is only exceeded once during a total of 108 (100 million) switching operations. During a long period of operation, therefore, a fault is not expected to occur, irrespective of the number of switching operations. A restriction applies in the case of auxiliary switch blocks built on at the side. Definition of switch fault frequency HF The fault frequency HF is defined as the number of contact faults that occur during a certain number of switching operations. 3.2.3.3 Electrical service life Electrical service life of the main contacts The service life of the contacts consists of: * at rated operational current Ie is defined in acc. with utilization category AC-4 (switching off 6 times the rated operational current): 200 000 operating cycles * at mixed modes - in other words, if normal switching mode (the rated operational current is switched off in acc. with utilization category AC-3) is mixed with occasional inching mode (several times the rated operational current is switched in acc. with utilization category AC-4): the service life can be roughly calculated with the following formula: A X = ----------------------------------------C A 1 + --------- --- - 1 100 B Key to the formula: X A B C Contact service life in mixed mode in operating cycles Contact service life in normal operation (Ia=Ie) in operating cycles Contact service life in inching mode (Ia = a multiple of Ie) in operating cycles Percentage of the total number of switching operations accounted for by inching operations SIRIUS System Manual 3-16 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/ 3RH1 Control relays Characteristic curve: contact service life of the main contacts The following characteristic curves illustrate the contact service life of contactors when switching inductive three-phase loads (AC-1/AC-3), irrespective of the breaking current and rated operational voltage. The prerequisites are arbitrary (i.e. not synchronous with the phase relation of the control station operating the network). Ia = breaking current Ie = rated operational current PN = rated output of three-phase induction motors with squirrel cage at 400 V Frame size S00 10 7 8 6 8 6 6 4 4 2 10 6 10 6 8 6 8 6 4 4 2 4 2 2 N SB0 04 73 a 10 6 8 6 4 2 10 6 8 6 4 2 2 4 3RT1016, 3RT1017 (4 kW, 5.5 kW) 2 2 10 8 6 10 8 6 3RT1015 (3 kW) Contactor type 7 4 4 10 5 8 6 400 V 690 V 500 V 230 V Operating cycles at 5 2 10 5 8 10 5 6 8 6 4 4 2 2 10 4 10 4 8 10 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 8 10 9 12 4 5.5 20 I a (A) 40 50 60 80 I e (A) PN (kW) Fig. 3-3: Characteristic curve of the electrical service life of the main contacts (frame size S00) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-17 3RT1 Contactors/ 3RH1 Control relays Frame size S0 10 7 8 6 8 6 3RT1025 (7.5 kW) 3RT1026 (11 kW) NSB00474a 4 2 2 2 10 6 10 6 8 6 8 6 4 4 2 10 6 8 10 6 6 8 6 4 4 2 2 2 10 5 10 5 8 6 8 6 4 4 2 10 5 8 10 5 6 8 6 4 4 2 2 10 3RT1024 (5.5 kW) 8 6 4 4 2 Contactor type 3RT1023 (4 kW) 10 7 6 4 400 V 690 V 500 V 230 V Operating cycles at 4 10 4 8 2 10 4 3 4 5 6 8 10 9 12 4 5.5 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 Ia (A) 17 25 Ie (A) PN(kW) 7.5 11 Fig. 3-4: Characteristic curve of the electrical service life of the main contacts (frame size S0) Frame size S2 2 400 V 8 6 4 690 V 10 7 8 6 4 500 V 230 V Operating cycles at 6 4 10 7 8 6 4 2 Contactor type 2 10 6 10 6 8 10 6 10 6 8 6 8 8 6 4 6 6 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 10 5 5 10 8 10 5 10 5 8 6 8 8 6 4 6 6 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 10 4 4 10 8 10 4 10 2 3RT1034 (15 kW) 3RT1035 (18.5 kW) 3RT1036 (22 kW) NSB00475a 20 30 40 50 60 32 40 50 15 18.5 22 80 100 Ia(A) 200 Ie (A) 300 400 PN (kW) Fig. 3-5: Characteristic curve of the electrical service life of the main contacts (frame size S2) SIRIUS System Manual 3-18 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/ 3RH1 Control relays Frame size S3 10 7 8 6 4 8 6 4 2 6 4 2 400 V 690 V 500 V 230 V Operating cycles at Contactor type 10 7 3RT1044 (30 kW) 3RT1045 (37 kW) 3RT1046 (45 kW) 8 6 4 2 10 6 10 6 8 10 6 10 6 8 6 8 8 6 4 6 6 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 10 5 5 10 8 10 5 10 5 8 6 8 8 6 4 6 6 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 10 4 4 10 8 10 4 10 NSB00476a 2 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 Ia (A) 200 65 80 95 Ie (A) 30 37 45 PN (kW) 300 400 600 Fig. 3-6: Characteristic curve of the electrical service life of the main contacts (frame size S3) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-19 3RT1 Contactors/ 3RH1 Control relays Characteristic curve: contact service life of the auxiliary contacts The contact service life depends on the breaking current. The prerequisites are arbitrary (i.e. not synchronous with the phase relation of the control station operating the network). The characteristic curves apply to: * Integrated 3RT10 auxiliary contacts * 3RH1911 auxiliary switch blocks for contactors in frame size S00 * 3RH1921 auxiliary switch blocks for contactors in frame sizes S0 to S3 6 Operating cycles in millions (10 ) 30 NSB00472 Basic unit 10 Basic unit with attachable contact block 5 4 3 2 1 DC-13 110 V DC-13 220 V AC-15/AC-14 0.5 DC-13 24 V 0.1 0.05 1) 0.01 0.01 0.03 0.05 0.1 0.3 0.5 I e DC-13 220 V 1 I e DC-13 110 V 2 3 5 6 7 10 I e AC-15 < 230 V I a (A) I e DC-13 24 V I a = breaking current I e = rated operational current Fig. 3-7: Characteristic curve of the electrical service life of the auxiliary contacts 1) DC-13: built-on auxiliary switch blocks for frame size S00: 6 A 3.2.3.4 Ambient temperature General information The 3RT10 contactors are designed for use with an ambient temperature of -25 C to +60 C. Special designs are available to be used at -35 C to +70 C. Use at higher ambient temperatures The use of contactors in frame sizes S00 to S3 at higher ambient temperatures is possible when different limitations are taken into consideration. Short time operation at Tu 80 C For the duration of 1 hour the contactor may be used up to a maximum ambient temperature of Tu 80 C without derating the rated current. However, this requires that an average 24 hour mean ambient temperature of Tu 60 C is not exceeded. Limitation: Contactors that contain electronic components or are combined with electronic accessories (for example integrated surge suppressor, electronic interface,...) may only be used up to a max. ambient temperature of Tu 60 C. SIRIUS System Manual 3-20 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/ 3RH1 Control relays Constant operation at an ambient temperature of Tu > 60 C The constant operation of the 3RT10 contactors at an ambient temperature of Tu > 60 C is possible under the following guidelines. Mounting For better heat dissipation for contactors without side-mounted auxiliary contacts they should be mounted with a minimum 10 mm clearance when mounting side by side. The following declarations are based on this clearance distance. Thermal load carrying capacity of the main circuit The standard contactors are designed for a max. ambient temperature of Tu = 60 C. For use of the contactors at higher ambient temperatures up to max. 70 C, then the normal rated operational current Ie/AC-1 (or Ie/DC-1) and the operating frequency must be reduced. The following calculations can be used: 60 C Iemax.,Tu = Ie/AC - 1 * Tu 60 C Iemax.,Tu = Ie/DC - 1 * Tu 60C zmax.,Tu = z * Tu Ie max., Tu = Ie/ AC-1 or Ie/ DC-1 = Tu= Coil voltage tolerance the calculated rated current of the contactor at increased ambient temperature Rated current of the contactor at the particular utilization category and Tu 60 C Actual ambient temperature at Tu > 60 C So that the contactor coil isn't thermally overloaded with the increased ambient temperature, the voltage tolerance of the rated coil voltage Us needs to be limited according to the Table. Tu S00 S0 to S3 60 C 0.85 to 1.1 Us 0.8 to 1.1 Us 70 C 0.85 to 1.0 Us 0.8 to 1.0 Us Table 3-9: Coil voltage tolerance SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-21 3RT1 Contactors/ 3RH1 Control relays Service life The use of the contactors at higher ambient temperatures leads to increased stress of the plastic material, main circuits and the operating mechanism. This results in the reduction of the mechanical service life and time to failure of the contactor. The time to failure is decisively influenced by the running time. The following table shows the reduced service life values: S00 Ambient temperature Tu S0 to S3 Mechanical service life [x106 operations S00 to S3 Time to failure [years] 60 C 30 10 20 65 C 15 5 15 70 C 3 1 10 Table 3-10: Service life of the contactor 3RT10 The data given for the time to failure is based on a running time of 100 %. At a running time of 50 % the values are doubled. Use of the contactors, frames sizes S00 to S3 at low ambient temperatures The contactors in frame sizes S00 to S3 can be used with a minimum ambient temperature of Tu -50 C with up to a 50 % reduction mechanical service life. The other catalog data remains the same. There are steps that need to be taken against condensation (for example, control panel heating). In low ambient temperature applications, high operating frequency and running time is less critical than low operating frequency and running time. Contactors that contain electronic components or are combined with electronic accessories may not be used under Tu = -40 C SIRIUS System Manual 3-22 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/ 3RH1 Control relays 3.3 Application and areas of use Various switching devices are available for switching electrical loads. The contactor is the most suitable device for frequent switching operations. Contactors are the most commonly used switching device in industry, mechanical engineering and in switchgear and controlgear. Due to the increased automation in manufacturing, contactors have become more important. This has also increased the variety of loads that must be controlled. Automated production systems are considerably more sensitive to operational malfunctions than manually operated systems. Each fault on an electrical device means downtime, waste, loss of production, and investment in order to get the system up and running again. For this reason, we concentrated on high reliability when developing the SIRIUS contactor range. This includes, increased service life, high contact reliability, and the possibility to use the contactors at higher ambient temperatures in the enclosure. It is possible to use the contactors up to 60 C without derating when the devices are installed in a row. To deal with the variety of possible applications, there are also contactor variants for special applications, such as for switching resistive loads or capacitors. This is in addition to the main 3RT10 range of contactors for switching motors. The different contactor ranges and their possible applications are described in the following subsections. 3.3.1 3RT10 contactors with 3 main contacts for switching motors Field of application The 3-pole 3RT10 contactors use 3 NO contacts as main contacts. They are mainly used to switch three-phase induction motors. Frame sizes The full performance range from 3 to 45 kW/400 V (utilization categories AC2 and AC-3) (up to 75 HP/460 V UL508) is covered by 4 frame sizes. The frame sizes cover most of the standard motor outputs. Dimensions The contactors are provided with alternating or direct current magnetic systems. The required panel areas of the devices of the two operating mechanism types are the same. For frame sizes S0 to S3, the installation depth for contactors with the DC magnet system is between 10 mm and 15 mm greater than for the variants with the AC magnet system. Power ratings All the specified power and current ratings apply to an ambient temperature of 60 C without derating. For use at increased ambient temperatures see section 3.2.3.4 "Ambient temperature". Increasing the power The ease of expansion is an advantage for configuration. In many applications there is enough space to retrofit the contactor with the next higher rating class and thus increase motor output. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-23 3RT1 Contactors/ 3RH1 Control relays 3.3.2 3RT14 contactors with 3 main contacts for switching resistive loads (AC-1) Field of application The 3RT14 contactors with 3 main contacts for switching resistive loads are used for applications in the AC-1 utilization category: * Switching of resistive loads such as heating systems or resistance furnaces * Applications in which a low switching capacity is sufficient * Applications in which high continuous currents occur without peaks (e.g. as a generator contactor or in the case of variable-speed drives). Switching capacity 1.5 times the Ie/AC-1 can be switched on and off. Switching off higher currents, with the emergency stop, for example, is possible up to 8 times the Ie/AC-3 current. Comparison: 3RT14/3RT10 The following table shows you the difference between the 3RT14 and 3RT10 contactors for normal AC-3 applications: Contact material 3RT14 Contact material with high current-carrying capacity and better thermal properties 3RT10 Contact material that ensures better switching capacity Conducting paths Larger conducting paths that permit better cooling Table 3-11: Comparison between the 3RT14 and 3RT10 contactors Planning note The 3RT10 range of contactors for switching motors also has a specific AC-1 switching capacity. However the more economic solution would be to use the 3RT14 AC-1 contactor for this specific purpose. Accessories You can use the same accessories for the 3RT14 contactors as you can for the 3RT10 contactors. SIRIUS System Manual 3-24 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/ 3RH1 Control relays 3.3.3 3RT13 and 3RT15 contactors with 4 main contacts Model There are two variants of the contactors with 4 main contacts: * 3RT13 with 4 NO contacts * 3RT15 with 2 NO + 2 NC contacts You can use the same accessories for both the 3-pole SIRIUS contactors and the 4-pole variants. Field of application The following table gives the fields of application for the 3RT13 and 3RT15 contactors: 3RT13 contactors with 4 NO contacts * Switching of resistive loads * Isolation of networks with ungrounded or badly grounded neutral conductors * Supply switch-overs in the case of alternative AC power supplies * As a contactor - for example, in variable-speed drives that only have to carry the current, not switch it 3RT15 contactors with 2 NO + 2 NC contacts * Pole switch-over in the case of crane-type motors * Switching of 2 separate loads * Breaking contactor Table 3-12: Applications of 4-pole contactors Auxiliary contact The following table specifies the maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be attached: Frame size S00 Frame size S0 Frame sizes S2 and S3 4 auxiliary contacts Maximum 2 auxiliary contacts (added on the side or snapped on the front) Maximum of 4 auxiliary contacts (added on the side or snapped on the front) Table 3-13: 4-pole contactors and auxiliary contacts Contactor combination with mechanical interlocking The 4-pole 3RT13 contactors with 4 NO contacts as main contacts in frame sizes S0 to S3 are suitable for putting together contactor combinations with mechanical interlocks for use in supply switch-overs. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-25 3RT1 Contactors/ 3RH1 Control relays 3.3.4 3RT16 capacitor contactors Field of application 3RT16 capacitor-switching contactors are used to switch power capacitors that are used in reactive-current compensation. Frame sizes The capacitor-switching contactors are available in frame sizes S00, S0 and S3 with the rating levels 12.5, 25 kvar, and 50 kvar at 400 V. S00 RT-01023 RT-01022 S3 Fig. 3-8: Capacitor contactors (frame sizes S00 and S3) Auxiliary contacts The auxiliary contact block attached onto the capacitor contactor contains three leading NO contacts and a normal NO contact that can be assigned as you wish. In Frame size S00, an additional 1 NC contact is available in the base unit. A 2-pole auxiliary switch block can also be attached to the side of the frame size S3 capacitor contactors (variants: 2 NO contacts, 2 NC contacts, or 1 NO + 1 NC contact). Switching capacitors/ banks of capacitors A single capacitor can normally be switched on because the current is limited by the inductance of the upstream transformer and the cables. It is more difficult to switch banks of capacitors (parallel connection of a capacitor to capacitors already present) because the current is now only limited by the low inductance of the connecting leads and the capacitors. This problem is solved with capacitor-switching contactors using precharging resistors. Precharging resistors The precharging resistors are an integral part of the contactor in 3RT16 capacitor-switching contactors. They are switched on via leading auxiliary contacts before the main contacts close. This results in damping down to approximately 10 % of the undamped peak currents. Damping of peaks in the making current prevents disturbances to the network. SIRIUS System Manual 3-26 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Important When switching banks of capacitors make sure that you adhere to the specified minimum inductance between the capacitors connected in parallel. 3RT10. capacitor switching capacity The normal 3RT10 contactors for switching motors also have a certain capacitor switching capacity. Details of this can be found in Section 3.7, "Technical specifications: Utilization category AC-6b, switching of individual capacitors and switching of low-inductance three-phase capacitors". The tables contain information on the switching of individual capacitors and the switching of banks of capacitors. Operation Caution Only switch to discharged capacitors! Do not carry out a function test by hand. The precharging resistors must not be removed as this will damage the contact pieces in circuits with a load. Circuit diagram S00 S0 and S3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 F0 F0 A1 1 3 5 13 51 A1 1 3 5 43 A2 2 4 6 14 52 A2 2 4 6 44 C1 C1 NSB01382 Fig. 3-9: Capacitor contactors, circuit diagram SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-27 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3.3.5 Contactors with an extended operating range Field of application The contactors with an extended operating range use a DC magnetic coil. They are used in systems with strong fluctuations in the control supply voltage and at the same time high ambient temperatures, such as railway applications in extreme climatic conditions, rolling mills, etc. Standards Contactors with an extended operating range comply with the following standards: * IEC 60 947-4-1 * EN 60 947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102) * The requirements of IEC 60 077 They are shockproof in acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 100. Exception: the series resistor in frame sizes S0 to S3 Control current circuits and auxiliary current circuits The magnet coils of the contactors have an extended operating range of 0.7 to 1.25 x Us and are wired with varistors as standard to provide protection against overvoltage. This increases the time to contact opening when compared with standard contactors by 2 ms to 5 ms. With/without a series resistor The 3RH11 and 3RT10 contactors with the suffix -0LA0 at digits 13 to 16 in the order number are used where several auxiliary contacts are required, in addition to a wide operating range and a high ambient temperature of 70 C. Up to 4 auxiliary contacts can be used in these variants. If fewer auxiliary contacts are required, contactors with the same extended operating range that work without a series resistor are available up to frame size S0. As an alternative to the contactors with a series resistor there is the electronic control module available for contactors in frame sizes S0 to S3. Advantages: * no increase in the mounting width of the series resistor * lower contact current closing rating * no auxiliary contact needed for the control of the series resistor The three ranges are described in more detail below 3.3.5.1 Contactors with series resister (3RH11...-0LA0/3RT10...-0LA0) The DC magnetic systems of these contactors are, due to their increased operating range, turned on with a defined overexcitation. As a result of the power up, there is a switch over to the hold-in coil via the series resistor. Designs in frame size S00 Control relays and contactors of frame size S00 are available with the following: * A built-on block that contains the series resistor (the NC contact required for the switch-over is integrated in the basic unit and is already wired). * Integrated varistor * A 4-pole auxiliary switch block (in acc. with EN 50 005) can also be built on. SIRIUS System Manual 3-28 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Designs for frame sizes S0 to S3 Contactors of frame sizes S0 to S3 are fitted on the front with an auxiliary switch block with 2 NO contacts + 2 NC contacts. The separate series resistor that is attached next to the contactor on the 35 mm rail has connecting leads for contactor attachment. An NC contact of the auxiliary switch block is required for the switch-over to hold-in coil level. A circuit diagram with the terminal points is attached on each contactor. Auxiliary contacts One NC contact of the auxiliary contacts is required for the series resistor. The number of auxiliary contacts that are available beyond this is listed in the selection and order data. With frame size S00, the auxiliary switch block must be ordered separately. An increase of the mountable auxiliary contacts is only possible with frame size S00. Installation The following types of installation are permissible for contactors and control relays in ambient temperatures of up to 70 C: Frame size S00: installation in series Frame sizes S0 to S3: The resistor block must be installed on the right side of the contactor because of the connecting leads there. Dimensions When the resistor is mounted, the contactors of frame sizes S0 to S3 become wider (see Section 3.6, "Dimensional drawings"). Circuit diagrams Frame size S00 Terminal markings in acc. with DIN EN 50 012 Contactors 3RT1017-2K.42-0LA0 Terminal markings in acc. with DIN EN 50 005 Control relays 3RH1122-2K.40-0LA0 L+ L- L+ L- S1 S1 E1+ RV E1+ K1 K1 K1 K1 1 2 4 6 NSB00559a A2A2- 13 23 31 3 5 14 24 32 NSB00560a RV Series resistor RV attached NC contact wired 2 NO + 1 NC contacts available Fig. 3-10: Contactors with an extended operating range, circuit diagrams SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-29 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays A1(+) 1 3 5 13 21 31 43 U A2( ) 2 4 6 14 22 32 44 NSB00561a Frame sizes S0 to S3 Terminal markings in acc. with EN 50 012 Contactors 3RT102.-, 3RT103.-, 3RT104.-3K.44-0LA0 With front-mounted 4-pole auxiliary switch block 3RH1921-1HA22 2 NO + 2 NC contacts Identification number 22 Fig. 3-11: Contactors with an extended operating range, terminal markings The NC contact at 21/22 is needed for the wiring of the series resistor Circuit diagram for wiring of the series resistor (-) NSB00562a A1 A2 RV A1 21 22 (+) A2 (-) Fig. 3-12: Contactors with an extended operating range, circuit diagram 3.3.5.2 Contactors with electronic control module frame sizes S0 to S3 (3RT10..-.X40-0LA2) Design The contactors are controlled using a line side electronic control module. These ensure an operating range of 0.7 to 1.25 US at an ambient temperature of 70 C. The coil has a integrated varistor to dampen the switching overvoltage of the coil. This causes an increase contact opening time compared to the standard contactors of about 2 ms to 5 ms. The contactors with an electronic control module are also offered as a complete device. Auxiliary contacts The mounting of auxiliary contacts corresponds to the corresponding standard contactors. Installation These contactor designs can be mounted side-by-side in frame sizes S0 to S3 at ambient temperatures up to 70 C. Ambient temperature The allowable ambient temperature for the operation of the contactors (at the full operational range of the coils) is - 40 C to + 70 C. At constant operation with temperatures of > + 55 C there is a reduction of mechanical service life, the loadability of the main conducting paths and the reliable switching frequency. SIRIUS System Manual 3-30 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Circuit diagram and terminal connections With the top mounted electronic control module, the height of the contactor is increased up to 34 mm (for dimensional drawings see Section 3.6 "Dimensional drawings"). U A1(+) 1 3 5 A2(-) 2 4 6 NSB00169 Dimensions A1 A2 1 3 5 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 2 4 6 NSB01390 Fig. 3-13: Contactor with electronic control module, circuit diagram + terminal connections 3.3.5.3 Contactors with an extended operating range (3RH1122-2K.40, 3RT1017-2K.4., 3RT102.-3K.40) Contactors of frame size S00: 3RH11 22-2K.40, 3RT1017-2K.4. and frame size S0: 3RT102.-3K.40 have the following features: * Extended operating range of 0.7 to 1.25 x Us * The magnet coils are wired with a varistor; an additional series resistor is not required Note the following: * Frame size S00: an auxiliary switch block cannot be attached * Frame size S0: a maximum of two 1-pole auxiliary switch blocks can be attached Installation At an ambient temperature > 60 C < 70 C, there must be spacing of 10 mm when installing in series. Ambient temperature The permissible ambient temperature for operating the contactors at the full operating range of the magnet coils is -35 C to +70 C. During continuous operation with temperatures > +55 C, the mechanical service life, the current-carrying capacity of the conducting paths, and the switching frequency are reduced. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-31 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3.3.6 3RH1 control relays Control relays are switching devices for auxiliary circuits for controlling, signaling, and interlocking. Control relays have to meet specific requirements in terms of clear terminal markings and have a time- and cost-saving terminal system. The SIRIUS 3RH1 control relays (frame size S00) meet these requirements Terminal markings The terminal markings comply with EN 50 011 and EN 50 005 (for a more detailed explanation, see Section 3.4.1 "Auxiliary switches"). Frame size and features 3RH1 control relays are available as follows: * Frame size S00 * With AC or DC operation * Same construction as the motor contactor of frame size S00 * 4-pole basic version * Can be extended to 8 poles with snap-on auxiliary switch blocks * Screw-type or Cage Clamp terminals Screw-type terminals The 3RH1 control relays have captive screws (cross-tip Pozidriv, size 2), with all the terminal points open on delivery. The screwdriver guides allow screwdriving machines to be used. Cage Clamp-Terminals The 3RH11 control relays are also available with Cage Clamp terminals a screwless terminal system. This type of terminal is particularly suitable if strong shock or vibration can be expected at the installation location. These terminals are also suitable for two-conductor connections. All the terminals are accessible from the front and are easily visible. Soldering pin connections Both the 4-pole basic version as well as the control relays that have an auxiliary switch block attached at the front (see Section 3.4, "Accessories") can be soldered onto printed circuit boards using a soldering pin adapter. Contact reliability All the switching elements of the 3RH1 control relays are equipped with contact pieces that have particularly high contact stability, ensuring high contact reliability even at low voltages and currents. This subject is discussed in detail in Section 3.2.3.2, "Contact reliability". SIRIUS System Manual 3-32 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3RH14 latched auxiliary contactors If there is a short circuit in the low-voltage network, or when large drive motors are switched on directly, the control supply voltage for the auxiliary contactors may fail briefly or fall below the permissible tolerance level. To ensure continuous operation, the variant with mechanical latching (3RH14) can be used with the auxiliary contactors. These auxiliary contactors latch mechanically after power-up and remain in an energized state even in the event of a power failure. The auxiliary contactor can be unlocked electrically using an interlock release magnet or manually using a button on the front of the attached latched block. When the voltage returns, the production program can be resumed immediately without resetting times due to the storage feature of the auxiliary contactors. The contactor coil and the coil of the release magnet are both designed for continuous operation. The power input is the same for the contactor coil and the release coil. The mechanical service life is 1 million operating cycles. 3.3.7 3RT10 contactor relays for switching motors (interface) and 3RH11 control relays for switching auxiliary circuits Contactor relays are available in the SIRIUS modular system for switching motors and auxiliary circuits for the purpose of smooth interaction with electronic controllers. These are variants of the 3RT10/3RH11 contactor series with the following features: * Low power input * Wide operating range of the magnet coil 0.7 to 1.25 x Us * High contact reliability of the auxiliary contacts * Integrated or attachable overvoltage damping Contact reliability The high contact reliability of the auxiliary contacts ensures that false signals do not occur even at low switching capacities. With a voltage of 17 V and a current of 1 mA, there is on average less than one contact fault per 100 million switching operations. Overvoltage damping Overvoltage damping protects sensitive output levels of electronic controllers against switching overvoltages of the coil. Extended operating range The operating range of the coil of the contactor relays covers a voltage range from 0.7 to 1.25 x Us (Us= rated control supply voltage). This wide operating range is required for the supply voltage of electronic controllers with the required voltage tolerances. The supply voltage of electronic controllers with 24 V DC covers the range 20.4 V to 28.8 V in acc. with DIN 19 240. If you take into consideration an additional loss of voltage of up to 3 V during the output phases, the contactor drive must be able to operate perfectly with voltages between 17.4 V and 28.8 V. The 3RT10 and 3RH11 contactor relays for electronic controllers operate safely from 17 V to 30 V, which corresponds to a voltage range of 0.7 x Us to 1.25 x Us. This is a considerably wider operating range than that of 0.85 to 1.1 x Us for contactors and auxiliary contactors in acc. with IEC 60 947, DIN EN 60 947 (VDE 0660). SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-33 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Voltage ranges The following graphic shows you the voltage ranges for electronic controllers and drives of contactors and contactor relays with a rated control supply voltage of Us = 24 V DC: Supply voltage range Electronic controllers in acc. with DIN 19340 U 30 Operating range for contactors in acc. with VDE 0660 part 102 1.2 x Us 1.2 x Us 28.8 V Voltage range of electronic outputs at < 3 V internal voltage drop 1.1 x Us 28.8 V Operating range of contactors for electronic controllers 1.25 x Us 30 V 1.25 Us 26.4 V 1.0 Us 24 20.4 V 0.85 x Us 17 20.4 V 0.85 x Us 17.4 V 0.72 x Us 17 V 0.7 x Us 0.7 Us Fig. 3-14: Contactor relays: voltage ranges Auxiliary contact blocks Auxiliary contact blocks can be built on as follows: Frame size S00: none Frame size S0: a maximum of two 1-pole auxiliary contact blocks Power consumption Variant 1: The power input of the magnet coils for contactor relays in frame size S00 is 2.3 W at 24 V DC (operating range: 0.7 to 1.25 x US). Variant 2: Contactor relays with reduced coil performance in frame size S00, P = 1.4 W at 24 V DC (operating range: 0.85 to 1.85 US). The power input of magnet coils for contactor relays in frame size S0 is 4.2 W at 24 V DC (operating range: 0.7 to 1.25 x US). SIRIUS System Manual 3-34 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3.3.8 3RA13 Contactor combinations for reversing 3RA13 reversing contactor combinations are available pre-assembled from the factory or as components for self-assembly * S00 to S3: pre-assembled from the factory or as kit for self-assembly Frame sizes S2 and S3 are delivered already mounted on a base plate. The same accessories can be used as for the basic contactors of the corresponding frame size (see Section 3.4, "Accessories"). For motor protection an overload relay must be attached. 4-pole contactor combinations for reversing can be put together in frame sizes S0 and S2. S00 S0 1 1 2 3RU1.1 3RU1.2 2 Fig. 3-15: Fully assembled contactor combination for reversing (frame sizes S00 and S0) Approvals The s and u approvals only apply to complete contactor combinations and not to combinations that have been field assembled from separate components. Switch-over time If the contactors are interlocked by means of their auxiliary switches (electrical interlocking) or by mechanical interlocking, there is no overlapping of the contacts and the arcing time between the contactors at switch-over. The switching times of the contactors are not affected by the mechanical interlock. Note At voltages of >500 V a switch-over pause of 50 ms must be included. AC-operated 3RT10 contactors in reversing or Dahlander mode require an NC contact interlock and a switch-over pause of 50 ms. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-35 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Auxiliary contact elements Different auxiliary switches can be attached (at the front or the side) to the 3RA1 reversing combination. An integrated auxiliary switch contact is available in frame size S00. Accessories The following accessories for the basic units can also be used for contactor combinations for reversing: * Auxiliary switch blocks (at the front/side) * Surge suppressors * Soldering pin adapters (frame size S00) The following accessories are designed specifically for contactor combinations for reversing: * Locking devices for mechanical interlocking * Locking devices for mechanical and electrical interlocking (at the front/ side) * Terminals for contactor coils (for frame sizes S0 to S3) * Mechanical connectors * Wiring modules Terminals for contactor coils To reach the coil terminals A1 and A2 of the frame sizes S2 and S3 reversing contactor combinations more easily, you can use extension terminals for contactor coils. For each combination, 2 x A1 and 1 x A2 are required. Wiring module Wiring modules are available to enable you to carry out different types of wiring (Dahlander wiring, for example). You can find out how to mount the wiring modules in the diagrams of the self-assembly kits. Mechanical interlocking Mechanical interlocking (for frame sizes S0 to S3) is available in 2 variants: * Attachable at the front (contactor spacing: 0 mm) * Attachable at the side with integrated NC contact for electronic interlocking Note If you want NC contact interlocking, you must use contactors with 1 NC contact in the basic unit with the 3RT1 contactors of frame size S00. SIRIUS System Manual 3-36 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays The following graphics show you how to install the front mount mechanical interlock for frame size S0: Mechanical interlock installation Drawing: Frame size S0 Step 1 Attach both of the wiring modules in order to connect the main conducting paths. Shown as the circled numbers: = Top wiring module = Bottom wiring module 2 Push the sliding switch on the upper portion of the mechanical interlock to RESET, in order to be sure of the conditional state of the module. 3/4/5 First attach the mechanical interlock in the contact opening of the left contactor (3), then with a swinging motion attach the mechanical interlock in contact opening of the right contactor (4) and pull the interlock downward until it sits securely in place (5). 6 In the proper operational condition, the upper sliding switch on the front side of the mechanical interlock is to the left and the lower sliding switch is to the right. 3RA1923-2A 1 4 3 5 1 2 RESET Procedure 6 Table 3-14: Installation of the front mounted mechanical interlock (frame size S0) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-37 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays The following graphics show you how to install the front mount mechanical interlock with frame sizes S2 and S3: Drawing: Frame sizes S2/S3 Step 3RA1932-2C Procedure 1/2 Place the contactors even to one another (1) and plug-in both of the connection clips to the backside (2). 3 Push the sliding switch on the upper portion of the mechanical interlock to RESET, in order to be sure of the conditional state of the module (3). First attach the mechanical interlock in the contact opening of the left contactor (4), then with a swinging motion attach the mechanical interlock in contact opening of the right contactor (5) and pull the interlock downward until it sits securely in place (6). 7 In the proper operational condition, the upper sliding switch on the front side of the mechanical interlock is to the left and the lower sliding switch is to the right. 2 1 5 4 6 3 RESET 7 Table 3-15: Installation of the front mounted mechanical interlock (frame sizes S2/S3) SIRIUS System Manual 3-38 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Assembly kits for contactor combinations The following accessories are components of the self-assembly kits and they are described in the diagrams of the relevant kit: * Side mount mechanical interlock * Mechanical connectors * Wiring modules Assembly kits for reversing combinations The following table shows you the components of the kit for the contactor combination for reversing in frame size S00 and explains how to put it together: Drawing: frame size S00 Step 1/2/3 Mount the mechanical interlock between the two contactors. 4/5 Press the two connecting clips from above and below onto the two contactors. 6 Attach the wiring modules to connect the main conducting paths and to electrically interlock the two contactors (3RT10.1). Make sure that the wiring modules are flush with the contactor at the side. 5 3 Procedure 2 1 4 6 6 Table 3-16: Assembling the contactor combination for reversing (frame size S00) Electrical interlock Note Contactors with an NC contact in the basic unit (3RT101.) are required for the electrical interlock. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-39 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays The following table shows you the components of the kit for the contactor combination for reversing in frame size S0 and explains how to put it together: Drawing: frame size S0 Step Procedure 1/2 Mount the mechanical interlock between the two contactors. 3 Wire the actuating voltage and the electrical reversing interlock using the auxiliary conducting paths. 4/5 Attach the wiring modules in order to connect the main conducting paths and tighten the terminals. 2 1 3 3 4 5 4 Table 3-17: Assembling the contactor combination for reversing (frame size S0) SIRIUS System Manual 3-40 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays The following table shows you the components of the kits for the contactor combination for reversing in frame size S2 and S3 and explains how to put it together: Drawing: frame size S2 (S3) Step 3 1/2/3 Mount the mechanical interlock between the two contactors. Then insert the 2 connecting clips (10 mm spacing) on the back of the two contactors. 4 Wire the actuating voltage and the electrical reversing interlock using the auxiliary conducting paths. 5/6 Attach the wiring modules (5) in order to connect the main conducting paths and tighten the terminals (6). 3 1 Procedure 2 4 4 5 6 5 A Table 3-18: Assembling the contactor combination for reversing (frame sizes S2/S3) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-41 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 4-pole contactor combination for reversing 4-pole contactor combinations for reversing are available in frame sizes S0 and S2. You will require the following to mount these combinations: * Frame size S0: locking device for mechanical interlock * Frame size S2: locking device for mechanical interlock and 2 connecting clips The following graphic shows you how to set up the 4-pole contactor combination for reversing in frame size S0: Drawing: frame size S0 Step Procedure 1/2 Remove the 4th pole from one of the two contactors by releasing the snap catch (1). 3/4 Put the 4th pole on the other side of the same contactor by placing the catches on the pole into the openings shown on the contactor and snapping the pole onto the contactor. 5/6 Mount the mechanical interlock between the two contactors (5/6). 1 2 1 3 4 3 4 3RA1924-2B 6 5 Table 3-19: 4-pole contactor combination for reversing (frame size S0) SIRIUS System Manual 3-42 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Assembly of the contactors in frame size S0 with front interlocking Drawing: frame size S0 Step Procedure 1/2 Remove the 4th pole of the left contactor by pressing the ribbed surfaces at the top and bottom at the same time (1) and then removing the pole (2). 3/4 Attach the pole to the left side of the same contactor. 5/6 Put the contactors together by inserting two mechanical couplers (3RA1922-2C) in the appropriate openings of the contactor (5), and then press the other contactor onto these mechanical couplers (6). 1 2 1 3 4 3 4 5 6 5 3RA1922-2C 7/8/9 Mount the mechanical interlock at the front (3RA1924-1A) over the two contactors. 8 7 9 Table 3-20: 4-pole reversing contactor combination with front interlock (frame size S0) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-43 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays The following graphic shows you how to assemble the 4-pole reversing contactor combination in frame size S2: Drawing: frame size S2 3 3 3RA1932-2G 1 2 Step Procedure 1/2 Mount the mechanical interlock between the two contactors. 3 Insert the 2 connecting clips on the back of the two contactors. 3RA1924-2B Table 3-21: 4-pole reversing contactor combination (frame size S2) NO contact function not interlocked If contactors in frame size S00 are used with 1 NO contact that is intended for an auxiliary function (e.g. as a signaling device), the wiring module must be separated. The illustration below shows you the wiring for this function: Fig. 3-16: NC contact wiring for the electrical interlock (frame size S00) Mounting and connection The contactor combinations for reversing have screw-type connections that are suitable for both panel mounting and snap-on mounting on a 35 mm rail. Conductor cross-sections The permissible conductor cross-sections of the contactor combinations for reversing correspond to those of the basic units for the corresponding frame size. SIRIUS System Manual 3-44 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Circuit diagrams Main circuit: S00 to S3 L1 L2 L3 F1 K1 K2 NSB00634 F2 UV W M 3~ Fig. 3-17: Reversing contactor combination, main circuit (frame sizes S00 to S3) Control circuit: S00 Push button switch control Continuous contacting (2-wire control) (3-wire control) L1/L+ L1/L+ F3 F3 95 F2 95 F2 96 96 S0 10 2 S1 S 53 53 S2 K2 54 22 K2 54 K1 21 21 N/L K1 A1 A2 22 K2 A1 A2 K2 NSB00635 K1 S1 K1 N/L 22 22 K1 21 21 A1 K2 A2 A1 A2 NSB00636 S2 Fig. 3-18: Reversing contactor combination, control circuit (frame size S00) S0 "Off" button S1 "Clockwise rotation on" button S2 "Counterclockwise rotation on" button S "Right/off/left" selector switch K1 Clockwise rotation contactor K2 Counterclockwise rotation contactor F1 Fuses for main circuit F2 Overload relay F3 Fuses for control circuit SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-45 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Control circuit: S0 to S3 Continuous contacting Push button switch control (2-wire control) (3-wire control) L1/L+ L1/L+ F3 F3 95 F2 95 F2 96 96 S0 10 2 S1 S .3 .3 S2 K2 .4 K2 N/L K1 112 .4 K1 121 111 122 A1 A1 A2 K2 A2 K2 NSB00638 K1 S1 K1 N/L 112 121 K1 111 122 A1 K2 A2 A1 A2 NSB00639 S2 Fig. 3-19: Reversing contactor combination for control circuit (frame sizes S0 to S3) Technical specifications The technical specifications of the contactor combinations for reversing correspond to those of the basic units for the corresponding frame size. 3.3.9 3RA14 Wye-delta combinations The 3RA1 wye-delta combinations in frame sizes S00 to S3 are available as follows: * Fully assembled with the usual auxiliary switches in the following frame sizes: - S00-S00-S00 - S0-S0-S0 - S2-S2-S0 - S2-S2-S2 - S3-S3-S2 Frame sizes S2 to S3 are delivered already mounted on a base plate. * In USA sold only for self-assembly. * S00 to S3 as a kit for self-assembly. The same accessories can be used as for the basic units of the corresponding frame size (see Section 3.4, "Contactor accessories"). SIRIUS System Manual 3-46 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays The following graphics show you the fully assembled wye-delta combinations in frame sizes S00 to S2: Frame size S00 Frame size S0 3-phase feed-in terminal (4 to 10 mm2) Auxiliary contact block, at the front Auxiliary contact block, at the front Time-delay auxiliary contact block, at front Time-delay auxiliary contact block, at front Frame size S2 Auxiliary contact block, at the front Time-delay auxiliary contact block, at front Fig. 3-20: Wye-delta combinations (frame sizes S00, S0, S2) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-47 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Frame size S2 Timing relay, at the side Fig. 3-21: Wye-delta combination (frame size S2) Field of application The wye-delta combination is used to start three-phase induction motors which require a low load torque during startup. Starting current ratio Wye-delta starting can only be used when the motor normally operates in delta mode, starts with no load, or if the load torque during the wye startup is small and does not increase rapidly. In the wye stage, the motors can be loaded with approximately 50 % (torque class KL16) and 30 % (KL10) of its rated torque. The starting torque is reduced to approximately 1/3 of the value at direct power-up. The starting current is approximately 2 to 2.7 times the rated current for the motor. Switch-over Switching from the wye to the delta stage can only be carried out once the motor has completed startup to the rated speed. The required switch-over time delay and interlock is included in the contactor combination. Important Motors that require an early switch-over are not suitable for wye-delta starting. Overload protection The fully assembled combinations are not equipped with overload protection. Overload relay (3RU11) and tripping devices for thermistor motor protection must be ordered separately. The overload relays can be attached to the contactor directly or set up separately. The overload relay is set to 0.58 times the set current Ie. See Chapter 4, "Overload relays" for further information. SIRIUS System Manual 3-48 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Components of the wye-delta-combinations The following table shows you the features of the fully assembled wye-delta combinations with time-delay auxiliary switch blocks with the wye-delta function (3RT19.6-2B...) and solid-state time relays with semiconductor output and the possible configuration, if you use the self-assembly kit: Frame size S00 Frame sizes S0 to S3 Fully assembled At front (time-delay auxiliary switch block) at the side (timing relay) Kit At front * at the side (timing relay) * At front (time-delay auxiliary contact block) Table 3-22: Configuration of the wye-delta combinations Important If a time-delay auxiliary switch block is mounted on the front of K3, an auxiliary switch block can only be mounted on the side of K3. Accessories The following basic unit accessories can also be used for wye-delta combinations: * Auxiliary switch blocks (front, side) * Surge suppressors * Time-delay auxiliary switch blocks with wye-delta function In addition, there are special accessories available for the wye-delta combinations: * 3-phase feed-in terminals * Wye-point links (parallel links) * Terminals for contactor coils (S2/S3) * Mechanical connectors * Wiring modules Terminal for contactor coils In order to more easily reach coil terminals A1 and A2 in the wye-delta combination from contactors in frame sizes S2 and S3, extension terminals for contactor coils can be used. For each combination, 2 x A1 and 1 x A2 are required. Infeed With conductor cross-sections > 2 x 2.5 mm2 and 1 x > 4 mm2, a feed-in terminal block must be used for the wye-delta combination in frame size S00. This makes the following conductor cross-sections possible: * Frame size S00: up to 6 mm2 * Frame size S0: up to 25 mm2 * Frame size S2: up to 50 mm2 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-49 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Kits The following graphic shows you the components of the kit for the wyedelta combination in frame size S00 and explains how to put it together: Drawing: frame size S00 Step 5 1/2/3 Place the mechanical interlock in the opening on the right side of the delta contactor K3. Push the wye contactor K2 and the delta contactor K3 together. 4/5 Press a connecting clip for both the top and bottom onto the two contactors (3). Make sure the clips are on the correct side. 6/7 Break the upper link module off at the notches (6), and attach the wiring modules and the wye jumper, to connect the main conducting paths (between line contactor (K1) and delta contactor (K3) and at the same time to interlock the combination electrically (K3-K2)). 8/9 Wire A2 and tighten the terminal screws. 3 2 1 4 6 7 7 7 Procedure 9 8 7 Table 3-23: Assembly of the wye-delta combination in frame size S00 SIRIUS System Manual 3-50 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays The following graphic shows you the components of the kits for the wyedelta combinations in frame sizes S0 to S3 and explains how to put it together: Drawing: frame size S0 Step 1 1 1 Procedure Attach the wiring modules and the wye-point link in order to connect the main conducting paths and to interlock the combination electrically. 1 Drawing: frame size S2 (S3) 1 Step Procedure 1/2 Place the wye-point link on the wye contactor. Tighten the main connections. Place the wiring module on the contactor undersides to connect the main conducting paths. 3 2 3 A Drawing: frame sizes S3-S3-S2 Step 1 1 2 Procedure Attach the wye-point link to the wye contactor. Attach the wiring module to the contactor undersides to connect the main conducting paths. 2 Table 3-24: Assembly of the wye-delta combinations in frame sizes S0 to S3 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-51 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Compensating for different depths for the mechanical interlock In wye-delta combinations with contactors of different frame sizes, it is necessary to compensate for the mounting depth of the smaller contactor. One frame size is the maximum difference possible. The following depth compensation must be made for a mechanical interlock attached at the side: * S2-S2-S0: K3: 1.5 mm; K2: 0 mm * S3-S3-S2: K3: 0 mm; K2: 27.5 mm Mounting and connection The wye-delta combinations have screw-type connections that are suitable for both screw-on and snap-on mounting on the 35 mm rail. Conductor cross-sections The permissible conductor cross-sections of the wye-delta combinations correspond to those of the basic units for the corresponding frame size. Circuit diagrams Main circuit: S00 S0 3AC 50Hz ...V L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 F0 F0 1 3 5 K1 3AC 50Hz ...V K3 1 3 5 2 4 6 1 3 5 K1 K2 K3 2 4 6 2 4 6 NSB00642 F1 1 3 5 K2 2 4 6 NSB00645 F1 U1 W2 V1 M U2 W1 3 ~ V2 U1 W2 M U2 V1 W1 3 ~ V2 U1 W2 V1 M U2 W1 3 ~ V2 U1 W2 V1 M U2 W1 3 ~ V2 S2 to S3 3AC 50Hz ...V L1 L2 L3 F0 K1 F0 1 3 5 K3 1 3 5 2 4 6 K2 2 4 6 NSB00648 F1 U1 V1 W1 M 3~ W2 U2 V2 U1 W2 V1 M U2 W1 3 ~ V2 Fig. 3-22: Wye-delta combinations, main power circuit (frame sizes S00 to S3) SIRIUS System Manual 3-52 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Control circuit S00 Push button switch control Continuous contacting (3-wire control) L1(L+) AC 50Hz (DC) ...V F0 F1 (2-wire control) L1(L+) AC 50Hz (DC) ...V F0 F1 95 96 95 96 S0 S S1 K1 13 13 K1 14 14 37 27 K4 38 28 22 K3 K1 22 K2 37 28 38 K2 K1 K4 N(L ) 22 21 21 K3 K2 22 K3 21 21 K4 27 K4 K3 K2 N(L ) NSB00643 NSB00644 Fig. 3-23: Wye-delta combinations, control circuit (frame size S00) Control circuit: S0 to S3 Continuous contacting Push button switch control (2-wire control) (3-wire control) L1(L+) AC 50Hz (DC) ...V F0 F1 L1(L+) AC 50Hz (DC) ...V F0 95 F1 96 95 96 S0 S S1 44 44 K1 K1 43 17 K4 28 18 K3 42 K2 N(L ) K2 K2 34 13 33 K1 K4 14 K3 28 18 22 K3 21 41 K4 33 K1 43 17 42 K2 NSB00646 K4 K2 N(L ) 13 14 22 21 41 K1 K2 34 K3 K1 NSB00647 Fig. 3-24: Wye-delta combinations, control circuit (frame sizes S0 to S3) S0 S1 S K1 K2 K3 K4 Technical Data "Off" button F0 Fuses "On" button F1 Overload relay Continuous contact maker Line contactor Wye contactor Delta contactor Time-delay auxiliary switch block or time relay The technical specifications of the wye-delta combinations correspond to those of the basic units for the corresponding frame size. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-53 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3.4 Accessories Accessories for frame size S00 The accessories for contactors that switch motors and for control relays are of the same type. The accessories are attached at the front. Accessories for frame sizes S0 to S3 The accessories are (with few exceptions) the same for frame sizes S0 to S3. They can be attached in different ways: * Auxiliary switches can be attached at the front or the side. * Surge suppressors can be attached at the top or the bottom. The following graphic shows you the accessories for the contactors and control relays that switch motors of frame size S00: 17 3 18 4 5 12 1 6 19 13 20 7 2 8 9 10 11 14 15 NSB00448 16 Fig. 3-25: Accessories for contactors of frame size S00 1 2 3 4 5 Contactor, frame size S00 Coupling relay Solid-state time relay block, on-delay Solid-state time relay block, off-delay Auxiliary switch block, time-delay (on-delay or off-delay or wye-delta function) 6/7 1-pole auxiliary switch block, infeed from above or below 8/9 2-pole auxiliary switch block, infeed from above or below 10 4-pole auxiliary switch block (terminal markings in acc. with EN 50 012 or EN 50 005) 11 2-pole auxiliary switch block, standard or electronic type 12 Soldering pin adapter for contactors with 4-pole auxiliary switch block 13 Soldering pin adapter for contactors and contactor relays 14 Additional load module to increase the permissible residual current 15/16Surge suppressor with and without LED 17 3-phase feed-in terminal 18 Parallel link (star-point link), 3-pole, without terminal 19 Parallel link, 3-pole, with terminal 20 Parallel link, 4-pole, with terminal SIRIUS System Manual 3-54 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays The following graphic shows you the accessories for the control relays and contactor relays for auxiliary circuits of frame size S00: 3 4 12 5 1 6 13 7 8 2 9 14 10 11 16 NSB00066a 15 Fig. 3-26: Accessories for control relays/coupling relays of frame size S00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Control relay Coupling relay for auxiliary circuits Solid-state time relay block, on-delay Solid-state time relay block, off-delay Auxiliary switch block, time-delay (types: on-delay or off-delay) 1-pole auxiliary switch block, infeed from above 2-pole auxiliary switch block, infeed from above 1-pole auxiliary switch block, infeed from below 2-pole auxiliary switch block, infeed from below 4-pole auxiliary switch block (terminal markings in acc. with EN 50 011 or EN 50 005) 2-pole auxiliary switch block, standard or electronic type (terminal markings in acc. with EN 50 005) Soldering pin adapter for control relays with 4-pole auxiliary switch block Soldering pin adapter for control relays and contactor relays Additional load module to increase the permissible residual current Surge suppressor with LED Surge suppressor without LED SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-55 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays The following graphic shows you the accessories for the contactors of frame sizes S0 to S3: 4 5 17 20 11 18 21 10 16 2 12 1 14 1 6 9 15 7 19 8 16 20 13 21 22 3 NSB00449 23 Fig. 3-27: Accessories for contactors of frame sizes S0 toS3 1 2 3 For 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 For 20 21 For 22 23 Contactor, frame size S0 Contactor, frame size S2 Contactor, frame size S3 frame sizes S0 to S3: Solid-state time relay block, on-delay Solid-state time relay block, off-delay Auxiliary switch block, time-delay (on-delay or off-delay or wye-delta function) 2-pole auxiliary switch block, infeed from above 2-pole auxiliary switch block, infeed from below 4-pole auxiliary switch block (Terminal markings in acc. with EN 50 012 or EN 50 005) Parallel link (star-point link), 3-pole without terminal Parallel link, 3-pole, with terminal 2-pole auxiliary switch block, attachable on the right or left side (Terminal markings in acc. with EN 50 012 or EN 50 005) 1-pole auxiliary switch block (a maximum of 4 can be snapped on) Mechanical interlock, attachable at the side Mechanical interlock, attachable at the front Wiring modules above and below (reversing operation) Surge suppressor (varistor, RC element, diode combination), attachable above or below (different for S0 and S2/S3) Coupling link for direct attachment to the contactor coil LED block to display the contactor function frame sizes S2 and S3 only: Terminal for contactor coil for assembling contactor combinations Terminal cover for box terminals frame size S3 only: Terminal cover for lug connection and bar connection Auxiliary connecting lead terminal, 3-pole SIRIUS System Manual 3-56 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3.4.1 Attachable auxiliary switches for extending the auxiliary contacts Integrated auxiliary contacts Frame size S00 The contactors of frame size S00 have an auxiliary contact integrated in the basic unit. Frame size S0 to S3 The contactors of frame sizes S0 to S3 do not have an integrated auxiliary contact in the basic unit. Auxiliary switch blocks Formats Auxiliary switch blocks for extending the auxiliary contacts are available with screw-type or Cage Clamp terminals to attach to contactors. They are available in the following formats: * At the front: 1 to 4-pole for frame sizes S00 to S3 * At the side: 2-pole for frame sizes S0 to S3 Different auxiliary switch blocks can be added to the 3RT1 basic units, depending on the application: The following can be snapped onto the front of the contactors: * Frame sizes S00 to S3: a 4-pole auxiliary switch block or * Frame sizes S0 to S3: up to four 1-pole auxiliary switch blocks Frame sizes S0 to S3 If the depth of the installation space is limited, 2-pole auxiliary switches can be attached on the right and left side in frame sizes S0 to S3. If 1-pole auxiliary switch blocks are used, note the location ID on the contactor. 1-pole/2-pole auxiliary switch blocks 1 or 2-pole auxiliary switch blocks that can be connected from above or below make the wiring simple and straightforward when setting up feeders. These auxiliary switch blocks are only available with a screw-type terminal. We recommend with the circuit breaker/MSP and contactor combination that you use auxiliary switch blocks that are connected from below. In the case of the contactor/overload relay combination, an auxiliary switch connected from above is more suitable. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-57 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Electronically optimized auxiliary switch blocks The electronically optimized auxiliary switch blocks contain enclosed switching elements that are particularly suitable for switching low voltages and currents (hard gold-plated contacts) as well as for use in dusty atmospheres. The rated operational current is Ie/AC-14 and DC-13: 1 to 300 mA, voltage: 3 to 60 V. The electronically optimized auxiliary switch blocks are available as screwtype or Cage Clamp terminal types: * Frame size S00 (3RH1911-.NF..): Has two enclosed auxiliary contacts (1 NO contact + 1 NC contact, 2 NO or 2 NC contacts) * Frame sizes S0 to S3 (3RH1921-.FE22): Has two enclosed auxiliary contacts and two standard auxiliary contacts, each 1 NO contact + 1 NC contact The switched current is in acc. with the VDE 0435 regulation for relays. Auxiliary contacts The following table gives you an overview of all the available auxiliary contacts: Auxiliary contacts and attachable accessories Frame size S00 Integrated auxiliary contact 1 integrated auxiliary contact 4-pole auxiliary switch Attachable at the front 2-pole auxiliary switch Attachable at the front 1-pole auxiliary switch 1-pole auxiliary switch (infeed from 1 side) 2-pole auxiliary switch (infeed from 1 side) 2-pole auxiliary switch -- Attachable at the front Attachable at the front -- Frame sizes S0 to S3 -- Attachable at the front -- Attachable at the front -- Attachable at the front Attachable at the side Time-delay auxiliary switch blocks Attachable at the front Attachable at the front Electronically optimized auxiliary switches Attachable at the front Attachable at the front Attachable at the side Table 3-25: Auxiliary contact blocks Adding to the auxiliary contacts * The basic units of frame size S00 possess an integrated auxiliary contact and can be supplemented with up to 4 contacts using attachable auxiliary contacts. * The basic units of frame sizes S0 to S3 do not have any auxiliary contacts, but auxiliary switches can be attached at the front or the side. SIRIUS System Manual 3-58 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays The following table shows you the expansion options for the different frame sizes: Frame size Auxiliary switch block Connection S00 1, 3 and 4-pole (attachable at the front) Screw-type/Cage Clamp terminal Feeder auxiliary switch (attachable at the front): * 1-pole (1 NO or 1 NC contact) * 2-pole (1 NO + 1 NC or 2 NO contacts) Infeed from above or below possible Screw-type terminal 1 and 4-pole (attachable at the front) 2-pole (attachable at the side) Screw-type/Cage Clamp terminal Feeder auxiliary switch (attachable at the front): * 2-pole (1 NO + 1 NC contact) * 2-pole (2 NO or 2 NC contacts) Infeed from above or below possible Screw-type terminal S0 to S3 Table 3-26: Expansion options for auxiliary contact blocks Front mount auxiliary contacts Auxiliary contacts that can be attached at the front are hooked into the opening of the contactors and pulled down until they snap into place. They can be removed using the release lever in the middle. 1 2 Fig. 3-28: Front mount auxiliary contacts SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-59 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Auxiliary switches at side (S0 to S3) The auxiliary switches are hooked onto the left or right side of the contactor and snapped onto it. They are removed again by pressing the ribbed surfaces. 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 Fig. 3-29: Side mount auxiliary contacts Note When you use two 2-pole, side mount auxiliary contacts, you must attach an auxiliary switch block on the left and right in the interests of symmetry. Maximum number of auxiliary contacts The following table shows you the maximum number of auxiliary switches and their combination options: Frame size S0 and S2 (3RT102./3RT103.) 1 auxiliary 4 auxiliary 2 auxiliary A maximum of 4 auxiliary contacts can contact contact contact be attached, and you can use any type element elements elements of auxiliary switch. When you use two 2-pole, auxiliary switch blocks at the side, you must attach a block on the left and right in the interests of symmetry. In some situations, it is permismax. 4 0 0 sible to have more auxiliary contacts max. 2 0 1 in frame size S2 (for more details, please contact Technical Assistance). 0 1 0 0 0 1+1 Table 3-27: Possible auxiliary contact combinations (frame sizes S0/S2) Frame size S3 (3RT104./3RT14) 1 auxiliary contact element 4 auxiliary contact elements 2 auxiliary contact elements 4 0 1+1 0 1 1+1 0 0 2+2 A maximum of 8 auxiliary contacts can be attached. Please note the following: Of these 8 auxiliary contacts, a maximum of four can be NC contacts. Symmetry must be preserved in the case of auxiliary switch blocks attached at the side. Table 3-28: Possible auxiliary contact combinations (frame size S3) SIRIUS System Manual 3-60 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Contactors with 4 main contacts and capacitor-switching contactors Contactors with 4 main contacts S00 S0 S2/S3 4 auxiliary contacts Maximum of 2 auxiliary contacts (attached at the side or snapped on at the top) Maximum 4 auxiliary contacts (attached at the side or snapped on at the top) Capacitor-switching contactors An additional 2-pole auxiliary switch block on each side (3RH1921-1EA..: 2 NO, 2 NC or 1 NO + 1 NC contact) Table 3-29: Possible auxiliary switch combinations with 4-pole/capacitor-switching contactors Switching of the auxiliary contact elements With the standard type of auxiliary switch, when the contactors are switched on, first the NC contacts are opened and then the NO contacts are closed. On Contactor Off NC Standard auxiliary switch On Off On Off NO Fig. 3-30: Switching of the auxiliary contact elements Auxiliary contact elements with make-before-break contacting The following table shows auxiliary contact elements with make-before-break contacting: S00 Auxiliary switch type 3RH1911-.FC22 22U, 2 NO + 2 NC S0 - S3 Auxiliary switch type 3RH1921-.FC22 22U, 2 NO + 2 NC contacts Screw-type/Cage Clamp terminal contacts Screw-type/Cage Clamp terminal 3RH1911-.FB11 11U, 1 NO + 1 NC contact Screw-type/Cage Clamp terminal 3RH1911-.FB22 11/11U. 1 NO+1 NC+1PS 1) +1 lagging NC2) contact Screw-type/Cage Clamp terminal 3RH1921-1CD01 1 NO contact, leading Screw-type terminal 3RH1921-1CD10 1 NC contact, lagging Screw-type terminal Table 3-30: Auxiliary switches with make-before-break contacting 1) Leading NO contact 2) Lagging NC contact SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-61 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3.4.1.1 Terminal markings of the contactors frame sizes S00 to S3 In contactors of frame size S00 with an integrated auxiliary contact, the terminal marking complies with EN 50 012. This also applies to contactors that are available as complete devices, frame sizes: * S0 to S3 with mounted auxiliary contact blocks 2 NO + 2 NC Expanding the contactors of frame size S00 All the contactors of frame size S00 (3 and 4-pole) can be expanded with auxiliary switch blocks with the identification numbers 40 to 02 in acc. with EN 50 005 as follows: * Frame size S00 with an integrated auxiliary contact (identification number 10E or 01) for contactors with 3 or 5 auxiliary contacts * Frame size S00 with 4 main contacts for contactors with 2 or 4 auxiliary contacts Note The identification numbers on the auxiliary switch blocks only apply to the attached auxiliary switches. Expanding the contactors with 1 integrated NO contact, S00 (3RT101.-...01) Contactors with one NO contact as an auxiliary contact with screw-type or Cage Clamp terminals, identification number 10E, can be expanded with auxiliary switch blocks with terminal markings in acc. with DIN EN 50 012 for contactors with 2, 4, and 5 auxiliary contacts. The terminal markings of the complete contactors comply with EN 50 012. The identification numbers 11E, 22E, 23E, and 32E on the auxiliary switch blocks apply to the complete contactors. Important Auxiliary switch blocks in acc. with EN 50 012 can only be combined with contactors of frame size S00 that have 1 NO contact in the basic unit because they are coded. These auxiliary switch blocks cannot be combined with contactors that have an NC contact in the basic unit (identification number 01). SIRIUS System Manual 3-62 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Auxiliary contacts S00 The following graphic shows you the auxiliary contacts that can be used to expand the contactors of frame size S00 (terminal marking in acc. with EN 50 012 or EN 50 005): contactors, DIN EN 50 012, 1 auxiliary contact identification no. 01 auxiliary switch blocks, 4, 3 or 1 contact(s) auxiliary switch blocks, 4 or 2 contacts identification no. 32E, 23E, 22E, 11E identification no. 40, 31, 22, 20, 11, 02 contactors, DIN EN 50 012 5, 4 or 2 auxiliary contacts contactors, Hilfsschutze DIN 50 005, DINEN EN50 005, 58oroder 3 6 Kontakte auxiliary contacts identification no. 32E, 23E, 22E, 11E NSB00450 identification no. 10E identification no. 40, 31, 22, 20, 11, 02 Fig. 3-31: Auxiliary contacts, contactors for switching motors (frame size S00) Expanding the contactors of frame sizes S0 to S3 With contactors of frame sizes S0 to S3, you can also attach 1-pole auxiliary switch blocks instead of 4-pole auxiliary switch blocks. The terminal markings of the 1-pole auxiliary switch blocks consist of sequence numbers (location ID) on the basic unit and function numbers on the auxiliary switch blocks. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-63 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays The following graphic shows you the front mount auxiliary contacts that can be used to expand the contactors of frame sizes S0 to S3 (terminal marking in acc. with EN 50 005 or EN 50 012): 4-pole auxiliary contact blocks 1-pole aux. contact blocks contactors 3RT10 2. 3RT10 3. 3RT10 4. without auxiliary contact contactors 3RT10 2. 3RT10 3. 3RT10 4. without auxiliary contact auxiliary switch blocks, with 4 contacts 3RH19 21-. HA.. in acc. with DIN EN 50 012 identification no. 40, 31, 22, 04, 22U identification no. 31, 22, 13 contactor arrangements with a 4-pole auxiliary switch block, terminal markings in acc. with DIN EN 50 005 contactor arrangements with a 4-pole auxiliary switch block, terminal markings in acc. with DIN EN 50 012 identification no. 40, 31, 22, 02 NSB00452a auxiliary switch blocks, with 4 contacts 3RH19 21-. FA.. in acc. with DIN EN 50 005 identification no. 31, 22, 13 auxiliary switch blocks, with 1 contact 1 NO 1O possible contactor arrangements with 1-pole auxiliary switch blocks, terminal markings in acc. with DIN EN 50 005 or DIN EN 50 012 identification numbers: 01, 10 11 21, 12 31, 22, 13 02, 20 03, 30 04, 40 NSB00451a Auxiliary contacts S0 to S3 Fig. 3-32: Auxiliary contacts for contactors for the switching of motors (frame sizes S0 to S3) 3.4.1.2 Terminal markings of the contactors and control relays combined with auxiliary switch blocks Terminal markings in acc. with EN 50 005 The terminal markings for contactors are defined in EN 50 005 that contains general directives. The following summarizes the basic rules that apply to switching elements of auxiliary circuits: * The terminals of auxiliary contact elements are designated by two-digit numbers. * The digit in the unit place is a function number (NC contact: 1 and 2, NO contact: 3 and 4). * The digit in the tens place is a sequence number (all the switching elements of the same function must have different sequence numbers). Identification numbers (EN 50 005) The identification numbers mean: Switching devices with a fixed number of auxiliary contact elements (NO contacts or NC contacts) can be assigned a two-digit identification number. The first digit represents the number of NO contacts and the second one the number of NC contacts. There is no information on the sequence of NO contacts and NC contacts in the contactor/control relay. Note The identification numbers on the auxiliary switch blocks only apply to the attached auxiliary switches. SIRIUS System Manual 3-64 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays EN 50 012/ EN 50 011 For certain equipment such as auxiliary contact elements of contactors and control relays, the EN 50 012 and EN 50 011 standards also apply. The EN 50 012 defines the terminal markings and identification numbers for auxiliary contact elements of particular contactors. The terminal markings of the auxiliary contact elements match the terminal markings of corresponding control relays with the ID letter E (in acc. with EN 50 011). For auxiliary contact elements of contactors with the same identification number, the terminal marking must correspond to the sequence defined in the standard. Graphical symbols for auxiliary contact elements Below are some examples of graphical symbols for auxiliary contact elements of contactors that comply with EN 50 012: Coil Main contact elem. ID no ID no Auxiliary contact elements 13 21 33 13 43 31 ID no Auxiliary contact elements 21 31 43 22 14 22 34 44 13 21 33 43 53 41 22 34 54 44 13 21 31 41 14 22 32 42 13 21 31 41 53 14 22 32 42 54 13 14 22 32 44 13 21 31 43 53 32 14 Auxiliary contact elements 23 14 22 32 44 54 Fig. 3-33: Graphical symbols for auxiliary contact elements in acc. with EN 50 012 (excerpt) Device circuit diagrams The following device circuit diagrams of the auxiliary switch blocks for contactors that switch motors contain the terminal markings in acc. with EN 50 012: 3RT101 Contactor (Frame size S00) A1(+) 1 A1(+) 1 3 5 13 21 31 43 A2( ) 2 4 6 3 NO + 2 NC contacts ID number: 32E 2 NO + 3 NC contacts ID number: 23E 2 NO + 2 NC contacts ID number. : 22E 3 5 13 21 31 41 53 A2( ) 2 4 6 14 22 32 44 A1(+) 1 14 22 32 42 54 3 5 13 21 31 43 53 A2( ) 2 4 6 14 22 32 44 54 3RT102 contactors to 3RT104, 3RT14 (Frame sizes S0 to S3) A1(+) 1 3 5 13 21 31 43 A2( ) 2 4 6 14 22 32 44 NSB00487 2 NO + 2 NC contacts ID number: 22 4-pole front mount auxiliary contact blocks 3RH1921-1HA/1XA..,r 2 NO+ 2 NC contacts 2 NO+ 2 NC contacts ID number: 22 13 21 33 43 13 21 31 43 53 61 71 83 14 22 34 44 14 22 32 44 54 62 72 84 1 NO + 3 NC contacts NSB01354 3 NO + 1 NC contacts ID number: 31E 13 21 31 41 14 22 32 42 Fig. 3-34: Device circuit diagrams of the auxiliary switch blocks (EN 50 012) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-65 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3.4.1.3 Auxiliary switches that can be attached to 3RH1 control relays The 3RH1 control relays can be expanded by up to 4 contacts using attachable auxiliary switch blocks. Definition: EN 50 011 The main standard for the designation of switching elements for the control relays is EN 50 011, which defines the terminal markings, identification numbers, and identification letters of certain control relays using a specific sequence of the switching elements. The number, type, and position of the switching elements must be specified using an identification number followed by an identification letter. In the case of 8-pole control relays, the letter "E" means that four NO contacts have to be arranged on the lower (rear) contact level. Expansion using auxiliary switch blocks The following example of an control relay with 4 NO contacts (contact designation in acc. with EN 50 011 and EN 50 005) explains how auxiliary switch blocks are added on: auxiliary contactors, DIN EN 50 011, 4 contacts identification no. 31E, 22E identification no. 40E auxiliary switch blocks, 4 or 2 contacts identification no. 80E, 71E, 62E, 53E, 44E identification no. 40, 31, 22, 20, 11, 02 auxiliary contacts, DIN EN 50 011 8 contacts auxiliary contacts, Hilfsschutze DIN 50 005, DINEN EN50 005, 88 oroder 6 contacts 6 Kontakte identification no. 80E, 71E, 62E, 53E, 44E NSB00067 auxiliary switch blocks, 4 contacts identification no. 40, 31, 22, 20, 11, 02 Fig. 3-35: Auxiliary contacts for control relays SIRIUS System Manual 3-66 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Contact designation Auxiliary switch blocks - for example, 3RH1911-1GA22 (2 NO + 2 NC contacts) in acc. with EN 50 011 - can only be attached to control relays with 4 NO contacts (3RH1140-.....) because they are coded. The identification number (62E) printed on the auxiliary switch block (6 NO + 2 NC contacts) applies to the whole contactor. NO and NC contacts are in the same position on all the control relays with the identification number 62E (EN 50 011). This means contactors can be replaced without changing the wiring, which therefore makes wiring very easy. You can attach auxiliary switch blocks that comply with EN 50 005 on all 3RH11 control relays and 3RT101 motor contactors. For example, the 3RH1911-1FA22 auxiliary switch block (2 NO + 2 NC contacts) has the identification number 22, and this only applies to the attached auxiliary switch block. Graphical symbols of the control relays Below are some examples of graphical symbols for control relays with the identification letter E that comply with EN 50 011: 8-pole control relays 4-pole control relays ID no Coil ID no. Switching elements 13 23 33 43 Coil Switching elements 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83 80 E 40 E 14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84 13 21 33 43 13 23 33 43 53 61 73 83 71 E 31 E 14 22 34 44 14 24 34 44 54 62 74 84 13 21 31 43 13 23 33 43 53 61 71 83 62 E 22 E 14 22 32 44 14 24 34 44 54 62 72 84 13 21 31 41 13 23 33 43 53 61 71 81 53 E 13 E 14 22 32 42 14 24 34 44 54 62 72 82 11 21 31 41 13 23 33 43 51 61 71 81 14 24 34 44 52 62 72 82 44 E 04 E 12 22 32 42 Fig. 3-36: Graphical symbols for auxiliary contactors (control relays) in acc. with EN 50 011 (excerpt) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-67 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays The following device circuit diagrams of the control relays contain terminal markings in acc. with EN 50 011: A2( ) 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84 A1(+) 13 23 33 43 53 61 73 83 NS2-5558 A1(+) 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83 7 NO contacts + 1 NC contacts Identification number: 71 E A2( ) 14 24 34 44 54 62 74 84 5 NO contacts + 3 NC contacts Identification number: 53 E A2( ) 14 24 34 44 54 62 72 82 6 NO contacts + 2 NC contacts Identification number: 62 E A1(+) 13 23 33 43 53 61 71 83 A2( ) 14 24 34 44 54 62 72 84 4 NO contacts + 4 NC contacts Identification number: 44 E A1(+) 13 23 33 43 51 61 71 81 NS2-5561 A1(+) 13 23 33 43 53 61 71 81 NS2-5559 8 NO contacts Identification number: 80 E A2( ) 14 22 32 44 NS2-5560 A2( ) 14 22 34 44 A1(+) 13 21 31 43 A2( ) 14 24 34 44 52 62 72 82 NS2-5562 A2( ) 14 24 34 44 A1(+) 13 21 33 43 NS2-5552 A1(+) 13 23 33 43 2 NO contacts + 2 NC contacts Identification number: 22 E 3 NO contacts + 1 NC contact Identification number: 31 E NS2-5554 4 NO contacts Identification number: 40 E NS2-5553 Device circuit diagrams Fig. 3-37: Device circuit diagrams Position diagrams The following position diagrams of the auxiliary switches of frame sizes S00 to S3 also apply to leading and lagging contacts: NC Standard auxiliary switch Overlapping auxiliary switches On Off NO Off NC On On Off On NO Off Fig. 3-38: Position diagrams of the auxiliary switches (frame sizes S0 to S3) SIRIUS System Manual 3-68 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3.4.2 Time-delay auxiliary switches Variants The following variants of the time-delay auxiliary switch are available: * On-delay * Off-delay without auxiliary supply * Wye-delta function On-delay and off-delay functions The time-delay auxiliary switch in the on-delay or off-delay variants has the following features: * It facilitates time-delayed functions up to 100 s * 3 single time areas * Contains a relay with 1 NO contact and 1 NC contact that switches the ondelay or off-delay depending on the version. Wye-delta function The time-delay auxiliary switch with wye-delta function has the following features: * Equipped with a delayed and an instantaneous NO contact between which there is an idle time of 50 ms. * The delay time of the NO contact can be set at between 1.5 s to 30 seconds. * The contactor on which the time-delay auxiliary switch block is mounted functions instantaneously. Conductor crosssections The permissible conductor cross-sections correspond to the auxiliary conductor terminals of the corresponding frame size. 3.4.2.1 Frame size S00 (3RT1916-2E, -2F, -2G) Description The time-delay auxiliary switch of frame size S00 has the following features: * The power supply is provided using plug-in contacts directly via the coil connections of the contactors, parallel to A1/A2. * The time function is activated when the contactor that has the auxiliary switch block mounted on it is turned on. * The off-delay version functions without an auxiliary supply. * The minimum on-time is 200 ms. * To dampen switching overvoltages of the contactor coil, a varistor is integrated in the time-delay auxiliary switch of frame size S00. Information on mounting Note about the off-delay without auxiliary supply function: The position of the output contacts is not defined at shipment (bistable relay). Apply the control supply voltage once, and then switch it off again to set up the initial state of the contacts. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-69 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Important The time-delay auxiliary switch cannot be added to contactor relays. Installation/removal Caution Switch off the supply voltage to A1/A2 before you install or remove the timedelay auxiliary switch block. The time-delay auxiliary switch is attached to the front of the contactor. 3RT1.1 1 2 Fig. 3-39: Time-delay auxiliary switch block (frame size S00) Connection When they are attached, the connections for the rated control supply voltage are connected to the contactor below by the integrated spring contacts of the time-delay auxiliary switch. Function diagrams 3RT1916-2E NSK-7932 A1/A2 27/28 35/36 On-delay 1 NO and 1 NC contact t 3RT1916-2F > 200 ms Off-delay Without auxiliary supply 1 NO and 1 NC contact A1/A2 27/28 35/36 t 3RT1916-2G NSK-7955 A1/A2 Y 27/28 D 37/38 50 ms t Wye-delta function 1 NO contact, instantaneous 1 NO contact, delayed t Fig. 3-40: Function diagrams of the time-delay auxiliary switches (frame size S00) SIRIUS System Manual 3-70 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3.4.2.2 Frame sizes S0 to S3 (3RT1926-2E, -2F, -2G) Description The time-delay auxiliary switch for frame sizes S0 to S3 has the following features: * The power supply of the time-delay auxiliary switch is via two terminals (A1/A2). * The time delay for the time-delay auxiliary switch can be activated by parallel connection to any contactor coil, or by any source of voltage. * The off-delay version works without an auxiliary supply. * The minimum on-time is 200 ms. * In addition to the time-delay auxiliary switch, a 1-pole auxiliary switch block can be snapped onto the front of the contactor. * The time-delay auxiliary switch does not have any integrated overvoltage damping for the connected contactor. Information on mounting Note about the off-delay without auxiliary supply function: The position of the output contacts is not defined at shipment (bistable relay). Apply the control supply voltage once, and then switch it off again to set up the initial state of the contacts. Installation/removal 3RT1.2 3RT1.3 3RT1.4 1 2 The time-delay auxiliary switch is attached to the front of the contactor. Fig. 3-41: Time-delay auxiliary switch block (frame sizes S0 to S3) Connection The A1 and A2 terminals for the rated control supply voltage of the timedelay auxiliary switch are connected to the respective contactor with cables. Terminal markings Because an additional auxiliary switch block can be snapped onto the contactor, the terminals of the delayed contacts have been designated as -5/-6 (NC contact) and -7/-8 (NO contact). SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-71 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Function diagrams NSK-7932 A1/A2 27/28 35/36 On-delay 1 NO and 1 NC contact t > 200 ms A1/A2 Off-delay without auxiliary supply 1 NO and 1 NC contact NSK-7933a 27/28 35/36 t NSK-7955 A1/A2 Y 27/28 D 37/38 t 50 ms Wye-delta function 1 NO contact, instantaneous 1 NO contact, delayed Fig. 3-42: Time-delay auxiliary switches, function diagrams (frame sizes S0 to S3) 3.4.3 Solid-state time relay blocks with semiconductor output The solid-state time relay blocks are suitable for AC and DC operation. To dampen switching overvoltages of the contactor coil, a varistor is integrated. Variants The following variants of the time-delay auxiliary switch are available: * On-delay (integrated varistor) * Off-delay with auxiliary supply (integrated varistor) On-delay and off-delay functions The time-delay auxiliary switch in the on-delay or off-delay with an auxiliary supply has the following features: * It facilitates time-delayed functions up to 100 seconds. * 3 individual time ranges * Contactors with a solid-state time relay block close and open with a delay according to the time set. Connection: on-delay time relay block The on-delay time relay block is connected in series to the contactor coil; the A1 terminal of the contactor coil must not be separately connected to the control supply. Connection: off-delay time relay block When an off-delay time relay block is attached, the contactor coil is connected via the time relay block; the A1 and A2 terminals of the contactor coil must not be separately connected to the control supply. Conductor crosssections The permissible conductor cross-sections correspond to the auxiliary conductor terminals of the corresponding frame size. SIRIUS System Manual 3-72 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Notes on configuration The control of loads parallel to the start input is not permissible in AC operation. See the relevant circuit diagram below. The off-delay solid-state time relay blocks (3RT1916-2D.../3RT1926-2D...) have a live start input (B1). With AC voltage, this can imitate the control of a parallel load on the B1 terminal. In this case, an additional load (contactor K3, for example) should be wired as shown in circuit diagram A. A L1 L1 K3 S1 A1 B1 A2 K3 S1 A1 B1 A2 K3 K1 K1 K2 A1 A1 A2 A2 K2 N N K1 time relay block K2 contactor Fig. 3-43: Control of loads 3.4.3.1 Frame size S00 (3RT1916-2C, -2D) Caution Switch off the supply voltage to A1/A2 before you install or remove the solidstate time relay block. Installation/removal Important The time-delay auxiliary switch cannot be attached to contactor relays. The solid-state time relay block of frame size S00 is attached to the front of the contactor and latched into place with a pushing movement. Removal Installation 2 1 1 2 Fig. 3-44: Solid-state time relay block with semiconductor output, installation (frame size S00) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-73 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Connection When the solid-state time relay block is installed, it is connected at the same time with the A1 and A2 coil connections of the contactor by the plug-in pins. Coil connections of the contactor that are not required are covered by covers on the housing of the time relay block, thus preventing inadvertent connection. Function diagrams 3RT19 16-2C, on-delay 3RT19 16-2D, off-delay A1/A2 Time relay t A1/A2 Contactor NSK-7938a NSK-7937a A1/A2 Time relay B1/A2 > 35 ms A1/A2 Contactor t Fig. 3-45: Solid-state time relay block with semiconductor output, function diagrams (frame size S00) 3RT19 16-2C... on-delay Frame size S00 3RT19 16-2D... off-delay (with auxiliary voltage) Frame size S00 L1/L+ NSB00554 L1/L+ S1 S1 NSB00555 Circuit diagrams A1 1 A1 B1 1 2 N/L N/L A2 A2 2 Solid-state time relay block A Contactor Fig. 3-46: Solid-state time relay with semiconductor output, circuit diagrams (frame size S00) 3.4.3.2 Frame sizes S0 to S3 (3RT19 26-2C, -2D) Note on configuration Caution The solid-state time relay block with a semiconductor output (3RT1926-2C..., -2D...) must not be used for 3RT104 contactors of frame size S3 with US 42 V because the coil current used for the output semiconductor is too high. The solid-state time relay block must not be attached to the lower coil connections. Installation/removal 1 2 The solid-state time relay block for the contactors of frame sizes S0 to S3 is attached at the top on the A1 and A2 coil connections of each contactor, connecting the time relay electrically and mechanically with pins. Fig. 3-47: Solid-state time relay with a semiconductor output, installation (frame sizes S0 to S3) SIRIUS System Manual 3-74 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3RT19 26-2C... on-delay Frame sizes S0 to S3 3RT19 26-2D... off-delay (with auxiliary supply voltage) Frame sizes S0 to S3 L1/L+ A1 A2 A1 A2 1 NSB00556 L1/L+ S1 A2 1 2 A1 A1 B1 NSB00557 Circuit diagrams A1 A2 A1 A2 2 A2 N/L N/L A2 can either be connected to the contactor or the timing relay with N(L-). - - - connect as preferred A2 may only be connected with N(L-) from the timing relay x do not connect! time relay block A contactor Fig. 3-48: Solid-state time relay with semiconductor output, circuit diagrams 3RT19 26-2C..1, on-delay t A1/A2 Contactor NSK-7937a A1/A2 Time relay 3RT19 26-2D..1, off-delay A1/A2 Time relay B1/A2 NSK-7938a Function diagrams > 35 ms A1/A2 Contactor t Fig. 3-49: Solid-state time relay with semiconductor output, function diagrams 3.4.4 Additional load module (3RT1916-1GA00) Field of application The additional load module for the contactors of frame size S00 is used to increase the permissible residual current and to limit the residual voltage of SIMATIC semiconductor outputs. Mode of operation Malfunctions can sometimes occur when SIRIUS contactors and auxiliary contactors of frame size S00 work together with SIMATIC output modules whose residual current at signal "0" is higher than is permissible for the contactors of frame size S00. The maximum permissible residual current of the electronic components is 3 mA for contactors of frame size S00 with a 230 V AC drive, and in the case of higher residual currents, the contactors no longer drop down. The additional load module is used to ensure the safe switching off of S00 contactors in the case of direct control by programmable controllers via 230 V AC semiconductor outputs. The additional load module takes on the function of overvoltage damping at the same time. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-75 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Technical specifications Rated voltage AC 50/60 Hz 180 V to 255 V Rated output power 1.65 W at 230 V Permissible contactor types 3RT1.1 3RT1. Associated coil type P0 (230 V, 50/60 Hz) N2 (220 V, 50/60 Hz) P6 (220 V, 50 Hz/240 V, 60 Hz) Operating range 0.8 to 1.1 Us Installation The additional load is connected in parallel to the contactor coil. It has the same construction as the surge suppressor and is attached on the front of the contactors with or without an auxiliary switch block. 3.4.5 Coupling element for frame sizes S0 to S3 (3RH1924-1GP11) Field of application The 3RH1924-1GP11 coupling link is intended for contactors of frame sizes S0 to S3. It can be controlled by a programmable controller output because the operating range of 17 to 30 V DC is permissible. Mode of operation A contactor of frame size S0 to S3 can be controlled, for example, at 24 V DC with a low control level (< 0.5 W) from a programmable controller output. The control voltage for the coupling link and the rated control supply voltage for the contactor are electrically isolated. An LED indicates the switching state of the coupling link. To dampen switching overvoltages of the contactor coil, a varistor is integrated in the coupling link. Installation Caution Switch off the supply voltage applied to L1 and N before installation. The coupling link is inserted with its two integrated mounting pins directly onto the coil connections of the contactor. 1 2 Fig. 3-50: Coupling link (frame sizes S0 to S3) SIRIUS System Manual 3-76 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Conductor crosssections The permissible conductor cross-sections correspond to the auxiliary conductor terminals of the corresponding frame size. Circuit diagram Coupling link 3RH19 24-1GP11 for control from a PLC L1 B1+ B2- N K1 U U A1 K2 K1 Coupling link K2 Contactor A2 B1+/B2-: Control voltage 24 V DC L1/N: Rated control supply voltage for the selected contactor Fig. 3-51: Coupling link, circuit diagram (frame sizes S0 to S3) Technical specifications You can find the technical specifications of the coupling link in Section 6.7, "Technical specifications". SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-77 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3.4.6 Surge suppression When contactor coils are de-energized, overvoltage occurs (inductive load). Voltage peaks of up to 4 kV with a rate of rise in voltage of 1 kV/ms can result (showering arcs). The consequences of this are: * Heavy contact erosion and thus premature wearing of the contacts that switch the coil * Unwanted signals can occur that may cause false signals in electronic controllers. All contactor coils, therefore, should be damped against switching overvoltages, particularly when working with electronic controllers. Oscillograms Coils without surge suppression The following oscillograms illustrate the behavior at disconnection of contactor coils without and with overvoltage damping: Disconnection of an unused contactor coil USp [V] USp 3000 1000 0 50 100 t [s] Fig. 3-52: Disconnecting contactor coil without suppression Oscillogram of a de-energized coil of an auxiliary contactor. When suppression is not used: Showering arcs can be clearly seen (voltage peaks of up to approximately 4 kV). After de-energization has been started, showering arcs occur for approximately 250 s, and after that the oscillation is only damped. SIRIUS System Manual 3-78 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Varistor Circuit with a varistor (AC/DC operation) USp [V] USp 200 0 20 0 t [s] Fig. 3-53: Circuit with a varistor (AC/DC operation) This is what happens when a coil is de-energized that is connected to a varistor (voltage-dependent resistor): Voltage peaks still occur. They are cut off at approximately 400 V and have a shorter overall duration (approximately 50 s). (Note: The oscillogram is cut off, and the voltage is reduced to zero after approximately 3 ms.) A varistor is suitable for AC and DC operation. The opening time of the contactor is extended by approximately 2 to 5 ms. RC-Element Circuit with an RC element (AC/DC operation) USp [V] USp 200 0 0 5 t [ms] Fig. 3-54: Circuit with an RC element (AC/DC operation) This is what happens when a coil is de-energized that is connected to an RC element: The amplitude and rate of rise of the switching overvoltage are reduced by the capacitor. Showering arcs no longer occur. The voltage swings briefly to 400 V and then slowly drops down. This represents ideal damping. Disadvantage: The component is larger and generally more expensive. RC elements are suitable for AC and DC operation. Only a minimal opening time occurs (under 1 ms). SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-79 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Diode Circuit with diode (DC operation) USp [V] USp 20 = 0,6 V ^ = USP of the Diode 0 0 200 t [s] Fig. 3-55: Circuit with a diode (DC operation) This is what happens when a coil is de-energized that is connected to a diode: Advantages: No overvoltage occurs during de-energization. The diode block becomes effective at 0.6 V. Disadvantage: The diode can only be used for DC operation. The opening time of the contactor is considerably increased and amounts to 6 to 9 times the normal opening time. This increased break time can be used, if necessary, for control purposes, such as for bridging brief interruptions in voltage. Zener diodes (diode combinations) are available for shorter opening times. The opening time then amounts to 2 to 6 times the normal opening time. Surge suppressors The following surge suppressors are available for the 3RT1 contactors: Surge suppressor With LED for S00 Without LED for S00 for S0 for S2, S3 Suppression diode x x -- -- Diode combination: suppression diode and Zener diode -- x x x Varistor x x x x RC element -- x x x Table 3-31: Surge suppressor SIRIUS System Manual 3-80 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Selection aid The following table gives you a comparison of the effects of the different surge suppressors: Suitable for control supply voltage Surge suppressor Suppression diode/ freewheeling diode DC Overvoltage is limited 0.6 V Effect * * Diode combination: suppression diode Zener diode DC To Zener voltage * * Varistor AC/DC RC element AC/DC To varistor voltage * (current-dependent) Corresponds to the dimensioning * * Opening time is considerably greater (6 to 10 times) A two-stage drop1) cannot be ruled out in the case of contactors as of frame size S0 Opening time is greater (2 to 6 times) A 2-stage drop no longer occurs Opening time is only slightly greater (2 to 5 ms) Opening time remains unchanged Rate of rise in voltage is damped Table 3-32: How surge suppressors work 1) The rate of drop is reduced once or twice to zero for a few ms: * A safe drop is always ensured in the case of switching without current. * The contact pieces are subjected to a greater thermal load when switching with current. When switching at the upper current limit, this can result in overload. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-81 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Installation Frame size S00 The surge suppressor is attached on the front of the contactors. There is space next to the attached auxiliary switch block. The direction of attachment is defined by a code. Frame size S0 to S3 2 Varistors, RC elements, and diode combinations can either be inserted and snapped on from above or below directly onto the coil terminals. 1 1 2 2 1 To remove them, press the varistors, RC elements, and diode combinations forwards, and remove them from the recess. Fig. 3-56: Surge suppressors, installation Installation instructions for frame sizes S0 to S3 Important The 3RT1926-1E.00 diode combination is inserted from above. The direction of attachment is defined by a code. Alternatively, the 3RT19 26-1T.00 diode combination can be inserted from below. The direction of attachment is not coded, but the terminals are marked with "+" and "-" so that the direction is clear. SIRIUS System Manual 3-82 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3.4.7 Other accessories 3.4.7.1 LED module for indicating contactor control (3RT19 26-1QT00) Description The LED module can be connected to the coil terminals of the contactors of frame sizes S0 to S3. It indicates the status of the contactors by means of yellow LEDs. Mode of operation The LED module can be used for AC/DC voltages of 24 V to 240 V. The LEDs are connected bidirectionally to protect against polarity reversal. Both LEDs light up in AC control, and one lights up in DC control, depending on the polarity. Connection The LED module is connected to the A1 and A2 coil terminals of the contactor. Installation The LED module is snapped onto the front in the openings intended for the inscription plate. Fig. 3-57: LED module 3.4.7.2 Auxiliary connecting lead terminal, 3-pole for frame size S3 (3RT19 46-4F) Using the 3-pole auxiliary lead terminal, auxiliary and control cables can be connected to the main cable terminals. Conductor cross-sections of auxiliary connecting leads that can be connected: Screw-type terminals (1 or 2 conductors can be connected) Single-core mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5); 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) in acc. with IEC 60 947; Max. 2 x (0.75 to 4) Finely stranded with wire end mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5); 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) ferrule AWG cables, single- or multi- AWG 2 x (20 to 16); 2 x (18 to 4); 1 x 12 core Terminal screws M3 Tightening torque Nm 0.8 to 1.2 (7 to 10.3 lb.in) Table 3-33: Conductor cross-sections of 3-pole auxiliary connecting lead terminals (for frame size S3) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-83 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3.4.7.3 EMC interference suppression module (3RT19 16-1P..) In the case of motors or various inductive loads, back-e.m.f (electromotive force) is produced when disconnected. This can produce voltage peaks of up to 4000 V with a frequency range of 1 kHz to 10 MHz and a rate of voltage variation of 0.1 to 20 V/ns. Capacitive coupling to various analog and digital signals makes suppression necessary in the load circuit. Description The connection of the main conducting path to the EMC suppression module reduces the contact sparking that is responsible for contact erosion and many of the disturbances, which in turn supports an EMC-compatible configuration. Mode of operation The EMC suppression module reduces through 3 phases the radio-frequency parts and the voltage peaks. The advantages of this are as follows: * Longer service life of the contact pieces * Higher operational reliability and high system availability A fine grading within the performance class is not required because smaller motors have greater inductance due to their construction, and one EMC suppression module is thus sufficient for all non-stabilized drives up to 5.5 kW. Variants Two electrical variants are available: * RC circuit * Varistor switching Circuit diagrams L1 L2 L3 R_L1 C_L1 R_L2 C_L2 R_L3 C_L3 V_L1 U U V_L2 V_L3 U 2T1 4T2 6T3 M 3~ 2T1 4T2 6T3 M 3~ Fig. 3-58: Circuit diagrams SIRIUS System Manual 3-84 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Installation The EMC suppression module is attached to the underside of the contactor. To do this, hook the EMC suppression module with both hooks onto the contactor, and push it upward until the connection pins of the EMC module are firmly in place in the terminal openings of the contactor. 1 2 3RT19 16-1P.. Fig. 3-59: EMC suppression module RC circuit The RC circuit is suitable: * For reducing the rate of rise * In RF damping Effective suppression can be achieved for a wide range of applications. Varistor circuit A varistor circuit can absorb a high level of energy and can be used for frequencies from 10 to 400 Hz (stabilized drives). There is no limit below the buckling stress. 3.4.7.4 Soldering pin adapter for frame size S00 (3RT19 16-4KA.) Description The standard contactors of frame size S00 in the SIRIUS range can be soldered onto printed circuit boards by means of the soldering pin adapter. Soldering pin connection is possible: * For contactors with an integrated auxiliary contact * For contactors with an attached 4-pole auxiliary switch block * For the reversing wiring of the S00 contactors. This involves carrying out the reversing wiring before soldering it on the printed circuit board Mounting main contacts 2 3 The soldering pin connectors are inserted above and below in the screw-type terminals of the contactors. 1 4 2 3 Fig. 3-60: Soldering pin connection, mounting SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-85 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Mounting on 4-pole auxiliary switch block 2 1 3 2 Fig. 3-61: Mounting the soldering pin connection on a 4-pole auxiliary switch block Removing the spring If necessary, the spring for attachment to the rail can be removed before the soldering pin connection is mounted. 1 2 Fig. 3-62: Removing the spring from the soldering pin connection SIRIUS System Manual 3-86 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3.4.7.5 Paralleling links (3RT19 .6-4B.31) If the current paths of a multiple pole switching device are connected in parallel, then the total current is spread over the individual poles in accordance to their ohmic resistance and their mutual inductive interference. The ohmic resistance is mainly made up of the contact resistance of the contacts, whose value can change with erosion and oxidation. Therefore there is neither a symmetrical nor stabile distribution of current: individual current paths can become overloaded and the overload trip may operate prematurely causing nuisance tripping. As long as there aren't any other details in the catalog data, then the following applies for continuous loading when connected in parallel: * When three current paths are connected in parallel then the continuous current can be 2.5 times of a single current path and 1.8 times the continuous current with two current paths connected in parallel. It should be noted that the making and breaking are not increased, because the contacts don't open and close at the same time and therefore the contacts of an individual current path must be able to make or break the entire current * The wiring arrangement should be such that every current path has the same cable length. * An eventual short-circuit current would be divided with relationship to the resistance of the current paths. Continuous loading when connected in parallel Attention: Thereby, the tripping current of an instantaneous electromagnetic short-circuit trip may not be reached. The magnitude of making and breaking capacities of contactors, related to load currents when connecting two/three poles in parallel are shown in the table below: Making/breaking capacity Ie Ie 1 3 2 Ie Ie 5 4 Ie I''e I'e 6 Ie 3-pole switching 1 3 2 4 I''e 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 7 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 8 Ie 2 poles in parallel Ie 3 poles in parallel Ie 4 poles in parallel Making capacity 12 x Ie (utilization category AC-4) 12 Ie ----------------- = 6, 67 Ie 1, 8 12 Ie ------------------- = 4, 8 Ie 2, 5 12 Ie ------------------- = 3, 9 Ie 3, 1 Breaking capacity 10 x Ie (utilization category AC-4) 10 Ie ----------------- = 5, 55 Ie 1, 8 10 Ie ------------------- = 4, 0 Ie 2, 5 10 Ie ------------------- = 3, 2 Ie 3, 1 Table 3-34: Parallel connection: making/breaking capacities SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-87 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays The following designs of paralleling links are available: Designs Frame sizes Design S00 to S3 3-pole, without connection terminal (wye jumper)2) S00 to S3 3-pole, with connection terminal S00 4-pole, with connection terminal Table 3-35: Paralleling links: designs 2) Installation 3.4.7.6 Accessory for wye-delta combinations The paralleling links each be shortened a pole. Sealing cover (3RT19 .6-4MA10) With the use of contactors and control relays in safety related applications, it must to be made certain that the manual activation of the contactor isn't possible. For applications of this kind there is a sealing cover available as an accessory that prevents unintentional manual activation. It is a see-through moulded plastic cap with a clip that makes sealing the cover possible. * Frame size S00: 3RT19 16-4MA10 1 2 3 Fig. 3-63: Contactor frame size S00 with sealable cover * Frame sizes S0 to S3: 3RT19 26-4MA10 1 2 3 Fig. 3-64: Contactor frame sizes S0 to S3 with sealable cover SIRIUS System Manual 3-88 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3.4.7.7 Terminal covers for frame sizes S2 to S3 To increase safety there are terminal covers available for contactors with frame sizes S2 to S3: Design Function required number Frame sizes Cover for box terminals 3RT19.6-4EA2 provides additional protection against shock S2 to S3 Terminal cover for ring-tongue and busbar connection 3RT19.6-4EA1 to keep the clearance between phases from determined connection cross-sections, provides protection against shock 2 covers each are needed per contactor (for the main connections on top and bottom) S3 Table 3-36: Covers SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-89 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays The following graphics show how to install the covers: Installation Drawing 3RT1956-4EA2 3TX7500-0A 3 2 5 Frame size Procedure 3RT19.6-4EA2 S2 to S3 The terminal covers for the box terminals are pushed into the guides on the box terminals block then slid toward the back until it locks into place. 1/ 4 3RT19.6-4EA1 S3 To mount the terminal covers for ring-tongue and busbar connection first remove the box terminals block (only with frame size S3), and slide the cover on the guide rails. 3 1 2 4 Fig. 3-65: Terminal covers SIRIUS System Manual 3-90 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3.5 Mounting and connection 3.5.1 Mounting Note Note the following during installation: * If foreign bodies, such as wood shavings, can get into the device, the contactors must be covered during installation. * If there is a danger that dirt or dust could be present, or if there is a corrosive atmosphere, the contactors must be installed in a housing. * Dust deposits must be vacuum cleaned. Mounting options The mounting options for the contactors are uniform. Frame size Installation Removal S00 to S3 Screw mounting Removed with a screwdriver S00, S0 Snapped onto a 35 mm rail (in acc. with EN 50 022) Removed without a tool S2, S3 Snapped onto a 35 mm rail (in acc. with EN 50 022) S3 Snapped onto a 75 mm rail The snap-on spring can be opened with a screwdriver Table 3-37: Mounting The following graphic shows panel (screw) mounting: Panel mounting Frame sizes S00 and S0 The 3RT1 contactors can be screwed onto a flat surface. * With 2 M4 screws, diagonal * Maximum tightening torque 2 Nm * Washers and spring lock washers must always be used * The distance to grounded parts at the side must be more than 6 mm M4 Frame sizes S0 In order to make panel mounting easier (for example vertical accessability with the use of insulated screwdriver) for the frame size S0 contactors, the screw adapter 3RT1926-4P can be used. Fig. 3-66: Panel (screw) mounting SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-91 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays DIN rail mounting DIN rail mounting is possible: * Frame size S00 to S3: on 35-mm DIN rail * Frame size S3: on 75-mm DIN rail. The height of the DIN rail must be at least 15 mm. The following graphic shows DIN rail mounting: Frame sizes S00 and S0 Place the device on the upper edge of the rail, and press it downward until it snaps onto the lower edge of the rail. Push the device downward to release the tension of the mounting spring, and remove the device by tilting it. 2 1 Frame sizes S2 and S3 1 2 Place the device on the upper edge of the rail, and press it downward toward the rail until it snaps onto the lower edge of the rail. Using a screwdriver, push the lug on the lower rear side of the device downward to release the tension of the mounting spring, and remove the device by tilting it. 4 3 3 Fig. 3-67: Snap-on attachment Mounting position The contactors are designed for use on vertical surfaces. The following installation positions are permissible for AC and DC operation: Frame size S00 to S3: 22.5 22,5 22.5 22,5 360 Contactor alone or with overload relay 3RB10 22.5 22,5 22.5 22,5 with overload relay 3RU1 225 315 Fig. 3-68: Installation positions (frame sizes S00 to S3) SIRIUS System Manual 3-92 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Installation on horizontal surfaces The following table provides a guide to installation on a horzontal surface: Size AC/DC Output power Measure S00 coupler 3RT10 1. DC 3 to 5.5 kW S00 coupler 3RH11 DC Ie/AC-15 6 A/230 V S00 3RT10 1. DC 3 to 5.5 kW Without restriction S00 3RH11 DC Ie/AC-15 6 A/230 V Without restriction S00 AC 3 to 5.5 kW/ and Ie/AC-15 6 A/230 V Special variant S0 coupler DC 5.5 to 11 kW Special variant S0 DC 4 to 11 kW Special variant AC 4 to 11 kW Without restriction AC 15 to 22 kW Special variant DC 15 to 22 kW Installation on horizontal surface not possible! AC 30 to 45 kW Special variant DC 30 to 45 kW Installation on horizontal surface not possible! S2 S3 Without restriction With 2 NO + 2 NC contacts: stronger springs, otherwise no restriction Table 3-38: Guide to installation on a horizontal surface Motor and auxiliary contacts (including the contactor relay variants) are included in frame size S00. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-93 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Side-by-side installation No derating is necessary up to an ambient temperature of 60 C for all the contactors, even those in side-by-side installation. In the case of contactors with an extended operating range (0.7 to 1.25 x Us) that use a series resistor, side-by-side installation is permissible up to an ambient temperature of +70 C. 3.5.2 Connection The SIRIUS contactors are available with the following terminal types: * Frame sizes S00 to S3: screw-type terminals * Contactors and auxiliary contactors of frame size S00: all the terminals are also available as Cage Clamp terminals * Contactors of frame sizes S0 to S3: the auxiliary switches and coil connections are also available with Cage Clamp terminals. * Accessories: screw-type and (for most of the range) Cage Clamp terminals * The contactors of frame size S3 have removable box terminals for the main conductor terminals. This enables the connection of ring lugs or busbars. Screw terminals The devices with screw-type terminals have the following features: * All the connections have captive screws. * All the terminal points are delivered in the open position. * The screwdriver guides allow screwdriving machines to be used. * In frame size S00, all the terminal screws for the main and auxiliary circuits have a uniform screw size (cross-tip Pozidriv 2 screws) and therefore all require the same torque. * In all the frame sizes (S00 to S3), the terminal screws are identical for the auxiliary conductor terminals (Pozidriv 2, common bit and uniform torque). Cage Clamp terminals In the variant with Cage Clamp terminals, the devices have the following features: * Recommended if high shock or vibration can be expected at the installation location. * The terminals are also suitable for two-conductor connections * All the terminals are accessible from the front and are easily visible. * A maximum of two conductors with a cross-section of 0.25 mm 2 up to a maximum 2.5 mm2 can be used for each terminal point. SIRIUS System Manual 3-94 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Cage Clamp terminals: Procedure The following illustration shows you how to use the Cage Clamp terminals: Insert the screwdriver straight into the opening up until the stop (1) to open the clamping unit. Insert the conductor in the oval terminal opening (2), and remove the screwdriver (3). 2 1.5 mm ... 2.5 mm 3 1 Fig. 3-69: Cage Clamp terminals Insulation stop With a conductor cross-section of 1 mm2, an insulation stop (3RT19 16-4JA02) must be used to hold the conductor insulation securely. An insulation stop line consists of 5 pairs of connection terminals. The following illustration demonstrates insertion into the Cage Clamp infeeds. 1mm 3RT19 16-4JA02 Fig. 3-70: Insulation stop with Cage Clamp terminals Two-conductor connection It is possible with all the main, auxiliary, and control cable connections to connect two conductor ends. They can also be used to connect untreated conductors with different cross-sections. Box terminals each with 2 terminal points are provided for the main conductor connection in contactors of frame sizes S2 and S3. This connection method also promises problem-free looping and parallel connection without intermediate terminals. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-95 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Conductor cross-sections Permissible conductor cross-sections for main and auxiliary connections: Frame size S00 Main and auxiliary conductors 5 ... 6 mm / PZ2 0.8 to 1.2 Nm 7 to 10.3 lb*in Cage Clamp 10 2 x (0.5 to1.5 mm) 2 x (0.25 to 2.5 mm) 2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm) 10 2 x (0.5 to1.5 mm) 2 x (0.25 to 1.5 mm) 2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm) 10 AWG -- 2 x (0.25 to 2.5 mm) 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (24 to 14) Frame size S0 Control conductor: A1/A2 Auxiliary conductor: NO/NC Screw-type Cage Clamp terminal terminal 5 ... 6 mm / PZ2 0.8 to 1.2 Nm 7 to 10.3 lb*in Main conductor L1 L2 L3 T1 T2 T3 2 to 2.5 Nm 18 to 22 lb*in -- 10 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm) 2 x (1 to 2.5 mm) 2 x (0.25 to 2.5 mm) 2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm) 2 x (2.5 to 6 mm) 10 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm) 2 x (1 to 2.5 mm) 2 x (0.25 to 1.5 mm) 2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm) 2 x (2.5 to 6 mm) 10 AWG -- 2 x (0.25 to 2.5 mm) -- 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (24 to 14) 2 x (14 to 10) Frame size S2 Control conductor: A1/A2 Auxiliary conductor: NO/NC Screw-type Cage Clamp terminal terminal 5...6 mm / PZ2 0.8 to 1.2 Nm 7 to 10.3 lb*in -- Main conductor L1 L2 L3 T1 T2 T3 5...6 mm / PZ2 3 to 4.5 Nm 27 to 40 lb*in 10 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm) 2 x (0.25 to 2.5 mm) 2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm) 13 2 x (0.75 to 16 mm) 10 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm) 2 x (0.25 to 1.5 mm) 2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm) 13 2 x (0.75 to 16 mm) 1 x (0.75 to 25 mm) 13 2 x (0.75 to 25 mm) 1 x (0.75 to 35 mm) 10 AWG -- 2 x (0.25 to 2.5 mm) 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (24 to 14) AWG 2 x (18 to 3) 1 x (18 to 2) SIRIUS System Manual 3-96 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Frame size S3 Control conductor: A1/A2 Auxiliary conductor: NO/NC Screw-type Cage Clamp terminal terminal 5 ... 6 mm / PZ2 0.8 to 1.2 Nm 7 to 10.3 lb*in -- Main conductor L1 L2 L3 T1 T2 T3 4 to 6 Nm 35 to 53 lb*in min 22 4 10 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm) 2 x (0.25 to 2.5 mm) 2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm) 17 2 x (2.5 to 16 mm) 10 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm) 2 x (0.25 to 1.5 mm) 2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm) 17 2 x (2.5 to 35 mm) 1 x (2.5 to 50 mm) 17 2 x (10 to 50 mm) 1 x (10 to 70 mm) 10 AWG -- -- 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (24 to 14) AWG 2 x (10 to 1/0) 1 x (10 to 2/0) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-97 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3.5.3 Changing the magnetic coils Contactors of frame sizes S0 to S3 have 4 coil terminals. The advantages of this are as follows: * Variable connection, depending on the amount of space and cable routing * Easier wiring of feeders 4 coil terminals The connection options are: * From below when in fuseless configuration with circuit breakers/MSPs connected above the contactor. * From above when contactors are used with an overload relay attached directly below it. * Diagonal Changing the magnetic coils The magnetic coils of frame sizes S0 to S3 contactors can be replaced in accordance with the procedures shown below. S0 - AC operation The following illustration shows the replacement of the magnetic coil in frame size S0 in AC operation: Drawing Step 1/2 Use screwdrivers to lever up the release clips between the rear and front contactor halves and remove the front part of the contactor. 3 Remove the magnetic coil from the rear half of the contactor. 4/5 Push in the new magnetic coil, and put the front section of the contactor back on again. 5a Important: Make sure that the springs between the magnetic coil and the front contactor half sit straight on the spring support pin. 1 1 Procedure 2 3 4 5 5a Fig. 3-71: Replacing the magnetic coil (frame size S0/AC) SIRIUS System Manual 3-98 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays S2 - AC operation Drawing Step 1/2/3 Loosen the 2 screws between the rear and front contactor halves, and remove the magnetic coil from the rear part of the contactor. 4 Insert the new magnetic coil. 5/6 Replace the front half of the contactor, and tighten the 2 screws again. 2 1 3 Procedure 1 4 5 6 6 Fig. 3-72: Replacing the magnetic coil (frame size S2/AC) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-99 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays S2 - DC operation Drawing Step 1 2 2 1 3 3 Procedure Loosen the 2 screws between the rear and front contactor halves. Loosen the two screws on the plates that attach the magnetic coil to the armature, and remove the magnetic coil from the rear half of the contactor. 1 4 Insert the new magnetic coil, and screw on the two plates again with the two screws. 4 5 5 6 6 Replace the front half of the contactor, and tighten the 2 screws again. Make sure the springs are in their correct position. 6 Fig. 3-73: Replacing the magnetic coil (frame size S2/DC) SIRIUS System Manual 3-100 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays S3 - AC operation Drawing Step 1 2 2 3 1 Procedure Loosen the 2 screws between the rear and front contactor halves, and remove the magnetic coil from the rear part of the contactor. 3 1 4 Insert the new magnetic coil. 5 Replace the front half of the contactor, and tighten the 2 screws again. 4 5 6 6 6 Fig. 3-74: Replacing the magnetic coil (frame size S3/AC) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-101 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays S3 - DC operation Drawing Step 1 2 2 3 1 4 4 1 Procedure Loosen the 2 screws between the rear and front contactor halves. Loosen the two screws on the plates that attach the magnetic coil on the armature, and remove the magnetic coil from the rear half of the contactor. 5/6 Insert the new magnetic coil, and screw on the two plates again with the two screws. 7/8 Replace the front half of the contactor, and tighten the 2 screws again. Make sure the springs are in their correct position! 5 6 3 7 8 8 Fig. 3-75: Replacing the magnetic coil (frame size S3/DC) SIRIUS System Manual 3-102 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3.5.4 Changing the contact pieces The contact pieces can be replaced in contactors of frame sizes S2 to S3. When they are replaced for the third time, the arcing chamber also has to be replaced. 3RT12 vacuum contactors can have the vacuum tubes replaced. Frame size S2 Drawing Step 1/2/3 Remove the left identification label, loosen the 2 screws on the front plate of the contactor, and remove the arc chute. 4/5 Remove the movable contact piece by gently tipping it upward and then pulling it out. 6 Loosen the screws that attach the two stationary contact pieces. 7/8 Remove the old contact pieces and screw on the new contact pieces. 9 Push in a new movable contact piece. 3 2 2 1 Procedure 6 4 5 8 7 9 10/11 12 10 Replace the arc chute of the contactor and tighten the 2 screws on the front plate. Replace the identification label. 11 12 11 Fig. 3-76: Replacing the contact piece (frame size S2) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-103 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Frame size S3 Drawing Step 2 1 Procedure 1/2 Loosen the 2 screws on the front plate of the contactor, and remove the arc chute. 3/4 Remove the movable contact piece by gently tipping it upward and then pulling it out. 5 Loosen the screws that attach the two stationary contact pieces. 6/7 Remove the old contact pieces and screw on the new contact pieces. 8 Push in a new movable contact piece. 1 5 3 4 7 6 8 9/10 Replace the arc chute of the contactor, and tighten the 2 screws on the front plate. 9 10 10 Fig. 3-77: Replacing the contact piece (frame size S3) SIRIUS System Manual 3-104 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Contact pieces The following contact pieces can be used for the different rating classes: Frame size S2 Frame size S3 3RT1034 15 kW 3RT1035 18.5 kW 3RT1036 22 kW 34 35 36 3RT1044 30 kW 3RT1045 37 kW 3RT1046 45 kW 3RT1446 140 A (AC-1) Fig. 3-78: Contact pieces SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-105 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3.6 Dimensional drawings (dimensions in mm) 3RT1. contactors / 3RH11 control relays - 3-pole Frame size S00, screw connection 5 67 106 99 4) 118 51 57.5 5 3) 2) NSB00752g 15.5 50 45 8.6 5.3 67 35 5 Fig. 3-79: 3RT1. 10 1/3RH11 contactors Screw-type terminal with surge suppressor, auxiliary switch block and attached overload relay Frame size S00, Cage Clamp connection 5 9 NSB01221 36 45 4) 5 68 50 25 37 44 47 60 5 2) 35 109 Fig. 3-80: 3RT10 1 contactors (Cage Clamp connection) with auxiliary contact block 2) Auxiliary switch block (also electronically optimized variant 3RH19 11-11N...) 3) Surge suppressor (also additional load module 3RT19 16-1GA00) 4) Drilling pattern Distance to grounded parts at the side 6 mm SIRIUS System Manual 3-106 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Frame size S0, screw connection 10 1) 45 10 b) 135 3) 5 86 a 35 60 2) NSB00753c 63 143 80 85 5 4) 15.5 86 5 Fig. 3-81: 3RT10 2 contactors, 3RT10 2 coupling contactors with surge suppressor, auxiliary contact block and installed overload relay a = 3 mm at < 240 V a = 7 mm at > 240 V b = DC 10 mm deeper than AC 1) Side-mount auxiliary contact 2) Front-mount auxiliary contact block. 1-, 2- and 4-pole (also electronically optimized design 3RH1921-.FE22) 3) Surge suppressor 4) Drilling pattern Distance to grounded parts at the side 6 mm Frame size S0, Cage Clamp connection 10 1) 10 b) 45 5 86 135 3) a 35 60 72 5 4) 143 63 2) NSB01220b 15.5 86 5 Fig. 3-82: 3RT10 2 contactors 3RT10 2 coupling contactors with surge suppressor, auxiliary contact block and installed overload relay (Cage Clamp connection) a = 0 mm with Varistor < 240 V, diode combination a = 3.5 mm with Varistor > 240 V a = 17 mm with RC-element b = DC 15 mm deeper as AC 1) Side-mount auxiliary contact 2) Front-mount auxiliary contact block (1-, 2- and 4-pole) 3) Surge suppressor 4) Drilling pattern Distance to grounded parts at the side 6 mm SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-107 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Frame size S2, screw connection a 15 10 55 b) 3) 5 159 110 45 1) 95 4) 2) NSB00754b 75 171 80 112 5 20.5 107 5 Fig. 3-83: 3RT10 3 contactors with surge suppressor, auxiliary contact block and installed overload relay Frame size S2, Cage Clamp connection 159 a 55 35 18 10 b) 15 5 14 64 3) 110 45 1) 171 75 95 72 112 5 4) 2) Test STOP RESET H A 0 NSB 01219a 1 20 107 5 Fig. 3-84: 3RT10 3 contactors (Cage Clamp connection) with surge suppressor, auxiliary contact block and installed overload relay a = 0 mm with Varistor < 240 V, diode combination a = 3.5 mm with Varistor > 240 V a = 17 mm with RC-element b = DC 15 mm deeper as AC 1) Side-mount auxiliary contact 2) Front-mount auxiliary contact block (1-, 2- and 4-pole) 3) Surge suppressor 4) Drilling pattern Distance to grounded parts at the side 6 mm SIRIUS System Manual 3-108 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Frame size S3, screw connection 13 10 10 a 70 5 b) 134 3) 183 60 1) 80 146 130 5 4) NSB00755b 100 221 2) 5) 6) 28 7 5 132 Fig. 3-85: 3RT10 4, 3RT14 46 contactors with surge suppressor, auxiliary contact blocks and installed overload relay Frame size S3, Cage Clamp connection b) a 70 45 23 10 183 13 10 5 40 86 134 3) 60 1) 5 72 146 130 4) 2) 100 224 5) 6) Test STOP RESET 0 H A NSB 01218a 7 1 28 131 5 Fig. 3-86: 3RT10 4 contactors (Cage Clamp connection) with surge suppressor, auxiliary contact blocks and installed overload relay a = 0 mm with Varistor, diode combination and < 240 V a = 3.5 mm with Varistor and > 240 V a = 17 mm with RC-element b = DC 13 mm deeper as AC 1) Side-mount auxiliary contact 2) Front-mount auxiliary contact block (1-, 2- and 4-pole) 3) Surge suppressor 4) Drilling pattern 5) Attachment to 35 mm DIN rail and 15 mm deep according to EN 50 022 or 75 mm DIN rail according to EN 50 023 6) 4 mm Allen screw Distance to grounded parts at the side 6 mm SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-109 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3RT10 coupling contactors Frame size S00 NSB00258a 4) 8.6 45 5.3 50 57.5 5 3) 5 67 35 99 Fig. 3-87: 3RT10 1. with surge suppressor Different dimensions for coupling contactors with Cage Clamp-connection: height 60 mm 3) Surge suppressor 4) Drilling pattern 3RT10 2. coupling contactor see illustration 3-96 3RT13 and 3RT15 contactors - 4-pole Frame size S00 67 5 106 99 57.5 5 2) 3) 1) NSB00757a 50 45 8.6 5.3 35 Fig. 3-88: 3RT13 1, 3RT15 1 Screw-type terminal with surge suppressor and auxiliary contact block Different dimensions for contactors with Cage Clamp-terminals: height 60 mm, mounting depth with auxiliary contact block 110 mm 1) Auxiliary contact block (also electronically optimized design 3RH19 11-1N...) 2) Surge suppressor (also additional load module 3RT19 16-1GA00) 3) Drilling pattern Distance to grounded parts at the side 6 mm Frame size S0 61 a b) 10 10 5 86 135 35 60 85 80 2) 4) NSB 00758e Fig. 3-89: 3RT13 2, 3RT15 2 with surge suppressor and auxiliary contact block a = 3 mm with < 250 V and installation of surge suppressor a = 7 mm with > 250 V and installation of surge suppressor b = DC 10 mm deeper as AC 1) Side-mount auxiliary contact (left) 2) Front-mount auxiliary contact block (max. two 1-pole auxiliary contact blocks) 3) Surge suppressor 4) Drilling pattern Distance to grounded parts at the side: 6 mm SIRIUS System Manual 3-110 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Frame size S2 b) a 73 10 15 5 3) 110 160 45 1) 4) 112 80 95 5 2) NSB00759c Fig. 3-90: 3RT13 3, 3RT15 3 with surge suppressor and auxiliary contact block a = 0 mm with Varistor < 240 V a = 3.5 mm with Varistor > 240 V a = 17 mm with RC-element and diode combination b = DC 15 mm deeper as AC 1) Side-mount auxiliary contact (right or left) 2) Front-mount auxiliary contact block (1-, 2- and 4-pole, also electronically optimized design 3RH19 21-1FE22) 3) Surge suppressor 4) Drilling pattern 5) Attachment to 35 mm DIN rail (15 mm deep) according to EN 50 022 or 75 mm DIN rail according to EN 50 023 6) 4 mm Allen screw Distance to grounded parts at the side 6 mm Frame size S3 b) 10 a 93 13 183 5 3) 134 60 5 1) 130 146 80 SIEMENS 4) 2) 5) 6) NSB 00760b Fig. 3-91: 3RT13 4 with surge suppressor and auxiliary contact block a = 0 mm with Varistor < 240 V a = 3.5 mm with Varistor > 240 V a = 17 mm with RC-element and diode combination b = DC 13 mm deeper than AC 1) Side-mount auxiliary contact (right or left) 2) Front-mount auxiliary contact block (1-, 2- and 4-pole, also electronically optimized design 3RH19 21-1FE22) 3) Surge suppressor 4) Drilling pattern 5) Attachment to 35 mm DIN rails with 15 mm depth in acc. with EN 50 022 or 75 mm DIN rails in acc. with EN 50 023 6) 4 mm Allen screw Distance to grounded parts at the side 6 mm SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-111 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3RT16 capacitor-switching contactors Frame size S00 57.5 16 36 83 92 51 NSB0_01236b 5 105 45 Fig. 3-92: 3RT16 17 Frame size S0 121 67 o5 85 72 60 18 48 100 44 5 45 130 NSB00761b Fig. 3-93: 3RT16 27 Frame size S3 22.5 90 116 167 60x130 51 18 38 104 124 150 22.5 NSB00763a 70 5 7 8 183 Fig. 3-94: 3RT16 47 SIRIUS System Manual 3-112 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3RT1/3RH11 contactors with an extended operating range Frame size S00 5 50 5 118 28 60 45 NSB00764a 35 Fig. 3-95: 3RT10 17, 3RH 11 Frame size S0 45 148 5 86 47 35 x 60 70 NSB00765a Fig. 3-96: 3RT10 2 Frame size S2 80 162 5 110 47 45 x 95 55 NSB00766a Fig. 3-97: 3RT10 3 Frame size S3 5 186 60 x 130 70 145 47 95 NSB00767a Fig. 3-98: 3RT10 4 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-113 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3RT10 contactors with electronic control module (extended operating range 0.7 to 1.25 x US) Frame sizeS0, Cage Clamp connection 61 7 119 63 77 45 NSB01384 Fig. 3-99: 3RT10 2.-3X.40-0LA2 Frame size S0, screw connection 44 61 7 116 63 77 45 NSB0_01385 Fig. 3-100: 3RT10 2.-1X.40-0LA2 Frame size S2, Cage Clamp connection 64 10 142 74 87 45 NSB01386 Fig. 3-101: 3RT10 3.-3X.40-0LA2 SIRIUS System Manual 3-114 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Frame size S2, screw connection Fig. 3-102: 3RT10 3.-1X.40-0LA2 Frame size S3, Cage Clamp connection Fig. 3-103: 3RT10 4.-3X.40-0LA2 Frame size S3, screw connection Fig. 3-104: 3RT10 4.-1X.40-0LA2 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-115 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3RT19 time-delay auxiliary contact block 5 9 NSB00254 127 143 45 Fig. 3-105: 3RT19 16-2E.., -2F.., -2G.. 5 46 NSB00772 25 46 Frame sizes S0 to S3 38 Frame size S00 73 33 3RT19 26-2E.., -2F.., -2G.. 3RT19 time-delay time relay blocks, on-delay Frame size S00 Frame sizes S0 to S3 45 4 41 50 Fig. 3-106: 3RT19 16-2 For attachment to the front of the contactor (dimensions also apply to off-delay time relay blocks) NSB00773 92 105 NSB00256 45 40 38 66 6 3RT19 26-2 Attachable on the top of the contactor (dimensions also apply to off-delay time relay blocks and to coupling links (3RH19 24-1GP11) SIRIUS System Manual 3-116 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3RT19 16-4KA soldering pin connection 45 55 67.5 11.6 5 5 5.2 8.6 8.6 8.6 8.6 1.4 A1 50 57.5 5.2 67 50 3RT1916-4KA1 attached to S00 device 71.5 57.5 71.5 18 x 2.0 A2 45 8.6 8.6 8.6 8.6 15.9 45 110 5 1.4 50 67 3RT1916-4KA2 attached to S00 device with front mount auxiliary contact block 38.5 33.5 90 45 45 67.5 A1 A1 50 57.5 5 5 5.2 8.6 8.6 8.6 8.6 10.4 8.6 8.6 8.6 8.6 5.2 20 x 2.0 1.4 50 57.5 5.2 A2 20 x 2.0 A2 8.6 8.6 8.6 8.6 10.4 8.6 8.6 8.6 8.6 5.2 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-117 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3RA13 reversing contactor combinations Frame size S00 67 50 5 NSB00774 5 8.6 90 35 7.5 5 51 67 Fig. 3-107: Reversing contactor combinations 5 Frame size S0 NSB00775 29 36 86 60 NSB00776 8 14 10 100 28 40 5 7.5 39 61 86 45 90 16 44 DC 95 Fig. 3-108: Reversing contactor combination with mechanical interlock 3RA19 24-2B, side with mechanical interlock 3RA19 24-1A, front 5 Frame size S2 120 95 NSB00777 120 13 10 10 17.5 50 5 8 36 52 110 DC 125 Fig. 3-109: Reversing contactor combination Frame size S3 12 157 130 5 NSB00778 10 12 65 22 150 5 8 46 85 134 DC147 Fig. 3-110: Reversing contactor combination SIRIUS System Manual 3-118 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Mechanical interlocks for 3RA13 combinations Frame sizes S0 to S3 Frame sizes S0 to S3 2.5 111 NC 29 36 34 112 25 55 80.5 121 122 45 10 Fig. 3-111: 3RA19 24-2B 48.5 16 44 3RA19 24-1A SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-119 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3RA14 contactor combinations for wye-delta starting Frame sizes S00 - S00 - S00 71 K4 K3 K2 NSB00779 5 135 67 143 (AC+DC) Fig. 3-112: Contactor combinations for wye-delta starting 88 Frame sizes S0 - S0 - S0 K3 K1 K2 K4 5 158 NSB00780 130 (AC) 140 (DC) Fig. 3-113: Contactor combinations for wye-delta starting without mechanical interlock 125 140 Frame sizes S2 - S2 - S0 K1 K2 K3 K4 7 NSB00781 10 150 178 169 (AC) 184 (DC) Fig. 3-114: Contactor combinations for wye-delta starting without mechanical interlock (frame sizes S2 - S2 - S0) (2) 3RT1916-4KA1 kits attached to a 3RA131 reversing contactor assembly SIRIUS System Manual 3-120 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 125 140 Frame sizes S2 - S2 - S2 K1 K3 K2 K4 7 10 169 (AC) 184 (DC) 150 198 NSB00782 Fig. 3-115: Contactor combinations for wye-delta starting 165 180 Frame sizes S3 - S3 - S2 K1 K3 7 NSB00783 K2 K4 10 150 218 194 (AC) 207 (DC) Fig. 3-116: Contactor combinations for wye-delta starting without mechanical interlock SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-121 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3.7 Technical data 3RT1 Contactor Auxiliary circuit Ratings of the auxiliary contacts acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1/EN 60 947-5-1 (VDE 0660 Part 200) The data is valid for integrated auxiliary contacts and contacts in the auxiliary switch blocks for contactor sizes S00 to S3 Contactor Frame size S00 to S3 Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 690 For laterally mountable 3RH19 21-.EA . . and 3RH19 21-.KA . . auxiliary switch blocks V max. 500 Conventional thermal current Ith = A 10 rated operational current Ie/AC-12 Load ratings with AC Rated operational current Ie/AC-15/AC-14 24 V at rated operational voltage Ue A 6 110 V A 6 125 V A 6 220 V A 6 230 V A 6 A 3 380 V A 3 400 V A 2 500 V 2 A 1 660 V ) A 1 690 V2) Load ratings with DC Rated operational current Ie/DC-12 at rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 10 60 V A 6 110 V A 3 125 V A 2 1 A 220 V 440 V 0.3 A 600 V2) A 0.15 Rated operational current Ie/DC-13 at rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 101) 60 V 2 A 110 V 1 A 125 V 0.9 A 0.3 A 220 V 0.14 A 440 V 0.1 A 600 V2) Contact reliability at 17 V, 1 mA Frequency of contact faults < 10-8 i.e. less than 1 fault per 100 million operating cycles acc. to IEC 60 947-5-4 1) DC-13: attachable auxiliary switch blocks for frame size S00: 6 A 2) With laterally attachable auxiliary switch blocks: switching capacity only up to 500 V 3RT10 contactors for switching motors General data Contactor S00 3RT1. 1. Frame size Type Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V Rated impulse strengthUimp kV 6 Safe isolation between coil and main contacts (acc. to DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 and A1 [draft 2/89]) V 400 C C -25 to +60 -55 to +80 Permissible ambient temperature For operation During storage Degree of protection in acc. with IEC 60 947-1 and DIN 40 050 Shock resistance Rectangular impulse Sine pulse 690 IP20 AC operation g/ms 7/5 and 4.2/10 DC operation g/ms 7/5 and 4.2/10 AC operation g/ms 9.8/5 and 5.9/10 DC operation g/ms 9.8/5 and 5.9/10 Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relay Main circuit Fuse-links, performance class gL/gG NH type 3NA, DIAZED type 5SB, NEOZED type 5SE - In acc. with IEC 60 947-4/EN 60 947-4 (VDE 0660 Part 102) Coordination type "2" 1) weld-free 2) Or miniature circuit breaker (up to 230 V) with C characteristic (Short-circuit current 1 kA, coordination type 1) A A A A 35 20 10 10 SIRIUS System Manual 3-122 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3RT1 01 contactors for switching motors Frame size Type Contactor S00 3RT1.1. Auxiliary circuit Fuse-links, performance class gL/gG A 10 A 6 DIAZED type 5SB, NEOZED type 5SE (weld-free fusing at Ik 1 kA) or miniature circuit breaker (up to 240V) with C characteristic (Short-circuit current Ik < 400 A) 1) Corresponds to section from IEC 60 947-4 (VDE 0660 Part 102): Coord. type 1: The destruction of the contactor and the overload relay is permissible. The contactor and/or overload relay must be replaced, if necessary. 2) Testing according to IEC 60 947-4-1 Coord. type 2 The overload relay must not be damaged. Contact welding on the contactor is permissible, if it can be easily separated again Frame size Type Contactor S00 3RT1.1. Control Operating range of the magnet coils AC at 50 Hz: at 60 Hz: DC at +50 C: 0.8 to 1.1 x Us at +60 C: 0.85 to 1.1 x Us Power input of the magnet coils (with coil in cold state and 1.0 x Us) Standard version AC operation Making capacity cos DC operation Contactor 0.8 to 1.1 x Us 0.85 to 1.1 x Us Hz 50/60 VA Holding power cos VA 27 0.8 4.4 0.27 Making capacity = Holding power W 3.3 Frame size Type /24.3 /0.75 /3.4 /0.27 S00 3RT10 15 For USA and Canada 50 60 26.4 0.81 4.7 0.26 31.7 0.77 5.1 0.27 S00 3RT10 16 S00 3RT10 17 Main Circuit Current carrying capacity with alternating current Utilization category AC-1, switching of resistive loads Rated operational currents Ie at 40 C to 690 V at 60 C to 690 V A A 18 16 22 20 22 20 6.3 11 13.8 19 7.5 13 17 22 7.5 13 17 22 Rated power of three-phase loads1) cos = 0.95 (at 60 C) at 230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V kW kW kW kW Minimum conductor cross-section loaded withIe at 40 C 60 C mm2 mm2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 to 400 V 500 V 690 V A A A 7 5 4 9 6.5 5.2 12 9 6.3 Utilization category AC-2 and AC-3 Rated operational currents Ie Rated power of motors with slip-ring or squirrel-cage rotor at 50 Hz and 60 Hz Thermal stress Power loss per conducting path 230 V kW 2.2 3 3 400 V kW 3 4 5.5 500 V kW 3.5 4.5 5.5 690 V kW 4 5.5 10-s-current2) at Ie/AC-3 A W 56 0.42 72 0.7 5.5 96 1.24 1) Resistance-heated industrial furnaces and electric heating appliances, etc. (increased current consumption at startup of heating taken into account). 2) In acc. with VDE 0660 Part 102, rated value for different startup conditions see Catalog section 4. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-123 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3RT1 01 contactors for switching motors Contactor Frame size Type S00 3RT1. 15 S00 3RT1. 16 S00 3RT1. 17 Main Circuit Current carrying capacity with alternating current Utilization category AC-4 Rated operational current Ie (at Ia = 6 x Ie) to 400 V A 6.5 8.5 8.5 Rated power of squirrel-cage motors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz at 400 V kW 3 4 4 to 400 V 690 V A A 2.6 1.8 4.1 3.3 4.1 3.3 at 230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V kW kW kW kW 0.67 1.15 1.45 1.15 1.1 2 2 2.5 1.1 2 2 2.5 for contact service life of approximately 200 000 operating cycles: Rated operational currents Ie Load ratings with DC Utilization category DC-1, switching of resistive loads (L/R 1 ms) Rated operational current Ie (at 60 C) Number of conducting paths in series connection to 24 V 60 V 110 V A A A 220 V 440 V 600 V A A A 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 15 15 1.5 15 15 8.4 15 15 15 20 20 2.1 20 20 12 20 20 20 20 20 2.1 20 20 12 20 20 20 0.6 0.42 0.42 1.2 1.6 0.5 15 0.9 0.7 0.8 0.6 0.6 1.6 0.8 0.7 20 1.3 1 0.8 0.6 0.6 1.6 0.8 0.7 20 1.3 1 Utilization category DC-3 and DC-5, shunt and series motors (L/R 15 ms) Rated operational current Ie (at 60 C) Number of conducting paths in series connection 1 to 24 V 60 V 110 V A A A 220 V 440 V 600 V A A A 2 3 15 15 15 0.35 3.5 15 0.1 0.25 15 - - - - - - 1.2 0.14 0.14 1 2 3 20 20 20 0.5 5 20 0.15 0.35 20 - - - - - - 1.5 0.2 0.2 1 2 3 20 20 20 0.5 5 20 0.15 0.35 20 - - - - - - 1.5 0.2 0.2 Operating frequency Operating frequency z in operating cycles/hour Contactors without overload relays AC-/DC operation 1/h 10 000 Rated operation Dependence of the operating frequency z' from the operating current I' and operating voltage U': according to AC-1 1/h 1 000 according to AC-2 1/h 750 according to AC-3 1/h 750 according to AC-4 1/h 250 1/h 15 I e 400 V 1.5 z' = z ----- ------------- 1/h I U Contactors with overload relay (average value) no-load operating frequency SIRIUS System Manual 3-124 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3RT10 2 contactors for switching motors Contactor Frame size Type S0 3RT10 2. General data Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 690 Safe isolation between coil and main contacts (acc. to DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 and A1 [draft 2/89]) V 400 C C -25 to +60 -55 to +80 Permissible ambient temperature for operation in storage Degree of protection in acc. with IEC 60 947-1 and DIN 40 050 Shock resistance Rectangular impulse Sine pulse front: IP20 terminal space: IP00 AC operation g/ms DC operation g/ms 10/5 and 7.5/10 AC operation g/ms 12.5/5 and 7.8/10 DC operation g/ms 15/5 and 10/10 Short-circuit protection for Contactors without overload relay Contactor 8.2/5 and 4.9/10 Short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relay see chapter 4. Short-circuit protection for weld-free contactors see chapter 5 (overload - and short-circuit protection only with 3RV10 circuit breaker/ MSP). Short-circuit protection for fuseless loadfeeders see chapter 5. Frame size Type S0 3RT10 23, 3RT10 24, 3RT10 25 S0 3RT10 26 Main Circuit Fuse-links, performance class gL/gG NH type 3NA, DIAZED type 5SB, NEOZED type 5SE with fuses - according to IEC 60 947-4/EN 60 947-4 (VDE 0660 part 102) Coord. type 1 1) A 63 100 Coord. type 2 1) A 25 35 weld-free2) A 10 16 A 25 32 A 10 10 A 10 10 or miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic (Short-circuit current 3 kA, Coord. type 1) 1) Auxiliary circuit Fuse-links, performance class gL/gG DIAZED type 5SB, NEOZED type 5SE (weld-free fusing at Ik 1 kA) or miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic (Short-circuit current Ik < 400 A) Contactor Frame size Type S0 3RT10 2. Control Operating range of the magnet coils AC/DC 0.8 to 1.1 x Us Power input of the magnet coils (coil in cold state and at 1.0 x Us) AC operation DC operation Standard version For USA and Canada Hz 50 50/60 50 60 Making capacity cos VA 61 0.82 64 /63 0.72 / 0.74 61 0.82 69 0.76 Holding power cos VA 7.8 0.24 8.4 / 6.8 0.24 / 0.28 7.8 0.24 7.5 0.28 Making capacity = Holding power W 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4 1) Corresponds to section from IEC 60 947-4 (VDE 0660 Part 102): Coord. type 1: The destruction of the contactor and the overload relay is permissible. The contactor and/or overload relay must be replaced, if necessary. Coord. type 2: The overload relay must not be damaged. Contact welding on the contactor is permissible, if it can be easily separated again from the contactor. 2) Test conditions in acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1. weld-free 3RT11 contactors, see Chapter 5 (overload and short-circuit protection only with the 3RV10 circuit breaker). SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-125 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3RT10 2 contactors for switching motors Contactor Frame size Type S0 3RT10 23 S0 3RT10 24 S0 3RT10 25 S0 3RT10 26 Main Circuit Current carrying capacity with alternating current Utilization category AC-1, switching of resistive loads Rated operational currents Ie Rated power of three-phase loads1) cos = 0.95 (at 60 C) Minimum conductor cross-section loaded with Ie at 40 C to 690 V at 60 C to 690 V at 230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V A A 40 35 40 35 40 35 40 35 kW kW kW kW 13.3 23 29 40 10 13.3 23 29 40 10 13.3 23 29 40 10 13.3 23 29 40 10 10 10 10 10 at 40 C mm2 60 C mm2 1) Resistance-heated industrial furnaces and electric heating appliances, etc. (increased current consumption at startup of heating taken into account). Utilization category AC-2 and AC-3 Rated operational currents Ie to 400 V 500 V 690 V A A A 9 6.5 5.2 Rated power of motors with slip-ring or squirrel-cage rotor at 50 Hz and 60 Hz at 110 V 120 V 127 V 200 V 220 V kW kW kW kW kW 1.1 1.1 1.1 2.2 3 1.5 1.5 1.5 3 3 2.2 2.2 2.2 4 4 3 3 3 5.5 5.5 230 V 240 V 380 V kW kW kW 3 3 4 3 3 5.5 4 4 7.5 5.5 5.5 11 400 V 415 V 440 V kW kW kW 4 4 4 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 9 11 11 11 460 V 500 V 575 V kW kW kW 4 4.5 4.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 9 10 10 11 11 11 660 V 690 V kW kW 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 11 11 11 11 A 80 150 200 Thermal stress Power loss per conducting path 10-s-current2) at Ie/AC-3 W Rated operational current Ie to 400 V at 400 V A kW Rated operational currents Ie to 400 V 690 V Rated power of squirrel-cage motors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 12 12 9 110 0.4 17 17 13 25 18 13 0.5 0.9 1.6 8.5 4 12.5 5.5 15.5 7.5 15.5 7.5 A A 4.1 3.3 5.5 5.5 7.7 7.7 9 9 at 110 V 230 V kW kW 0.5 1.1 0.73 1.5 1 2 1.2 2.5 400 V kW 2 2.6 3.5 4.4 500 V kW 2 3.3 4.6 5.6 Utilization category AC-4 (at Ia = 6 x Ie) (contact service life of approximately 200 000 operation cycles 690 V kW 2.5 4.6 6 7.7 1) Resistance-heated industrial furnaces and electric heating appliances, etc. (increased current consumption at startup of heating taken into account). 2) In acc. with VDE 0660 Part 102, rated value for different startup conditions see Catalog section 4. SIRIUS System Manual 3-126 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3RT10 2 contactors for switching motors Load ratings with DC Contactor Frame size Type S0 3RT10 23, 3RT10 24 S0 3RT10 25 S0 3RT10 26 Utilization category DC-1, switching of resistive loads (L/R 1 ms) Rated operational current Ie (at 60 C) Number of conducting paths in series connection to 24 V 60 V 110 V A A A 220 V 440 V 600 V A A A 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 35 20 4.5 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 20 4.5 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 20 4.5 35 35 35 35 35 35 1 0.4 0.25 5 1 0.8 35 2.9 1.4 1 0.4 0.25 5 1 0.8 35 2.9 1.4 1 0.4 0.25 5 1 0.8 35 2.9 1.4 Utilization category DC-3 and DC-5, shunt and series motors (L/R 15 ms) Rated operational current Ie (at 60 C) Number of conducting paths in series connection to 24 V 60 V 110 V A A A 220 V 440 V 600 V A A A 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 20 5 2.5 35 35 15 35 35 35 20 5 2.5 35 35 15 35 35 35 20 5 2.5 35 35 15 35 35 35 1 0.09 0.06 3 10 0.27 0.6 0.16 0.6 1 0.09 0.06 3 10 0.27 0.6 0.16 0.6 1 0.09 0.06 3 10 0.27 0.6 0.16 0.6 Operating frequency Operating frequency z in operating cycles/hour Contactors without overload relays Dependence of the operating frequency z' from the operating current and operating voltage U': I e 400 V 1.5 z' = z ----- ------------- 1/h I U AC DC AC DC AC DC 5000 1500 5000 1500 5000 1500 no-load operating frequency 1/h AC/DC AC/DC AC/DC with AC-1 with AC-2 with AC-3 with AC-4 1/h 1/h 1/h 1/h 1000 1000 1000 300 1000 1000 1000 300 1000 750 750 250 1/h 15 15 15 Contactors with overload relay (average value) Use in stator circuits of slip-ring motors (AC-2) Rel. OD Stator currents Voltages to 500 V 20 % 40 A 40 A 54 A 40 % 40 A 40 A 43 A 60 % 38 A 38 A 38 A 80 % 35 A 35 A 35 A 20 % 26 A 26 A 26 A 40 % 26 A 26 A 26 A 60 % 26 A 26 A 26 A 80 % 26 A 26 A 26 A Rel. OD Stator currents Voltages to 690 V Use as rotor contactors of slip-ring motors Rel. OD Locked rotor voltages at Starting up to 1380 V Variable speed up to 690 V Plugging up to 690 V Loading 10 % 40 A 40 A 75 A 20 % 40 A 40 A 75 A 40 % 40 A 40 A 67 A 60 % 40 A 40 A 60 A 80 % 40 A 40 A 54 A 100 % 40 A 40 A 54 A -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Rel. ED Locked rotor voltages at Starting up to 1500 V Variable speed up to 750 V Plugging up to 750 V 10 % 20 % 40 % 60 % 80 % Loading 100 % Important! The shown current values are good for Delta switching of the contacts. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-127 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3RT10 3 contactors for switching motors Contactor Frame size Type S2 3RT10 3. General data Mechanical life Basic units Basic unit with attached auxiliary switch block Electronically optimized auxiliary switch block operat- 10 Mio. ing 10 Mio. cycles 5 Mio. Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 690 Safe isolation between coil and main contacts (acc. to DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 and A1 [draft 2/89]) V 400 C C -25 to +60 -55 to +80 Permissible ambient temperature for operation in storage Degree of protection in acc. with IEC 60 947-1 and DIN 40 050 Shock resistance Contactor front: IP20 terminal space: IP00 Rectangular impulse AC and DC operation g/ms 10/5 and 5/10 Sine pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 15/5 and 8/10 Frame size Type S2 3RT10 34 Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relay S2 3RT10 35 S2 3RT10 36 Short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relay see chapter 4. Short-circuit protection for weld-free contactors see chapter 5 (overload - and short-circuit protection only by 3RV10 circuit breaker/MSP). Short-circuit protection for fuseless loadfeeders see chapter 5. Main Circuit Fuse-links, performance class gL/gG NH type 3NA, DIAZED type 5SB, NEOZED type 5SE - according to IEC 60 947-4/EN 60 947-4 (VDE 0660 part 102) Coord. type 1 1) A 125 Coord. type 2 1) A 63 63 80 weld-free2) A 16 16 50 A 10 10 10 A 10 10 10 125 160 Auxiliary circuit Fuse-links, performance class gL/gG DIAZED type 5SB, NEOZED type 5SE (weld-free fusing at Ik 1 kA) or miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic (Short-circuit current Ik < 400 A) Control Operating range of the magnet coils AC/DC 0.8 to 1.1 x Us Power input of the magnet coils (with coil in cold state and at 1.0 x Us) AC operation Standard version Hz 50 50/60 50 50/60 Making capacity cos VA 104 0.78 127 /113 0.73/ 0.69 145 0.79 170 /155 0.76/ 0.72 Holding power cos VA 9.7 0.42 11.3 / 9.5 0.42/ 0.42 12.5 0.36 15 / 11.8 0.35/ 0.38 For USA and Canada Hz 50 60 50 60 Making capacity cos VA 108 0.76 120 0.7 150 0.77 166 0.71 Holding power cos VA 9.6 0.42 12.5 0.35 12.6 0.37 10.1 0.42 DC operation Making capacity = Holding power W 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 1) Corresponds to section from IEC 60 947-4 (VDE 0660 Part 102): Coord. type 1: The destruction of the contactor and the overload relay is permissible. The contactor and/or overload relay must be replaced, if necessary. Coord. type 2: The overload relay must not be damaged. Contact welding on the contactor is permissible, if it can be easily separated again from the contactor. 2) Test conditions in acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1 weld-free 3RT11 contactors, see Chapter 5 (overload and short-circuit protection only with the 3RV10 circuit breaker). SIRIUS System Manual 3-128 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3RT10 3 contactors for switching motors Contactor Frame size Type S2 3RT10 34 S2 3RT10 35 S2 3RT10 36 Main Circuit Current carrying capacity with alternating current Utilization category AC-1, switching of resistive loads Rated operational currents Ie at 40 C to 690 V at 60 C to 690 V Rated power of three-phase loads1) cos = 0.95 (at 60 C) Minimum conductor cross-section loaded with Ie at 230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V A A 50 45 60 55 kW kW kW kW 18 31 39 54 16 22 38 46 66 16 10 16 at 40 C mm2 60 C mm2 Utilization category AC-2 and AC-3 Rated operational currents Ie to 400 V 500 V 690 V A A A Rated power of motors with slip-ring or squirrel-cage rotor at 50 Hz and 60 Hz at 127 V 200 V 220 V kW kW kW 230 V 240 V 380 V Thermal stress Power loss per conducting path 32 32 20 40 40 24 50 50 24 4 7.5 7.5 5.5 7.5 11 7.5 11 11 kW kW kW 7.5 7.5 15 11 11 18.5 15 15 22 400 V 415 V 440 V kW kW kW 15 15 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 22 22 22 460 V 500 V 575 V kW kW kW 18.5 18.5 18.5 22 22 22 30 30 22 660 V 690 V kW kW 18.5 18.5 22 22 22 22 400 400 10-s-current2) A at Ie/AC-3 W Rated operational current Ie Rated power of squirrel-cage motors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz for contact service life of approximately 200 000 operating cycles: to 400 V at 400 V A kW Rated operational currents Ie to 400 V 690 V A A 320 1.8 2.6 5 29 15 35 18.5 41 22 15.6 15.6 18.5 18.5 24 24 Utilization category AC-4 (at Ia = 6 x Ie) at 230 V kW 4.7 5.4 7.3 400 V 500 V 690 V kW kW kW 8.2 9.8 13 9.5 11.8 15.5 12.6 15.8 21.8 1) Resistance-heated industrial furnaces and electric heating appliances, etc. (increased current consumption at startup of heating taken into account). 2) In acc. with VDE 0660 Part 102, rated value for different startup conditions see Catalog section 4. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-129 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3RT1 03 contactors for switching motors Load ratings with DC Contactor Frame size Type S2 3RT10 34 S2 3RT10 35 S2 3RT10 36 Utilization category DC-1, switching of resistive loads (L/R 1 ms) Rated operational current Ie (at 60 C) Number of conducting paths in series connection to 24 V 60 V 110 V A A A 220 V 440 V 600 V A A A 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 45 20 4.5 45 45 45 45 45 45 55 23 4.5 55 45 45 55 45 45 50 23 4.5 50 45 45 50 45 45 1 0.4 0.25 5 1 0.8 45 2.9 1.4 1 0.4 0.25 5 1 0.8 45 2.9 1.4 1 0.4 0.25 5 1 0.8 45 2.9 1.4 Utilization category DC-3 and DC-5, shunt and series motors (L/R 15 ms) Rated operational current Ie (at 60 C) Number of conducting paths in series connection to 24 V 60 V 110 V A A A 220 V 440 V 600 V A A A 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 35 6 2.5 45 45 25 45 45 45 35 6 2.5 55 45 25 55 55 55 35 6 2.5 50 45 25 50 50 50 1 0.1 0.06 5 25 0.27 0.6 0.16 0.35 1 0.1 0.06 5 25 0.27 0.6 0.16 0.35 1 0.1 0.06 5 25 0.27 0.6 0.16 0.35 Operating frequency Operating frequency z in operating cycles/hour Contactors without overload relays no-load operating frequency 1/h AC DC AC DC AC DC 5000 1500 5000 1500 5000 1500 AC/DC AC/DC AC/DC from the operating current I' and operating voltage U': with AC-1 1/h 1200 1200 1000 with AC-2 1/h 750 600 400 with AC-3 1/h 1000 1000 800 with AC-4 1/h 250 300 300 1/h 15 15 15 20 % 69 A 85 A 77 A 40 % 55 A 67 A 61 A 60 % 49 A 60 A 55 A 80 % 45 A 55 A 50 A 20 % 62 A 80 A 77 A 40 % 55 A 67 A 61 A 60 % 49 A 60 A 55 A 80 % 45 A 55 A 50 A Dependence of the operating frequency z' I e 400 V 1.5 z' = z ----- ------------- 1/h I U Contactors with overload relay (average value) Use in stator circuits of slip-ring motors (AC-2) Rel. OD Stator currents Voltages to 500 V Rel. OD Stator currents Voltages to 690 V Use as rotor contactors of slip-ring motors Rel. OD Locked rotor voltages at Starting up to 1380 V Variable speed up to 690 V Plugging up to 690 V Loading 10 % 115 A 135 A 150 A 20 % 106 A 131 A 118 A 40 % 86 A 106 A 96 A 60 % 77 A 95 A 86 A 80 % 70 A 86 A 78 A 100 % 70 A 86 A 78 A -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Rel. OD Locked rotor voltages at Starting up to 1500 V Variable speed up to 750 V Plugging up to 750 V 10 % 20 % 40 % 60 % 80 % Loading 100 % Important! The shown current values are good for Delta switching of the contacts. SIRIUS System Manual 3-130 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3RT10 4 contactors for switching motors Contactor Frame size Type S3 3RT10 4. General data Mechanical life Basic units Basic unit with attached auxiliary switch block Electronically optimized auxiliary switch block operat- 10 Mio. ing 10 Mio. cycles 5 Mio. Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 1000 Safe isolation between coil and main contacts (acc. to DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 and A1 [draft 2/89]) V 690 Permissible ambient temperature for operation in storage C C Degree of protection in acc. with IEC 60 947-1 and DIN 40 050 Shock resistance Contactor -25 to +60 -55 to +80 front: IP20 terminal space: IP00 Rectangular impulse AC and DC operation g/ms 6.8/5 and 4/10 Sine pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 10.6/5 and 6.2/10 Frame size Type S3 3RT10 44 Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relay S3 3RT10 45 S3 3RT10 46 Short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relay see chapter 4. Short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders see chapter 5. Main Circuit Fuse-links, performance class gL/gG NH type 3NA, DIAZED type 5SB, NEOZED type 5SE - according to IEC 60 947-4/EN 60 947-4 (VDE 0660 part 102) Coord. type 1 1) A 250 250 250 Coord. type 2 1) A 125 160 160 weld-free 2) A 63 100 100 A 10 10 10 Auxiliary circuit Fuse-links, performance class gL/gG (weld-free fusing at Ik 1 kA) DIAZED type 5SB, NEOZED type 5SE 10 10 10 or miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic (Short-circuit current Ik < 400 A) A 1) Corresponds to section from IEC 60 947-4 (VDE 0660 Part 102): Coord. type 1: The destruction of the contactor and the overload relay is permissible. The contactor and/or overload relay must be replaced, if necessary. Coord. type 2: The overload relay must not be damaged. Contact welding on the contactor is permissible, if it can be easily separated again from the contactor. 2) Test conditions in acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1. Contactor Frame size Type S3 3RT10 44 S3 3RT10 45 S3 3RT10 46 Control Operating range of the magnet coils AC/DC 0.8 to 1.1 x Us Power input of the magnet coils (with coil in cold state and at 1.0 x Us) AC operation Standard version Hz 50 50/60 Making capacity cos VA 218 0.61 247 /211 270 0.62/ 0.57 0.68 Holding power cos VA 21 0.26 25 / 18 0.27/ 0.3 50 22 0.27 50/60 298 /274 0.7/ 0.62 27 / 20 0.29/ 0.31 For USA and Canada DC operation Hz 50 60 50 60 Making capacity cos VA 218 0.61 232 0.55 270 0.68 300 0.52 Holding power cos VA 21 0.26 20 0.28 22 0.27 21 0.29 Making capacity = Holding power W 15 15 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-131 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3RT10 4 Contactors for switching motors Contactor Frame size Type S3 3RT10 44 S3 3RT10 45 S3 3RT10 46 Main Circuit Current carrying capacity with alternating current Utilization category AC-1, switching of resistive loads Rated operational currents Ie at 40 C to 690 V 1000 V at 60 C to 690 V 1000 V Rated power of three-phase loads 1) cos = 0.95 (at 60 C) Minimum conductor cross-section loaded with Ie at 230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V A A A A 100 50 90 40 120 60 100 50 120 70 100 60 kW kW kW kW kW 34 59 74 102 66 35 38 66 82 114 82 50 38 66 82 114 98 50 35 35 35 at 40 C mm2 60 C mm2 Utilization category AC-2 and AC-3 Rated operational currents Ie to 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V A A A A 65 65 47 25 80 80 58 30 95 95 58 30 Rated power of motors with slip-ring or squirrel-cage rotor at 50 Hz and 60 Hz at 230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V kW kW kW kW kW 18.5 30 37 55 30 22 37 45 55 37 22 45 55 55 37 760 760 Thermal stress Power loss per conducting path 10-s-current2) with Ie/AC-3 A W 600 4.6 7.7 10.8 Utilization category AC-4 at (Ia = 6 x Ie) Rated operational current Ie to 400 V A 55 66 80 Rated power of squirrel-cage motors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz at 400 V kW 30 37 45 Rated operational currents Ie to 400 V 690 V 1000 V A A A 28 28 20 34 34 23 42 42 23 Rated power of squirrel-cage motors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz at 230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V kW kW kW kW kW 8.7 15.1 18.4 25.4 22 10.4 17.9 22.4 30.9 30 12 22 27 38 30 for contact service life of approximately 200 000 operating cycles: 1) Resistance-heated industrial furnaces and electric heating appliances, etc. (increased current consumption at startup of heating taken into account). 2) In acc. with VDE 0660 Part 102, rated value for different startup conditions see Catalog section 4 SIRIUS System Manual 3-132 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3RT10 4 contactors for switching motors Contactor Frame size Type S3 3RT10 44 S3 3RT10 45 S3 3RT10 46 Load ratings with DC Utilization category DC-1, switching of resistive loads (L/R 1 ms) Rated operational current Ie (at 60 C) Number of conducting paths in series connection to 24 V 60 V 110 V A A A 220 V 440 V 600 V A A A 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 90 23 4.5 90 90 90 90 90 90 100 60 9 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 60 9 100 100 100 100 100 100 10 1.8 1 80 4.5 2.6 1 0.4 0.26 5 1 0.8 70 2.9 1.4 2 0.6 0.4 10 1.8 1 80 1.8 1 2 0.6 0.4 Utilization category DC-3 and DC-5, shunt and series motors (L/R 15 ms) Rated operational current Ie (at 60 C) Number of conducting paths in series connection to 24 V 60 V 110 V A A A 220 V 440 V 600 V A A A 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 40 6 2.5 90 90 90 90 90 90 40 6.5 2.5 100 100 100 100 100 100 40 6.5 2.5 100 100 100 100 100 100 1 0.15 0.06 7 35 0.42 0.8 0.16 0.35 1 0.15 0.06 7 35 0.42 0.8 0.16 0.35 1 0.15 0.06 7 35 0.42 0.8 0.16 0.35 Operating frequency Operating frequency z in operating cycles/hour Contactors without overload relays Dependence of the operating frequency z' from the operating current I' and operating voltage U': I e 400 V 1.5 z' = z ----- ------------- 1/h I U AC DC AC DC AC DC 5000 1000 5000 1000 5000 1000 no-load operating frequency 1/h AC/DC AC/DC with AC-1 1/h 1000 900 900 with AC-2 1/h 400 400 350 with AC-3 1/h 1000 1000 850 with AC-4 1/h 300 300 250 1/h 15 15 15 20 % 139 A 154 A 154 A 40 % 110 A 122 A 122 A 60 % 98 A 109 A 109 A 80 % 90 A 100 A 100 A AC/DC Contactors with overload relay (average value) Use in stator circuits of slip-ring motors (AC-2) Rel. OD Stator currents Voltages to 500 V Rel. ED Stator currents Voltages to 690 V 20 % 115 A 137 A 137 A 40 % 110 A 122 A 122 A 60 % 98 A 109 A 109 A 80 % 90 A 100 A 100 A Use as rotor contactors of slip-ring motors Rel. OD Locked rotor voltages at Starting up to 1380 V Variable speed up to 690 V Plugging up to 690 V Loading 10 % 235 A 312 A 312 A 20 % 213 A 237 A 237 A 40 % 172 A 192 A 192 A 60 % 154 A 172 A 172 A 80 % 140 A 156 A 156 A 100 % 140 A 156 A 156 A Rel. OD Locked rotor voltages at Starting up to 1500 V Variable speed up to 750 V Plugging up to 750 V 10 % 235 A 312 A 312 A 20 % 213 A 237 A 237 A 40 % 172 A 192 A 192 A 60 % 154 A 172 A 172 A 80 % 140 A 156 A 156 A 140 A 156 A 156 A Loading 100 % Important! The shown current values are good for Delta switching of the contacts. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-133 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3RT14 contactors 3-pole Contactor Frame size Type S3 3RT14 46 General data Mechanical life Operating cycles 10 Mio. Service life Utilization category AC-1 at Ie Operating cycles 0.5 Mio. Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V Rated impulse strength Uimp kV Safe isolation between coil and main contacts (acc. to DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 and A1 [draft 2/89]) V Permissible ambient temperature for operation in storage C C Degree of protection in acc. with IEC 60 947-1 and DIN 40 050 1000 6 690 -25 to +60 -55 to +80 front: IP20 terminal space: IP00 Shock resistance Rectangular impulse at AC and DC operation g/ms 6.8/5 and 4/10 Sine pulse at AC and DC operation g/ms 10.6/5 and 6.2/10 Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relay Main Circuit Fuse-links, performance class gL/gG Coord. type 1 1) A 250 Coord. type 2 1) A 250 Fuse-links, performance class gL/gG (weld-free fusing at Ik 1 kA) DIAZED type 5SB, NEOZED type 5SE A A 10 10 Without miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic (Ik < 400 A) A 10 NH, type 3NA Fuse-links, performance class gR SITOR, type 3NE Auxiliary circuit Control Operating range of the magnet coils AC/DC 0.8 to 1.1 x Us Power input of the magnet coils (with coil in cold state and 1.0 x Us) AC operation Standard version For USA and Canada Hz 50 50/60 50 60 Making capacity cos VA 270 0.68 298 /274 0.7 / 0.62 270 0.68 300 0.52 Holding power cos VA 22 0.27 27 / 20 0.29 / 0.31 22 0.27 21 0.29 DC operation Making capacity = Holding power W 15 15 15 15 1) Corresponds to section from IEC 60 947-4 (VDE 0660 Part 102): Coord. type 1: The destruction of the contactor and the overload relay is permissible. The contactor and/or overload relay must be replaced, if necessary. Coord. type 2: The overload relay must not be damaged. Contact welding on the contactor is permissible, if it can be easily separated again from the contactor. SIRIUS System Manual 3-134 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3RT14 contactors 3-pole Contactor Frame size Type S3 3RT14 46 Main Circuit Current carrying capacity with alternating current Utilization category AC-1, switching of resistive loads Rated operational currents Ie at 40 C to 690 V at 60 C to 690 V at 1000 V Rated power of three-phase loads cos = 0.95 (at 60 C) at 230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V A A A 140 130 60 kW kW kW kW kW 50 86 107 148 98 50 at 40 C mm2 at 60 C mm2 Minimum conductor cross-section loaded with Ie 50 Utilization category AC-2 and AC-3 at a service life of 1.3 Mio. operating cycles Rated operational current Ie to 690 V A 44 Rated power of motors with slip-ring or squirrel-cage rotor at 50 Hz and 60 Hz (at 60 C) at 230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V kW kW kW kW 12.7 22 29.9 38.2 Power loss per conducting path at Ie/AC-1 W 12.5 Load ratings with DC Utilization category DC-1, switching of resistive loads L/R 1 ms) Number of conducting paths in series connection Rated operational currents Ie (at 60 C) to 24 V 60 V 110 V A A A 220 V 440 V 600 V A A A 1 2 3 130 80 12 130 130 130 130 130 130 2.5 0.8 0.48 13 2.4 1.3 130 6 3.4 Utilization category DC-3 and DC-5, shunt and series motors Number of conducting paths in series connection Rated operational currents Ie (at 60 C) 1 to 24 V 60 V 110 V A A A 6 3 1.25 220 V 440 V 600 V A A A 0.35 0.15 0.1 2 3 130 130 130 130 130 130 1.75 0.42 0.27 4 0.8 0.45 Operating frequency Operating frequency z in operating cycles/hour AC operation DC operation Contactors without overload relay no-load operating frequency 1/h 5000 1000 Rated operation according to AC-1 according to AC-3 1/h 1/h 650 1000 650 1000 Dependence of the operating frequency z' from the operating current I' and operating voltage U': Ie 400 V 1.5 1/h z' = z ----- -------------- I U SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-135 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3RT13 contactors 4-pole (4 NO) for switching of resistive loads Contactor Frame size Type S00 3RT13 16/17 S0 3RT13 25/26 S2 3RT13 36 S3 3RT13 44 S3 3RT13 46 General data Mechanical life Operating 30 Mio. cycles Service life at Ie/AC-1 Operating ca. 0.5 Mio. cycles Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) Permissible ambient temperature for operation in storage V 690 C C -25 to +60 -55 to +80 Degree of protection in acc. with IEC 60 947-1 and DIN 40 050 10 Mio. front: IP20 front: IP20 terminal space: terminal space: IP20 IP00 Short-circuit of contactors without overload relays Main Circuit Fuse-links, performance class gL/gG NH type 3NA, DIAZED type 5SB, NEOZED type 5SE - according to IEC 60 947-4/ EN 60 947-4 (VDE 0660 part 102) Contactor Coord. type 1 1) A 35 63 160 250 Coord. type 2 1) A 20 25/35 63 125 160 weld-free 2) A 10 16 50 63 100 S0 3RT13 25/26 S2 3RT13 36 S3 3RT13 44 Frame size Type S00 3RT13 16/17 250 S3 3RT13 46 Control Operating range of the magnet coils AC at 50 0.8 - 1.1 x Us AC/DC: 0.8 - 1.1 x Us Hz: at 60 0.85 - 1.1 x Us Hz: DC at 0.8 - 1.1 x Us +50 C: at 0.85 - 1.1 x Us +60 C: Power input of the magnet coils (coil in cold state and at 1.0 x Us) AC operation Making capacity Hz 50/60 50 50/60 50 50/60 VA 26.5/24.3 61 145 0.82 170/155 270 0.76/0.72 0.68 298/274 0.72/0.62 0.79/0.75 64/63 0.82 0.74 4.4/3.4 7.8 15/11.8 27/ 20 0.27/0.27 0.24 cos Holding power cos VA 0.79 8.4/ 12.5 6.8 0.24/0.28 0.36 50 50/60 22 0.35/0.38 0.27 0.29/0.31 DC operation Making capacity = Holding power W 3.3 5.6 13.3 15 1) Corresponds to section from IEC 60 947-4 (VDE 0660 Part 102): Coord. type 1: The destruction of the contactor and the overload relay is permissible. The contactor and/or overload relay must be replaced, if necessary. Coord. type 2: The overload relay must not be damaged. Contact welding on the contactor is permissible, if it can be easily separated again from the contactor. 2) Test conditions in acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1. SIRIUS System Manual 3-136 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3RT13 contactors 4-pole (4 NO) for switching of resistive loads Contactor Frame size Type S00 3RT13 16 S00 3RT13 17 S0 3RT13 25 S0 3RT13 26 S2 3RT13 36 S3 3RT13 44 S3 3RT13 46 Main Circuit Current carrying capacity with alternating current Utilization category AC-1, switching of resistive loads Rated operational currents Ie (at 40 C) (at 60 C) Rated power of three-phase loads cos = 0.95 (at 40 C) Minimum conductor cross-section loaded with Ie to 690 V to 690 V A A 18 16 22 20 35 30 40 35 60 55 110 100 140 120 at 230 V 400 V kW kW 7 12 8.5 14.5 12.5 22 15 26 23 39 42 72 53 92 10 10 16 50 50 17 25 26 5.5 11 5.5 11 mm2 2.5 at 400 V A 9 at 230 V 400 V kW kW 3 4 at 40 C and 60 C 2.5 Utilization category AC-2 and AC-3 Rated operational currents Ie (at 60 C) Rated power of slip-ring or squirrel-cage motors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz Contactor Frame size Type 12 3 5.5 4 7.5 S00 3RT13 16 S00 3RT13 17 S0 3RT13 25/26 Load ratings with DC Utilization category DC-1, switching of resistive loads (L/R 1 ms) Rated operational currents Ie (at 40 C) Number of conducting paths in series connection to 24 V 60 V 110 V 220 V 440 V A A A A A 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 18 18 2.1 0.8 0.6 18 18 12 1.6 0.8 18 18 18 18 1.3 18 18 18 18 1.3 22 22 2.1 0.8 0.6 22 22 12 1.6 0.8 22 22 22 22 1.3 22 22 22 22 1.3 35 20 4.5 1 0.4 35 35 35 5 1 35 35 35 35 2.9 35 35 35 35 2.9 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 18 18 18 1.5 0.2 20 20 20 0.5 5 20 0.15 0.35 20 -- -- 1.5 -- -- 0.2 20 20 20 1.5 0.2 20 35 5 35 2.5 15 1 3 0.09 0.27 35 35 35 10 0.6 35 35 35 35 0.6 Utilization category DC-3 and DC-5 shunt and series motors (L/R 15 ms) Rated operational currents Ie (at 40 C) Number of conducting paths in series connection to 24 V 60 V 110 V 220 V 440 V Contactor A A A A A Frame size Type 18 18 18 0.5 5 18 0.15 0.35 18 -- -- 1.5 -- -- 0.2 S2 3RT13 36 S3 3RT13 44 S3 3RT13 46 Load ratings with DC Utilization category DC-1, switching of resistive loads (L/R 1 ms) Rated operational currents Ie (at 40 C) Number of conducting paths in series connection to 24 V 60 V 110 V 220 V 440 V A A A A A 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 50 23 4.5 1 0.4 50 45 45 5 1 50 45 45 45 2.9 50 45 45 45 2.9 70 23 4.5 1 0.4 70 70 70 5 1 70 70 70 70 2.9 70 70 70 70 2.9 80 60 9 2 0.6 80 80 80 10 1.8 80 80 80 80 4.5 80 80 80 80 4.5 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 20 6 2.5 1 0.1 45 45 25 5 0.27 45 45 45 25 0.6 45 45 45 45 0.6 20 70 6 70 2.5 70 1 7 0.15 0.42 70 70 70 35 0.8 70 70 70 70 0.8 20 80 6.5 80 2.5 80 1 7 0.15 0.42 80 80 80 35 0.8 80 80 80 80 0.8 Utilization category DC-3 and DC-5 shunt and series motors (L/R 15 ms) Rated operational currents Ie (at 40 C) Number of conducting paths in series connection to 24 V 60 V 110 V 220 V 440 V A A A A A SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-137 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3RT15 contactors 4-pole (2 NO + 2 NC main contacts) Contactor Frame size Type S00 3RT15 16/17 S0 3RT15 26 S0 3RT15 26 S2 3RT15 35 S2 3RT15 35 General data Mechanical life Operating cycles 30 Mio. Service life at Ie/AC-1 Operating cycles ca. 0.5 Mio. Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) Permissible ambient temperature for operation in storage V 690 C C -25 to +60 -55 to +80 Degree of protection in acc. with IEC 60 947-1 and DIN 40 050 10 Mio. 10 Mio. 10 Mio. 10 Mio. 63 35 16 160 80 50 160 80 50 front: IP20 front: IP20 terminal space: terminal IP20 space: IP00 Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relay Main Circuit Fuse-links, performance class gL/gG NH type 3NA, DIAZED type 5SB, NEOZED type 5SE - according to IEC 60 947-4/ EN 60 947-4 (VDE 0660 part 102) Coord. type 1 1) Coord. type 2 1) weld-free 2) Contactor A A A Frame size Type 35 20 10 S00 3RT15 16/17 63 35 16 S0 3RT15 26 S0 3RT15 26 S2 3RT15 35 S2 3RT15 35 Control Operating range of the magnet coils AC DC at 50 Hz: at 60 Hz: at +50 C at +60 C 0.8 to 1.1 x Us AC/DC: 0.8 AC/DC: 0.8 0.85 to 1.1 x Us to 1.1 x Us to 1.1 x Us 0.8 to 1.1 x Us 0.85 to 1.1 x Us Power input of the magnet coils (coil in cold state and at 1.0 x Us) AC operation Hz 50/60 50 50/60 50 50/60 Making capacity cos VA 26.5/24.3 0.79/ 0.75 61 0.82 64/63 0.82/0.74 145 0.79 170/155 0.76/0.72 Holding power cos VA 4.4/ 3.4 0.27/0.27 7.8 0.24 8.4/6.8 0.24/0.28 12.5 0.36 15/11.8 0.35/0.38 DC operation Making capacity = Holding power W 3.3 5.6 5.6 13.3 13.3 1) Corresponds to section from IEC 60 947-4 (VDE 0660 Part 102): Coord. type 1: The destruction of the contactor and the overload relay is permissible. The contactor and/or overload relay must be replaced, if necessary. Coord. type 2: The overload relay must not be damaged. Contact welding on the contactor is permissible, if it can be easily separated again from the contactor. 2) Test conditions in acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1. SIRIUS System Manual 3-138 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3RT15 contactors 4-pole (2 NO + 2 NC main contacts) Contactor Frame size Type S00 3RT15 16 S00 3RT15 17 S0 3RT15 26 S2 3RT15 35 18 16 22 20 40 35 55 50 15 20 26 36 10 16 25 1) 40 Main Circuit Current carrying capacity with alternating current Utilization category AC-1, switching of resistive loads Rated operational currents Ie (at 40 C) (at 60 C) Rated power of three-phase loads cos = 0.95 (at 40 C) Minimum conductor cross-section loaded with Ie to 690 V to 690 V A A at 230 V kW 400 V kW at 40 C and 60 C 6.5 7.5 11 mm2 2.5 13 2.5 Utilization category AC-2 and AC-3 Rated operational currents Ie (at 60 C) to 400 V A 9 12 Rated operation for motors with slip-ring or squirrel-cage rotor at 50 Hz and 60 Hz and at 230 V kW 3 3 400 V kW 4 5.5 5.5 9.5 11 18.5 Load ratings with DC Utilization category DC-1, switching of resistive loads (L/R 1 ms) Rated operational current Ie (at 60 C) Number of conducting paths in series connection 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 to 24 V 60 V 110 V A A A 16 16 2.1 16 16 12 20 20 2.1 20 20 12 35 20 4.5 35 35 35 50 23 4.5 50 45 45 220 V 440 V A A 0.8 0.6 1 0.4 5 1 1 0.4 5 1 1 2 to 24 V 60 V 110 V A A A 16 0.5 0.15 16 20 5 0.5 0.35 0.15 220 V 440 V A A 0.75 1.5 0.75 1.5 -- -- -- -- 1.6 0.8 0.8 0.6 1.6 0.8 Utilization category DC-3 and DC-5 2), shunt and series motors (L/R 15 ms) Rated operational current Ie (at 60 C) Number of conducting paths in series connection 1 2 1 2 20 20 5 5 0.35 2.5 1 0.09 35 35 15 1 35 6 2.5 3 1 0.27 0.1 2 50 45 25 5 0.27 1) with AC-coil: 25 A DC-coil: 20 A. 2) For Us > 24 V the rated operational currents Ie for the NC contact conducting paths are 50 % of the values for the NO contact conducting paths. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-139 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3RT16 capacitor-switching contactors The technical specifications for frame size S0 correspond, unless listed below, to those of the 3RT10 26 contactors, for frame size 2 to those of the 3RT10 36 contactors, and for frame size S3 to those of the 3RT10 45 contactors. Contactor Frame size Type Capacitor power at operating voltage 230 V 50/60 Hz 400 V 50/60 Hz 525 V 50/60 Hz 690 V 50/60 Hz (Utilization category AC-6b) S00 3RT16 17 kvar kvar kvar kvar Auxiliary contacts attached (freely available) 3.0 to 5.0 to 7.5 to S0 3RT16 27 7.5 12.5 15 10.0 to 21 1 NO + 1 NC S3 3RT16 47 3.5 to 6.0 to 7.8 to 15 25 30 3.5 to 5.0 to 7.5 to 30 50 60 10.0 to 42 10.0 to 84 1 NO -- Additional auxiliary contacts that can be attached (lateral) Operating range of the magnet coil 0.8 to 1.1 x Us 0.85 to 1.1 x Us 180 100 Max. operating frequency 1/h Service life Operat- > 150 000 ing cycles Ambient temperature C > 100 000 60 60 Regulations IEC 60 947/EN 60 947 (VDE 0660) Short-circuit protection 1.6 to 2.2 x Ie 3RT10 contactors with electronic control module Contactor S0 3RT10 2. Magnetic coil operational range Power input of the magnet coils with coil in cold state and 1.0 x US W S2 3RT10 3. S3 3RT10 4. 15 19 0.7 to 1.25 x US 6 Making capacity = Holding power Upright mounting All data not shown corresponds to the standard contactors. on request 3RT10 coupling relays (Interface) The technical specifications correspond to those of the 3RT10 contactors used to switch motors, unless listed below. Auxiliary switch blocks cannot be added to 3RT10 1. coupling relays. Two, 1-pole auxiliary switch blocks can be built on to the 3RT10 2. coupling relays. Contactor Frame size Type S00 3RT10 1.-1HB4. Mechanical life Operat- 30 Mio. ing cycles S00 3RT10 1.-1JB4. S00 3RT10 1.-1KB4. S0 3RT10 2.-1KB40 30 Mio. 30 Mio. 10 Mio. 0.7 to 1.25 x Us (17 V to 30 V) Operating range of the magnet coils Operating range of the magnet coil (with coil in cold state) Making capacity = Holding power at Us 17 V W 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.1 24 V W 2.3 2.3 2.3 4.2 30 V W 3.6 3.6 3.6 6.6 mA 24 V < 10 mA x ------------ Us 24 V < 10 mA x ------------ Us 24 V < 10 mA x ------------ Us 24 V < 6 mA x ------------ Us without surge suppression with Diode with Varistor with Varistor Permissible residual current of the electronic components (at 0 signal) Suppressor circuit of the magnet coil U U Operating time of the coupling relays Making Breaking at 17 V On delay Off delay NO ms NC ms 40 to 120 30 to 70 40 to 120 30 to 70 40 to 120 30 to 70 93 to 270 83 to 250 at 24 V On delay Off delay NO ms NC ms 30 to 60 20 to 40 30 to 60 20 to 40 30 to 60 20 to 40 64 to 87 55 to 78 at 30 V On delay Off delay NO ms NC ms 20 to 50 15 to 30 20 to 50 15 to 30 20 to 50 15 to 30 53 to 64 45 to 56 at 17 V to 30 V On delay Off delay NO ms NC ms 7 to 17 22 to 30 40 to 60 60 to 70 7 to 17 22 to 30 18 to 19 24 to 25 400 400 400 400 Safe isolation between coil and main contacts (acc. to DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 and A1 [draft 2/89]) V SIRIUS System Manual 3-140 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays The technical specifications correspond to those of the 3RT10 contactors used to switch motors, unless listed below. Auxiliary switch blocks cannot be added to 3RT10 1. contactor relays. Operating range of the magnet coils 1.4 W at 24 V. Contactor Frame size Type S00 3RT10 1.-1MB4.0KT0 Mechanical life S00 3RT10 1.-1VB4. S00 3RT10 1.-1WB4. 30 Mio. 30 Mio. 1.4 1.4 1.4 without surge suppression with Diode with Varistor Operat- 30 Mio. ing cycles Operating range of the magnet coils 0.85 to 1.85 x Us Power input of the magnet coils at Us 24 V (with coil in cold state) W Making capacity = Holding power Suppressor circuit of the magnet coil U Safe isolation between coil and main contacts (acc. to DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 and A1 [draft 2/89]) Permissible residual current of the electronic components (at 0 signal) on request Operating time of the coupling relays - Catalog data (1.4 W) UC [V] Making 3RT1015-1MB42-0KT0 3RT1015-1MB42-0KT0 3RT1015-1MB42-0KT0 at 20.5 V at 24 V at 44 V Breaking at 20.5 to 44 V without protective element Diode from to Varistor from to Pull-in NO ms 40 130 Drop-out NC ms 40 125 Pull-in NO ms 40 100 Drop-out NC ms 30 90 from to Pull-in NO ms 20 30 Drop-out NC ms 15 25 Pull-in NO ms 9 12 45 65 10 15 Drop-out NC ms 12 16 52 72 15 20 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-141 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays Accessories for 3RT1. contactors Solid-state time relay blocks with semiconductor output Rated insulation voltage AC V Time-delayed auxiliary switch blocks 3RT19 .6- 2C 2D 3RT19 .6- 2E 2F 2G 250 250 Pollution degree 3 Overvoltage category III in acc. with DIN VDE 0110 Energizing operating range 0.8 to 1.1 x Us 0.85 to 1.1 x Us 0.95 to 1.05 times the rated frequency 0.95 to 1.05 times the rated frequency Rated power W 1 2 Power input at 230 V AC, 50 Hz VA 1 4 -- -- 3 1 0.2 0.1 Rated operational currents Ie AC-140, DC-13 A AC-15 at 230 V AC, 50 Hz DC-13 at 24 V DC-13 at 110 V DC-13 at 230 V A A A A 0.3 at 3RT19 16 0.5 at 3RT19 26 -- -- -- -- A -- 4 DIAZED fusing Performance class gL/gG Operating frequency Loaded with Ie 230 V AC 1/h 2500 2500 Loaded with 3RT10 16 contactor, 230 V AC 1/h 2500 5000 Recovery time ms 50 150 Minimum on-time ms 35 200 (off delay) Residual current mA 5 -- V 3.5 -- A 10 (to 10 ms) -- 15 % 15 % Voltage drop in switched state Short-term current carrying capacity Setting accuracy in relation to the value at the end of the scale Repeatability Mechanical life Operating cycles Permissible ambient temperature for operation in storage C C Degree of protection in acc. with EN 60 529 Terminal type Single-core mm2 1% 30 x 106 -25 to +60 -40 to +85 -25 to +60 -40 to +85 IP20 terminals IP20 terminals 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) 2 x (0.75 to 4) 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) 2 x (0.75 to 4) Finely stranded with wire end ferrule: mm2 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) Single or multi-core AWG 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (18 to 14) M3 M3 Terminal screw Tightening torque Nm Permissible installation Shock resistance Half sine according to IEC 60 068-2-27 Vibration performance according to IEC 60 068-2-6 1% 100 x 106 g/ms Hz/mm 0.8 to 1.2 0.8 to 1.2 any any 15/11 15/11 10 to 55/0.35 10 to 55/0.35 EMC-Testing EN 50081-1; IEC 61 000-6-2 EN 50081-1; IEC 61 000-6-2 Overvoltage protection Varistor integrated in timing relay -- SIRIUS System Manual 3-142 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3RA13 reversing contactor combinations The technical information corresponds to that of the 3RT10 ... contactors. The s and u approvals only apply to complete contactor combinations and not to combinations you have put together from separate parts. 3RA14 combinations for wye-delta starting The technical specifications correspond to those of the 3RT individual contactor and the 3RU time relay, unless listed below. Starter Frame sizes S . . - S . . - S . . Type 3RA . . . . Mechanical life 00-00-00 00-00-00 0-0-0 14 15 14 16 14 23 0-0-0 14 25 2-2-0 14 34 2-2-2 14 35 2-2-2 14 36 3-3-2 14 44 3-3-2 14 45 160 80 250 125 250 160 Operating 3 Mio. cycles Short-circuit protection without overload relay Short-circuit protection with overload relay see section 4. Maximum rated current of the fuse Main Circuit1) Fuse-links, performance class gL/gG NH type 3NA, DIAZED type 5SB, NEOZED type 5SE Single or double infeed Coord. type 1 1) Coord. type 2 1) A A 35 20 Fuse-links, performance class gL/gG DIAZED type 5SB, NEOZED type 5SE A 10, (Short-circuit current Ik 1 kA) A 62), if the auxiliary contact of the overload relay is in the circuit of the contactor coil. Miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic A 10, - according to IEC 60 947-4-1/ DIN VDE 0660 part 102 35 20 63 25 100 35 125 63 125 63 Control circuit A 62), if the auxiliary contact of the overload relay is in the circuit of the contactor coil Size of the individual contactors Line contactor K1 Delta contactor K3 Wye contactor K2 Unassigned auxiliary contacts of the individual contactors see circuit diagrams of the control circuit on page 3/93. type 3RT 10 15 type 3RT 10 15 type 3RT 10 15 10 17 10 17 10 15 10 24 10 24 10 24 10 26 10 26 10 24 10 34 10 34 10 26 10 35 10 35 10 34 10 36 10 36 10 34 10 44 10 44 10 35 10 45 10 45 10 36 150 138.6 138.6 Load ratings utilization category AC-3 Switch-over time up to 10 s Rated operational current at 400 V 500 V 690 V A A A Rated power of three phase motors at 50 Hz and at 230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V kW kW kW kW kW Operating frequency with overload relay 12 8.7 6.9 17 11.3 9 25 20.8 20.8 40 31.2 22.5 65 55.4 53.7 80 69.3 69.3 86 86 69.3 115 112.6 98.7 3.3 5.8 5.3 5.8 -- 4.7 8.2 6.9 7.5 -- 7.2 12.5 13 18 -- 12 21 20.5 20.4 -- 20.4 35 38 51 -- 25.5 44 48 66 -- 27.8 48 60 67 -- 37 65 80 97 -- 49 85 98 136 -- 1/h 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 12 8.7 6.9 17 11.3 9 25 20.8 20.8 31 31 22.5 44 44 44 57 57 57 67 67 67 97 97 97 106 106 106 3.3 5.8 5.3 5.8 -- 4.7 8.2 6.9 7.5 -- 7.2 12.5 13 18 -- 9.4 16.3 20.4 20.4 -- 13.8 24 30 42 -- 18.2 31.6 40 55 -- 21.6 38 47 65 -- 32 55 69 95 -- 35 60 75 104 -- 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 Load ratings utilization category AC-3 Switch-over time up to 15 s Rated operational current at 400 V 500 V 690 V A A A Rated power at 230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V kW kW kW kW kW of three phase motors at 50 Hz and Operating frequency with overload relay 1/h 15 15 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3-143 3RT1 Contactors/3RH1 Control relays 3RA14 combinations for wye-delta starting Starter Frame sizes S . . - S . . - S . . Type 3RA . . . . 00-00-00 00-00-00 0-0-0 14 15 14 16 14 23 0-0-0 14 25 2-2-0 14 34 2-2-2 14 35 2-2-2 14 36 3-3-2 14 44 3-3-2 14 45 12 8.7 6.9 17 11.3 9 25 20.8 20.8 28 28 22.5 39 39 39 51 51 51 57 57 57 85 85 85 92 92 92 3.3 5.8 5.3 5.8 -- 4.7 8.2 6.9 7.5 -- 7.2 12.5 13 18 -- 8.5 14.7 18.4 20.4 -- 12.2 21.3 26.7 37 -- 16.3 28 35 49 -- 18.4 32 40 55 -- 28 48 60 83 -- 30 52 65 90 -- 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 Load ratings utilization category AC-3 Switch-over time up to 20 s Rated operational current at 400 V 500 V 690 V A A A Rated power of three phase motors at 50 Hz and at 230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V kW kW kW kW kW Operating frequency with overload relay 1/h 15 15 1) Corresponds to IEC 60 947-4 (VDE 0660 Part 102): Coord. type 1: The destruction of the contactor and the overload relay is permissible. The contactor and/or overload relay must be replaced, if necessary. Coord. type 2: The overload relay must not be damaged. Contact welding on the contactor is permissible, if it can be easily separated again from the contactor. 2) to Ik 0.5 kA; 260 V. SIRIUS System Manual 3-144 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Section Subject Page 4.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals 4-2 4.2 Device description 4-4 4.2.1 Overview 4-4 4.2.2 Detailed device description 4-5 4.3 Application and use 4-10 4.3.1 Overload relay in the motor circuit 4-10 4.3.2 3RU11 thermal overload relays and 3RB10 electronic overload relays 4-15 4.3.3 3RB12 electronic overload relays 4-22 4.4 Accessories 4-30 4.4.1 Electrical remote RESET 4-30 4.4.2 Mechanical thru-the-door reset 4-31 4.4.3 Other accessories 4-33 4.5 Mounting and connection 4-34 4.5.1 Mounting 4-34 4.5.2 Connection 4-41 4.5.3 Circuit diagrams 4-43 4.6 Dimensional drawings (dimensions in mm) 4-46 4.7 Technical Data 4-49 4.7.1 3RU11 thermal overload relays 4-49 4.7.2 3RB10 electronic overload relays 4-54 4.7.3 3RB12 electronic overload relays 4-61 4.7.4 Terminal bracket for stand-alone installation 4-66 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-1 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays 4.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals Standards * The 3RU11 thermal overload relays and the 3RB10 and 3RB12 electronic overload relays comply with the following standards: IEC 60947-1/DIN VDE 0660 Part 100 IEC 60947-4-1/DIN VDE 0660 Part 102 IEC 60947-5-1/DIN VDE 0660 Part 200 IEC 60801-2, -3, -4, -5; UL 508/CSA C 22.2. * The 3RB10 and 3RB12 electronic overload relays also comply with the EMC standards. This standard isn't relevant for the 3RU11 thermal overload relays. Approvals/test reports Requests for confirmation of approvals, testing certificates and tripping characteristics can be sent to Technical Assistance per E-mail at E-mail-Address: technical-assistance@siemens.com. Tripping classes The tripping classes describe time intervals within which the overload relays have to trip from a cold state at 7.2 times the set current in the case of a symmetrical, three-pole load. The following table shows the tripping times in relationship to the tripping classes in accordance with the IEC 60947-4-1 standard: Tripping time t A in sec. at 7.2 x Ie from a cold state Tripping class 2 < tA 10 4 < tA 10 6 < tA 20 9 < tA 30 10 A 10 20 30 Table 4-1: Tripping classes/Tripping time The tripping classes that the 3RU11, 3RB10 and 3RB12 overload relays are available in, can be found in section 4.2. Time-delayed overload releases The following table contains the operating limits of time-delayed overload releases in the case of an all-pole load: Overload release type Ambient temperature compensated Multiple of the set current A B C D Reference ambient temperature 1.05 1.2 1.5 7.2 +20 C Not tripped <2h Tripped <2h Tripped < 4 min. Tripped from a cold state in 4 to 10 sec. CLASS 10 <2h <2h < 8 min. 6 to 20 sec. CLASS 20 Table 4-2: Operating limits of time-delayed overload releases in the case of an all-pole load SIRIUS System Manual 4-2 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Resistance to extreme climates The 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays are climate-proof in acc. with IEC 721. Shock protection The 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays are shockproof in acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 100. Depending on the attachment to other devices, extended terminal covers are to be attached to the connecting bars. Ships' systems The 3RU11, 3RB10, and 3RB12 overload relays are suitable for use on ships. The overload relays have been submitted to: * GL (Germany) * LRS (Great Britain) * DNV (Norway) Explosion-proof motors The 3RU11 thermal overload relays and the 3RB10 and 3RB12 electronic overload relays comply with the regulations for the overload protection of explosion-proof motors of "increased safety" protection types (EEx d and EEx e) in acc. with EN 50 019/DIN VDE 0165 and DIN VDE 0170/0171: The numbers of the individual test reports as well as individual notes on the application of overload relays are in Section 4.3 "Application and use". SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-3 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays 4.2 Device description 4.2.1 Overview Protection function Overload relays are used for current dependent protection of electrical equipment (for example motors) against overheating. Overheating can be caused by overload, asymmetrical current consumption, phase loss in the power network, or locked rotor. With Overload, phase imbalance, phase loss or locked rotor there is an increase in the motor current that is well above the set rated motor current. This increase in current, that over a longer period of time can damage or even destroy the equipment, is monitored and evaluated by the overload relay. There are two function principles for overload relay protection available: thermal and electronic. Function principles With Thermal overload relays (see overload relay 3RU11) an increase in current heats up the bimetal strips inside the device by means of heating elements. The strips then bend and activate auxiliary contacts by means of a tripping mechanism. With an electronic overload relay (see overload relays 3RB10 and 3RB12) the current increase is measured by an integrated current transformer then evaluated by the corresponding electronics, which then send an impulse to the auxiliary contacts. The auxiliary contact shuts down the contactor and therefore the load. The switching time is dependent on the relationship of tripping current to the set current and can be found in the form of long stability tripping characteristic curves (see section 4.3 "Application and use"). Product offering There are 3 overload relay families available: 3RU11 thermal overload relays The 3RU11 thermal overload relays, from 0.11 A to 100 A, are designed for current dependent protection of loads with normal starting (tripping class CLASS 10). 3RB10 electronic overload relays The self-powered 3RB10 electronic overload relays, from 0.1 A to 630 A, are designed for current dependent protection of loads with normal and heavy starting (tripping classes CLASS 10 and CLASS 20). 3RB12 electronic overload relays The externally powered 3RB12 electronic overload relays, from 0.25 A to 820 A are designed for current dependent protection of loads with normal and heavy starting (tripping classes CLASS 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 and 30, adjustable on the device). In addition to current dependent protection of loads against non-permissible overheating, the 3RB12 electronic overload relay also offers the possibility for temperature monitoring of the motor windings by use of a thermistor (PTC) sensor circuit. The load can also be protected against excess temperature that, for example, could appear indirectly due to blocked coolant flow and therefore could not be measured by current dependent means. SIRIUS System Manual 4-4 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Furthermore the 3RB12 electronic overload relay offers the possibility to protect the installation against the results of a ground fault with its internal/ external ground fault monitoring. 4.2.2 Detailed device description Description 3RU11 thermal overload relays The 3RU11 thermal overload relays from 0.11 A to 100 A are available with tripping class CLASS 10 and offer current dependent protection of loads with normal starting at a low price. This is an economical protection device, especially in the lower ratings range. 3RB10 electronic overload relays The self-powered 3RB10 electronic overload relays from 0.1 A to 630 A are available with tripping classes CLASS 10 and CLASS 20. With these two tripping classes they offer optimal current dependent protection of loads with normal- and heavy starting. The 3RB10 electronic overload relay is similar to the 3RU11 thermal overload relay in dimensions, in operational control and in the way they mount to contactors. That way the thermal overload relay can be easily substituted by the electronic version, when the application requires phase loss trip within 3 seconds, a wide current adjustment range (1 : 4) or also lower heat generation. The accessories for the thermal and electronic devices are identical. 3RB12 electronic overload relays The 3RB12 electronic overload relays from 0.25 A to 820 A with external power supply are suitable for normal starting and heavy starting with the adjustable setting of the variable tripping classes CLASS 5 to CLASS 30. In addition to the adjustable variable tripping classes, the 3RB12 electronic overload relay offers a large number of additional built-in features and protection functions: overload warning, thermistor-motor protection-function, ground fault detection, self-monitoring, status indicator by means of LEDs, and analog output. More detailed information about the built-in features and functions in section 4.3 "Application and use". SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-5 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Features/customer benefits The following table provides an overview of the features and resulting benefits of the three overload relay families: Feature Customer benefits 3RU11 3RB10 3RB12 Protection functions Tripping due to an overload * guarantees an optimal current dependent protection of the load against non-permissible overheating as a result of an overload. x x x Tripping due to phase imbalance * guarantees an optimal current dependent protection of the load against non-permissible overheating as a result of phase imbalance. x x x Tripping due to phase loss * minimizes the heating of the three-phase motor during single-phase operation 1). x x2 ) x Tripping due to excessive temperature * permits optimal temperature-dependent protection of loads against impermissibly high temperature rises, e. g. for stator-critical motors, reduced coolant flow, pollution of the motor surface or long starting and breaking procedures * saves an additional unit * saves space in the switchgear cabinet * reduces wiring complexity and costs 3) 3) x by integrated thermistor motor protection function x Tripping due to an earth fault * permits optimal protection of the load in the case of minor short-circuits or earth faults caused by damage to by insulation, humidity, condensation, etc. * eliminates additional unit internal 4) or external earth fault monitoring * saves space in the switchgear cabinet * reduces wiring complexity and costs Features RESET function * allows manual or automatic resetting of the relay. x x x TEST function * permits easy checking of correct functioning and the wiring. x x x Status display * signals the current operational state. x x x Large current setting knob * makes it easier to set the relay accurately to the right current value. x x x Integrated auxiliary contacts (1 NO + 1 NC) * allow the load to be disconnected in the case of a disturbance * enable tripped signals to be output. x x x Short-circuit strength up to 100 kA at 690 V * guarantees optimum protection of the load and the (in combination with the appropriate operating personnel in the event of short-circuits fuse or circuit-breaker) caused by insulation breakdown or faulty switching operations. x x x Electrical and mechanical compatibility with the 3RT1 contactors x x x5 ) only 3RB10 56.FW0 only 3RB12 46-.... Design of load feeders * simplifies project planning * reduces the project engineering work and costs * permits space-saving direct mounting apart from individual mounting. Straight-through current transformer * reduces the contact resistances (only one contact point) (the leads are directly routed short-circuit-proof * saves connection costs (quick, easy and no tools to the main terminals of the contactor through required) * saves material costs (no need for busbars) the feed-through openings of the overload * reduces installation costs. relay) 1) Single-phase operation: Abnormal operating state of a three-phase induction motor in which a phase is interrupted. 3) In combination with the 3RN thermistor motor protection 5) Exception: For 3RB12 46, only individual mounting devices, additional temperature-based protection can be implemented. 2) Tripping from warm state within 3 seconds 4) Special device variants: See selection and ordering data. SIRIUS System Manual 4-6 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Feature Customer benefits 3RU11 3RB10 3RB12 Further characteristics Temperature compensation * allows implementation of the relay at high temperatures without derating * prevents premature tripping * permits compact design of the switchgear cabinet without the need for clearance between the devices and/or load feeders * simplifies project planning * allows space to be saved in the switchgear cabinet. x x x High long-term stability * guarantees reliable protection of loads even after years of operation under harsh conditions. x x x Wide current adjustment ranges * reduce the number of variants * minimize the project engineering work and costs * provide savings in inventories in terms of work, costs and capital tie-up. x x Trip classes > CLASS 10 * permit solutions for heavy starting and extremely heavy starting. x x Minimal power losses * reduce the energy consumption (the energy consumption is up to 95% lower than for thermal overload relays) and therefore the energy costs * minimize the temperature rise for the contactor and switchgear cabinet - which may obviate the need for a cabinet cooling system * allow space to be saved by direct mounting on the contactor and in the case of high motor currents (i. e. heat isolation is not necessary). x x Internal power supply * saves project engineering and connection of an additional control circuit. 1) x Variable setting of the trip classes * reduces the number of variants The release class required can be set in * minimizes the project engineering work and costs accordance with the prevailing start-up con- * permits savings in inventories in terms of work, costs ditions by means of a six-position rotary and capital tie-up. switch (CLASS 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 or 30) x Analog output2) * allows an analog output signal to be output to control instruments, PLCs or to bus systems * saves an additional transducer and signal converter * saves space in the switchgear cabinet * reduces wiring complexity and costs x Overload warning * indicates impending tripping of the relay due to an overload, phase unbalance or phase failure directly on the device * enables impending tripping of the relay to be signalled via an external indicator lamp connected to the corresponding auxiliary contacts2) * permits early implementation of countermeasures in the case of long-term current-dependent loading of the consumer above the limit current * saves an additional relay * saves space in the switchgear cabinet * reduces wiring complexity and costs x 1) The SIRIUS 3RU11 thermal overload relays operate according to the bimetal-strip principle and therefore do not require an additional control circuit. 2)Special device variants: See selection and ordering data SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-7 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Frame sizes/device designs The following table provides an overview of the 3RU11 thermal overload relay and the 3RB10 electronic overload relay in their available frame sizes. The individual frame sizes are arranged to show the maximum rated current, the lowest and highest adjustable ranges as well as the available tripping classes. Frame size S00 S0 S2 S3 S6 S10/12 Device width 45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 70 mm 120 mm 145 mm Base Number 3RU11 16 3RU11 26 3RU11 36 3RU11 46 -- -- Max. Rated current 12 A 25 A 50 A 100 A -- -- Lowest adjustable range 0.11...0.16 A 1.8...2.5 A 5.5...8 A 18...25 A -- -- Highest adjustable range 9...12 A 20...25 A 40...50 A 80...100 A -- -- Tripping class CLASS 10 3RB10 26 3RB10 36 3RB10 46 3RB10 56 3RB10 66 3RU11 thermal overload relay 3RB10 electronic overload relay Base Number 3RB10 16 Max. Rated current 12 A 25 A 50 A 100 A 200 A 630 A Lowest adjustable range 0.1...0.4 A 0.1...0.4 A 6...25 A 13...50 A 50...200 A 55...250 A Highest adjustable range 3...12 A 6...25 A 13...50 A 25...100 A 50...200 A 300...630 A Tripping class CLASS 10 and CLASS 20 Table 4-3: Overview of the designs of both the 3RU11 and 3RB10 overload relays SIRIUS System Manual 4-8 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays The 3RB12 electronic overload relay comes in four frame sizes. These can be found in the following table. In the table the individual frame sizes are arranged to show the maximum rated current, the lowest and highest adjustable ranges as well as the available tripping classes. Furthermore the various designs are described below. Base number 3RB12 46 3RB12 53 3RB12 57 3RB12 62 Max. Rated current 100 A 205 A 500 A 820 A Lowest adjustable range 0.25...6.3 A 50...205 A 125...500 A 200...820 A Highest adjustable range 25...100 A 50...205 A 125...500 A 200...820 A Tripping class CLASS 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 and 30, adjustable Designs Standard design Comes with the option to connect a thermistor (PTC) sensor circuit as well as an additional current transformer and two outputs (each 1 NO + 1 NC),that can be used on each model for shut down and alarm for an overload trip, Thermistor trip, ground fault trip and/or a pending overload (overload warning). Design with internal ground fault detection Like the standard design, except with additional internal ground fault detection for the detection of fault currents. Design with bistabil output relays Like the standard design, except with bistabil output relays. Design with analog output Like the standard design, except with additional analog 4...20 mA output signal for the motor current related to motor current setting; for the control of measuring instruments, for processing in management systems, communication using networking systems, indication of overload and motor current. Table 4-4: Overview of the 3RB12 electronic overload relay designs Detailed information More detailed technical information on overload relays can be found under section 4.7 "Technical data". SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-9 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays 4.3 Application and use 4.3.1 Overload relay in the motor circuit Starter: Contactor + overload relay The individual overload relay families protect the following loads against the effects of an overload, phase loss and phase imbalance. For the protection of 3RU11 3RB10 3RB12 Three phase loads X X X DC loads X -- -- Single phase-AC-loads X -- X 1) 1) devices without internal ground fault detection. Important The protection of the load can't be realized by the overload relay alone. The overload relay only senses the current, evaluates it and switches the auxiliary contacts according to the respective trip curve. The auxiliary contact (95-96, NC) will switch off the connected contactor and therefore the load. SIRIUS System Manual 4-10 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays In order to switch the load the following contactors will be needed. The following table offers an overview regarding the coordination of the overload and contactor with their ratings. 3RU11 16 3RU11 26 3RU11 36 3RU11 46 3RB10 56 3RB10 16 3RB10 26 3RB10 36 3RB10 46 400 V 460 V kW HP 3 kW 4 kW 5.5 kW 5.5 kW max. adjustable current 12 A 25 A 50 A 100 A 200 A 630 A 100 A Frame size width S00 45 mm S0 45 mm S2 55 mm S3 70 mm S6 120 mm S10/S12 145 mm 70 mm 3RT10 15 S00 X Contactor 3 3RB10 66 3RB12 46 3RB12 53 3RB12 57 3RB12 62 5 3RT10 16 S00 X 7.5 3RT10 17 S00 X 5 3RT10 23 7.5 3RT10 24 S0 X X 7.5 kW 10 3RT10 25 S0 X 11 kW 15 3RT10 26 S0 X 20 3RT10 33 25 3RT10 34 15 kW X S2 X 18.5 kW 30 3RT10 35 S2 X 22 kW 40 3RT10 36 S2 X 30 kW 50 3RT10 44 S3 X 37 kW 60 3RT10 45 S3 X X 205 A 500 A 820 A 120 mm 145 mm 230 mm 45 kW 75 3RT10 46 S3 55 kW 100 3RT10 54 S6 X X 75 kW 125 3RT10 55 S6 X X 90 kW 150 3RT10 56 S6 X X 110 kW 150 3RT10 64 S10 X X 132 kW 200 3RT10 65 S10 X X 160 kW 250 3RT10 66 S10 X X 200 kW 300 3RT10 75 S12 X X 250 kW 400 3RT10 76 S12 X X 375 kW 500 3TF68 Frame Size 14 X X 450 kW 700 3TF69 Frame size 14 X X Table 4-5: Coordination of the overload relays to the contactors X = Directly mounted = Stand alone installation (device with straight through transformer) DIN rail mountable on 35-mm DIN rail Overload relays in wyedelta combinations When overload relays are used in wye-delta combinations, it must be taken 1 into consideration that only --------3- of the motor current flows through the line contactor. An overload relay built onto the line contactor must be set to this level (i.e. 0.58 of the motor current). A coordination of the overload relay to the line contactor in 3RA wye-delta combinations can be found in the catalog, chapter 3. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-11 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Important 3RB12 electronic overload relays with internal ground fault detection are not suitable for use in wye-delta combinations, since transient current spikes occur at switch-over from wye to delta operation. These can result in the triggering of the ground fault detection. Short circuit For short circuit protection, fuses (fused branch circuit) or circuit breaker (fuseless load feeder/combination assembly) must be used. Appropriate short-circuit protection devices for overload relay with contactor are found in section 4.7 "Technical Data". When selecting from the table, the coordination type needs to be considered. Coordination type The coordination types (EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 part 102)) describe the performance characteristics after a short-circuit. They are differentiated in 2 types: With coordination type 1 the contactor or starter may not endanger people or installations in the event of a short-circuit and does not need to be suitable for further operation (without repair or partial replacement). With coordination type 2 the contactor or starter may not endanger people or installations in the event of a short-circuit and must be suitable for further operation. There is the danger of welding contacts. In this case, the manufacturer must provide maintenance instructions. Operation with frequency converters The 3RU11 thermal overload relays are suitable for use with frequency converters. Depending on the frequency of the converter the trip current must sometimes be adjusted to a higher current than the motor current because of appearing eddy current and Skin effect. The adjusted current settings can be taken from chapter 2 "3RV1 circuit breaker/MSP" under section 2.8 "Application notes for the use of 3RV1 downstream from frequency converters/ inverters with pulsing voltage". The 3RB10 electronic overload relay and 3RB12 are suitable for frequencies of 50/60 Hz and their related harmonics. That way it's possible to use the 3RB10 and 3RB12 on the line side of a frequency converter. If there is a need for motor protection on the load side of a frequency converter then we recommend the 3RN thermistor motor protection device or the 3RU11 thermal overload relay. Normal and heavy starting When selecting the correct overload relay the ramp-up time needs to be taken into consideration in addition to the rated motor current. The ramp-up time is the time it takes the motor to reach its full load speed. If this time falls under 10 seconds, it's called normal starting. However, if based on special load requirements (for example, the starting up of large centrifuges), the motor needs a ramp-up time of more than 10 seconds it's called heavy starting. For the protection of heavy starting motors, special overload relays are required with the respective tripping classes (ex.: CLASS 20, CLASS 30). With heavy starting, the wiring and contactors must be specially sized due to the increased thermal loading. The required sizing is taken into consideration in the coordination tables in chapter 4.7 "Technical Data". SIRIUS System Manual 4-12 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Explosion-proof motors The 3RU11 thermal overload relays comply with the regulations for the overload protection of explosion-proof motors of "increased safety" protection types EEx e IEC 50 019/ DIN VDE 0165, DIN VDE 0170/171. KEMA-test certificate no. Ex-97.Y.3235 DMT 98 ATEX G001 EN 50 019: 1977 + A1 ... A5, increased safety "e": Attachment A, Guidelines for the temperature monitoring of squire-cage motors in operation. The 3RB10 thermal overload relays comply with the regulations for the overload protection of explosion-proof motors of "increased safety" protection types EEx d and EEx e IEC 50 019/DIN VDE 0165, DIN VDE 0170/171 and PTB-Test rules. PTB-test report no. Nr. 3.43-8803/98 (for S00 to S3) EG-special test certificate in acc. with directive 94/9/EG: PTB 01 ATEX 3306 (for S00 to S3) PTB 01 ATEX 3203 (for S6) PTB 01 ATEX 3316 (for S10/S12) The 3RB12 thermal overload relays comply with the regulations for the overload protection of explosion-proof motors of "increased safety" protection types EEx d and EEx e IEC 50 019/DIN VDE 0165, DIN VDE 0170/171 and PTB-Test rules. In the case of tripping devices with DC operation, electrical isolation must be secured by means of a battery network or a safety transformer in compliance with DIN VDE 0551. When the 3RB12..-....1 electronic overload relays (no change to the switching state of the auxiliary contact elements in the event of the failure of the control supply voltage) are used to protect EEx d and EEx e motors, separate monitoring of the control supply voltage is recommended. PTB-test report no. Nr. 3.53-3907/96. EG-special test certificate in acc. with directive 94/9/EG: PTB 01 ATEX 3220. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-13 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Advantages of load feeders/combination starters with overload relays The assembly of load feeders/combination starters with overload relays (Fuses+contactor+overload relay or circuit breaker+contactor+overload relay) has the following advantages over the purely fuseless assembly (circuit breaker/MSP+contactor): * It is easy to distinguish between tripping caused by an overload and tripping caused by a short circuit. In the event of a short circuit, the fuses limit the short-circuit current; in the event of an overload, the overload relay switches off the contactor and thus the motor. * At voltages > 400 V, fuses have a short-circuit breaking capacity of up to 100 kA. As a result, in 690 V systems, in particular, fused motor feeders are often preferred. * If automatic RESET is set, the overload relay resets itself automatically after a trip and does not have to be switched on again locally. * A remote reset can be implemented very easily by means of attachable electrical and mechanical RESET modules for the 3RU11 and 3RB10 overload relays. The electrical remote RESET is already integrated in the 3RB12 multifunction devices. * Longer ramp-up times can be only accomplished in connection with the 3RB10 and 3RB12 electronic overload relays. * Wide adjustable setting range of 1:4 are only possible with the 3RB10 and 3RB12 electronic overload relays. * Combinations of a circuit breaker for starter protection, a contactor, and an overload relay also have the advantage that the feeder can be easily isolated and that, in the event of a short circuit, it is disconnected in three poles. SIRIUS System Manual 4-14 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays 4.3.2 3RU11 thermal overload relays and 3RB10 electronic overload relays Functions 4 M 8 2 3 TEST A 7 1 STOP RESET 9 6 5 95 96 97 98 A2 9 2T2 4T2 6T3 14/22 Fig. 4-1: Front view 3RU11 3RB10 is the same as 3RU11 with exception of the integrated sealable cover. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Scale for setting the rated current of the load. Reset button (blue): Press the RESET button to get the relay ready before putting it into operation or after tripping. STOP button (red): The STOP button opens the normally closed contact, which remains open until the button is released again. The downstream contactor and thus the motor can be switched off. Press the STOP button to switch the relay off when it is in operation. The normally closed contact of the auxiliary switch opens. The relay remains ready for operation. Device type plate Terminals for three motor supply lines Terminals for normally closed/normally open contacts (95/96 for normally closed contacts, 97/98 for normally open contacts) Contact position indicator/test The slider for the contact position indicator also serves as a test function. When it is operated, tripping of the overload relay is simulated. The normally closed contact (95/96) opens, and the normally open contact (97/98) closes. The switching position is indicated. Switch for manual/auto RESET: By pressing and turning the blue button you can select automatic or manual reset. In the case of the relay setting M (manual RESET), the switching position of the relay is indicated: I = ready for operation O = tripped Only in the case of frame size S00: Terminal A2: repetition terminal of the contactor coil Terminal 14/22: repetition terminal of the contactor auxiliary contact. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-15 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Areas of use The 3RU11 thermal overload relays are designed for the protection of 3-phase AC, DC and single phase AC loads. If the 3RU11 thermal overload relay is going to protect DC loads or single phase loads, then all bimetal strips must be heated. Therefore, all main current paths of the relay need to be wired in series. The 3RB10 electronic overload relays are designed for the protection of three phase loads in sine-wave 50/60 Hz voltage networks. The relay is not suitable for protection of DC loads or single phase loads. In loads with single pole loading, the 3RU11 thermal overload relays or the 3RB12 electronic overload relays (only suitable for the protection of single phase loads) can be used. Supply power For the operation of the 3RU11 overload relay there is no additional supply voltage necessary. The 3RB10 overload relay is self-powered. That means there is no additional supply voltage necessary. Setting The 3RU11 thermal overload relay and the 3RB10 electronic overload relay are set by adjusting to the rated motor current with a setting dial. The range on the setting dial is calibrated in amperes. Important The overload relays may only be operated between the lower and upper adjustment marks on the current setting range. That means that the operation of the overload relay under or over the current setting range is not permitted. The following drawing shows an example of setting the 3RU11 thermal overload relay, frame size S00, to the rated motor current. A max. + 60 C max. + 70 C Ie Fig. 4-2: Setting the rated motor current Sealable cover The following drawing shows how to secure the current setting dial and the "Manual/Automatic RESET" selector switch against unauthorized adjustment for the 3RU11 thermal overload relay and the 3RB10 electronic overload relay. SIRIUS System Manual 4-16 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Sealing the current setting dial 3RU11 3RB10 1 2 Fig. 4-3: Sealing the current setting dial (frame size S00) Important When the sealing cover (transparent sliding window) is closed (3RU11) or mounted (3RB10), it is not possible to use the blue reset button for a switchover between M (manual RESET) and A (automatic RESET). Ambient requirements The 3RU11 thermal overload relays are temperature (ambient) compensated according to IEC 60 947-4-1/DIN VDE 0660 part 102 for a temperature range of -20 C to +60 C. At a temperature from +60 C to +80 C the setting value of the setting range needs to be reduced by a specific factor according to the table below. Ambient temperature in C Reduction factor for the top setting value +60 +65 +70 +75 +80 1.0 0.94 0.87 0.81 0.73 According to the table 70 C has a reduction factor of 13 %. This factor is so small, that because of the overlapping of the current setting ranges no gaps appear to the next setting range. So that at 70 C a continuous current range of 0.11 A to 87 A can be used. The 3RB10 electronic overload relay are insensitive to outside influences, such as vibration, aggressive environment, weathering and strong temperature swings. In the temperature range of -25 C to +70 C the 3RB10 electronic overload relays in the sizes S00 to S3 are temperature (ambient) compensated according to IEC 60 947-4-1/DIN VDE 0660 part 102. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-17 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays The 3RB10 electronic overload relays in the sizes S6 and S10/12 require an adjustment to the setting value of the setting range by a specific factor at ambient temperatures of +60 C according to the tables below.. Type Ambient temperature +60 C +70 C 3RB10 56-.F.0 1.00 0.80 3RB10 66-.GG0 1.00 0.80 3RB10 66-.KG0 1.00 0.93 3RB10 66-.LG0 0.90 0.80 Table 4-6: Reduction factor for the top setting value of a stand alone device Type Ambient temperature +60 C +70 C 3RB10 56-.F .0 0.70 0.60 3RB10 66-.GG0 0.70 0.60 3RB10 66-.KG0 0.82 0.70 3RB10 66-.LG0 0.70 0.60 Table 4-7: Reduction factor for the top setting value when direct mounting to the contactor Manual-automatic RESET By pushing in and turning the blue button (RESET button) on the 3RU11 thermal overload relays and 3RB10 electronic overload relays, you can choose between manual and automatic reset. The following figure shows how to switch between manual and automatic for the 3RU11 and 3RB10 using the example of the 3RU11, frame size S00. MANUAL AUTO Fig. 4-4: Manual-automatic RESET When manual resetting is selected, a reset can be performed directly on the device by pressing the RESET button. Remote resetting can be implemented by using the mechanical and electrical RESET modules from the range of accessories (see Section 4.4, "Accessories"). When the blue button is set to Automatic RESET, the relay will be reset automatically. A reset is not possible until the recovery time has elapsed (see "Recovery time"). SIRIUS System Manual 4-18 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Recovery time After tripping due to an overload, it takes a certain length of time for the bimetal strips of the 3RU11 thermal overload relays to cool down. The relay can only be reset once it has cooled down. This time (recovery time) is dependent on the tripping characteristic and the level of the tripping current. After tripping due to overload, the recovery time allows the load to cool down. With the 3RB10 electronic overload relays the recovery time is fixed when set on Automatic-RESET and lasts about 4 minutes for frame sizes S00 to S3 and about 7 minutes for frame sizes S6 and S10/S12. When set to manual RESET then the device can be reset immediately. TEST function Correct functioning of the ready status of the overload relay can be tested with the TEST slide. The slide is operated to simulate tripping of the relay. During this simulation, the NC contact (95-96) is opened and the NO contact (97-98) is closed whereby the overload relay checks that the auxiliary circuit is wired correctly. When the overload relay is set to Automatic RESET, an automatic reset takes place when the TEST slide is released. The relay must be reset using the RESET button when it is set to Manual RESET. STOP-Function When the STOP button is pressed, the NC contact (95-96) is pressed, the NC contact is opened and the series-connected contactor and therefore the load is switched off. The load is reconnected via the contactor when the STOP button is released. Pressing the STOP button does not close the NO contact (97-98). Status indication The current status of the overload relay is indicated by the position of the marking on the "TEST function/switching position indicator" slide. The marking on the slide is on the left at the "O" mark following a trip due to overload or phase failure and at the "I" mark otherwise. Auxiliary contacts The overload relay is equipped with an NO contact (97-98) for the tripped signal and an NC contact (95-96) for switching off the contactor. The auxiliary contacts have high contact reliability and are therefore suitable for with PLC's. Also due to the high switching capacity they can be directly connected to the contactor coil. The following table shows the reaction of the auxiliary contact when activating the TEST, STOP and RESET button. TEST STOP RESET NC 95/96 NO 97/98 Table 4-8: Auxiliary contact 3RU11/3RB10 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-19 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Tripping characteristic The tripping characteristics show the relationship between the tripping time and the tripping current as a multiple of the operational current Ie and are specified for symmetrical three-pole and two-pole loading from cold state. The smallest current at which tripping occurs is called the limiting tripping current. In accordance with IEC 60 947-4-1/ DIN VDE 0660 Part 102, this must lie within certain specified limits. The limit tripping current for the 3RU11 overload relay for symmetrical three-pole loading lies between 105 % and 120 % of the current setting and for the 3RB10 electronic overload relay at 114 % of the current setting. Starting from the limiting tripping current, the tripping characteristic moves on to larger tripping currents based on the characteristics of the so-called trip classes (CLASS 10, CLASS 20 etc., see section 4.1 "Specifications/regulations/ approvals"). The tripping characteristic of a three-pole 3RU11 thermal overload relay (see characteristic curve for symmetrical three-pole loading from cold state) is valid when all three bimetal strips are loaded with the same current simultaneously. If, however, only two bimetal strips are heated as a result of phase failure, these two strips would have to provide the force necessary for operating the release mechanism and, if no additional measures were implemented, they would require a longer tripping time or a higher current. These increased current levels over long periods usually result in damage to the load. To prevent damage, the 3RU11 thermal overload relay features phase failure sensitivity which, thanks to an appropriate mechanical mechanism, results in accelerated tripping according to the characteristic for two-pole loading from cold state. Tripping time 10 000 100 min 60 40 5000 s 2000 1000 10 500 5 200 2 100 1 50 three-pole load 20 two-pole load 10 5 2 1 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 15 20 30 40 A 60 80 x I n Current Fig. 4-5: Schematic representation of time-current-characteristic for 3RU11 These are schematic representations of characteristics. The characteristics for individual 3RU11 thermal overload relays can be requested from Technical Assistance at the following E-mail-address: technical-assistance@siemens.com . SIRIUS System Manual 4-20 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays The tripping characteristic of a three-pole loaded 3RB10 electronic overload relay from cold state (see schematic representation, Characteristic "1") is valid when all three phases are loaded with the same current simultaneously. In the case of phase loss or a current unbalance of more than 40 %, the 3RB10 solidstate overload relay trip contacts switch within 3 seconds. Thanks to rapid tripping in accordance with the tripping characteristic for two-pole loading from cold state (see schematic representation, Characteristic "3"), the temperature rise in the load is minimized. 10 10 NSB00293 2 1 50 40 1 20 Tripping time min 4 2 1 50 40 s Tripping time min NSB00294 6 6 10 8 6 4 4 1 20 2 s 2 10 8 6 4 3 3 2 2 1 0,6 1 2 4 6 10x I e Tripping current (mean values) 1 2 4 6 10x I e 0,6 1 Tripping current (mean values) CLASS 10 CLASS 20 Fig. 4-6: Schematic representation of time-current-characteristic for CLASS 10 and CLASS 20, 3RB10 These are schematic representations of characteristics. The characteristics for individual 3RB10 electronic overload relays can be requested from Technical Assistance at the following E-mailaddress: technical-assistance@siemens.com . In contrast to a load in the cold state, a load at operating temperature has a lower heat reserve. This fact affects the overload relay in that following long-term loading at operational current Ie needs to be reduced. The tripping time for the 3RU11 thermal overload relay is reduced to 25 % and for the 3RB10 electronic overload relay to about 30 % (see schematic representation, Characteristic "2"). Phase loss protection The 3RU11 thermal overload relays and the 3RB10 electronic overload relays both have phase loss protection (see "Tripping characteristics") for the purpose of minimizing the heating of the load during single-phase operation as a result of phase loss. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-21 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Important The 3RB10 electronic overload relays are not suitable for the protection of loads with a grounded wye point. N L1 L2 L3 U V W L1 L2 U V L1 L3 W U L2 V L3 W Fig. 4-7: Load types, that the 3RB10 can provide with current dependent protection 4.3.3 3RB12 electronic overload relays Functions Drawing of the front view 3RB12: 7 8 13 A1 A2 T1 T2/C1 C2 Y1 Y2 1 9 SIEMENS 2 3 Ready 4 Overload 60 50 Gnd Fault 10 5 NC 3RB12 A 40 30 25 15 TEST/ RESET 5 70 80 90 100 20 25 10 30 11 CLASS NC 12 6 95 96 97 98 05 06 07 08 NSB00297 Fig. 4-8: Front view of the 3RB12 electronic overload relays 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Terminals for the control supply voltage Green "Ready" LED Red "Ground Fault" LED Red "Overload" LED Combined TEST/RESET button with function test 1 NO contact/1 NC contact for overload/thermistor tripping or 1 NO contact/1 NC contact for overload/thermistor or ground fault tripping Terminals for thermistor input Terminals for external summation current transformer Terminals for remote or automatic RESET Rotary dial for current setting Rotary dial for the trip class 1 NO contact/1 NC contact for ground fault tripping or 1 NO contact/ 1 NC contact for overload warning Analog output 4 mA ... 20 mA SIRIUS System Manual 4-22 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Areas of use The 3RB12 electronic overload relays are designed for the protection of 3-phase and single phase AC loads. If single-phase AC motors are to be protected with the 3RB12 electronic overload relay, the microprocessor only monitors one phase conductor. The main circuits must therefore be connected to the current transformer in accordance with the operating instructions for the 3RB12 electronic overload relay. Supply voltage The 3RB12 electronic overload relays require an external voltage supply. The devices are available for the following control voltages: 24 V DC 110 V to 120 V AC 220 V to 240 V AC The 3RB12 overload relay with the control voltage of 24 V DC can be operated with the help of the DC/DC power supply SITOP POWER 24 V / 0.375 A (see section 4.4 "Accessories") on a DC supply from 30 V to 264 V. Setting The 3RB12 electronic overload relay is adjusted to the rated motor current using a rotary knob. The scale of the setting dial is calibrated in Amperes. Important The overload relays may only be operated between the lower and upper adjustment marks on the current setting range, that means that the operation of the overload relay above or below the current setting range is not permitted. Note In order to achieve a setting range of 0.25 A to 1.25 A, the wires going to the motor must be looped through the openings in the 3RB1246 overload relay multiple times in accordance with the instructions in section 4.5 "Mounting and connection". Furthermore the overload relay needs to be set for the required tripping class. Note The wiring and the contactor must be sized for the appropriate tripping class (CLASS). The overload relay is delivered with a default setting of tripping class CLASS 10. Sealable cover With the help of the sealable cover, 3RB1900-0A, the setting dial for rated motor current and dial for tripping class selection can be secured against unauthorized adjustment. The cover needs to be snapped in the place of the middle identification tab. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-23 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Ambient requirements The 3RB12 electronic overload relays are insensitive to outside influences, such as vibration, aggressive environment, weathering and strong temperature swings. In the temperature range of -25 C to +70 C the 3RB12 electronic overload relays are temperature (ambient) compensated according to IEC 60 947-4-1/DIN VDE 0660 part 102. Manual-automatic RESET A reset can be performed directly on the device by pressing the TEST/RESET button. A remote reset is possible by connecting a button to terminals Y1 and Y2 of the 3RB12 solid-state overload relay. Automatic resetting is still possible by bridging terminals Y1 and Y2. A reset is not possible until the recovery time has elapsed (see "Recovery time"). Important In the case of ground fault tripping, an automatic reset is not possible. Recovery time Following a current-dependent trip due to overload, phase unbalance or phase failure, the recovery time is approximately 5 minutes regardless of the reset mode that has been selected. This time is permanently set in the microprocessor to allow the load sufficient time to cool down. If, however, temperature-dependent tripping takes place as a result of a connected PTC thermistor circuit, the device cannot be reset manually or automatically until the winding temperature at the PTC thermistor falls to 5 K below the response temperature. After a ground fault trip, the overload relay can be activated again immediately without waiting for a recovery time to elapse. After tripping as a result of a ground fault an Automatic-RESET is not possible. The recovery time can be taken from the following table depending on the reset mode and the cause of the trip: When the 3RB12 tripped as a result of: Then the overload relay is reset after the following time by: Test immediate Overload* after 5 min. Thermistor* when 5 K under the tripping temperature is reached Ground fault immediate brief push of the Test/ RESET Button Remote-RESET (button Automatic-RESET activated over Y1-Y2) (jumper** Y1-Y2) non-functional * In the case the thermistor- and overload trip at the same time, the longer of the two Reset times is correct. ** Jumper (B) is at the time of delivery connected to Y1. Table 4-9: Recovery times SIRIUS System Manual 4-24 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays TEST function The relay can be tested to ensure the relay is functioning by using the combined TEST/RESET button. The device hardware, LEDs, current monitoring, thermistor input and ground fault input are tested when the button is pressed for up to 2 seconds. If the button is depressed for up to 5 seconds, the current transformer, resistive load and the microprocessor can be tested without the need to deactivate the motor feeder. The motor feeder is deactivated after 5 seconds via the output relay of the 3RB12. On deactivation, all functions of the 3RB12 solid-state overload relay are tested. The current transformer and the resistive load are excluded from the functional test when no voltage is applied to the main circuit. Testing of the device functions can be done during operation. STOP function When the TEST/RESET button is pressed, the overload relay switches off the contactor and therefore the load after 5 seconds. The load is switched on again via the contactor when the TEST/RESET button is pressed again briefly. Status indication The status of the 3RB12 solid-state relay is displayed on 3 LEDs: Green LED "Ready": Continuous green light indicates the operational readiness. The 3RB12 is not ready (LED "Off") when control supply voltage is not applied and when the function test was negative see "Test function"). Red LED "Overload": Continuous red light signals overload tripping due to current overload and flashing red light indicates imminent tripping due to overload (overload warning). Red LED "Ground Fault": Continuous red light indicates the presence of a ground fault. Auxiliary contacts The 3RB12 solid-state overload relay is equipped with two outputs each with one NO contact and one NC contact. Their use depends on the device variation: 1 NO (97-98) for the signal "tripped due to overload and/or thermistor"; 1 NC (95-96) for shutting off the contactor and 1 NO(07-08) for the signal "tripped due to ground fault"; 1 NC (05-06) for shutting off the contactor or 1 NO (97-98) for the signal "tripped due to overload and/or thermistor and/or ground fault"; 1 NC (95-96) for shutting off the contactor and 1 NO (07-08) for overload warning; 1 NC (05-06) for shutting off the contactor Mono- and bistable output relays The difference between monostable and bistable can be seen in terms of the tripping response of the auxiliary contacts on failure of the control supply voltage. Note The 3RB12 electronic overload relays come standard with monostable output relays. A special variation is available with bistable output relays. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-25 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays The monostable overload relays take up the "tripped" position on failure of the control voltage (> 200 ms) and resume their original state once voltage has been restored. These devices are suitable for systems in which the control voltage is not specifically monitored. The bistable 3RB12 solid-state overload relays do not change state from "tripped" or "not tripped" on failure of the control voltage. The auxiliary contacts only switch in the event of an overload when supply voltage is applied. These devices are therefore suitable for systems in which the control voltage is separately monitored. In the event of the failure of the control supply voltage for any length of time (> 0.2 seconds), the output relays respond in either a monostable or bistable manner, depending on the variant involved. Behavior of the output relays given: monostable 3RB12..-....0 bistable 3RB12..-....1 Loss of the control supply voltage Device trips Return of the control supply voltage without prior tripping Device resets No change to the switching status of the auxiliary contact elements Return of the control supply voltage after prior tripping Device remains tripped Reset at: - Overload trips after 5 minutes; thermistor trips when 5 K under the operating temperature reached - Ground fault trips immediately Table 4-10: Loss of the control supply voltage Control voltage failure with prior thermistor or overcurrent tripping action Control voltage failure without prior thermistor or overcurrent tripping action Control voltage monostable bistable monostable bistable 1 0 t N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. NSB00300 Overheated motor: device trips Control voltage failure Contact element open Control voltage return Manual/auto reset after five minutes or after the thermistor has cooled down Contact element closed Fig. 4-9: Reaction of the monostable and bistable auxiliary contacts SIRIUS System Manual 4-26 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Thermistor motor protection function Connecting a thermistor (PTC) sensor circuit offers, in addition to the current dependent protection, the possibility of directly monitoring the temperature of the motor windings. That way the load is protected against excessive temperature, that, may be derived from - stator critical motors, - motors with long start-up and braking processes - motors with blocked cooling or high ambient temperature. When excessive temperature is measured at the motor windings the 3RB12 switches the auxiliary contact (see point "Auxiliary contacts") shutting off the contactor and therefore the load. The connection for the excessive temperature protection is broken-wire proof. That means the device trips when there is an opening at the connection terminal. The thermistor-motor protection function comes with this feature deactivated. Analog output The motor current that is measured by the 3RB12..-...40 overload relay's microprocessor is converted and sent with an analog output signal of 4 mA to 20 mA DC (max. current value of the 3 phases). The following shows the relationship between the motor current and the analog output signal: 4 ... 20 mA 1 % x Ie = 0.128 mA I/Ie [%] = (Iout - 4 mA) / 0.128 mA IMotor [A] = (Iout - 4 mA) x Ie /12.8 mA Output current of the analog output Motor current, max. phase Set current (rated current for motor) Iout IMotor Ie Iout [mA] I/Ie [%] 0 No connection, wire break! Device not in operation 0 1 10 25 50 90 100 110 125 4.000 4.128 5.280 7.200 10.40 15.52 16.80 18.08 20.00 Example Iout = 10.40 mA; Ie = 6.0 A I = 50 % v. Ie IMotor = 3 A Technical data: Max. output current 23 mA Terminals "+" and "-" Max. load 100 Accuracy +/- 10% Short circuit-proof and idling-proof SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-27 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays The analog output signal can control moving coil instruments with a 4 mAto 20 mA-input (the upper limit of the scale for all frame sizes is 125 %) or can be stored through analog inputs of PLCs. Furthermore the current values can be transferred with a AS-Interface-analog module over the AS-Interface network. Ground fault protection To protect your load from minor short-circuits or ground faults caused by damage to the insulation, humidity, condensation, etc., the 3RB12 solid-state overload relays offer the following two possibilities for earth fault monitoring: - internal ground fault monitoring (not possible with wye-delta combinations) for motors with 3-wire connections for the detection of fault currents 30 % of the operational current Ie under rated operation. - External ground fault detection by connecting a summation current transformer (see "Accessories") for motors with 3-wire and 4-wire connection for detecting sinusoidal fault currents (50/60 Hz) of 0.3 A, 0.5 A and 1 A. In the case of a ground fault, the relay trips without a delay and switches off the contactor and therefore the load via the auxiliary contactors (see "Auxiliary contactors"). The "Tripped" state is signalled by a red LED "Ground Fault" (see "Indication of status"). Overload warning A blinking LED on the relay indicates when tripping is iminent as a result of overload, phase imbalance or phase loss after exceeding a limit current. This warning can also be signalled externally. The overload warning occurs - at 1.5 x Ie with symmetrical loading and - at 0.85 x Ie with asymmetrical loading. The overload warning makes it possible to take corrective measures (for example, disconnecting the load) right away and avoid longer over current dependent stress on the branch circuit. Self-monitoring Self-monitoring causes the device to trip in the event of an internal fault. In this case, the overload relay cannot be reset. Tripping characteristics The tripping characteristics show the relationship between the tripping time and the tripping current as a multiple of the operational current Ie and are specified for symmetrical three-pole and two-pole loading from cold state. The smallest current at which tripping occurs is called the limiting tripping current. In accordance with IEC 60 947-4-1/DIN VDE 0660 Part 102, this must be within certain specified limits. The limits of the limiting tripping current lie, in the case of the 3RB12 solid-state overload relay for symmetrical three-pole loading, between 110 % and 120 % of the operational current. Starting from the limiting tripping current, the tripping characteristic moves on to higher tripping currents based on the characteristics of the so-called trip classes (CLASS 10, CLASS 20 etc. see section 4.1 "Specifications/regulations/ approvals"). SIRIUS System Manual 4-28 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays 120 100 50 50 20 20 CLASS 30 25 20 Tripping time 5 2 1 50 s 20 15 10 5 CLASS 5 10 2 0,6 10 CLASS 30 25 20 5 Tripping time 10 min 120 100 s min The tripping characteristic of an overload relay with three-pole loading from cold state (see the diagram "Tripping characteristic for three-pole loading") is valid when all three phases are loaded with the same current simultaneously. In the event of a phase loss or current unbalance of more than 40 %, the 3RB12 overload relay switches off the contactor more quickly to minimize the temperature rise in the load in accordance with the tripping characteristic for two-pole loading from cold state (see the diagram "Tripping characteristic for 2-pole loading"). 2 1 50 20 10 5 15 10 CLASS 5 2 1 2 5 10x I e Tripping current (mean values) Three-pole loading 0,6 1 2 5 10x I e Tripping current (mean values) Two-pole loading Fig. 4-10: Time-current-characteristics, schematic representation 3RB12 These are schematic representations of characteristics. The characteristics for individual 3RB12 electronic overload relays can be requested from Technical Assistance at the following E-mailaddress: technical-assistance@siemens.com . In contrast to a load in the cold state, a load at operating temperature has a lower heat reserve. This fact affects the 3RB12 overload relay, in that, following an extended period of loading at operational current Ie, the tripping time is reduced by about 30 %. Phase loss protection The 3RB12 electronic overload relays have phase loss protection (see "Tripping characteristics") for the purpose of minimizing the heating of the load during single-phase operation as a result of phase loss. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-29 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays 4.4 Accessories 4.4.1 Electrical remote RESET Description For the 3RU11 thermal overload relays, frame sizes S00 to S3, and the 3RB10 electronic overload relays, frame sizes S00 to S10/S12, there is an electrical remote RESET module that can be used for every frame size. With this module the overload relay can be electrically reset after tripping once the recovery time is met. The coil of the module is designed for an operation duration of 0.2 to 4 seconds. Maintained-contact control is not permissible. An electrical RESET can be achieved without an accessory with the 3RB12 electronic overload relay (see section 4.3 "Application and use") Installation/Removal The following graphic shows how the electrical remote RESET is installed and removed, using the example of the 3RU11 in frame size S00. 1 2 Fig. 4-11: Electrical remote RESET, installation/removal Voltages The electrical remote RESET module is available for the following voltages: 24 to 30 V AC/DC 110 to 127 V AC/DC 220 to 250 V AC/DC Operational range The operational range of the coil is 0.85 to 1.1 x Us Current consumption The current consumption of the electrical remote RESET-module is: AC 80 VA, DC 70 W Manual RESET The electrical reset can be bypassed by manually pushing the blue reset button on the electrical remote RESET-module. Connection The screw connections on terminals E1 and E2 of the electrical remote RESET module are similar to the screw connections of the auxiliary contacts of the 3RU11 and 3RB10 overload relays (see section 4.7 "Technical Data"). SIRIUS System Manual 4-30 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays 4.4.2 Mechanical thru-the-door reset For the 3RU11 thermal overload relays, frame sizes S00 to S3, and the 3RB10 electronic overload relays, frame sizes S00 to S10/S12, can also be remotely reset by mechanical means. For the mechanical remote RESET there are the two following possibilities: 1 Resetting plunger (same for all frame sizes) A resetting plunger with a support and funnel 3RU1900-1A for operation from the enclosure door. The plunger must be cut to the required length. 2 Cable release (same for all frame sizes) Cable release with support 3RU1900-1B, -1C for panel layouts that do not allow for the standard resetting plunger. The cable comes in the following lengths 400 mm (3RU1900-1B) and 600 mm (3RU1900-1C) The 3RB12 electronic overload relays don't have an accessory for mechanical remote RESET. Resetting plunger Installation The following graphic shows how to install the resetting plunger, support, funnel and push button, using the example of the 3RU11 thermal overload relay, frame size S00: 2 1 3SB1 Enclosure door Fig. 4-12: Mechanical remote RESET: resetting plunger, installation Removal The following graphic shows the removal of the holder, using the example of the 3RU11 thermal overload relay: 1 2 Fig. 4-13: Mechanical remote reset: resetting plunger, removal SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-31 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Cable release Installation The following graphic shows the installation of the cable release with support, using the example of the 3RU11 thermal overload relay in frame size S00: 2 5 6 O 6.5 mm 4 1 3 8 mm 4 Fig. 4-14: Mechanical remote RESET: cable release, installation Removal The following graphic shows the removal of the support for the cable release, using the example of the 3RU11 thermal overload relay: 1 2 Fig. 4-15: Mechanical remote RESET: cable release, removal SIRIUS System Manual 4-32 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays 4.4.3 Other accessories Sealable cover There is a frame size independent sealable cover for both the 3RB10 and 3RB12 electronic overload relay. In contrast, the 3RU11 thermal overload relay has a built-in sealable cover. Adapters for individual installation There is an adapter for individual installation for the 3RU11 thermal overload relay and the 3RB10 electronic overload relay, frame sizes S00 to S3. The 3RB10 overload relays, frame sizes S6 and S10/S12 can be individually installed without an accessory. The 3RB12 46 electronic overload relays require the use of push-in lugs for panel mounting. The 3RB12 53 overload relay can also be snapped onto 75 mm DIN rail, when using the 3UF1900-0JA00 base plate. Terminal covers For the 3RU11 thermal overload relay, frame sizes S2 and S3, the 3RB10 electronic overload relays, frame sizes S2 to S10/S12 and the 3RB12 53 3RB12 57 and 3RB12 62 electronic overload relays, there are terminal covers available. The designs and use of the covers can be taken from the installation instructions. Box terminal blocks For the 3RB10 electronic overload relay, frame sizes S6 and S10/S12 there are box terminal blocks for connection to round cables and ribbon cable. The designs and use of the box terminal blocks can be taken from the installation instructions. Summation current transformer A summation current transformer for external ground fault detection is available for the 3RB12 electronic overload relay. DC power supply For the operation of the externally supplied 3RB12 with a control voltage of 24 V DC on a DC network of 30 V to 264 V the SITOP POWER 24 V/0.375 A, DC power supply can be used. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-33 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays 4.5 Mounting and connection 4.5.1 Mounting 4.5.1.1 3RU11 thermal overload relays and 3RB10 electronic overload relays Mounting options The 3RU11 thermal overload relays and the 3RB10 electronic overload relays are electrically and mechanically designed to work in harmony with the 3RT contactor. For that reason it is possible to directly mount the overload relay to a contactor. With a separate accessory it is possible to mount the overload relay as a stand alone device. The 3RB10 overload relays can also be used in connection with the 3RW30/31 softstarters. However, the mounting instructions found in Chapter 8 must be observed. Direct mounting The following drawing shows an example of a 3RU11 thermal overload relay in frame size S00 being mounted directly to a 3RT contactor and an example of a 3RB10 electronic overload relay in frame size S00 being mounted to the 3RW30/31 softstarter. 3 1 1 2 2 Fig. 4-16: Mounting to the 3RT contactor/3RW3 softstarter Important For the use of the overload relays in connection with the 3RW30/31 softstarters, observe the instructions found in Chapter 8. SIRIUS System Manual 4-34 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays The following drawing shows the direct mounting of the 3RB10 electronic overload relays, frame size S6 (3RB105) and S10/S12 (3RB106), to the 3RT contactors: 3RB10 5 + 3RT1.5 3RB10 6 + 3RT1.6 3RB10 6 + 3RT1.7 3RT19 56-4EA1 3 RU-01019 RU-01031 3RT19 66-4EA1 3 3 3 2 3 2 1 2 1 3RT19 56-4EA3 3RT19 66-4EA3 3 3 3 2x 3RT19 66-4EA1 4 1 3RT19 56-4EA1 3RB10 5 + 3RT1.5 3RB10 56-..W 3RB10 55-..W RU-01032 RU-01033 3RT19 55-4G 3RT19 56-4EA2 2 3RT19 56-4EA2 2 1 1 3 1 2 3RT19 56-4EA1 Fig. 4-17: Mounting of the 3RB10 electronic overload relays, frame size S6 (3RB105) and S10/S12 (3RB106), to the 3RT contactors SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-35 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Important When installing the 3RB10 electronic overload relays, frame size S6, with the busbar connection pieces, the 3RB10 may not be guided with the nose of the top of the overload housing in the guides of the contactor. The guides on the contactor are for the direct mounting of the overload relay 3RB10, frame size S6 with straight-through current transformer. To cover the busbar when combining 3RB10 6 and 3RT1.6 or 3RB10 6 and 3RT1.7, use the terminal cover 3RT19 66-4EA3. There is a piece that must be removed as shown in the figure 4-17. RU-00964 The following drawing shows the removal of the 3RB10 electronic overload relay with straight-through current transformer: 2 3 1 Fig. 4-18: Removal of the 3RB10 electronic overload relays, frame size S6 with straight-through current transformer RU-00200 The contactor-overload combination, frame sizes S00 to S3 can be snapped on to 35 mm DIN rail, according to EN 50 022. This is shown in the following drawing of a combination in frame size 00: Fig. 4-19: Mounting on 35 mm DIN rail SIRIUS System Manual 4-36 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays For the removal of S00/S0 combinations from the DIN rail, the contactor must be pushed downward and then swung forward. By contrast, in S2/S3 combinations the overload relay must be removed first and then the contactor needs to be disengaged from the DIN rail with a screw driver (see description in Chapter 3). As an alternative to DIN rail mounting, it is possible to screw mount the S00 to S3 combinations. The combinations in the frame sizes S6 to S12, on the other hand, were designed for screw mounting only. When mounting the S00 to S12 combinations with screws, the contactor should to be mounted first and then the overload relay should be mounted to the contactor as in the drawing on the previous page. Individual installation The 3RU11 thermal overload relays and the 3RB10 electronic overload relays frame sizes S00 to S3, can also be used as stand alone units when used with adapters for individual installation. Adapter for individual installation Frame size for 3RU11 for 3RB10 3RU19 16-3AA01 S00 X X 3RU19 26-3AA01 S0 X X 3RU19 36-3AA01 S2 X X 3RU19 46-3AA01 S3 X X The following drawing shows the mounting and removal of the adapter for individual installation with a 3RU11 thermal overload relay, frame size S2. 1 3RU19 00-3A RU-00342 1 2 2 Fig. 4-20: Mounting and removal of the adapter for individual installation (S2) The adapter can be mounted to 35 mm DIN rail according to EN 50 022. The frame size S3 adapter can also be mounted to 75 mm DIN rail. It is also possible to panel mount the adapter. The frame size S6 3RB10 electronic overload relays are suitable for panel mounting and DIN rail mounting on 35 mm DIN rail - without an additional adapter. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-37 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays 3RB10 5 RU-00960 3RT19 56-4EA2 3RT19 55-4G Fig. 4-21: Mounting to 35 mm DIN rail The 3RB10 electronic overload relays, frame sizes S10/S12, are designed for panel mounting. 3RT19 66-4EA2 3RB10 6 3 2 1 2 3RT19 66-4G Fig. 4-22: The panel mounting of the 3RB10 electronic overload relay (S10/S12) SIRIUS System Manual 4-38 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Mounting position The following drawing shows the permissible mounting position when mounted to the contactor and for individual installation of the 3RU11 thermal overload relays. If the mounting position falls in the shaded range, the current setting needs to be adjusted by 10 %. Contactor with overload relay 0 22,5 0 Overload relay in individual installation 0 22,5 45 0 45 I e x 1,1 I e x 1,1 90 135 135 I e x 1,1 NSB01363 135 135 90 NSB01364 Ie x 1,1 Fig. 4-23: The permissible mounting of the 3RU11 when mounted to the contactor and for individual installation The mounting position of the 3RB10 electronic overload relays is not restricted. Minimal clearance A minimal side clearance to grounded parts of > 6.5 mm is required. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-39 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays 4.5.1.2 3RB12 electronic overload relays Mounting possibilities The 3RB12 electronic overload relays can be directly connected to 3RT contactors with the exception of the 3RB12 46. Individual installation is possible with all of the overload relays. Direct mounting The 3RB12 53 and 3RB12 57 electronic overload relays can be mounted directly to the 3RT contactor in the manor shown in the following drawing. Additional covers usable Frame Size S6 3RT1956-4EA1 or 3RT1956-4EA2 (with use of box terminals) S6 contactor 3TX7506-0B or 3RT1956-4EA3 Overload Relays 3TX7506-0A 3RB1253 Additional covers usable Frame Size S10/S12 3RT1966-4EA1 or 3RT1966-4EA2 (with use of box terminals) S10/S12 contactor 3RT1966-4EA3 Overload Relays 3RB1257 3TX7506-0A Individual installation The 3RB12 46 electronic overload relays can be mounted on 35 mm DIN rail according to EN 50 022 or directly to a panel with the use of push-in lugs that are available as an accessory. The other overload relays are designed for panel mounting with screws. The 3RB12 53 overload relay can also be snapped onto 75 mm DIN rail when using a base plate accessory. Mounting position The mounting position of the 3RB12 electronic overload relays is not restricted. Minimal clearance A minimal side clearance to grounded parts of > 6.5 mm is required. SIRIUS System Manual 4-40 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays 4.5.2 Connection 3RU11 thermal overload relays and 3RB10 electronic overload relays Connection options The connections for the main current paths are either screw terminals, busbars, Cage Clamp terminals or straight-through current transformers depending on the frame size and model of the device. The auxiliary circuits have either screw terminals or Cage Clamp terminals, depending on the frame size and model of the device. The connection type as well as the type of screw driver/bit width, required torque and conductor cross-sections (min.; max.) for the individual devices can be found in section 4.7 "Technical Data". The 3RB10 electronic overload relays in frame size S6 are available with straight-through current transformer technology. As shown in the picture below the cables are passed through the straight-through current transformer openings and connected directly to the main terminals on the contactor. RU-00965 Straight-through current transformer Fig. 4-24: 3RB10 electronic overload relay, frame size S6 with straight-through current transformer technology Cage Clamp technology For Cage Clamp terminal technology please observe the instructions in Chapter 1 "System overview". Coil- and auxiliary contact repeat terminal When directly mounting the 3RU11 thermal overload relays and the 3RB10 electronic overload relays of frame size S00, the auxiliary contact runs through the coil terminal A2. This simplifies the wiring. Protection against electrical shock Observe the data in section 4.7 "Technical Data" regarding protection against electrical shock (according to DIN VDE 0106 part 100) with the 3RU11 thermal overload relays and 3RB10 electronic overload relays. Possibilities on how to achieve shock protection can be found in the mounting instructions. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-41 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays 3RB12 electronic overload relays Connection options The connections for the main current paths are either bar connection or straight-through current transformer technology, depending on frame size and device design. The auxiliary, control, and thermistor sensor circuits have screw terminals. The connection type as well as the type of screw driver/bit width, required torque and conductor cross-sections (min.; max.) for the individual devices can be found in section 4.7 "Technical Data". Straight-through current transformer The 3RB12 46 electronic overload relay is designed with straight-through current transformer technology. The cables are passed through the straightthrough current transformer openings and are connected directly to the main terminals on the contactor. Looping of the cables The 3RB12 46 electronic overload relays with the setting range 1.25 to 6.3 A can also be used to protect loads with the rated current of 0.25 to 1.25 A. With these rated currents, IN, every phase must be looped through the openings in the overload multiple times (n-times). With this multiple looping through of the cables, calculate the setting current Ie according to the following formula: with n 5 Ie = n* IN The following drawing shows the looping through technique: L1 L2 L3 3 1 2 Fig. 4-25: Looping through technique, 3RB12 46 Protection against electrical shock Observe the data in section 4.7 "Technical Data" regarding protection against electrical shock (according to DIN VDE 0106 part 100) with the 3RB12 electronic overload relays. Possibilities on how to achieve shock protection can be found in the mounting instructions. SIRIUS System Manual 4-42 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays 4.5.3 Circuit diagrams The following diagrams show wiring examples for the 3RU11 thermal overload relays, the 3RB10 and 3RB12 electronic overload relays: Protection of DC motors with 3RU11 NSB00290 NSB00289 3RU11 1 3 5 1 3 5 2 4 6 2 4 6 1-pole 2-pole Fig. 4-26: Circuit diagrams 3RU11 General circuit diagrams for 3RU11 and 3RB10 95 97 2T1 4T2 6T3 96 98 STOP RESET 1L1 3L2 5L3 95 97 A2 14/22 2T1 4T2 6T3 96 98 3RU11 16/3RB10 16 NSB00292 1L1 3L2 5L3 NSB00291 TEST STOP RESET TEST 3RU11 and 3RB10 3RU11 26 to 3RU11 46/3RB10 26 to 3RB10 66 Fig. 4-27: Internal circuit diagrams 3RU11 and 3RB10 3RB10 1 and 3RU11 1 N L1 L2 L3 L1 F1 N F3 1 3 5 A2 13 2 4 6 A1 14 K1 STOP 1 3 5 95 97 2 4 6 96 98 A2 14/22 F2 Test Reset U VW M1 M 3~ E1 S1 S2 0,2 ... 4 sec. Remote reset E2 Fig. 4-28: Diagram for thermal 3RU11 1 overload relay and 3RB10 1 electronic overload relay SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-43 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays 3RU11 2 to 3RU11 4 / 3RB10 2 to 3RB10 6 N L1 L2 L3 N L1 F1 F3 1 3 5 A2 2 4 6 A1 K1 STOP 1 3 5 95 97 2 4 6 96 98 S1 F2 Test Reset U V W E1 M 3~ M1 S2 0,2 ... 4 sec. Remote Fernreset reset E2 Fig. 4-29: Diagram for 3RU11 2 to 3RU11 4 thermal overload relays and 3RB10 2 to 3RB10 6 electronic overload relays In single pole loads the 3 main current paths are to be connected in series. (applies only good for 3RU11). Warning When using automatic reset and a maintained contact device for starting, the motor restarts automatically. 3RB12 electronic overload relays 3RB12 53- ...0., - ... 1 . 3RB12 57- ...0., - ... 1 . 3RB12 62- ...0., - ... 1 . 3RB12 46- ...0., - ... 1 .; L N L N L1 L2 L3 L1 3RB12 T1 L2 L3 T2 T3 3RB12 T2 T3 T1 1~ M 1~ M Fig. 4-30: Wiring diagrams for single-phase motors using 3RB12 Important The electronic overload relays with integrated ground fault detection (3RB12..-....2./3RB12..-....3.) are not suitable for single-phase motors. SIRIUS System Manual 4-44 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays 3RB12 overload relay, standard design L1 L2 L3 N F2 F3 F5 F4 Z1 S1A 3 UL 22 Z2 S1E 1 3 5 2 4 6 1 L1 3 5 L2 L3 K1E K1E F1 T2/ C1 C2 A2 A1 95 97 05 07 Test/ Reset CLASS 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 K2 Ground Fault 3 RB 12 Ground Fault K1 Overload H1 T1 T2 T3 2 4 6 T2/ T1 C1 Y2 Y1 H1 H1 Ready Ground Overload Fault 96 98 06 08 A1 M 3~ AutomaticReset RemoteReset Y2 Y2 Y1 Y1 K1E A2 NSB00301b Fig. 4-31: 3RB12 Overload relay, standard design SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-45 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays 4.6 Dimensional drawings (dimensions in mm) 47 3) 10 24 41 61 118 185 148 46 NSB00338 3RU11/3RB10/3RB12 overload relays - screw-type terminals 15.5 1) 2) 33 49 5 45 68 max. 161 max. 8 3SB1 1) Mechanical RESET 2) Cable release (400 mm or 600 mm long, Installation on front or side on the support) 3) Support for RESET Fig. 4-32: 3RU11 16-..B0. (frame size S00) with accessories 52 4.5 1) 5 75 5 87 43 38 NSB00339a 5 35 45 5 33 5 68 30 41 1) Adapter for remote RESET Fig. 4-33: 3RU11 16-..B., 3RB10 16-..B. (frame size S00) with adapter for stand-alone installation with accessories 62 4.5 4.5 6 85 97 50 44 NSB00340 5 35 45 5 44 86 5 Fig. 4-34: 3RU11 26-..B., 3RB10 26-..B. (frame size S0) with adapter for stand-alone installation 51 5 5.5 4 95 105 54 50 NSB00341a 5.5 44 55 5 40 108 5 Fig. 4-35: 3RU11 36-..B., 3RB10 36-..B. (frame size S2) with adapter for stand-alone installation SIRIUS System Manual 4-46 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays 5 79 7 1) Mounting to 35 mm, DIN rail 15 mm deep according to EN 50 022 or 75 mm DIN rail according to EN 50 023 5 110 62 57 NSB00342 5 1) 60 70 5 59 5 130 5 Fig. 4-36: 3RU11 46-..B., 3RB10 46-..B. (frame size S3) with adapter for stand-alone installation 12.5 14 10 O 4.5 g h f p 100 85 100 b d i o 7.2 127.5 5 a b f m e k NSB00356a 50 70 j e a l n c NSB00355 c d Fig. 4-37: 3RB12 46 Fig. 4-38: 3RB12 5. / 3RB12 62 Overload relay a b c d e f Overload relay a 3RB12 46-1E 3RB12 46-1P 3RB12 46-1Q 29 34 34 24 29 29 47 46 46 -- -- 48 48 4 4 3RB12 53-0F 3RB12 57-0K 3RB12 62-0L 15 10 10 b 120 85 145 85 230 85 c d e 155 110 40 175 105 50 190 120 70 f g 7 42 9 52 1 70 h i 37 48 125 41 130 46 135 55 -- j k l 20 30 40 131 7.2 151 7.2 166 7.2 m n o 13 145 4 160 6 175 8 -- -- p SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-47 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays 3RU11 overload relay- Cage Clamp terminals 4.5 17.5 148 46 8 28 4.5 3) 2) 5 7.5 5 68 1) Mechanical RESET 2) Cable release 400 mm or 600 mm long Installation on front or side on the support 3) Support 35 45 5 5 7.5 68 30 41 NSB00344a 75 5 12 26 5 NSB00343 1) 15.5 35 45 5 5 92 75 92 42 1) 1) Adapter for remote RESET Fig. 4-39: 3RU11 16-..C1 (frame size S00) with accessories (same for frame sizes S00 to S3) 62 44 50 4.5 SIEMENS T EST 0 1 A 6 85 97 H RESET 4.5 NSB00345 ST OP 5 44 35 45 5 86 5 Fig. 4-40: 3RU11 26-..D. (frame size S0) with adapter for stand alone installation 51 50 54 5 SIEMENS A 4 105 95 T EST 0 1 H RESET 5.5 NSB00346a ST OP 44 55 5.5 5 40 108 5 Fig. 4-41: 3RU11 36-..D. (frame size S2) with adapter for stand alone installation 5 79 57 62 NSB00347 SIEMENS 5 A RESET 110 120 TEST 0 1 H STOP 5 1) 5 60 70 7 5 59 130 5 1) Mounting to 35 mm, DIN rail 15 mm deep according to EN 50 022 or 75 mm DIN rail according to EN 50 023 Fig. 4-42: 3RU11 46-..D. (frame size S3) with adapter for stand alone installation SIRIUS System Manual 4-48 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays 4.7 Technical Data 4.7.1 3RU11 thermal overload relays Type 3RU11 16 3RU11 26 3RU11 36 3RU11 46 Frame size S00 S0 S2 S3 Width 45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 70 mm General specifications Tripped at Tripping class Overload and phase loss In acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1 CLASS 10 Phase loss sensitivity Yes Overload warning No Resetting and recovery Manual, remote, and automatic resetting 1) Resetting options after tripping Recovery time With automatic REST min. Depends on the height of the tripping current and the tripping characteristic With manual RESET min. Depends on the height of the tripping current and the tripping characteristic With remote RESET min. Depends on the height of the tripping current and the tripping characteristic Configuration Indication of operating status on device Yes, by means of the "test function/contact position indicator" slider TEST function Yes RESET button Yes STOP button For the safe operation of motors with increased safety protection Yes EC special test certificate number in compliance with directive 94/9/EC KEMA test certificate no. EX-97.Y.3235 DMT 98 ATEX G001 Ambient temperatures Storage/transportation C -55 to +80 Operation C -20 to +70 Temperature compensation Permissible rated current at C up to 60 Internal cubicle temperature of 60 C % 100 (current reduction is required at above +60 C) Internal cubicle temperature of 70 C % 87 Repetition terminals Terminal for contactor coil Yes Not required Auxiliary switch repetition terminal Yes Not required IP20 IP202) Degree of protection In acc. with IEC 60 529/DIN VDE 0470 Part 1 Shock protection In acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 Sinus shock resistance In acc. with IEC 68 Part 2-27 g/ms 810 Conducted disturbance neutralization - burst In acc. with IEC 61 000-4-4: (corresponds to severity grade 3) kV EMC noise immunity is not relevant to thermal overload relays Conducted disturbance neutralization - surge In acc. with IEC 61 000-4-5: (corresponds to severity grade 3) kV EMC noise immunity is not relevant to thermal overload relays Electrostatic discharge In acc. with IEC 61 000-4-2: (corresponds to severity grade 3) kV EMC noise immunity is not relevant to thermal overload relays Field-related disturbance neutralization In acc. with IEC 61 000-4-3: (corresponds to severity grade 3) V/m EMC noise immunity is not relevant to thermal overload relays Protected against touching by fingers EMC noise immunity EMC emitted interference EMC noise immunity is not relevant to thermal overload relays Resistance to extreme climates (atmospheric humidity) % 100 Site altitude m Up to 2000 above sea level; above on request Construction type/mounting 1) Remote RESET in conjunction with suitable accessories 2) Terminal compartment: IP00 degree of protection Direct mounting/stand-alone installation with terminal Direct bracket 4) mounting 3)/ stand-alone installation with terminal bracket 4) For screw-on and snap-on attachment to 35 mm DIN rail; frame size S3 also for 75 mm DIN rail 3) Only stand-alone installation is possible for the 3RU11 16 overload relay with the Cage Clamp terminal system. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-49 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Type 3RU11 16 3RU11 26 3RU11 36 3RU11 46 Frame size S00 S0 S2 S3 Width 45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 70 mm Main circuit Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 690 Rated impulse strength Uimp kV 6 8 Rated operating voltageUe V 690 1000 Current type Direct current Yes Alternating current Current setting Yes, frequency range up to 400 Hz A Power loss per device (max.) W Short-circuit protection With fuse, without contactor With fuse and contactor Safe isolation between main and auxiliary conducting paths In acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 IEC 60 947-1-A1 1000 0.11 - 0.16 1.8 - 2.5 5.5 - 8 Up to 9 - 12 Up to 20 - 25 Up to 40 - 50 18 - 25 Up to 80 - 100 3.9 to 6.6 3.9 to 6 6 to 9 10 to 16.5 See the selection and ordering data in the catalog See the technical specifications (short-circuit protection with fuses/ circuit breakers for motor feeders) V 500 690 Screw-type terminal/ Cage Clamp terminal1) Screw-type terminal Connection of the main circuit Connection type Screw-type terminal with box terminal Screw-type terminal with box terminal 2)/ bar connection Screw-type terminal * Terminal screw Pozidriv 2 * Tightening torque * Connection cross-section (min./max.), 1 or 2 conductors Allen screw 4 mm Nm 0.8 to 1.2 2 to 2.5 3 to 4.5 4 to 6 Single-core mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) max. 2 x (1 to 4) 2 x (1 to 2.5) 2 x (2.5 to 6) max. 2 x (2.5 to 10) 2 x (0.75 to 16) -- 2 x (2.5 to 16) -- Finely stranded without wire end ferrule mm2 -- Finely stranded with wire end ferrule mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) 2 x (1 to 2.5) 2 x (0.75 to 16) 2 x (2.5 to 35) mm2 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) 2 x (2.5 to 6) 1 x (0.75 to 25) 1 x (2.5 to 50) mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) 2 x (1 to 2.5) 2 x (0.75 to 25) 2 x (10 to 50) mm2 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) 2 x (2.5 to 6) max. 2 x max. 2 x (1 to 4) (2.5 to 10) 1 x (0.75 to 35) 1 x (10 to 70) Stranded AWG cables, single- or multi-core AWG 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (14 to 10) 2 x (18 to 3) 2 x (10 to 1/0) AWG -- -- 1 x (18 to 1) 2 x (10 to 2/0) -- -- 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) Ribbon cables (number x width x depth) mm Bar connection * Terminal screw M 6 x 20 * Tightening torque Nm 4 to 6 * Connection cross-section Finely stranded with cable lug mm2 -- (min./max.) Stranded with cable lug mm2 -- 2 x 70 AWG cables, single-core or stranded with cable lug AWG -- 2/0 With connecting bars (max. width) mm -- 12 2 x 70 1) For the connection cross-sections for the Cage Clamp terminal system, see "Connecting the auxiliary circuit". 2) The box terminal can be removed. After the box terminal has been removed, busbar and cable-lug connections are possible. SIRIUS System Manual 4-50 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Type 3RU11 16 3RU11 26 3RU11 36 3RU11 46 Frame size S00 S0 S2 S3 Width 45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 70 mm Auxiliary circuit Auxiliary contact elements (number x (variant) 1 x (1 NO contact + 1 NC contact) Assignment of the auxiliary contact elements 1 NO contact for the "tripped by overload" signal 1 NC contact for switching off the contactor Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 690 Rated impulse strength Uimp kV 6 * 24 V A 4 * 120 V A 4 * 125 V A 4 * 230 V A 3 * 400 V A 2 * 600 V A 0.6 * 690 V A 0.5 * 24 V A 3 * 120 V A 3 * 125 V A 3 * 230 V A 2 * 400 V A 1 * 600 V A 0.6 * 690 V A 0.5 * 24 V A 1 * 60 V A On request * 110 V A 0.22 * 125 V A 0.22 * 220 V A 0.11 Contact rating of the auxiliary contact elements NC contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15 NO contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15 NC contact, NO contact with direct current DC-13 Rated operational current Ie at Ue: Rated operational current Ie at Ue: Rated operational current Ie at Ue: A Conventional free air thermal current Ith Contact reliability (suitable for PLC; 17 V, 5 mA) 6 yYs Short-circuit protection With fuse Performance class gL/gG A 6 rapid A 10 With miniature circuit breaker (C characteristic) A 61) Safe isolation between auxiliary conducting paths in acc. with V 415 DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 Connection of the auxiliary circuit Connection type Screw-type terminal or Cage Clamp terminal Connection characteristics Screw-type terminal Cage Clamp terminal *Terminal screw Pozidriv 2 -- *Tightening torque *Connection cross-sections Single-core (min./max.) 1 or 2 conductors Nm 0.8 to 1.2 -- mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) 2 x (0.25 to 2.5) mm2 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) Finely stranded without wire end ferrule mm2 Finely stranded with wire end ferrule Stranded AWG cables, single- or multi-core -- 2 x (0.25 to 2.5) mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) 2 x (0.25 to 1.5) mm2 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm2 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) AWG 2 x (18 to 14) -- 2 x (24 to 14) s, u, U rating data Auxiliary circuit Switching capacity B600, R300 1) Up to IK 0.5 kA; 260 V SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-51 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders with short-circuit currents of up to 70 kA at 50/60 Hz 690 VAC Permissible short-circuit protection for motor starters consisting of an overload relay and a contactor of the coordination type "2"1) Frame size S00 Adjustment range A 3 kW 3RT10 15 Ie max = 7 A (at 50 Hz 400 V AC) 4 kW 3RT10 16 Ie max = 9 A (at 50 Hz 400 V AC) 5.5 kW 3RT10 17 Ie max = 12 A (at 50 Hz 400 V AC) UL fuse Circuit breaker for starter protection at RK5 Iq = 50 kA / 400 V AC gL/gG aM BS88T gL/gG aM BS88T gL/gG aM BS88T A 0.11 to 0.16 0.5 -- -- 0.5 -- -- 0.5 -- -- 1 0.14 to 0.2 1 -- -- 1 -- -- 1 -- -- 1 3RV1321-0BC10 0.18 to 0.25 1 -- -- 1 -- -- 1 -- -- 1 3RV1321-0CC10 0.22 to 0.32 1.6 -- 2 1.6 -- 2 1.6 -- 2 1 3RV1321-0DC10 0.28 to 0.4 2 -- 2 2 -- 2 2 -- 2 1.6 3RV1321-0EC10 0.35 to 0.5 2 -- 2 2 -- 2 2 -- 2 2 3RV1321-0FC10 0.45 to 0.63 2 -- 4 2 -- 4 2 -- 4 2.5 3RV1321-0GC10 -- 0.55 to 0.8 4 -- 4 4 -- 4 4 -- 4 3 3RV1321-0HC10 0.7 to 1 4 -- 6 4 -- 6 4 -- 6 4 3RV1321-0JC10 3RV1321-0KC10 0.9 to 1.25 4 -- 6 4 -- 6 4 -- 6 5 1.1 to 1.6 6 -- 10 6 -- 10 6 -- 10 6 3RV1321-1AC10 1.4 to 2 6 -- 10 6 -- 10 6 -- 10 8 3RV1321-1BC10 1.8 to 2.5 10 -- 10 10 -- 10 10 -- 10 10 -- 2.2 to 3.2 10 -- 16 10 -- 16 10 -- 16 12 -- 2.8 to 4 16 -- 16 16 -- 16 16 -- 16 16 -- 3.5 to 5 20 6 20 20 6 20 20 6 20 20 -- 4.5 to 6.3 20 6 20 20 6 20 20 6 20 25 -- 5.5 to 8 20 10 20 20 10 20 20 10 20 30 -- 20 16 20 20 16 20 40 -- 20 16 25 45 -- 7 to 10 9 to 12 Frame size S0 Adjustment range 5.5 kW 3RT10 24 Ie max = 12 A (at 50 Hz 400 V AC) 7.5 kW 3RT10 25 Ie max = 17 A (at 50 Hz 400 V AC) 11 kW 3RT10 26 Ie max = 25 A (at 50 Hz 400 V AC) UL fuse Circuit breaker for starter protection at RK5 Iq = 50 kA / 400 V AC A gL/gG aM BS88 gL/gG aM BS88 gL/gG aM BS88 1.8 to 2.5 10 -- 10 10 -- 10 10 -- 10 10 A 3RV13 21-1CC10 2.2 to 3.2 10 -- 16 10 -- 16 10 -- 16 12 3RV13 21-1DC10 2.8 to 4 16 -- 16 16 -- 16 16 -- 16 16 3RV13 21-1EC10 3.5 to 5 20 6 20 20 6 20 20 6 20 20 3RV13 21-1FC10 4.5 to 6.3 20 6 25 20 6 25 20 6 25 25 3RV13 21-1GC10 5.5 to 8 25 10 25/32 2) 25 10 25/32 2) 25 10 25 30 3RV13 21-1HC10 7 to 10 25 16 25/32 2) 25 16 25/32 2) 32 16 35 40 3RV13 21-1JC10 9 to 12.5 25 20 25/32 2) 25 20 25/32 2) 35 20 35 45 3RV13 21-1KC10 11 to 16 25 20 25/32 2) 25 20 25/32 2) 35 20 35 60 3RV13 21-4AC10 14 to 20 -- -- -- 25 20 25/32 2) 35 20 35 80 3RV13 21-4BC10 17 to 22 -- -- -- -- -- -- 35 20 35 80 3RV13 21-4CC10 20 to 25 -- -- -- -- -- -- 35 20 35 100 1) Type of coordination and short-circuit protection devices according to IEC 60 947-4-1/DIN VDE 660 Part 102: Type of coordination 1: In the event of a short-circuit, persons and equipment must not be in danger from the contactor or starter. These do not have to be suitable for subsequent operation (without repair and replacement of parts). Type of coordination 2: In the event of a short-circuit, persons and equipment must not be in danger from the contactor or starter. These must be suitable for subsequent operation. There is a risk of welding of the contacts. 2) At max. 415 V. SIRIUS System Manual 4-52 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders with short-circuit currents of up to 50 kA at 50/60 Hz 690 VAC Permissible short-circuit protection for motor starters consisting of an overload relay and a contactor of the coordination type "2"1 Frame size S2 Adjustment range 15 kW 3RT10 34 Ie max = 32 A (at 50 Hz 400 V AC) 18.5 kW 3RT10 35 Ie max = 40 A (at 50 Hz 400 V AC) 22 kW 3RT10 36 Ie max = 50 A (at 50 Hz 400 V AC) UL fuse Circuit breaker for starter protection at RK5 Iq = 50 kA / 400 V AC A gL/gG aM BS88 gL/gG aM BS88 gL/gG aM BS88 A 5.5 to 8 25 10 25 25 10 25 25 10 25 30 -- 7 to 10 32 16 32 32 16 32 32 16 32 40 -- 9 to 12.5 35 16 35 35 16 35 35 16 35 50 -- 11 to 16 40 20 40 40 20 40 40 20 40 60 -- 14 to 20 50 25 50 50 25 50 50 25 50 80 -- 18 to 25 63 32 63 63 32 63 63 32 63 100 3RV13 31-4DC10 22 to 32 63 35 63 63 35 63 80 35 80 125 3RV13 31-4EC10 28 to 40 63 50 63 63 50 63 80 50 80 150 3RV13 31-4FC10 36 to 45 -- -- -- 63 50 80 80 50 80 175 3RV13 31-4GC10 40 to 50 -- -- -- -- -- -- 80 50 80 200 3RV13 31-4HC10 UL fuse RK5 Circuit breaker for starter protection at Frame size S3 Adjustment range 30 kW 3RT10 44 Ie max = 65 A (at 50 Hz 400 V AC) 37 kW 3RT10 45 Ie max = 80 A (at 50 Hz 400 V AC) 45 kW 3RT10 46 Ie max = 95 A (at 50 Hz 400 V AC) Iq = 50 kA / 400 V AC A gL/gG aM BS88 gL/gG aM BS88 gL/gG aM BS88 18 to 25 63 32 63 63 32 63 63 32 63 A 100 -- 22 to 32 80 35 80 80 35 80 80 35 80 125 -- 28 to 40 80 50 80 80 50 80 80 50 80 150 -- 36 to 50 125 50 125 125 50 125 125 50 125 200 -- 45 to 63 125 63 125 160 63 160 160 63 160 250 3RV13 41-4JC10 57 to 75 -- -- -- 160 80 160 160 80 160 300 3RV13 41-4KC10 70 to 90 -- -- -- -- -- -- 160 100 160 350 3RV13 41-4LC10 80 to 100 -- -- -- -- -- -- 160 100 160 350 3RV13 41-4MC10 1) Type of coordination and short-circuit protection devices according to IEC 60 947-4-1/DIN VDE 660 Part 102: Type of coordination 1: In the event of a short-circuit, persons and equipment must not be in danger from the contactor or starter. These do not have to be suitable for subsequent operation (without repair and replacement of parts). Type of coordination 2: In the event of a short-circuit, persons and equipment must not be in danger from the contactor or starter. These must be suitable for subsequent operation. There is a risk of welding of the contacts. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-53 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays 4.7.2 3RB10 electronic overload relays Type 3RB10 16 3RB10 26 3RB10 36 3RB10 46 Frame size S00 S0 S2 S3 Width 45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 70 mm General specifications Tripped at Tripping class Overload, phase loss, and phase imbalance (>40 % in acc. with NEMA) In acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1 CLASS 10 and 20, depending on the variant Phase loss sensitivity Yes, tripped from a warm state < 3 seconds Overload warning No Resetting and recovery Manual, remote, and automatic resetting 1) Resetting options after tripping Recovery time With automatic RESET min. Approx. 4 With manual RESET min. Immediate With remote RESET min. Immediate Configuration Indication of operating status on device Yes, by means of the "test function/contact position indicator" slider TEST function yes RESET button yes STOP button For the safe operation of motors with increased safety protection yes EC special test certificate number in compliance with directive 94/9/EC On request Ambient temperatures Storage/transportation C -55 to +80 Operation C -20 to +70 Temperature compensation Permissible rated current at C Up to 70 Internal cubicle temperature of 60 C % 100 (current reduction is required at above +60 C) Internal cubicle temperature of 70 C % 100 (current reduction is required at above +60 C) Repetition terminals Terminal for contactor coil Yes Not required Auxiliary switch repetition terminal Yes Not required IP202) Degree of protection In acc. with IEC 60 529/DIN VDE 0470 Part 1 IP20 Shock protection In acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 Sinus shock resistance In acc. with IEC 68 Part 2-27 g/ms 8/10 and 15/11 Conducted disturbance neutralization - burst In acc. with IEC 61 000-4-4: (corresponds to severity grade 3) kV 2 Conducted disturbance neutralization - surge In acc. with IEC 61 000-4-5: (corresponds to severity grade 3) kV 2/1 (line to ground/line to line) Electrostatic discharge In acc. with IEC 61 000-4-2: (corresponds to severity grade 3) kV 6/8 (contact/air discharge) Field-related disturbance neutralization In acc. with IEC 61 000-4-3: (corresponds to severity grade 3) V/m 3 % 100 m Up to 2000 above sea level Protected against touching by fingers EMC noise immunity EMC emitted interference Resistance to extreme climates (atmospheric humidity) 10 Limit value class B in acc. with CISPR 11 Dimensions Site altitude 103) See dimensional drawings Installation position Any Construction type/mounting Direct mounting/stand-alone installation with terminal bracket 4) 1) Remote RESET in conjunction with suitable accessories 2) Terminal compartment: IP00 degree of protection 4) For screw-on and snap-on attachment to 35 mm DIN rail; frame size S3 also for 75 mm DIN rail 3) For the setting ranges 0.1 to 0.4 A, 0.4 to 1.6 A, and 1.5 to 6 A, it is 3 V/m. SIRIUS System Manual 4-54 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Type 3RB10 16 3RB10 26 3RB10 36 3RB10 46 Frame size S00 S0 S2 S3 Width 45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 70 mm Main circuit Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 690 1000 Rated impulse strength Uimp kV 6 8 Rated operating voltageUe V 690 1000 Current type Direct current No Alternating current Current setting Power loss per device (max.) Short-circuit protection Yes, 50/60 Hz 3 (other frequencies on request) A W With fuse, without contactor With fuse and contactor Safe isolation between In acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 main and auxiliary conducting paths IEC 60 947-1-A1 0.1 - 0.4 0.1 - 0.4 6 - 25 13 - 50 Up to 3 - 12 Up to 6 - 25 Up to 13 - 50 Up to 25 - 100 Approximately 0.5 See the selection and ordering data in the catalog See the technical specifications (short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders) V On request Connection of the main circuit Connection type Screw-type terminal Screw-type terminal with box terminal Screw-type terminal with box terminal 1)/bar connection Screw-type terminal *Terminal screw Pozidriv 2 *Tightening torque *Connection cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or 2 conductors Single-core Nm 0.8 to 1.2 2 to 2.5 3 to 4.5 4 to 6 mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) max. 2 x (1 to 4) 2 x (1 to 2.5) 2 x (2.5 to 6) max. 2 x (2.5 to 10) 2 x (0.75 to 16) -- 2 x (2.5 to 16) - Finely stranded without wire end ferrule mm2 Finely stranded with wire end ferrule Stranded AWG cables, single- or multi-core Allen screw 4 mm -- mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) 2 x (1 to 2.5) 2 x (0.75 to 16) 2 x (2.5 to 35) mm2 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) 2 x (2.5 to 6) 1 x (0.75 to 25) 1 x (2.5 to 50) mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) 2 x (1 to 2.5) 2 x (0.75 to 25) 2 x (10 to 50) mm2 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) 2 x (2.5 to 6) max. 2 x max. 2 x (1 to 4) (2.5 to 10) 1 x (0.75 to 35) 1 x (10 to 70) AWG 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (14 to 10) 2 x (18 to 3) 2 x (10 to 1/0) AWG -- -- 1 x (18 to 1) 2 x (10 to 2/0) -- -- 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) Ribbon cables (number x width x depth) mm Bar connection *Terminal screw M 6 x 20 *Tightening torque Nm -- 2 x 70 Stranded with cable lug mm2 -- 2 x 70 AWG cables, single-core or stranded with cable lug AWG -- 2/0 Finely stranded with cable lug (min./max.) 1) 4 to 6 mm2 *Connection cross-section With connecting bars (max. width) mm -- The box terminal can be removed. After the box terminal has been removed, busbar and cable-lug connections are possible. 12 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-55 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Type 3RB10 56 3RB10 66 Frame size S6 S10/S12 Width 120 mm 145 mm General specifications Tripped at Tripping class overload, phase loss and phase imbalance (>40 % according to NEMA) In acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1 CLASS 10 and 20, depending on the model Phase loss sensitivity Yes, tripped from a warm state < 3 seconds Overload warning No Resetting and recovery Manual, remote, and automatic resetting1) Resetting options after tripping Recovery time With automatic RESET min Approx. 7 With manual RESET min Immediate With remote RESET min Immediate Configuration Indication of operating status on device Yes, by means of the "test function/contact position indicator" slider TEST function Yes RESET button Yes STOP button For the safe operation of motors with increased safety protection Yes EC special test certificate number in compliance with directive 94/9/EC PTB 01 ATEX 3203 PTB 01 ATEX 3316 Ambient temperatures Storage/transportation C -55 to +80 Operation C -25 to +70 C see description Temperature compensation Permissible rated current at Internal cubicle temperature of 60 C % see description Internal cubicle temperature of 70 C % see description Repetition terminals Terminal for contactor coil Not required Auxiliary switch repetition terminal Not required IP202) Degree of protection In acc. with IEC 60 529/DIN VDE 0470 Part 1 Shock protection In acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 Sinus shock resistance In acc. with IEC 68 Part 2-27 g/ms 8/10 and 15/11 Conducted disturbance neutralization - burst In acc. with IEC 61 000-4-4: (corresponds to severity grade 3) kV 2 Conducted disturbance neutralization - surge In acc. with IEC 61 000-4-5: (corresponds to severity grade 3) kV 2/1 (line to earth/line to line) Electrostatic discharge In acc. with IEC 61 000-4-2: (corresponds to severity grade 3) kV 6/8 (contact/air discharge) Field-related disturbance neutralization In acc. with IEC 61 000-4-3: (corresponds to severity grade 3) V/m 10 % 100 m Up to 2000 above sea level Touch safe with cover EMC noise immunity EMC emitted interference Resistance to extreme climates (atmospheric humidity) Limit value class B in acc. with CISPR 11 Dimensions Site altitude See dimensional drawings Installation position Any Construction type/mounting Direct mounting/stand-alone installation with terminal bracket 3) 1) Remote reset in conjunction with suitable accessories. 2) Terminals: IP00 degree of protection. 3) For screw-on and snap-on attachment to 35 mm DIN rail (with S10/S12 DIN rail mounting not possible). SIRIUS System Manual 4-56 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Type 3RB10 56 3RB10 66 Frame size S6 S10/S12 Width 120 mm 145 mm Main circuit Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V Rated impulse strength Uimp kV 8 Rated operating voltageUe V 1000 Current type Direct current 1000 No Alternating current YES, 50/60 Hz 3 (other frequencies upon request) Current setting A 50 - 200 Power loss per device (max.) W Approx. 0.05 55 - 250 to 300 - 630 Short-circuit protection With fuse, without contactor With fuse and contactor Safe isolation between Acc. with IEC 60 947-1 main and auxiliary conducting paths DIN VDE 0106 part 101 See the selection and ordering data in the catalog See the technical specifications (short-circuit protection with fuses/ circuit breakers for motor feeders) V 1000 Connection of the main circuit Screw-type terminal with box terminal 1)/bar connection Screw-type terminal with box termina Allen screw 4 mm Allen screw 5 mm Nm 10 to 12 20 to 22 mm2 -- Connection type Schraubanschluss *Terminal screw *Tightening torque *Connection cross-section (min./max.), 1 or 2 conductors Single-core Finely stranded without wire end ferrule mm2 Finely stranded with wire end ferrule Stranded AWG cables, single- or multi-core with box terminals 3RT19 55-4G 2 x (1 x max. 50, 1 x max. 70) 1 x (10 to 70) 2 x (50 to 185) front clamping point only: 1 x (70 to 240) with box terminals 3RT19 56-4G 2 x (1 x max. 95, 1 x max. 120) 1 x (10 to 120) rear clamping point only: 1 x (120 to 185) with box terminals 3RT19 55-4G 2 x (1 x max. 50, 1 x max. 70) 1 x (10 to 70) 2 x (50 to 185) front clamping point only: 1 x (70 to 240) with box terminals 3RT19 56-4G 2 x (1 x max. 95, 1 x max. 120) 1 x (10 to 120) rear clamping point only: 1 x (120 to 185) with box terminals 3RT19 55-4G 2 x (max. 70) 1 x (16 to 70) 2 x (70 to 240) front clamping point only: 1 x (95 to 300) with box terminals 3RT19 56-4G 2 x (max. 120) 1 x (16 to 120) rear clamping point only: 1 x (120 to 240) AWG with box terminals 3RT19 55-4G 2 x (max. 1/0) 1 x (6 to 2/0) 2 x (2/0 to 500 kcmil) front clamping point only: 1 x (3/0 to 600 kcmil) AWG with box terminals 3RT19 56-4G 2 x (max. 3/0) 1 x (6 to 250 kcmil) rear clamping point only: 1 x (250 kcmil to 500 kcmil) with box terminals 3RT19 55-4G 2 x (6 x 15.5 x 0.8) 1 x (3 x 9 x 0.8 to 6 x 15.5 x 0.8) 2 x (20 x 24 x 0.5) 1 x (6 x 9 x 0.8 to 20 x 24 x 0.5) mm2 mm2 Ribbon cables (number x width x depth) mm with box terminals 3RT19 56-4G rear clamping point only: 2 x (10 x 15.5 x 0.8) 1 x (250 kcmil to 500 kcmil) 1 x (3 x 9 x 0.8 to 10 x 15.5 x 0.8) Bar connection *Terminal screw M8 x 25 *Tightening torque M 10 x 30 Nm 10 to 14 14 to 24 mm2 16 to 952) 50 to 2403) *Connection cross-section Finely stranded with cable lug (min./max.) Stranded with cable lug mm2 25 to1202) 70 to 2403) AWG cables, single-core or stranded with cable lug AWG 4 to 250 kcmil 2/0 to 500 kcmil With connecting bars (max. width) mm 17 25 1) Screw connection is possible using the appropriate box terminals from the accessories range. 2) When connecting cable lugs acc. to DIN 46 235 with conductor cross-sections of 95 mm2 and above, the 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover is required to maintain the phase spacing. 2 x 70 3) When connecting cable lugs acc. to DIN 46 234 with conductor cross-sections of 240 mm2 and above, as well as DIN 46 235 with conductor cross-sections of 185 mm2 and above, the 3RT19 664EA1 terminal cover is required to maintain the phase spacing. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-57 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Type 3RB10 16 3RB10 26 3RB10 36 3RB10 46 Frame size S00 S0 S2 S3 Width 45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 70 mm Auxiliary circuit Auxiliary contact elements (number x (variant) 1 x (1 NO contact + 1 NC contact) Assignment of the auxiliary contact elements 1 NO contact for the "tripped by overload" signal 1 NC contact for switching off the contactor Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 690 Rated impulse strength Uimp kV 6 * 24 V A 4 * 120 V A 4 * 125 V A 4 * 230 V A 3 * 400 V A 2 * 600 V A 1 * 690 V A 1 * 24 V A 4 * 120 V A 4 * 125 V A 4 * 230 V A 3 * 400 V A 2 * 600 V A 1 * 690 V A 1 * 24 V A 1 * 60 V A 0.22 * 110 V A 0.22 * 125 V A 0.22 * 220 V A 0.11 A 6 Contact rating of the auxiliary contact elements NC contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15 NO contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15 NC contact, NO contact with direct current DC-13 Rated operational current Ie at Ue: Rated operational current Ie at Ue: Rated operational current Ie at Ue: Conventional free air thermal current Ith Contact reliability (suitable for PLC; 17 V, 5 mA) Yes Short-circuit protection With fuse Performance class gL/gG A 6 rapid A 10 With miniature circuit breaker (C characteristic) A 61) Safe isolation between auxiliary conducting paths in acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 V 300 Connection of the auxiliary circuit Connection type Screw-type terminal Connection characteristics *Terminal screw Pozidriv 2 *Tightening torque *Connection cross-sections Single-core (min./max.) 1 or 2 conductors Nm 0.8 to 1.2 mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm2 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) Finely stranded without wire end ferrule mm2 Finely stranded with wire end ferrule Stranded AWG cables, single- or multi-core -- mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm2 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm2 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) AWG 2 x (18 to 14) s, u, U rating data Auxiliary circuit 1) Switching capacity B600, R300 Up to IK 0.5 kA; 260 V SIRIUS System Manual 4-58 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Type 3RB10 56 3RB10 66 Frame size S6 S10/S12 Width 120 mm 145 mm Auxiliary circuit Auxiliary contact elements (number x (model) 1 x (1 NO contact + 1 NC contact) Assignment of the auxiliary contact elements 1 NO contact for the "tripped by overload" signal 1 NC contact for switching off the contactor Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 690 Rated impulse strength Uimp kV 6 * 24 V A 4 * 120 V A 4 * 125 V A 4 * 230 V A 3 * 400 V A 2 * 600 V A 1 * 690 V A 1 * 24 V A 4 * 120 V A 4 * 125 V A 4 * 230 V A 3 * 400 V A 2 * 600 V A 1 * 690 V A 1 * 24 V A 1 * 60 V A 0.22 * 110 V A 0.22 * 125 V A 0.22 * 220 V A 0.11 Contact rating of the auxiliary contact elements NC contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15 NO contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15 NC contact, NO contact with direct current DC-13 Rated operational current Ie at Ue: Rated operational current Ie at Ue: Rated operational current Ie at Ue: A Conventional free air thermal current Ith Contact reliability (suitable for PLC; 17 V, 5 mA) 6 1) Yes Short-circuit protection With fuse Performance class gL/gG A 6 rapid A 10 With miniature circuit breaker (C characteristic) A 6 2) Safe isolation between auxiliary conducting paths in acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 V 300 Connection of the auxiliary circuit Connection type Screw-type terminal Connection characteristics *Terminal screw Pozidriv size 2 *Tightening torque *Connection cross-sections Single-core (min./max.) 1 or 2 conductors Nm 0.8 to 1.2 mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm2 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) Finely stranded without wire end ferrule mm2 Finely stranded with wire end ferrule Stranded AWG cables, single- or multi-core -- mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm2 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm2 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) AWG 2 x (18 to 14) s, u, U rating data Auxiliary circuit Switching capacity B600, R300 1) From 60 C upwards, the conventional thermal current Ith across the auxiliary contacts is 2 A. 2) Up to Ik 0.5 kA; 260 V. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-59 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders with short-circuit currents of up to 50 kA at 690 VAC 690 V Overload relay Contactor Adjustment range Type 415 V 600 V Fuse links1) CLASS 10 NH Type 3NA NH British Rated operating current Ie 20 DIAZED Type 5SB Type 3ND Standard AC-3 in A at NEOZED Type 5SE Performance class gL/gG Coordination type2) aM BS88, Type T "1" "2" "1" "2" "2" Fuses Type 400 V 500 V 690 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 3RT10 153) 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 25 2 25 2 3RT10 153) 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 25 6 35 6 Frame size S00 0.1 A to 0.4 A 3RB10 16 0.4 A to 1.6 A 3RB10 16 1.5 A to 6 A 3RT10 153) 6 5 4 6 5 4 35 20 35 20 3RB10 16 3RT10 173) 6 6 6 6 6 6 35 20 35 20 3 A to 12 A 3RT10 173) 12 9 6.3 10 6 6.3 35 20 35 25 3RB10 16 Frame size S0 0.1 A to 0.4 A 3RT10 243) 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 63 2 63 2 0.4 A to 1.6 A 3RT10 243) 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 63 6 63 6 1.5 A to 6 A 3RT10 243) 6 6 6 6 6 6 63 25 20 63 25 3 A to 12 A 3RT10 243) 12 12 12 12 12 12 63 25 20 63 25 3RB10 26 6 A to 25 A 3RT10 243) 12 12 12 12 12 12 63 25 20 63 25 3RB10 26 3RT10 253) 17 17 13 16 16 13 63 25 20 63 25 3RT10 263) 25 18 13 16 16 13 100 35 20 63 25 6 A to 25 A 3RB10 36 3RT10 343) 3RT10 353) 25 25 25 22 22 22 125 63 50 125 63 25 25 25 25 25 25 125 63 50 125 63 13 A to 50 A 3RT10 343) 32 32 31 22 22 22 125 63 50 125 63 3RB10 36 3RT10 353) 40 40 40 29 29 29 125 63 50 125 80 3RT10 363) 50 50 40 32 32 33 160 80 50 125 80 13 A to 50 A 3RB10 46 3RT10 443) 3RT10 453) 50 50 50 50 50 50 49 50 49 50 49 50 250 250 100 100 63 80 250 250 100 100 25 A to 100 A 3RT10 443) 65 65 57 49 49 49 250 125 63 250 125 3RB10 46 3RT10 453) 80 80 80 53 53 53 250 160 80 250 160 3RT10 463) 95 95 95 59 59 59 250 160 100 250 160 Fuse links1) NH Type 3NA NH British Frame size S2 Frame size S3 Overload relay Contactor CLASS Adjustment range 10 Frame size S6 50 A to 200 A 3RT10 54 4) 115 3RB10 56 3RT10 55 4) 150 3RT10 56 4) 185 Frame size S10/S12 55 A to 250 A 3RT10 64 4) 225 3RB10 66 3RT10 65 4) 250 3RT10 66 4) 250 200 A to 540 A 3RT10 65 4) 265 3RB10 66 3RT10 66 4) 300 3RT10 75 4) 400 3RT10 76 4) 500 3RT12 64 4) 225 3RT12 65 4) 265 3RT12 66 4) 300 3RT12 75 4) 400 3RT12 76 4) 500 300 A to 630 A 3TF68 630 3RB10 66 3TF69 630 1) 2) 3) 4) 20 115 150 185 115 150 170 81.7 107 131 82 107 131 82 107 131 355 355 355 315 315 315 160 200 200 250 315 315 450 500 500 225 250 250 265 300 400 500 225 265 300 400 500 630 630 225 265 280 265 280 400 450 225 265 300 400 500 630 630 160 188 213 188 213 284 355 225 265 300 400 500 440 572 160 188 213 188 213 284 355 225 265 300 400 500 440 572 160 188 213 188 213 284 355 225 265 300 400 500 440 572 500 500 500 500 500 630 630 500 500 500 800 800 800 800 400 400 400 400 400 400 500 500 500 500 800 800 500 630 250 315 315 315 315 400 500 400 400 400 630 630 630 630 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 700 800 800 800 800 1000 1200 800 800 800 1200 1200 1200 1200 500 630 Please note the operating voltage. Assignment and short-circuit facilities in acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1/DIN VDE 660 Part 102 Coordination type "1": Contactors or starters must not endanger people or the system in the event of a short circuit. They do not have to be suitable for further operation without repair and part replacement. Coordination type "2": Contactors or starters must not endanger people or the system in the event of a short circuit and must be suitable for further use. There is a danger of contact welding. Mounting on the contactor is possible after removal of the box terminal block. Mounting on the contactor is possible. SIRIUS System Manual 4-60 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays 4.7.3 3RB12 electronic overload relays Type 3RB12 46 3RB12 53 3RB12 57 3RB12 62 Width 70 mm 120 mm 145 mm 230 mm General specifications Tripped at Tripping class Overload, phase loss, phase imbalance (>40 % in acc. with NEMA), ground fault, and operation of thermistor motor protection1) In acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1 CLASS 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, and 30; adjustable by means of a 6-way rotary switch Phase loss sensitivity Yes Overload warning Yes, as of 1.5 x Ie given a symmetric load, and as of 0.85 x Ie given an asymmetric load Resetting and recovery Manual, remote, and automatic resetting 1) Resetting options after tripping Recovery time With automatic RESET min. When tripped by overcurrent: 5 (stored permanently) When tripped by thermistor: time until the motor temperature 5K sinks under the operating temperature When tripped by ground fault: no automatic reset With manual RESET min. When tripped by overcurrent: 5 (stored permanently) When tripped by thermistor: time until the motor temperature 5K sinks under the operating temperature When tripped by ground fault: immediate With remote RESET min. When tripped by overcurrent: 5 (stored permanently) When tripped by thermistor: time until the motor temperature 5K sinks under the operating temperature When tripped by ground fault: immediate Configuration Indication of operating status on device Yes, with 3 LEDs; green "Ready" LED, red "Overload" LED, and red "Ground fault" LED 2) TEST function Yes, with combined TEST/RESET button 2) RESET button Yes, with combined TEST/RESET button 2) STOP button Yes, with combined TEST/RESET button 2) For the safe operation of motors with EC special test certificate number in increased safety protection compliance with directive 94/9/EC PTB 01 ATEX 3220 Ambient temperatures Storage/transportation C -40 to +80 Operation C -25 to +70 Temperature compensation Permissible rated current at C Up to 70 Internal cubicle temperature of 60 C % 100 (current reduction is not required at above +60 C) Internal cubicle temperature of 70 C % 100 (current reduction is not required at above +60 C) Repetition terminals Terminal for contactor coil Not required Auxiliary switch repetition terminal Not required Degree of protection In acc. with IEC 60 529/DIN VDE 0470 Part 1 IP20 ( 100 A max. set current Ie IP00 ( 100 A max. set current Ie Shock protection In acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 Protected against finger touch Sinus shock resistance In acc. with IEC 68 Part 2-27 g/ms 15/11 Conducted disturbance neutralization - burst In acc. with IEC 61 000-4-4: (corresponds to severity grade 3) kV 2 Conducted disturbance neutralization - surge In acc. with IEC 61 000-4-5: (corresponds to severity grade 3) kV 2 Electrostatic discharge In acc. with IEC 61 000-4-2: (corresponds to severity grade 3) kV 8 Field-related disturbance neutralization In acc. with IEC 61 000-4-3: (corresponds to severity grade 3) V/m 10 % 100 m Up to 2000 above sea level Protected against finger touch with cover EMC noise immunity EMC emitted interference Resistance to extreme climates (atmospheric humidity) Limit value class B in acc. with EN 55 011 Dimensions Site altitude Construction type/mounting See dimensional drawings Stand-alone installation3) Direct mounting/stand-alone installation without additional terminal bracket 4) 1) Tripped at ground fault only in the case of devices with the order number suf3) Snap-on attachment to 35 mm rail or screw-on attachment with fixes 20 and 30 or in conjunction with the external summation current transformer accessories 2) For a detailed explanation, see Section 4.2, "Applications and use". 4) For screw-on attachment SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-61 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Type 3RB12 46 3RB12 53 3RB12 57 3RB12 62 Width 70 mm 120 mm 145 mm 230 mm 690 (for bare/ non insulated conductors) 1000 (for insulated conductors) 1000 125 - 500 200 - 820 Main circuit Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V Rated impulse strength Uimp kV 6 8 Rated operating voltage Ue V 690 1000 Current type Direct current No Alternating current Current setting Yes, 50/60 Hz A 1.25 - 6.3 50 - 205 Up to 25 - 100 Power loss per device (max.) W Short-circuit protection With fuse, without contactor With fuse and contactor Safe isolation between main and auxiliary conducting paths In acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 IEC 60 947-1-A1 Approx. 2 See the selection and ordering data in the catalog See the technical specifications (short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders) V Up to 690 V Up to 690 (using main circuit cables with an impulse withstand voltage of 6 kV) Connection of the main circuit Connection type Bar-type transformer connection Bar connection Screw-type terminal * Terminal screw -- * Tightening torque * Connection cross-section (min./max.), 1 or 2 conductors Nm -- mm2 -- Finely stranded without wire end ferrule mm2 -- mm2 -- mm2 -- mm2 -- mm2 -- Single-core Finely stranded with wire end ferrule Stranded AWG cables, single- or multi-core AWG -- AWG -- Ribbon cables (number x width x depth) mm -- Bar connection * Terminal screw * Tightening torque -- M8 M10 M 10 or M 12 Nm -- 10 to 14 14 to 24 14 to 24 (with M10) 20 to 25 (with M12) * Connection cross-section Finely stranded with cable lug mm2 -- 35 to 95 50 to 240 (min./max.) Stranded with cable lug mm2 -- 50 to 120 70 to 240 AWG cables, single-core or stranded with cable lug AWG -- 1/0 to 250 kcmil 2/0 to 500 kcmil 2/0 to 500 kcmil With connecting bars (max. width) mm -- 20 x 4 mm -- 10 (devices 25 A max. set current Ie) 15 (devices with max. 100 A set current Ie) 30 x 6 185 to 240 40 x 8 Bar-type transformer connection * Opening diameter * Conductor cross-section NYY H07RN-F mm2 -- -- 10/16 -- SIRIUS System Manual 4-62 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Type 3RB12 46 3RB12 53 3RB12 57 3RB12 62 Width 70 mm 120 mm 145 mm 230 mm Auxiliary circuit Auxiliary contact elements: number x (variant) 2 x (1 NO contact + 1 NC contact) Assignment of the auxiliary contact elements 1 NO contact for the "tripped by overload and/or thermistor" signal 1 NC contact for tripping the contactor 1 NO contact for the "tripped by ground fault" signal 1 NC contact for tripping the contactor Or1) 1 NO contact for the "tripped by overload and/or thermistor and/or ground fault" signal 1 NC contact for switching off the contactor 1 NO contact for the "tripped by ground fault" signal 1 NC contact for tripping the contactor Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 300 Rated impulse strength Uimp kV 4 * 24 V A 6 * 120 V A 6 * 125 V A 2) * 230 V A 3 * 400 V A 1.5 * 600 V A 2) * 690 V A 2 * 24 V A 6 * 120 V A 6 * 125 V A 2 * 230 V A 3 * 400 V A 1.5 * 600 V A 2 * 690 V A 2) * 24 V A 2 * 60 V A 0.55 * 110 V A 0.25 * 125 V A 0.25 * 220 V A 0.14 A 6 Contact rating of the auxiliary contact elements NC contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15 NO contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15 NC contact, NO contact with direct current DC-13 Rated operational current Ie at Ue: ) ) Rated operational current Ie at Ue: Conventional free air thermal current Ith Contact reliability ) Rated operational current Ie at Ue: 2 (suitable for PLC; 17 V, 5 mA) ) Short-circuit protection With fuse Performance class gL/gG A 6 rapid A 10 With miniature circuit breaker (C characteristic) A Safe isolation between auxiliary conducting paths in acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 V 1.63) 300 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 4-63 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays Connection of the auxiliary circuit Connection type Screw-type terminal Connection characteristics *Terminal screw Pozidriv 2 *Tightening torque *Connection cross-sections Nm Single-core 0.8 to 1.2 mm2 1 x (0.5 to 4) mm2 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) (min./max.) 1 or 2 conductors Finely stranded without wire end ferrule mm2 1 x (0.5 to 2.5) mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) Finely stranded with wire end ferrule mm2 1 x (0.5 to 2.5) mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) Stranded mm2 -- AWG cables, single- or multi-core AWG Without wire end ferrule: 2 x (20 to 14) 1 x (20 to 12) With wire end ferrule: 2 x (20 to 15) 1 x (20 to 14) s, u, U rating data Auxiliary circuit Switching capacity B600, R300 1) The assignment of the auxiliary contact elements depends on the order number suffix 2) On request 3) Up to IK 1000 A SIRIUS System Manual 4-64 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3TF68 4) 3TF69 4) 3RT1064 3RT1065 3RT1066 3RT1075 3RT1076 3RT1264 3RT1265 3RT1266 3RT1275 3RT1276 3TF68 3TF69 3RT1054 3RT1055 3RT1056 3RT1034 3RT1035 3RT1036 3RT1044 3RT1045 3RT1046 3RT1015 3RT1016 3RT1017 3RT1024 3RT1025 3RT1026 3RT1034 3RT1035 3RT1015 3RT1016 3RT1017 630 820 225 265 300 400 500 225 265 300 400 500 500 - 115 150 185 32 40 50 65 80 95 7 9 12 12 17 25 25 -- 6.3 6.3 6.3 630 820 225 265 300 400 500 225 265 300 400 500 500 - 115 150 185 32 40 50 65 80 95 -- 6.5 9 12 17 18 25 -- 5 6.3 6.3 630 820 225 265 280 400 450 225 265 300 400 500 500 - 115 150 185 -- -- -- 47 58 58 -- -- 6.3 9 13 13 25 -- 4 5.2 6.3 502 662 182 214 243 324 405 225 265 300 400 500 500 - 93 121 149 25 33 38 56 61 69 7 9 11 12 17 18 25 -- 6.3 6.3 6.3 502 662 182 214 243 324 405 225 265 300 400 500 500 - 93 121 149 25 33 38 56 61 69 -- 6.5 9 12 17 18 25 -- 5 6.3 6.3 500 V 1) Please note the operating voltage 3) Please ensure that the safety clearance between the max. 3 AC operating current and the fuse rated current is maintained. 4) Mounting onto contactor possible 200 - 820 A 3RB1262-0L 125 - 500 A 3RB1257-0K 50 - 205 A 3RB1253-0F 25 - 100 A 3RB1246-1E 6.3 - 25 A 3RB1246-1Q 1.25 - 6.3 A 3RB1246-1P 690 V 400 V 400 V (Type) 500 V CLASS CLASS 5 and 10 15 Rated operating current Ie AC-3 in A at 502 662 182 214 243 324 405 225 265 300 400 500 500 - 93 121 149 -- -- -- 47 58 58 440 572 159 188 213 284 355 225 265 300 400 500 440 500 81 106 131 -- 29 32 49 53 59 7 9 10 12 16 16 22.3 25 6.3 6.3 6.3 440 572 159 188 213 284 355 225 265 300 400 500 440 500 81 106 131 -- 29 32 49 53 59 -- 6.5 9 12 16 16 22.3 25 5 6.3 6.3 500 V 440 572 159 188 213 84 355 225 265 300 400 500 440 500 81 106 131 -- - - 47 58 58 -- -- 6.3 9 13 13 22.3 25 4 5.2 6.3 5 6.3 6.3 500 V 408 531 146 172 195 260 325 193 227 258 344 430 408 500 74 97 120 -- 28 29 45 47 53 408 531 146 172 195 260 325 193 227 258 344 430 408 500 74 97 120 -- 28 29 45 47 53 7 -- 9 6.5 9.5 9 12 12 15 15 15 15 20.3 20.3 25 25 6.3 6.3 6.3 690 V 400 V 25 6.3 6.3 6.3 408 531 146 172 195 260 325 193 227 258 344 430 408 500 74 97 120 -- -- -- 45 47 53 376 500 135 159 180 240 300 173 204 231 308 385 376 500 69 90 111 -- 26 26 41 45 50 -- 7 -- 9 6.3 9 9 12 13 14 13 14 20.3 19.1 25 25 4 5.2 6.3 690 V 400 V 30 376 500 135 159 180 240 300 173 204 231 308 385 376 500 69 90 111 -- 26 26 41 45 50 -- 6.5 9 12 14 14 19.1 25 5 6.3 6.3 500 V 376 500 135 159 180 240 300 173 204 231 308 385 376 500 69 90 111 -- 41 45 50 -- -- -- 6.3 9 13 13 19.1 25 4 5.2 6.3 1000 1250 500 500 500 630 630 500 500 500 800 800 800 800 355 355 355 125 125 160 250 250 250 35 35 35 63 63 100 125 125 35 35 35 5003) 6303) 400 400 400 400 500 500 500 500 800 800 5003) 6303) 315 315 315 63 63 80 125 160 160 20 20 20 25 25 25 63 63 20 20 20 630 630 250 315 315 400 500 400 400 400 630 630 630 630 160 200 200 50 50 50 63 80 100 -- -- -- 20 20 20 50 50 -- -- -- 2 aM NH Type 3ND 500 630 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 500 500 250 315 315 63 63 80 125 160 160 20 20 20 25 25 25 63 63 20 20 20 British standards fuses BS88 Type T 2 415 V 1200 2000 700 800 800 800 1200 800 800 800 1200 1200 1200 2000 450 500 500 125 150 200 250 250 350 60 60 60 70 70 100 100 100 25 25 25 RK5 UL-listed fuses 600 V 2) Assignment and short-circuit facilities in acc. with IEC 60947-4-1/DIN VDE 660 Part 102 Coordination type "1": The contactor or starter must not endanger people or the system in the event of a short circuit. They do not have to be suitable for further operation without repair and part replacement. Coordination type "2": The contactor or starter must not endanger people or the system in the event of a short circuit and must be suitable for further operation. There is a danger of contact welding. -- -- 6.3 9 13 13 25 -- 4 5.2 6.3 690 V 400 V 20 690 V Fuse links1) NH Type 3NA DIAZED Type 5SB NEOZED Type 5SE Performance class gL (gG) Coordination type 2) 690 V 1 2 Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents of up to 50 kA at 690 V for 3RB12 and 3UF50 Overload relay Contactor Overload relay Contactor Adjustment range 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays SIRIUS System Manual 4-65 3RU11, 3RB10, 3RB12 Overload relays 4.7.4 Terminal bracket for stand-alone installation Type 3RU19 163AA01 For overload relays Mounting type 3RU19 263AA01 3RU19 363AA01 3RU19 463AA01 3RU11 16 3RU11 26 3RU11 36 3RU11 46 3RB10 16 3RB10 26 3RB10 36 3RB10 46 For screw-on and snap-on attachment to a 35 mm DIN rail; frame size S3 also on 75 mm DIN rail Connection of the main circuit Anschlussart Screw-type terminal Screw-type terminal with box terminal Connection type *Terminal screw *Connection cross-section Pozidriv Gr. 2 Single-core mm2 (min./max.) 1 or 2 conductors Finely stranded without wire end ferrule mm2 Finely stranded with wire end ferrule Stranded AWG cables, single- or multi-core Ribbon cables (number x width x thickness) mm2 mm2 AWG mm Allen screw 4 mm 1 x (0.5 to 2.5) 1 x (1 to 6) max. 1 x (to 4) max. 1 x (to 10) 2 x (0.75 to 16) 2 x (2.5 to 16) 2 x (0.75 to 16) 2 x (2.5 to 35) 1 x (0.75 to 25) 1 x (2.5 to 50) -- 1 x (0.5 to 2.5) 1 x (1 to 6) 1 x (0.5 to 2.5) 1 x (1 to 6) 2 x (0.75 to 25) 2 x (10 to 50) max. 1 x (to 4) max. 1 x (to 10) 1 x (0.75 to 35) 1 x (10 to 70) 1 x (18 to 14) 1 x (14 to 10) -- -- 2 x (18 to 3) 2 x (10 to 1/0) 1 x (18 to 1) 2 x (10 to 2/0) 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) SIRIUS System Manual 4-66 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 5 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders/ Combination starters Section Subject Page 5.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals 5-2 5.2 Device descriptions 5-3 5.2.1 Mounting systems 5-4 5.2.2 Mounting kits for self-assembly 5-5 5.2.3 Complete devices 5-5 5.3 Application and areas of use 5-7 5.4 Accessories 5-8 5.4.1 Accessories for the individual devices 5-8 5.4.2 Accessories specifically for the SIRIUS 3RA fuseless load feeder 5-8 5.4.3 Instructions for self-assembly 5-9 5.5 Mounting and connection 5-18 5.5.1 Mounting 5-18 5.5.2 Connection 5-21 5.5.3 Circuit diagrams 5-23 5.6 Dimensional drawings (dimensions in mm) 5-24 5.7 Technical specifications 5-28 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 5-1 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders/Combination starters 5.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals Coordination types The fuseless load feeders/combination starters are manufactured and tested in acc. with IEC 60947 Part 1 and Part 2. An important selection criterion for the fuseless load feeders/combination starters are the coordination types. IEC 60947-4-1/DIN VDE 0660 Part 102 draws a distinction between two coordination types, known as coordination type 1 and coordination type 2. They describe what happens at a short circuit and the device status after a short circuit. In both coordination types, the short circuit to be dealt with is reliably disconnected. There must be no damage to systems or injury to persons. The differences lie only in the degree to which the device is damaged after the short circuit. Coordination type 1 The fuseless load feeder can be inoperable after each short-circuit disconnection. Damage to the contactor and the circuit breaker/MSP is permissible. Coordination type 2 After a short-circuit disconnection, there must not be any damage to the overload release or any other part. The 3RA1 fuseless load feeder can be put into operation again without the need for replacement. Only welding of the contactor contacts is permissible if they can be separated easily without any significant deformation. Approvals/test reports All the approvals and test certificates of the individual devices used in the feeders are valid. UL/CSA When connected to a SIRIUS contactor the 3RV Motor Starter Protectors are UL Listed and CSA certified for the following motor switching applications: * Starter for Group Installation per N.E.C. 430-53 * Combination Motor Controller, Type F. A Type F Combination Motor Controller is an assembly made up of a Type E, Self-protected Manual Combination Motor Controller and a contactor. See 2.4.6 "Terminals for Combination Type E in acc. with UL 508" for more information. SIRIUS System Manual 5-2 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders/Combination starters 5.2 Device descriptions Fuseless load feeders/combination starters up to 100 A are combinations of devices consisting of a 3RV circuit breaker/MSP for overload and short-circuit protection and a 3RT contactor for normal switching duty. The different components can be assembled separately and electrically wired with individual cables. It is of course simpler to connect the circuit breakers/MSPs and contactors mechanically and electrically using readymade kits. As an alternative, we offer the pre-assembled 3RA fuseless load feeders/ combination starters. In the smaller frame sizes these combinations can be mounted directly to DIN rail. The combinations for high ratings come with mounting adapters for DIN rail mounting or on busbar adapter shoes (Fastbus). Subsequently you'll receive a detailed overview the 3RA fuseless load feeders/combination starters product spectrum. Depending on the design these meet coordination type "1" or "2". Device variants The fuseless load feeders/combination starters can be set up in 4 frame sizes: * Frame size S00: width 45 mm; for three-phase induction motors up to 0.75 kW / 400 V, coordination type "2" and 5.5 kW / 400 V, coordination type "1" * Frame size S0: width 45 mm; for three-phase induction motors up to 7.5 kW / 400 V, coordination type "2" and 11 kW / 400 V, coordination type "1" * Frame size S2: width 55 mm; for three-phase induction motors up to 22 kW / 400 V, coordination type "2" and coordination type "1" * Frame size S3: width 70 mm; for three-phase induction motors up to 45 kW / 400 V, coordination type "2" and coordination type "1" SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 5-3 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders/Combination starters 5.2.1 Mounting systems The possible types of mounting are as follows: * On a 35 mm rail in acc. with EN 50 022 * Screw-on attachment by means of the attachment openings integrated in the rail adapter * On busbar systems with a busbar center-to-center clearance of 40 mm or 60 mm The following illustrations show the adapters for rail and busbar mounting: Rail adapter Busbar adapter Fig. 5-1: Rail adapter/busbar adapter SIRIUS System Manual 5-4 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders/Combination starters 5.2.2 Mounting kits for self-assembly Because SIRIUS is a modular system, the standard devices fit together optimally both mechanically and electrically. The fuseless load feeders/combination starters can therefore be assembled quickly and easily in all four frame sizes. To this end, the circuit breaker/MSP and the contactor are connected using the corresponding kit. Kits There are kits for reversing feeders for mounting on: * Rail frame sizes S0, S2, S3: mounting kit for reversing operation frame size S00: wiring kit for reversing operation * Busbars frame sizes S00, S0, S2: mounting kit for reversing operation The following illustration shows how to assemble the fuseless load feeder of frame size S00 for reversing operation and rail mounting: 7 6 4 5 Adapter (3RA1911-1A) 1 2 3 Fig. 5-2: Self-assembly of a fuseless load feeder (frame size S00) 5.2.3 Complete devices The fuseless load feeders/combination starters are also available fully assembled: * Up to 22 kW in the case of direct starters * Up to 11 kW in the case of reversing starters SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 5-5 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders/Combination starters Control supply voltage For control voltages of: * 230 V AC / 50 Hz * 24 V DC Self-assembly on rails or busbar systems is recommended for other control voltages. Auxiliary contact elements * Direct feeders The contactors of frame size S00 include a normally open contact * Reversing feeders S00/S0: electrical and mechanical interlocking SIRIUS System Manual 5-6 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders/Combination starters 5.3 Application and areas of use The fuseless load feeders/combination starters can be used in electrical installations wherever combinations of fuses, contactors, and overload relays have been used up to now. The greater functionality of the circuit breaker/MSP over fuses, and their suitability as emergency-stop and disconnecting switches, means that many requirements can be met more easily with a fuseless load feeder. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 5-7 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders/Combination starters 5.4 Accessories 5.4.1 Accessories for the individual devices The accessories for the individual devices can also be used in the load feeder. You will find information on the accessories of the contactors in Chapter 3, "Contactors" (Section 3.4, "Accessories"). You will find information on the accessories of the circuit breakers/MSPs in Chapter 2, (Section 2.4, "Accessories"). 5.4.2 Accessories specifically for the SIRIUS 3RA fuseless load feeder The following accessories facilitate the setup and wiring of the fuseless load feeder: Accessory Description Auxiliary switch for the circuit breaker/MSP * Transverse and connectable from above * 1 changeover contact, 1 normally open contact + 1 normally closed contact or 2 normally open contacts Auxiliary switch blocks for the contactor Snap-on and connectable from below Link modules * Provide electrical connections between circuit breakers/MSPs and contactors * Also provide a mechanical connection in frame sizes S00 and S0 Wiring kits * Electrical and mechanical connection for reversing combinations * The wiring kit can be combined with the link module * In the case of frame size S00, the wiring module contains integrated cables for electrical interlocking Table 5-1: Fuseless load feeder, accessories SIRIUS System Manual 5-8 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders/Combination starters 5.4.3 Instructions for self-assembly Fuseless load feeder for rail mounting Assembly The following illustration and the table below it show how to assemble the fuseless load feeder: * Rail mounting * Frame size S00 * Reversing operation 7 6 4 5 3RA1911-1A 1 2 3 Fig. 5-3: Self-assembly, rail, reversing operation (frame size S00) Step Procedure 1 Hook the back of the right contactor of the contactor combination onto the link module 2 With a tilting movement, insert the connecting pins of the link module into the upper terminal openings of the contactor 3 Tighten the upper terminal screws of the contactor 4 Hook the link module onto the back of the circuit breaker/MSP 5 With a tilting movement, insert the connecting pins of the link module into the lower terminal openings of the circuit breaker/MSP 6 Tighten the lower terminal screws of the circuit breaker/MSP 7 Snap the circuit breaker/MSP and thus the feeder onto the rail Table 5-2: Self-assembly of the reversing starter for rail (frame size S00) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 5-9 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders/Combination starters The following illustrations show how to assemble the fuseless load feeder: * Rail mounting * Frame sizes S00 to S3 * Direct starters S00 S0 7 7 6 4 6 4 5 5 1 2 3RA1911-1A 1 3RA1921-1. 2 3 3 S2 S3 3RA1942-1A 3RA1932-1A 1 1 1 3RA1931-1. 1 2 4 2 4 3 3 5 5 4 3RA1941-1. 4 Fig. 5-4: Self-assembly, rail, direct starter (frame sizes S00 to S3) SIRIUS System Manual 5-10 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders/Combination starters The following illustrations show how to assemble the fuseless load feeder: * Rail mounting * Frame sizes S00 with Cage Clamp terminal system Direct starter 2 1 6 3RA1911-2E 4 3 5 5b 5a 5c Fig. 5-5: Self-assembly, rail, direct starter (frame size S00, Cage Clamp) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 5-11 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders/Combination starters The following illustrations show how to assemble the fuseless load feeder: * Rail adapter * Reversing operation * Frame size S0 3RA1924-2B 3 2 1 Kit 3RA1923-1B 4 3 5 4 6 (4x) 7 12 7 8 3RA1921-1. 9 10 11 Fig. 5-6: Self-assembly, rail, reversing operation (frame size S0) SIRIUS System Manual 5-12 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders/Combination starters The following illustrations show how to assemble the fuseless load feeder: * Rail adapter * Reversing operation * Frame size S2 (assembly of frame size S3 is analogous) 3 4 3 1 Kits S2: 3RA1933-1B S3: 3RA1943-1B 2 3RA1924-2B 4 5 S2: 4X S3: 6X 7 6 9 8 8 11 9 5 10 3RA1931-1. 3RA1941-1. 12 14 13 14 14 14 Fig. 5-7: Self-assembly, rail, reversing operation (frame sizes S2 and S3) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 5-13 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders / Combination starters 5 3RA1 fuseless load feeders Fuseless load feeders/combination starters for busbar mounting There are kits available for reversing operation for frame sizes S00 to S2. The fuseless load feeders/combination starters of frame size S3 are not suitable for busbar mounting. Direct starters of frame sizes S00 to S2 The following illustrations show how to assemble the fuseless load feeder: * Busbar adapter * Direct starters * Frame sizes S00 to S2 S0 S00 8US1 8US1 5 5 1 3RA1911-1A 3 125 110 1 2 3 3RA1921-1. 3 2 3 4 4 S2 8US1 1 2 3RA1931-1. 4 3 4 5 Fig. 5-8: Self-assembly, busbars, direct starters (frame sizes S00 and S2) SIRIUS System Manual 5-14 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders / Combination starters The following illustrations show how to assemble the fuseless load feeder: * Busbar adapter * Direct starters * Frame sizes S00 and S0 with Cage Clamp terminal system 2 6 1 8 5 4 7 3 3 7b 7a 7c 2 3 3RA1911-2E 4 5 1 1b 1a 1c Fig. 5-9: Self-assembly, busbars, direct starters (frame sizes S00/S0, Cage Clamp) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 5-15 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders / Combination starters Reversing operation of frame sizes S00 to S2 The following illustrations show how to assemble the fuseless load feeder: * Busbar adapter * Reversing operation * Frame sizes S00 to S2 S00 5 Kit 3RA1913-1. 1 3RA1911-1A 3 3 2 4 S0 55 5 Kit 3RA1923-1. 1 3RA1921-1. 3 3 6 3 2 4 3RA1924-2B Fig. 5-10: Self-assembly, busbars, reversing operation (frame sizes S00 and S0) SIRIUS System Manual 5-16 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders / Combination starters S2 Kit 3RA1933-1. 1 2 3RA1931-1. 4 4 3 5 4 3RA1904-2B Fig. 5-11: Self-assembly, busbars, reversing operation (frame size S2) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 5-17 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders / Combination starters 5.5 Mounting and connection 5.5.1 Mounting Snap-on attachment The fuseless load feeders/combination starters can be snapped onto a 35 mm rail in acc. with EN 50 022. Rail mounting without adapter The fuseless direct feeders of frame sizes S00 and S0 and reversing feeders S00 can be snapped onto the rail without an adapter by mounting the circuit breaker/MSP. No tools are required for either mounting or removal. A rail adapter is available as an accessory for frame sizes S00/S0. The reversing feeders of frame sizes S2/S3 are mounted with a rail adapter. Rail mounting with adapter To mount frame sizes S2 and S3 and reversing feeders S0 on a rail, adapters must be used for stability reasons. These are available as accessories. To remove them, the rail adapter is unlocked with a screwdriver. You will find information on this in Section 2.5.1 on how to mount circuit breakers/MSPs. All feeders can be mounted with a rail adapter. SIRIUS System Manual 5-18 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders / Combination starters Screw-mount attachment A screw-mount attachment is implemented in the case of sizes S00 and S0 by means of push-in lugs (see Section 2.4 for information on circuit-breaker accessories). In the case of sizes S2 and S3, the holes for screw-mount attachment are integrated in the mandatory rail adapter. The following illustration shows screw-mount attachment by means of pushin lugs in the case of the fuseless load feeder of frame size S00:. 3RA1900-0B 6 4 5 1 2 3 Fig. 5-12: Screw-mount attachment, fuseless load feeder (frame size S00) Important In the case of screw-mount attachment without a rail adapter, the feeder must not be screwed onto a conductive surface. Insulation is necessary so that, in the event of a short circuit of the circuit breaker/MSP, there is no short circuit to the base plate. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 5-19 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders / Combination starters Busbar mounting The following illustrations show busbar mounting and removal of the fuseless load feeders/combination starters S00 to S2. S00 (S0): Mounting S00 (S0): Removal 10 mm 8US1.51-5DM07 S2: Mounting 8US1.61-5FP08 Removal of the extension piece 2 1 1 2 Fig. 5-13: Busbar system, mounting/removal (frame sizes S00 to S2) SIRIUS System Manual 5-20 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders / Combination starters 5.5.2 Connection 5 3RA1 fuseless load feeders The fuseless load feeders/combination starters are available with the SIGUT terminal system. Conductor cross-sections The following table gives the permissible conductor cross-sections for fuseless load feeders. The specifications apply to main and auxiliary connections. Frame sizes S00 and S0 5 ... 6 mm / PZ2 10 10 AWG S00 A1/A2; NO/NC L1 L2 L3 T1 T2 T3 A1/A2; NO/NC S0 L1 L2 L3 T1 T2 T3 0.8 to 1.2 Nm 7 to 10.3 lb.in 0.8 to 1.2 Nm 7 to 10.3 lb.in 2 to 2.5 Nm 18 to 22 lb.in 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm) 2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm) 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm) 2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm) 2 x (1 to 2.5 mm) 2 x (2.5 to 6 mm) 2 x (0.5 to 2.5 mm) 2 x (0.5 to 2.5 mm) 2 x (1 to 2.5 mm) 2 x (2.5 to 6 mm) 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (14 to 10) Table 5-3: Conductor cross-sections (frame sizes S00/S0) Frame size S2 S2 A1/A2; NO/NC 5 ... 6 mm / PZ2 10 L1 L2 L3 T1 T2 T3 0.8 to 1.2 Nm 7 to 10.3 lb.in 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm) 2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm) 10 5 ... 6 mm / PZ2 13 -- AWG 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (0.75 to 16 mm) 13 2 x (0.75 to 16 mm) 1 x (0.75 to 25 mm) 13 2 x (0.75 to 25 mm) 1 x (0.75 to 35 mm) 2 x (0.5 to 2.5 mm) -- 3 to 4.5 Nm 27 to 40 lb.in AWG 2 x (18 to 3) 1 x (18 to 2) Table 5-4: Conductor cross-sections (frame size S2) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 5-21 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders / Combination starters Frame size S3 S3 A1/A2; NO/NC 5 ... 6 mm / PZ2 10 L1, L2, L3 T1,T2,T3 0.8 to 1.2 Nm 7 to 10.3 lb.in 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm) 2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm) 10 4 to 6 Nm 35 to 53 lb.in min 22 4 17 17 2 x (2.5 to 35 mm) 1 x (2.5 to 50 mm) 17 2 x (10 to 50 mm) 1 x (10 to 70 mm) 2 x (0.5 to 2.5 mm) -- -- AWG 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (2.5 to 16 mm) AWG 2 x (10 to 1/0) 1 x (10 to 2/0) Table 5-5: Conductor cross-sections (frame size S3) SIRIUS System Manual 5-22 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders / Combination starters 5.5.3 Circuit diagrams Direct starters S0 to S3 S00 1L1 3L2 5L3 13 NO/21 NC A1 A1 III III A2 1L1 3L2 5L3 A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 14 NO/22 NC 2T1 4T2 6T3 Fig. 5-14: Circuit diagrams, direct starters (frame sizes S00 to S3) Reversing starters S00 S0 to S3 1L1 3L2 5L3 I 2 I 4 1L1 3L2 5L3 I I 6 2 I 4 I 6 NC 21 NC 21 NC A1 K1 A2 1 3 5 2 4 6 A1 K2 1 3 5 2 4 6 A1 K1 A2 1 3 5 2 4 6 NC 122 A1 K2 A2 22 NC 2T1 4T2 6T3 NC 3 5 111 2 4 6 110 121 2T1 4T2 6T3 22 NC 1 A2 NC Fig. 5-15: Circuit diagrams, reversing starters (frame sizes S00 to S3) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 5-23 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders / Combination starters 5.6 Dimensional drawings (dimensions in mm) 3RA1 fuseless load feeders/combination starters - frame size S00 for rail 10 27.5 10 45 8 20 5 5 70 67.5 8 30 14 6 159 163 163 SIEMENS 5 5 NSB00392 SIEMENS 6.5 SIEMENS NSB00393 SIEMENS 6.5 9 5 40 90 7.5 51 9 45 Fig. 5-16: 3RA11 10-..A.. for direct-on-line starting 1) Space above the arc chute Clearance to grounded parts at the side at least 6 mm Fig. 5-17: 3RA12 10-..A.. for reversing operation 3RA1 fuseless load feeders/combination starters - frame size S00 for 40 mm and 60 mm busbar systems 13 21 1) 48 SIEMENS 60 SIEMENS 0 159 203 60 SIEMENS NSB00394 5 9 45 SIEMENS NSB00395 SIEMENS 6.5 I I 159 203 0 27 82 98 101 Fig. 5-18: 3RA11 10-..C.., 3RA11 10-..D.. for direct-on-line starting 1) Space above the arc chute Clearance to grounded parts at the side at least 6 mm 6.5 5 9 90 Fig. 5-19: 3RA12 10-..C.., 3RA12 10-..D.. for reversing operation SIRIUS System Manual 5-24 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders / Combination starters 3RA1 fuseless load feeders/combination starters - frame size S0 for rail 14 8 14 91 10 5 115 33 14 8 14 1) 44 5 NSB00397 5 20 30 5 1) 45 2) SIEMENS 57 7 2) SIEMENS SIEMENS 6 5 NSB00396 SIEMENS 125 210 220 183 178 106 SIEMENS 6 28 45 5 7.5 39 61 3) 86 DC 96 6 10 55 7 7 5 63 85 110 DC 120 100 Fig. 5-20: 3RA11 20-..A.. for direct-on-line starting Fig. 5-21: 3RA12 20-..B.. for reversing operation 1) Space above the arc chute 2) Lockable in zero position with a shackle diameter of 5 mm 3) Attached using two 35 mm rails with a depth of 7.5 mm in acc. with EN 50 022 or one 75 mm rail in acc. with EN 50 023. Clearance to grounded parts at the side at least 6 mm 26 23 3RA1 fuseless load feeders/combination starters - frame size S0 for 40 mm and 60 mm busbar systems 1) 13 2) SIEMENS 183 185 209 211 48 2) SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS NSB00398 NSB00399 SIEMENS 28 27 6 8 14 45 8 70 92 117 121 DC 127 Fig. 5-22: 3RA11 20-..C.., 3RA11 20-..D.. for direct-on-line starting 1) Space above the arc chute 2) Lockable in zero position with a shackle diameter of 5 mm Clearance to grounded parts at the side at least 6 mm 10 6 14 100 Fig. 5-23: 3RA1220-..C.., 3RA1120-..D.. for reversing operation SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 5-25 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders / Combination starters 3RA1 fuseless load feeders/combination starters - frame size S2 for rail Fig. 5-24: 3RA1 direct-on-line starting (frame size S2) Fig. 5-25: 3RA1 reversing operation (frame size S2) 1) Space above the arc chute 2) Lockable in zero position with a shackle diameter of 5 mm 3) Attached using two 35 mm rails with a depth of 7.5 mm in acc. with EN 50 022 or one 75 mm rail in acc. with EN 50 023. Clearance to grounded parts at the side at least 6 mm 3RA1 fuseless load feeders/combination starters - frame size S0 for 40 mm and 60 mm busbar systems 1) SIEMENS 2) 259 309 2) 259 309 SIEMENS 53 14 34 1) SIEMENS SIEMENS NSB00403 NSB00402 SIEMENS 7 10 18 17 55 18 28 68 95 10 142 DC 157 176 Fig. 5-26: 3RA1 direct-on-line starting (frame size S0) 1) Space above the arc chute 2) Lockable in zero position with a shackle diameter of 5 mm Clearance to grounded parts at the side at least 6 mm 10 17.5 17.5 120 Fig. 5-27: 3RA1 reversing operation (frame size S0) SIRIUS System Manual 5-26 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders / Combination starters 3RA1 fuseless load feeders/combination starters - frame size S3 for rail 8 12 111 23 60 1) 60 12 23 4) 100 4) 40 5 5 SIEMENS 2) SIEMENS 320 330 310 320 330 125 2) 3) SIEMENS SIEMENS NSB00405 NSB00404 SIEMENS 78 23 12 23 70 72 78 111 160 DC 173 195 80 55 150 Fig. 5-28: 3RA1 direct-on-line starting (frame size S3) Fig. 5-29: 3RA1 reversing operation (frame size S3) 1) Space above the arc chute 2) Lockable in zero position with a shackle diameter of 5 mm 3) Attached using two 35 mm rails with a depth of 7.5 mm in acc. with EN 50 022 or one 75 mm rail in acc. with EN 50 023. 4) Hexagonal socket 4 mm Clearance to grounded parts at the side at least 6 mm SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 5-27 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders / Combination starters 5.7 Technical specifications Installation regulations for 400/500 V AC When installing the combinations, the following clearances must be maintained to grounded parts: Circuit breaker Contactor Z Clearances to grounded or live parts Rated operational voltage X21) mm Y mm Z Y circuit breakers/MSPs combined with contactors 1L1 Z mm 3RV1. 1 with 3RT10 1 400/500 V 20 10 9 3RV1. 2 with 3RT10 1 3RT1 .2 3RT1 .3 400/500 V 400/500 V 400/500 V 30 30 30 10 10 10 9 9 9 3RV1. 3 with 3RT10 2 3RT1 .3 3RT10 4 400/500 V 400/500 V 400/500 V 50 50 50 10 10 10 10 10 10 3RV1. 4 with 3RT10 4 3RT10 4 400 V 500 V 90 220 10 10 12 20 3L2 5L3 3RV1... 3RV1... 2T1 4T2 6T3 1L1 3L2 5L3 X2 3RT1... 2T1 3RT1... 4T2 6T3 NSB01030b 1) Minimum clearance to the contactor at the front. A minimum clearance at the front is not required for a circuit breaker/MSP. Installation regulations for 690 V AC Frame size Format S0 Mounted on an insulated base plate. In screw-on mounting, the screws must not be grounded. Alternatively, the rail adapter can be used without restrictions. S2/S3 Standard format for frame sizes S0 to 5.5 kW, S2, and S3 Format for frame size S0 from 7.5 to 11 kW Infeed side 3-phase busbar 1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3 3RV1... Mounted on an insulated base plate. Alternatively, the rail adapter can also be used. 2T1 Frame size S0: 3RV19 15-1A 3RV1... 4T2 6T3 1L1 Frame size S2: 3RV19 35-1A 3L2 5L3 1L1 3RV1... 3RV1... 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3 1L1 3L2 5L3 Infeed side 3L2 5L3 1L1 3RT1... 3L2 5L3 NSB01032b 2T1 4T2 6T3 NSB01031c 3RT1... Link module see accessories 2T1 4T2 6T3 Load side Load side When installing the combination, the following clearances must be maintained to grounded parts: 2 circuit breakers/MSPs combined with contactors Clearance to grounded or live parts Circuit breaker Y1 mm Contactor Rated operational voltage Y2 mm Y3 mm X1 mm X2 mm X3 mm 3RV1. 2 with 3RT10 1 690 V 80 10 95 20 14 20 3RV1. 3 with 3RT10 3 690 V 50 10 120 10 32 10 3RT10 4 690 V 50 10 120 10 40 10 1 3-phase busbar 1 2 Z Z Y1 S0: 3RV19 15-1A S2: 3RV19 35-1A 1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3 X1 3RV1... 2T1 4T2 6T3 3RV1... 2T1 4T2 6T3 1L1 3L2 5L3 In a combination involving a circuit breaker of frame size S2 and a contactor of frame size S3, a clearance of 10 cm must be maintained 3RV1... 2 X2 3RT1... Y2 Y3 3RT1... 2T1 4T2 6T3 NSB01033c SIRIUS System Manual 5-28 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders / Combination starters General specifications Specifications IEC 60 947-1, EN 60 947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100) IEC 60 947-2, EN 60 947-2 (VDE 0660 Part 101) IEC 60 947-4-1, EN 60 947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102) Type Frame size Number of poles 3RA1. 1 S00 3 3RA1. 2 S0 3 3RA1. 3 S2 3 3RA11 4 S3 3 25 50 100 Max. rated current Inmax (= max. rated operational current Ie) A 12 Permissible ambient temperature C C -55 to +80 for storage/transportation -20 to +70 for operation (above +60 C with restrictions) Rated operating voltage Ue Rated frequency Rated insulation voltage Ui Rated impulse strength Uimp V Hz V kV 690 50/60 690 6 Tripping class (CLASS) In acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1, EN 60 947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102) 10 Rated short-circuit current Iq at 50/60 Hz 400 V AC in acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1, EN 60 947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102) Coordination types in acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1, EN 60 947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102) kA Power loss Pv max of all main conducting paths depending on the rated current In (upper setting range) W W W W W W W W W W W W 6 7 10.5 VA 27 0.8 4.6 0.27 3.2 Up to 1.25 A 1.6 to 6.3 A 8 to 12 A 2 to 6.3 A 8 to 16 A 20 to 25 A 25 to 32 A 40 A 45 to 50 A 63 A 75 to 90 A 100 A 50 1 ) 7 9.5 13 19 28 35 29 45 60 Power input of the magnet coils with contactors (given a cold coil and Us, 50 Hz) AC operation DC operation Making capacity cos Holding power cos Making capacity = holding power VA W Operating range of the magnet coils with contactors Lower limit 61 0.82 7.8 0.24 5.4 127 0.82 13.5 0.34 11.50 270 0.68 22 0.27 15 0.8 to 1.1 x Us at 55 C at 60 C 0.8 x Us 0.85 x Us - - Service life of circuit breakers/MSPs Mechanical life Electrical life Max. switching frequency per hour (motor startups) Operating cycles Operating cycles 1/h 100,000 100,000 15 Service life of contactors Mechanical life Operating cycles 30 million Operating cycles See the service life characteristic of the contactors (part 3). Electrical life Shock resistance (sinus) In acc. with IEC 60 068 Part 2-27 Degree of protection In acc. with IEC 60 947-1 g Up to 9.8 IP20 50,000 50,000 15 10 million Up to 12.5 Up to 8 Up to 6 IP20 IP00 terminal housing Shock protection In acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 Protected against touching by fingers Phase loss sensitivity of the circuit breaker/MSP In acc. with IEC 60 947-4-1, EN 60 947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102) Yes Disconnector properties of the circuit breaker/MSP Main and emergency-stop switch properties of the circuit breaker/MSP and accessories In acc. with IEC 60 947-2, EN 60 947-2 (VDE 0660 Part 101) In acc. with IEC 60 204-1, EN 60 204-1 (VDE 0113 Part 1) Yes Yes, with undervoltage release to category 1 in the case of proper use Safe isolation between the main In acc. with DIN VDE 0160 Part 101 and auxiliary circuits Up to 400 V Positively driven operation with contactors Yes Yes, from the main contact to the auxiliary normally closed contact SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 5-29 3RA1 Fuseless load feeders / Combination starters Conductor cross-sections - main circuit Specifications IEC 60 947-1, EN 60 947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100) IEC 60 947-2, EN 60 947-2 (VDE 0660 Part 101) IEC 60 947-4-1, EN 60 947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102) Type Frame size Number of poles 3RA1.1 S00 3 3RA1. 2 S0 3 3RA1. 3 S2 3 3RA11 4 S3 3 Connection type Screw-type terminal Pozidriv 2 Screw-type terminal Pozidriv 2 Box terminal Box terminal Pozidriv 2 Allen screw mm2 mm2 0.5/2.5 0.5/2.5 1/6 1/2.5 to 2.5/6 0.75/25 0.75/16 2.5/501) 2.5/351) mm2 mm2 AWG AWG 0.5/4 0.75/2.5 (max. 4) - - 2 x (18 to 14) - 1/6 (max. 10) 1/2.5 to 2.5/6 - - 2 x (14 to 10) - 0.75/35 0.75/25 yes - 2 x (30 to 2) - 2.5/701) 2.5/501) yes yes - 2 x (10 to 1/0) mm2 AWG 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) 2 x (18 to 14) Terminal screw Connection type Cage Clamp terminal Permissible installation position - 22,5 22,5 90 90 NSK-7666 Minimum/maximum conductor cross-sections Finely stranded with wire end ferrule - 1-wire - 2-wire Single- or multi-core - 1-wire - 2-wire Ribbon conductor Bar connection Single- or multi-core Multi-core Important: In acc. with DIN 43 602 Start command "I" right or above 1) After the box terminals have been removed, lug or busbar connections are possible. SIRIUS System Manual 5-30 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 6 3RH, 3TX, LZX Coupling links Section Subject Page 6.1 Specifications/regulations 6-2 6.2 Device description 6-3 6.2.1 Relay coupling modules versus semiconductor coupling modules 6-4 6.2.2 Coupling links in two-tier and box terminal format 6-5 6.2.3 Plug-in relay coupling links 6-6 6.2.4 Coupling links for direct attachment 6-7 6.2.5 SIRIUS contactor relays 6-7 6.2.6 Installation 6-7 6.2.7 Notes on configuration 6-8 6.2.8 Explanation of terms 6-9 6.3 Application and areas of use 6-10 6.3.1 General information 6-10 6.3.2 Criteria for selection 6-11 6.4 Accessories 6-12 6.4.1 Accessories for two-tier coupling links 6-12 6.4.2 Accessories for LZX plug-in relay coupling links 6-13 6.5 Mounting and connection 6-14 6.5.1 Mounting 6-14 6.5.2 Connection 6-14 6.5.3 Device circuit diagrams 6-16 6.6 Dimensional drawings (dimensions in mm) 6-20 6.7 Technical specifications 6-22 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 6-1 3RH, 3TX, LZX Coupling links 6.1 Specifications/regulations Degrees of protection offered by housing EN 60 529 I/O interfaces EN 61 131-2 Connection designations EN 50 005 DIN standard rail EN 50 022 Coordination of insulation VDE 0110 Electrical relays, all-or-nothing relays DIN VDE 0435 Part 201/IEC 60255-1-00 Control devices and switching elements DIN VDE 0660 Part 200/IEC 60947-5-1 Optocoupler DIN VDE 0884 Equipment of high-voltage installations DIN VDE 0160 Shock protection DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 Safe isolation DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 Environmental conditions IEC 60721 EMC Emission Immunity EN 50081 EN 50082 General information VDE 0660 Part 100/IEC 60947-1 Specifications for industrial control systems UL 508 Specifications for industrial equipment CSA C22.2-14 Table 6-1: Regulations and specifications SIRIUS System Manual 6-2 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RH, 3TX, LZX Coupling links 6.2 Device description Coupling links are interface modules that enable optimal adaptation between electronic controllers and I/O devices, both on the sensor and the actuator side. They also provide electrical isolation. Overview The following table offers an overview of the device groups and their distinguishing features: Device group Distinguishing features Two-tier coupling links 3TX7004/3TX7005 Relay couplers: 6.2 to 22.5 mm width, contact elements: 1 to 3 normally open contacts, 1 to 2 changeover contacts Multi-channel devices Semiconductor couplers: 6.2 to 12.5 mm width Long service life, high switching frequency Screw-type terminal (3TX7004) Cage Clamp terminal (3TX7005) Box terminals 3TX7002/3TX7003 Relay couplers: Contact elements: 1 to 2 normally open contacts, 1 to 2 changeover contacts, low device height Semiconductor couplers: Long service life, high switching frequency Screw-type terminal (3TX7002) Cage Clamp terminal (3TX7003) Plug-in relay coupling links LZX: RT/PT/MT Plug-in relays (1 to 4 changeover contacts) High switching currents, prewiring possible Space-saving, adapted to contactor type, Coupling links for direct attachment to contactor reduced wiring coils 3RH1924/3TX4090/3TX7090 3RH1924 for frame sizes S0 to S3 3TX4090 for 3TH42/43 auxiliary contactors 3TX7090 for frame sizes 3 to 14 SIRIUS contactor relays 3RT10 3RH11 For main circuits: switching from motors to 11 kW directly For main circuits: up to 4 auxiliary switches Table 6-2: 3RH, 3TX, LZX coupling links - overview of the device groups with their distinguishing features Contact material Relay coupling links are offered with AgNi and hard gold-plated contacts. Hard gold-plated contacts have greater contact reliability at low voltages and currents. They can be used as of mV or A. They can be used to switch low levels of power, such as those involved in measurement and control signals. In the case of input coupling links, they are to be recommended on account of the low currents of the input modules of controllers. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 6-3 3RH, 3TX, LZX Coupling links 6.2.1 Relay coupling modules versus semiconductor coupling modules Models Advantages Relay coupling modules 6.2 mm 12.5 mm * Single- * Singlechannel channel * 1 NO/ * Multi1 SPDT channel * With/ without M-O-A switch * 1 SPDT/ 1 NO/ 2 NO 17.5 mm 22.5 mm * Singlechannel * Multichannel * Without switch * 3 NO * Singlechannel * Multichannel * Without switch * 2 SPDT Semiconductor coupling modules 6.2 mm * Singlechannel 12.5 mm * Single-channel * With M-O-A switch * Without switch Disadvantages Lower switching frequency Contact erosion, particularly in the case of inductive loads Inductivity of the coil (disturbance) Mechanical wear (service life) Low direct-current switching capacity Bounce time of the relay contact Danger of contact microwelding in the case of capacitive loads * Suitable for direct and alternating voltage * High switching capacity without heat generation * Virtually no transfer resistance (suitable as measured value transfer switch) * Electrical isolation * Safe isolation between contact and coil sides * No leakage current * High electromagnetic compatibility * High noise immunity * Insensitive to overloads and voltage peaks * Several switching levels * * * No contact welding in the case of capacitive loads * High switching frequencies * High direct-current switching capacity * Long service life * Bounce-free switching * Insensitive to vibrations and impact * Defined transfer resistance and volume resistance * Safe isolation between drive circuit and load in acc. with DIN VDE 0884 * Silent switching operation * High temperature rise in the case of high loads * Leakage current at output * Sensitive to peaks in the power system * Not suitable as measured value transfer switch because of a voltage drop at the switching transistor * * * * * Table 6-3: Comparison: Relay coupling modules and semiconductor coupling modules SIRIUS System Manual 6-4 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RH, 3TX, LZX Coupling links 6.2.2 Coupling links in two-tier and box terminal format Features * * * * Connections at two levels Very narrow design, as of 6.2 mm Terminal system: screw-type and Cage Clamp Labeling strip to identify equipment Models The 3TX70 coupling links for SIRIUS are available as both input couplers and output couplers, which have their terminals in different positions: 13 A1 14 A2 A1 13 14 Fig. 6-1: Output coupler A2 Fig. 6-2: Input coupler Input coupling links have hard gold-plated contacts for greater contact reliability at low voltages and currents. Status indication A yellow status LED on the drive circuit side indicates whether there is any control supply voltage applied to the coupler. Protective circuit There is an integrated rectifier at the input of each coupler. As a result, they are protected against polarity reversal. The rectifiers function as flywheeling diodes at disconnection. Semiconductor outputs are protected by suppressor or Zener diodes. Manual-0-automatic Some coupling links are equipped with a manual-0-automatic switch that makes it easier to switch the system on and is used for test purposes. * Manual: Relay is always on * 0 (zero): Relay is always off * Automatic: Relay follows the control supply voltage (A1) Power consumption Following on from the technical specifications of the electronic systems, the coupling links have low power consumption. They can be controlled from a programmable controller and are suitable for continuous duty. Accessories The following accessories are available for two-tier coupling links: * 24-pole connecting lead or connection comb * Screwdriver for Cage Clamp terminal system * End holder and end plate SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 6-5 3RH, 3TX, LZX Coupling links 6.2.3 Plug-in relay coupling links The plug-in relay coupling links are modular coupling links. The plug-in format means the relays can be easily replaced. Models There are complete modules for 1 and 2 changeover contacts and individual modules for 1, 2, 3 or 4 changeover contacts for a rated control supply voltage of either 24 V DC or 230 V AC. Widths Plug-in relay coupling links are available in 3 widths: * 15.5 mm print relays, LZX: RT variants * 27 mm mini-industrial relays, LZX: PT variants * 38 mm industrial relays, LZX: MT variants Installation The plug-in relay coupling links are plugged into the associated bases, and these are snapped onto a 35 mm rail in acc. with EN 50 022. Surge suppression To avoid high breaking voltage peaks, LZX: RT and PT plug-in relay coupling links are available for a rated control supply voltage of 24 V DC, with 1, 2, or 4 changeover contacts (Ws) and integrated surge suppression (flywheeling diode). RC elements are available for AC voltages. Connection The standard polarity must be taken into consideration when connecting up: * At A1: positive voltage supply (+) * At A2: negative voltage supply (-) Test button The LZX: PT and MT variants are equipped with a test button. The plug-in relay coupling link can thus be brought into the switching state and locked without the need for electrical triggering. When the test button is protruding, this indicates the locked switching position. LED An LED is available either as an individual plug-in module or is integrated in the relay, depending on the variant involved. Power consumption Following on from the technical specifications of the electronic systems, the coupling links have low power consumption. Safe isolation The drive circuit and contacts are electrically isolated. Safe isolation can also be achieved for the print relays (LZX:RT and PT series) by means of a special base. SIRIUS System Manual 6-6 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RH, 3TX, LZX Coupling links 6.2.4 Coupling links for direct attachment Contactors S0 to S3 The 3RH1924-1GP11 coupling relay, which is screwed directly onto the coil terminals, is available for direct attachment to the contactors of frame sizes S0 to S3. The 3TX4090-0C/-0D coupling links are suitable for attachment to 3TH42/43 auxiliary contactors. Contactors of up to 450 kW In the case of the large contactors of up to 450 kW (size 14), the 3TX7090 coupling link can be snapped on at the side like an auxiliary switch block, and the wires are connected to the contactor coil terminals. Variants There are variants with one normally open contact, 24 V DC, with and without surge suppression. The operating range is 17 to 30 V DC. Installation The 3TX 4090 and 3RH1924-1GP11 coupling links are screwed directly onto the contactor coil terminals, and the 3TX7090 coupling links are snapped on at the side like the auxiliary switches. Surge suppression The following coupling links have an integrated surge suppressor (varistor) for the contactor coil to be switched: * 3RH1924-1GP11 * 3TX4090-0D * 3TX7090-0D Power consumption Following on from the technical specifications of the electronic systems, the coupling links have low power consumption. LED An LED is integrated in the coupler. 6.2.5 SIRIUS contactor relays The SIRIUS 3RT10/3RH11 contactor relays are described in Chapter 3, "Contactors". 6.2.6 Installation Attachment Snap-on attachment The coupling links can be snapped onto a 35 mm rail in acc. with EN 50 022. Screw-on attachment is not possible. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 6-7 3RH, 3TX, LZX Coupling links Connection Screw-type terminals The two-tier coupling links are fitted with slotted screws for a maximum screwdriver blade width of 4 mm. Plug-in relay couplers have plus-minus POZIDRIV 2 screw-type terminals. Cage Clamp terminals The two-tier coupling links described in Section 6.2.1 are available with Cage Clamp terminals as well as screw-type terminals. 6.2.7 Notes on configuration Contact microwelding When capacitive loads are switched, a short-circuit current briefly occurs (for a period lasting only microseconds) if the capacitor is not connected in series with a resistor. This can result in contact microwelding and the contact being unable to open after the control supply voltage is removed. To prevent this from happening, a resistor can be connected in series, or a coupling link with a semiconductor output and short-circuit protection can be used. Switching inductive loads The contacts are tested in acc. with EN 60947-5-1, utilization category AC-15 and DC-13. Going beyond the requirements of the standard, a continuous test was carried out on the contacts with an AC-15 load for 100,000 operating cycles. The electrical service life of the contacts was thus tested over 100,000 operating cycles at the specified current under normal conditions. A lower load on the contacts or a protective circuit for the inductive load increases the service life of the contacts. If this service life is insufficient, a semiconductor coupler with an unlimited service life must be used. Max. line length in AC operation Each wire has a line capacitance that works like a capacitor connected in series to the coupling link. The effect of this in operation with alternating current is that so much current may flow due to the line capacitance that the coupling link does not fall in spite of a switch being open. To remedy this, a parallel resistor can be fitted to A1/A2 of the coupling link, or an RC combination can be used. Both of these measures change the performance and switching times of the coupling link. The following basic circuit diagram shows the line capacitance: CL= line capacitance Button/ switch A1 Relay coupling link ~ A2 Fig. 6-3: Basic circuit diagram, line capacitance The line lengths specified in the catalog were calculated for a line capacitance of 0.3 nF/m. This depends on the wire used. SIRIUS System Manual 6-8 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RH, 3TX, LZX Coupling links 6.2.8 Explanation of terms Electrical isolation There is no conductive connection between the input circuit and the output circuit. Electrical isolation is ensured by the in-built relay and, in the case of semiconductor outputs, by means of optocouplers. Safe isolation Safe isolation provides protection against shock currents in different circuits. It is implemented by means of increased creepages and clearances. Distinction between terms Electrical isolation is not necessarily safe isolation. Safe isolation is a protective measure against shock current, the primary purpose of which is to prevent injury. It prevents the voltage of one circuit crossing over into another. For the insulation coordination of equipment, the standard specifies values for the rating of the creepages and clearances. In the case of safe isolation, these values must be selected by means of double or reinforced insulation. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 6-9 3RH, 3TX, LZX Coupling links 6.3 Application and areas of use 6.3.1 General information Advantages The use of coupling links offers the following advantages: * Galvanic isolation between two circuits * Current gain * Protects the controller from interference and overvoltage * Substantially reduces the power input of switchgear * Permits power gain or level adaptation Applications Coupling links are used in: * Production engineering * Machine setup * Process control in power distribution * Building services automation * Process engineering Usage Coupling links are used for: * Floating signal transmission * Linking of different voltages (AC/DC) and currents * Power gain * Level adaptation * Protection of the controller against EMC noise from the I/O * Contact multiplication Application example Electronic controller I/O Devices 110 V AC 230 V AC Pushbutton Position switch Final controlling element 24 V DC 24 V DC Input Coupling link 110 V AC 230 V AC Output M Coupling link Motor contactor Fig. 6-4: Application example, coupling links in box terminal format SIRIUS System Manual 6-10 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RH, 3TX, LZX Coupling links 6.3.2 Criteria for selection Coupling links are selected on the basis of a number of criteria: Technical specifications See Section 6.7: * Rated control supply voltage Us * Typical power input * Output elements * Rated operational currents Ie * Permissible line length Mechanical requirements * * * * * Selection table The following table provides an overview of the main criteria for selection from different device groups: Construction type, width Mounting type Indicators Connection type Replaceability Device group Criteria for selection Two-tier coupling links * Space-saving due to narrow housing width * Test switches Coupling links in box terminal format * Low device height * For installation given narrow tier spacing Contactor relays for switching main and auxiliary circuits * High switching currents * Direct switching of motors up to 11 kW * Up to 4 auxiliary contacts Plug-in relay coupling links * High switching currents * Quickly interchangeable * Up to 4 changeover contacts Coupling links for attachment to contactors * Attachable directly onto the contactor * Technical specifications of the contactor to be controlled Table 6-4: Selection criteria for the 3RH, 3TX, and LZX coupling links SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 6-11 3RH, 3TX, LZX Coupling links 6.4 Accessories 6.4.1 Accessories for two-tier coupling links Connecting lead The 24-pole connecting lead 3TX7004-8BA00 can be used for all two-tier coupling links both with screw-type and Cage Clamp terminals: Fig. 6-5: 24-pole connection lead for two-tier coupling links Connection comb The 24-pole connection comb 3TX7004-8AA00 can be used for the 6.2 mm wide two-tier coupling links with screw-type terminals: Fig. 6-6: 24-pole connection comb for two-tier coupling links SIRIUS System Manual 6-12 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RH, 3TX, LZX Coupling links End holder The end holder 8WA2808 is snapped onto the rail (EN 50 022) without screws. Screwdriver for Cage Clamp terminal system The screwdriver 8WA2804 is suitable when wiring coupling links with Cage Clamp terminals. End plate In order to ensure shock protection in the case of the two-tier optocouplers having a width of 6.2 mm and with a housing opening (e.g. 3TX7 0043AB04), the individual module or last module in a series must be fitted with an end plate 3TX7004-8CE00. Labeling strip Each coupling link has a labeling strip for the purpose of identification. 6.4.2 Accessories for LZX plug-in relay coupling links Retainer In situations where there is increased mechanical stress, a retainer can be fitted to plug-in relay coupling links to provide stability. LED module An LED can be fitted as an individual plug-in module with the variants LZX:RT and LZX:PT. Module with flywheeling diode A flywheeling diode for surge suppression can be fitted as a module (for DC voltages) with the variants LZX:RT and LZX:PT. RC module For AC voltages, there is a plug-in RC module available with the series LZX:RT and LZX:PT for surge suppression. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 6-13 3RH, 3TX, LZX Coupling links 6.5 Mounting and connection 6.5.1 Mounting Snap-on attachment The coupling links are snapped onto 35 mm rails in acc. with EN 50 022. With a vertical rail and tightly packed devices, the permissible ambient temperature TU is 60 C. Any installation position is possible. 6.5.2 Connection The coupling links are available with the SIGUT terminal system, with screw-type terminals, or with Cage Clamp terminals. Cage Clamp terminals Important Risk of injury When making connections using the Cage Clamp terminal system, you should support your screwdriver with your finger to prevent the screwdriver slipping. Fig. 6-7: Cage Clamp terminals, coupling links SIRIUS System Manual 6-14 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RH, 3TX, LZX Coupling links Conductor cross-sections The following table shows the permissible conductor cross-sections for the coupling links. The specifications apply to main and auxiliary connections. 3TX7004 3TX7005 3TX7002 3TX7003 Screw-type terminals Cage Clamp terminals 3.5 mm 10 10 LZX: RT/ZT/MT 3RH1924 3TX7090 Screw-type terminals M3 -- -- M3 1 x (0.25 to 4) mm 1 x (0.08 to 2.5) mm 2 x 2.5 mm 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) mm 1 x (0.5 to 2.5) mm 1 x (0.25 to 2.5) mm 2 x 1.5 mm 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm Table 6-5: Conductor cross-sections for the 3RH, 3TX, and LZX coupling links SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 6-15 3RH, 3TX, LZX Coupling links 6.5.3 Device circuit diagrams The following circuit diagrams are examples: 3RH1924 L1 B1+ B2- N 1 1 L1 L+ L1 B1+ B2- N L- N U A1 U A1 2 A2 2 A2 NSB00184 NSB00182 3RH1924-1GP11 with surge suppressor Coupling link A Contactor Relay coupling modules 3TX7 002/3TX7 003 A1 13 A1 14 A2 A2 NSB00188 11 A1 A1 12 14 A2 A2 NSB00189 A2 3TX7002-.A.00 -1AB00 -2AF00 3TX7003-1AB00 A1 -1B.00 13 23 A1 14 24 A2 11 21 NSB00191 NSB00190 -1CB00 12 14 12 24 -1FB00 11 NSB00192 12 14 A2 -2BF02 Semiconductor coupling modules 3TX7 002 A1 13 A1 13 A1 13 A1 14 A2 13 NSB00193 NSB00195 NSB00196 NSB00194 A2 14 3TX7 002-0AB00 A2 -3AB01 14 A2 -4AB00 14 4AG0. SIRIUS System Manual 6-16 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RH, 3TX, LZX Coupling links Relay coupling modules 3TX7 004/3TX7 005 Output coupling links A 0 M A1 A1 14 14 A3 A2 13 14 A2 A2 NSB00205 13 NSB00206 3TX7 00.-1M.00 13 3TX7 00.-1AB10 A1 A1 12 A1 12 14 14 A2 A2 A2 11 11 NSB00207 NSB00208 11 3TX7 00.-1BB00 3TX7 00.-1L.0. A11 114 A 0 M A1 12 A3 113 A21 14 A2 214 A2 11 A2 NSB00209 11 3TX7 00.-1BB10 213 A2 NSB00210 3TX7 00.-1CB00 A11 A11 114 A11 112 114 113 A21 214 111 A21 111 A21 314 313 A2 NSB00211 211 A2 NSB00212 211 A2 3TX7 00.-1HB00 Relay coupling modules 3TX7 004/3TX7 005 Input coupling links 214 A2 A2 A2 A2 212 213 A31 3TX7 00.-1GB00 A1 14 A2 13 NSB00213 3TX7 00.-2M.02 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 6-17 3RH, 3TX, LZX Coupling links Semiconductor coupling modules 3TX7 004/3TX7 005 Output coupling links A1 A1 +13 +13 + A2 A2 14 14 NSB00215 NSB00214 0V Last 3TX7 00.-3AB04 Last _ 3TX7 00.-3PB54 A 0 M A1 A1 A1 +13 +13 + A2 +13 A3 +13 + A2 14 A2 NSB00216 0V 3TX7 00.-3AC04 Last _ 14 A2 NSB00217 0V Last _ 3TX7 00.-3AC14 A1 A1 A1 ~13 ~13 ~13 A2 A2 ~14 ~14 A2 NSB00218 NSB01099 ~14 Last Last 3TX7 00.-3AC03 Semiconductor coupling modules 3TX7 004/7 005 Input coupling links A1 +13 A2 14 NSB00219 Last 3TX7 00.-4AB04 Relay couplers LZX: RT/PT/MT A1 12 11 A1 12 11 14 A2 22 14 21 24 NSB00248a A2 22 21 24 NSB00247a LZX: RT3, 1-pole LZX: RT4, 2-pole SIRIUS System Manual 6-18 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RH, 3TX, LZX Coupling links (1) 12 14 (4) (3) 32 34 (6) (2) 22 24 (6) (1) 12 14 (5) (3) 32 34 (7) (4) 42 44 (8) NSB00250a NSB00249a (2) 22 24 (5) 11(7) 21(8) 31(9) (13)A1 11(9) A2(14) 21(10) 31(11) (13)A1 LZX: PT370, 3-pole 41(12) A2(14) LZX: PT570, 4-pole (5) (6) (7) 22 21 24 (4)12 (8)32 (3)14 (9)34 NSB00251a (2) A1 (1) (11) 11 31 (10) A2 LZX: MT32, 3-pole Values in brackets: Values without brackets: Plug-in base designations Contact/coil designations SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 6-19 3RH, 3TX, LZX Coupling links 6.6 Dimensional drawings (dimensions in mm) NSB00273 NSB00272 NSB00271 79 1) 80 2) NSB00274 Two-tier coupling links 3TX7 004/3TX7 005 12.5 12,5 6.2 6,2 Relay couplers 3TX7 00.-1MB00 3TX7 00.-1MF00 3TX7 00.-1L . 0 . 3TX7 00.-2M... Optocouplers 3TX7 00.-3AB04 3TX7 00.-4AB04 3TX7 00.-3PB.. 3TX7 00.-3PG74 3TX7 00.-3RB43 3TX7 00.-4P . 24 22.5 22,5 17.5 17,5 Relay couplers 3TX7 00.-1AB10 3TX7 00.-1BB00 3TX7 00.-1BB10 3TX7 00.-1CB00 3TX7 00.-1BF05 Optocouplers 3TX7 00.-3AC04 3TX7 00.-3AC14 3TX7 00.-3AC03 Relay couplers 3TX7 00.-1HB00 84 Relay couplers 3TX7 00.-1GB00 1) Dimension 3TX7 004 coupling links (screw-type terminals) 2) Dimension 3TX7 005 coupling links (Cage Clamp terminals) NSB00270 60 NSB00269 NSB00268 NSB00284 Coupling links in box terminal format 3TX7 002/3TX7 003 M3 11.5 11,5 M3 12.5 12,5 3TX7 00.-1AB.. 3TX7 00.-2A... 3TX7 002-3AB01 3TX7 002-3AB00 3TX7 002-4A... M3 22.5 22,5 17.5 17,5 3TX7 00.-1BB00 3TX7 00.-1BF00 3TX7 002-2BF02 M3 62 3TX7 00.-1CB00 3TX7 002-1BF02 Plug-in relay coupling links LZX: RT NSB00275a 15.7 15,7 NSB00276 Retaining bracket Haltebugel Print relay Printrelais LED-Modul LED module 3.8 3,8 2.6 2,6 29 12.7 12,7 60 Print relay LZX: RT3/RT4 NSB00278 Complete device LZX: RT3/RT4 15.5 15,5 75.5 75,5 75.5 75,5 NSB00277 4.5 4,5 22.2 22,2 43 Plug-in base LZX: RT78625 for print relays 15.5 15,5 4.5 4,5 22.2 22,2 61 Plug-in base LZX: RT78626 with safe isolation for print relays SIRIUS System Manual 6-20 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RH, 3TX, LZX Coupling links Plug-in relay coupling links LZX: PT 75 Retaining Haltebugel bracket 6 29 NSB00279 Relay Relais 22.5 22,5 22.2 22,2 42.5 42,5 4.5 4,5 27 Industrial relay LZX: PT570 NSB00280 LEDLED Modul module 2.2 2,2 22.5 22,5 28 73.1 73,1 Plug-in base LZX: PT78703 for industrial relays Plug-in relay coupling links LZX: MT/MR 100 32.3 32,3 62 57 69 NSB00282 35.5 35,5 24.2 24,2 NSB00281 35.5 35,5 1.5 1,5 9.3 9,3 4 38 26 Industrial relay LZX: MT32 Plug-in base LZX: MR78750 for industrial relays 45 3RH1924-1GP11 3TX4090-0C 28 28 20 30.1 30,1 30.1 30,1 45 20 26 NSB00267 50 NSB00283 45 6 11 NSB00265 Coupling links 3RH/3TX 3TX4090-0D SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 6-21 3RH, 3TX, LZX Coupling links 6.7 Technical specifications 3TX70 relay coupling links Load side Rated currents Conventional free air thermal current Ith Rated operational current Ie by utilization categories (DIN VDE 0660) At 24 V 110 V 230 V A 3TX7 00 .-1A/-1B/-1C/-1H/-1G 3TX7 00 .-. L/- .M 6 6 AC-15 DC-13 AC-15 DC-13 A A A 3 3 3 1.0 0.2 0.1 2 2 2 1.0 0.2 0.1 AC-12 DC-12 AC-12 DC-12 6 6 6 6 0.3 0.2 6 6 6 6 0.3 0.2 Current switched At 24V 110 V For resistive load In acc. with DIN VDE 0435 (relay standard) and DIN VDE 0660 A A A Min. contact loading for 3TX7 00 . -1 . . 00 17 V AC/V DC, 5 mA 17 V AC/V DC, 5 mA Min. contact loading for 3TX7 00 . -. . . 02 (hard gold-plating) 1 V AC/V DC, 0.1 mA 1 V AC/V DC, 0.1 mA Performance limit/hard gold-plating 30 V/20 mA 30 V/20 mA Switching voltage 17 to 250 V AC/V DC 17 to 250 V AC/V DC Mechanical life 20 x 106 operating cycles 20 x 106 operating cycles Electrical service life at Ie Switching frequency 1/h 1 x 105 operating cycles 0.5 x 105 operating cycles 5000 operating cycles 5000 operating cycles Table 6-6: Technical specifications, 3TX70 relay coupling links 3TX7004/3TX7005 semiconductor coupling links Load side Type 3TX7 004-/ 3TX7 005- 3AB04/ 4AB04 3AC.4 3AC03 4AB04 3PB54 2 Rated operating current Ie A 0.5 5 0.5 1.5 Short-term current carrying capacity A ms 1.5 20 Short circuit- 100 proof 20 1.5 20 Short circuitproof Contact elements 1 NO contact Transistor 1 NO contact Transistor 1 NO contact Triac 1 NO contact Transistor 1 NO contact Transistor Switching voltage (operating range) DC 48 V DC 30 V AC 50/60 Hz 24 to 250 V DC 48 V DC 30 V Minimum load current mA -- -- 50 -- -- Voltage drop switched through V 1 0.5 1.6 1 0.5 Leakage current of the electronics (at 0 signal) mA < 0.1 < 0.1 <6 < 0.1 < 0.1 Switching frequency For resistive load Hz 50 50 1 50 500 Table 6-7: Technical specifications, 3TX7 004/3TX7 005 semiconductor coupling links 3TX7002/3TX7003 semiconductor coupling links Load side Type 3AB00 3AB01 4AB00 4AG00 Rated operating current Ie 3TX7 002A 1.8 1.5 (See derating diagram) 0.1 0.1 Short-term current carrying capacity A ms 20 20 4 0.2 1 20 1 20 1 NO contact 1 NO contact 1 NO contact 1 NO contact Triac Transistor Transistor Transistor Effective 50/60 Hz 48 to 264 V AC 60 V DC 30 V DC 60 V DC Contact elements Switching voltage (operating range) Minimum load current mA 60 -- -- -- Voltage drop switched through V 1.5 1.1 1.7 0.3 Leakage current of the electronic components (at 0 signal) mA <5 <0.1 <0.1 0.001 1 Hz 1 Hz 5 Hz 5 Hz Switching frequency at Ie Table 6-8: Technical specifications, 3TX7 002/3TX7 003 semiconductor coupling links SIRIUS System Manual 6-22 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RH, 3TX, LZX Coupling links LZX: RT/PT Relay type Print relay RT, 8-pole (12.7 mm) 1 W/2 W Industrial relay PT, 14-pole (22.5 mm) 3 W/4 W 24 to 250 VAC/VDC 24 to 250 VAC/VDC 16 A/8 A (1 W/2 W) 10 A/6 A (3 W/4 W) Load side Switching voltage Rated currents Conventional free air thermal current Ith Rated operating current Ie by utilization categories (DIN VDE 0660) at 24 V 230 V Short-circuit protection Fuse links, performance class gL/gG DIAZED AC-15 DC-13 -- 6 A/3 A 6 A/3 A 2A 0.27 A -- -- -- 10 A Min. contact loading (reliability: 1 ppm) 12 VDC/10 mA -- Mechanical life 30 x 106 operating cycles 10 x 106 10 x 106 Electrical life (resistive load at 250 VAC) 1 x 105 operating cycles 1 x 105 1 x 105 Table 6-9: Technical specifications, LZX: RT/PT LZX: MT Relay type Industrial relay MT, 11-pole (35.5 mm) 3 W Load side Switching voltage 24 to 250 VAC/VDC Rated currents Conventional free air thermal current Ith 10 A Rated operating current Ie AC-15 AC-13 by utilization categories 5A 5A 2A 0.27 A (DIN VDE 0660) at 24 V 230 V Short-circuit protection Fuse links, performance class gL/gG DIAZED 10 A Min. contact loading (reliability: 1 ppm) 12 VDC/10 mA Mechanical life 20 x 106 operating cycles Electrical service life (resistive load at 250 VAC) 4 x 105 operating cycles Table 6-10: Technical specifications, LZX: MT SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 6-23 3RH, 3TX, LZX Coupling links 3RH1924/3TX7090 Short-circuit protection (unwelded fuse at Ik W 1 kA) Fuse links, performance class gL/gG NH Type 3NA DIAZED Type 5SB NEOZED Type 5SE A 6 Load side Mechanical life Operating 20 x 106 cycles Electrical service life at Ie Operating 1 x 105 Switching voltage V 24 to 250 V AC/V DC A 6 AC-15 DC-13 At 24 V A 3 1.0 by utilization categories 110 V A 3 0.2 (DIN VDE 0660) 230 V A 3 0.1 cycles Rated currents Conventional free air thermal current Ith Rated operating current Ie Table 6-11: Technical specifications, 3RH1924/3TX7090 SIRIUS System Manual 6-24 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 7 3RP20, 3RP15 Solid-state time relays Section Subject Page 7.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals 7-2 7.2 Device description 7-3 7.2.1 Device types 7-3 7.2.2 Installation 7-5 7.2.3 Special features 7-5 7.2.4 Notes on configuration 7-6 7.2.5 Explanation of terms 7-7 7.3 Application and areas of use 7-8 7.3.1 Multifunction (3RP20 05 solid-state time relay) 7-8 7.3.2 Multifunctional (3RP15 05 solid-state time relay) 7-12 7.3.3 On-delay 7-18 7.3.4 Off-delay 7-19 7.3.5 Clock pulse generator (3RP15 55 solid-state time relay) 7-20 7.3.6 Wye-delta function (3RP15 74/76 solid-state time relay) 7-21 7.3.7 Wye-delta function with overtravel (3RP15 60 solid-state time relay) 7-21 7.4 Accessories 7-22 7.4.1 Accessories for 3RP15 05, 3RP20 05 7-22 7.5 Mounting and connection 7-24 7.5.1 Mounting 7-24 7.5.2 Connection 7-25 7.5.3 Circuit diagrams 7-26 7.6 Dimensional drawings (dimensions in mm) 7-27 7.7 Technical Data 7-28 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 7-1 3RP20, 3RP15 Solid-state time relays 7.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals Standards The time relays comply with the following standards: * IEC 61812-1/DIN VDE 0435 Part 2021 on electrical relays and time relays * IEC 61000 on electromagnetic compatibility * IEC 60947-5-1; DIN VDE 0660 Part 200 on low-voltage switchgear * IEC 60721-3-1/-3 on environmental conditions * IEC 60529 on degree of protection Electromagnetic compatibility The time relays are tested in acc. with EN 50 081-1 (emission) and EN 50 082-2 (immunity) and are thus noise-free and surge-proof. Switching capacity The switching capacity complies with IEC 60947-5-1 * In the case of utilization category AC-15 and 230 V AC: 3 A * In the case of utilization category DC-13 and 24 V DC: 1 A * In the case of utilization category DC-13 and 48 V DC: 0.45 A * In the case of utilization category DC-13 and 60 V DC: 0.35 A * In the case of utilization category DC-13 and 110 V DC: 0.2 A * In the case of utilization category DC-13 and 230 V DC: 0.1 A UL/CSA/marine approval The SIMIREL time relays are approved by UL and CSA for use worldwide and tested by the GL, LRS, DM marine authorities. Approvals/ test reports Confirmation of approvals, test certificates, and the declaration of conformity can be obtained on the Internet/intranet. SIRIUS System Manual 7-2 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RP20, 3RP15 Solid-state time relays 7.2 Device description Time relays are used for different control tasks in automatic production lines and for processing machines. They are suitable for all time-delayed switching operations in control, starting, protective, and regulating circuits and ensure high repeatability of the set run times. 7.2.1 Device types Device types The SIMIREL 3RP1 time relays are available in the following forms: * Single-function devices, such as the on-delay function * Multifunctional devices Frame sizes The SIMIREL 3RP1 time relays are available in two widths: * 3RP10: 45 mm The width, height, and depth of time relays and contactors of frame size S00 (3RT/3RH10) are identical. The terminals are therefore on the same level, and the tier spacing in the cubicle can be kept correspondingly low. * 3RP15: 22.5 mm Time relays with 1 changeover contact are 82 mm in height and have six possible terminals Time relays with 2 changeover contacts are 102 mm in height and have a possible twelve terminals View of the 3RP10 LED indicators 15C B3+ A3+ B1 A1 Time-range selector switch 3RP 1s 10h 100min Coding plug for function selection 40 10s 1min 100s 1h 10min 60 80 20 Runtime adjuster 5 Device type plate 16NC 18NO 100 % A2- Fig. 7-1: 3RP1000 solid-state time relay, multifunctional 3RP10 features The features of the 3RP10 solid-state time relay: * 1 changeover contact * Eight selectable time ranges * Adjustable runtime from 0.05 s to 10 h * Contact position and voltage indication by means of LED * Safe isolation between the control and load sides in acc. with DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 * Combination voltage 24 V AC/V DC / 200-240 V AC and 24 V AC/V DC / 100-127 V AC * Single-function device for the on-delay function * Multifunctional device with 7 functions SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 7-3 3RP20, 3RP15 Solid-state time relays View of the 3RP15 A1 B1 15/17C A3 B3 21/25/27C LED indicators Runtime adjuster Time-range selector switch Function selector switch Function indicator window A Device type plate 22/26NC 24/28NO 16NC A2(-) 18NO Fig. 7-2: 3RP15 solid-state time relay, multifunctional with 2 changeover contacts 3RP15 features The features of the 3RP15 solid-state time relays are: * 1 changeover contact (8 functions) * 2 changeover contacts (16 functions) * Single or up to 15 selectable time ranges * Contact position and voltage indication by means of LEDs * Combination voltage 24 V AC/V DC / 200-240 V AC, and 24 V AC/V DC / 100-127 V AC * Wide-range voltage variant for 24-240 V AC/V DC * Single-function devices for the following functions: - On-delay with 1 or 2 changeover contacts - Off-delay with auxiliary supply and 1 changeover contact - Off-delay without auxiliary supply and 1 or 2 changeover contacts - Clock pulse generator with 1 changeover contact - Star-delta with 2 NO contacts - 2-wire, on-delay with semiconductor output * Multifunctional time relay with 8 (1 changeover contact) or 16 functions (2 changeover contacts) Accessories 3RP10 Coding plug set for the multifunctional time relay with 7 functions 3RP15 * Label sets for the multifunctional time relay with 8 or 16 functions * Sealable cap * Push-in lugs for screw-type terminal SIRIUS System Manual 7-4 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RP20, 3RP15 Solid-state time relays 7.2.2 Installation Attachment Snap-on attachment All the time relays can be snapped onto 35 mm rails and removed without tools in acc. with EN 50 022. Screw-on attachment 3RP10: attachment openings are integrated in the device 3RP15: push-in lugs for screw-type attachment are available as accessories Connection The terminals of the 3RP1 time relays are designed for connections of the control cables with a maximum stripped length of 10 mm. Cross-sections of 2 x 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 (single-coil) and 2 x 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 (single-coil) can be clamped with a wire end ferrule. Screw-type terminal (SIGUT(R) terminal) The 3RP10 and 3RP15 time relays are available with plus-minus Pozidriv 2 screw-type connections. Springloaded terminal The 3RP10 and 3RP15 time relays are available with springloaded terminals. 7.2.3 Special features Operating temperature There are no restrictions on the control supply voltage, switching current, or duty cycle for operation between -25 C to +60 C. Time ranges There are up to 15 time settings, ranging from 0.05 s to 100 h. The 3RP15 has additional time settings between the decade scales (1/10/100 s/min/h) that make high setting accuracy possible. Wide-range voltage There are multifunctional relays with a wide voltage range of 24 V AC/V DC to 240 V AC/V DC. Electrical service life The electrical service life with contactor load (e.g. 3RT1016 contactor) is 10 million operating cycles. The electrical service life at AC voltage of 230 V, utilization category AC-15/ 3 A, and at DC voltage, utilization category DC-13/1 A, is 100,000 operating cycles. Start contact In the case of functions that require a continuous auxiliary supply to terminals A1/A2 and A3/A2, the time function can be started by a control supply voltage to terminal B1 or B3. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 7-5 3RP20, 3RP15 Solid-state time relays 7.2.4 Notes on configuration The following specifications must be complied with to ensure error-free operation of the solid-state time relays: Start input Only apply the control supply voltage from start input B1 or B3 once the supply voltage has already been applied to A1/A2 or A3/A2. Identical potential Identical potential must be applied to terminals A1 and B1 or A3 and B3. Combination voltage In the case of combination voltage types, only one voltage range can be connected. Never apply the two control supply voltages simultaneously. Parallel load at the start contact The start contact is under voltage and rectified. There is a connection in the time relay to the A1 and A2 terminals. The control of loads parallel to the start input is therefore not permissible at AC 50/60 Hz control supply voltage. The following information facilitates configuration of SIMIREL 3RP time relays: Combination/ wide-range voltages 80 % of the time relay types are combination and wide-range voltage types because they are flexible in their uses: - Combination voltage: two operating voltage ranges (e.g. 24 V AC/V DC and 200 to 240 V AC) at different terminals - Wide-range voltage: one operating voltage range from 24 V AC/V DC to 240 V AC/V DC at the same terminals Two-wire time relay Two-wire time relays have the following advantages over conventional time relays in connection with contactors: - Reduced wiring - Bounce-free control - The electronic output increases service life because no mechanical wear occurs - Greater switching frequency SIRIUS System Manual 7-6 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RP20, 3RP15 Solid-state time relays Special functions * Pulsing function: pulse and idle time can be set separately. * Flashing: the pulse/break ratio is 1:1. * The timing period starts with the "off-delay without auxiliary supply" function if the time relay is separated from the supply voltage. * In the case of the 3RP15 time relay with 15 selectable time settings, there is a switch position. This means an endless timing period. If this setting is chosen for the on-delay function, the output relay never switches through after the supply voltage has been applied (off function). In the case of the "making pulse contact" function, the output relay always remains on (on function). This can be used for test purposes. * In the case of the "additive on-delay with auxiliary supply" function, the time is added for as long as the start contact is activated. If the start contact is interrupted, the timing period stops and is then continued once the start contact is closed again. This function is not non-volatile and requires a continuous auxiliary power supply. * In the case of the "shaping pulse contact with auxiliary supply" function, an activated start contact triggers a timing period that can be set. The control signal for this can be shorter or longer than the desired runtime. Cable ducts If you use cable ducts for wiring, the position and dimensions of the terminal blocks must be taken into consideration (see pages 7-27). 7.2.5 Explanation of terms Setting accuracy Setting accuracy is the accuracy in relation to the end value of the scale in line with the specified tolerance. Repeatability Repeatability describes the accuracy with which the set value can be reproduced with the specified tolerance. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 7-7 3RP20, 3RP15 Solid-state time relays 7.3 Application and areas of use 7.3.1 Multifunction (3RP20 05 solid-state time relay) The time relay contains one or two SPDT contacts. Operating time adjustment 15 time ranges can be set by means of a rotary switch. The desired runtime can be set accurately by means of a potentiometer (rotary switch for fine adjustment). Important Changes to the time range are only effective if they are made in a deenergized state. Example You want to set a duration of 5 seconds: Step Procedure 1 1s 10 h 100 min 10 s 1 min 100 s 1 h 10 min Rotate the time range selector switch to 10 s. This means runtimes of up to 10 seconds can be set. 2 60 40 80 20 5 100% Rotate the potentiometer to 50 % for fine adjustment. In other words, 50 % (= 5 seconds) of the maximum value (10 seconds) is set. Table 7-1: 3RP20 05 (multifunctional) operating time adjustment) 1s 15C B3+ A3+ B1 A1 3RP 1s 10s 1min 10h 100s 100min 1h 10min 40 10s 1min 100s 1h 10min 10h 100min 5s: 40 80 20 1s 20 16NC 18NO 100 % 5 60 10s 1min 100s 1h 10min 80 5 60 100 % A2- 1.5min (90s): 10h 100min 40 60 80 20 5 100 % Fig. 7-3: 3RP20 05 (multifunctional) operating time adjustment Functions You can select 8 different functions with the integrated function setting dial. Important Changes to the function are only effective if they are made in a deenergized state. SIRIUS System Manual 7-8 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RP20, 3RP15 Solid-state time relays Function diagrams The label set, for labeling the set function on the solid state time relay 3RP2005- .A, contains the functions shown in the following table: Function 1 SPDT Circuit diagram Function diagram time relay energized contact closed contact open A1/A2 NSB00858 On-delay 15/18 15/16 t Off-delay with auxiliary supply A1/A2 > 35 ms NSB00859 B1/A2 15/18 15/16 t A1/A2 B1/A2 NSB00861 On-delay and off-delay with auxiliary supply (t = t an = t ab) 15/18 15/16 t A1/A2 NSB00862 Flashing, start with break (pulse/break 1:1) t 15/18 15/16 t A1/A2 NSB00864 Passing make contact t 15/18 15/16 t Breaking pulse contact with auxiliary supply A1/A2 > 35 ms NSB00865 B1/A2 15/18 15/16 t Pulse shaping contact with auxiliary supply A1/A2 > 35 ms NSB00867 B1/A2 15/18 15/16 t Additive ON-delay with auxiliary voltage A1/A2 t1 t3 t2 NSB00868 B1/A2 15/18 15/16 t Table 7-2: 3RP20 05-. A (multifunctional) circuit diagrams and function diagrams SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 7-9 3RP20, 3RP15 Solid-state time relays The label set, for labeling the set function on the solid state time relay 3RP2005- .B, contains the functions shown in the following table: Function 2 SPDT Circuit diagram Function diagram time relay energized contact closed contact open ON-delay A1/A2 NSB00871 15/18 15/16 25/28 25/26 t A1/A2 NSB00872 ON-delay and instantaneous contact 15/18 15/16 t 21/24 21/22 OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage A1/A2 > 35 ms B1/A2 NSB00873 15/18 15/16 25/28 25/26 t A1/A2 NSB00874 OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage and instantaneous contact > 35ms B1/A2 15/18 15/16 t 21/24 21/22 A1/A2 NSB00876 ON-delay and OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage (t = t an = t ab) B1/A2 15/18 15/16 25/28 25/26 t t t A1/A2 NSB00877 ON-delay and OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage and instantaneous contact (t = t an = t ab) t B1/A2 15/18 15/16 21/24 21/22 A1/A2 NSB00878 Flashing, start with break (pulse/break 1:1) 15/18 15/16 25/28 25/26 t t A1/A2 NSB00879 Flashing, start with break (pulse/break 1:1) and instantaneous contact 15/18 15/16 t t 21/24 21/22 SIRIUS System Manual 7-10 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RP20, 3RP15 Solid-state time relays Passing make contact Circuit diagram Function diagram A1/A2 NSB00880 Function 15/18 15/16 25/28 25/26 t A1/A2 NSB00881 Passing make contact and instantaneous contact 15/18 15/16 t Passing break contact with auxiliary voltage A1/A2 NSB00882 21/24 21/22 > 35ms B1/A2 15/18 15/16 25/28 25/26 Passing break contact with auxiliary voltage and instantaneous contact A1/A2 NSB00883 t > 35ms B1/A2 15/18 15/16 t Pulse shaping with auxiliary voltage (creates a pulse at the output irrespective of the length of excitation) A1/A2 NSB00884 21/24 21/22 > 35ms B1/A2 15/18 15/16 25/28 25/26 t A1/A2 NSB00885 Pulse shaping with auxiliary voltage and instantaneous contact (creates a pulse at the output irrespective of the length of excitation) >35ms B1/A2 15/18 15/16 t Additive ON-delay with auxiliary voltage and instantaneous contact A1/A2 t1 t3 t2 B./A2 NSB01381 21/24 21/22 15/18 15/16 t 21/24 21/22 A1/A2 NSB00888 Wye-delta function 17/18 27/28 t 50ms Table 7-3: 3RP20 05-.B (multifunctional) circuit diagrams and function diagrams Important The same potential must be applied to terminals A and B. A./A2 q A1/A2 or A3/A2, depending on the voltage level connected B./A2 q B1/A2 or B3/A2, depending on the voltage level connected SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 7-11 3RP20, 3RP15 Solid-state time relays 7.3.2 Multifunctional (3RP15 05 solid-state time relay) Operating time adjustment Fifteen time ranges can be set using a rotary switch, ensuring very precise adjustment. The set time range is displayed in a window next to the rotary switch. The desired runtime can be set accurately by means of a potentiometer (rotary switch for fine adjustment). In the time range position the function is executed with an endless time period. This means, for example, that the output relay never switches through when "on-delay" is set and the supply voltage is applied or that the output relay remains continuously on when "making pulse contact" is set. Important Changes to the time range are only effective if they are made in a deenergized state. Example You want to set a 90 second period: Step Procedure 1 100s Rotate the time range selector switch until 100 s appears in the adjacent window. This means runtimes of up to 100 seconds can be set. 2 40 60 80 20 5 100% Rotate the potentiometer to 90 %. In other words 90 % (= 90 seconds) of the maximum value (= 100 seconds) is set. Table 7-4: 3RP15 05 (multifunctional) operating time adjustment SIRIUS System Manual 7-12 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RP20, 3RP15 Solid-state time relays A1 B1 15/17C A3 B3 21/25/27C 40 60 80 20 5s: 100 % 5 10s 40 60 80 20 A 1.5 min (90 s): 5 100 % 100s 22/26NC 24/28NO 16NC A2(-) 18NO Fig. 7-4: 3RP15 05 (multifunctional) operating time adjustment Functions The following can be set by means of a rotary switch. * Time relay with 1 changeover contact: 8 functions * Time relay with 2 changeover contacts: 16 functions Important Changes to the function are only effective if they are made in a deenergized state. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 7-13 3RP20, 3RP15 Solid-state time relays Function setting The function is set using a rotary switch and is indicated by an identifying letter in the adjacent window. The set function can be labeled distinctly with an identification plate with the corresponding function diagram. At the same time, a mechanical code ensures that the correct function is set by ensuring that a label can only be clipped on if the corresponding function is set using the rotary switch. A label set with function diagrams of all the functions that can be set for the time relay is available as an accessory. Break the label of the set function out of the label set, and snap it firmly onto the time relay as shown in the following diagram: 1 2 3RP19 01-0A (3RP15 05-1A) 3RP19 01-0B (3RP15 05-1B) Fig. 7-5: 3RP15 05 (multifunctional) function identification SIRIUS System Manual 7-14 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RP20, 3RP15 Solid-state time relays Identifying letters The following table lists the identifying letters for the 8 or 16 functions of the solid-state multifunctional 3RP15 05 time relay: Function Identifying letter with time relay with 1 changeover contact Identifying letter with time relay with 2 changeover contacts On-delay A A Off-delay with auxiliary supply B B On-delay and off-delay with auxiliary supply C C Flashing, start with break D D Making pulse contact E E Breaking pulse contact with auxiliary supply F F Shaping pulse contact with auxiliary supply G G Additive on-delay with auxiliary supply (and immediate switching only H*) H H* On-delay and immediate switching A* Off-delay with auxiliary supply B* On-delay and off-delay with auxiliary supply and immediate switching C* Flashing, start with break, and immediate switching D* Making pulse contact and immediate switching E* Breaking pulse contact with auxiliary supply and immediate switching F* Shaping pulse contact with auxiliary supply and immediate switching G* Wye-delta function ?*d Table 7-5: 3RP15 05 (multifunctional) assignment of the identifying letters The "*" after the identifying letter indicates that the second changeover contact present reacts as an immediate switching contact (controlled by the supply voltage or the start contact depending on the function). If this "*" is not present, the second changeover contact reacts with a time delay like the first changeover contact. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 7-15 3RP20, 3RP15 Solid-state time relays The following table explains the 8 or 16 functions of the solid-state multifunctional 3RP15 05 time relay using circuit diagrams and function diagrams: A./A2 15/18 15/16 15 A2 16 18 B./A2 A./A2 B./A2 NSB00899 16 18 * AC/DC24V A./A2 AC100/127V AC200/240V 15/18 15/16 25/28 25/26 16 18 NSB00900 15 ~ A1 A3 * AC/DC24V A./A2 AC100/127V AC200/240V 15/18 15/16 25/28 25/26 15 16 18 AC/DC24V * A./A2 AC100/127V AC200/240V B./A2 15 A1 B1 A3 B3 A2 H* Additive ON-delay with auxiliary voltage and instantaneous contact 15/18 15/16 25/28 25/26 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 A2 G Pulse shaping with auxiliary voltage (creates a pulse at the output irrespective of the length of excitation) * AC/DC24V AC100/127V AC200/240V A1 A3 F Passing break contact with auxiliary voltage NSB00898 16 18 A2 E Passing make contact 15/18 15/16 25/28 25/26 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 A2 D Flashing, start with break (pulse/break 1:1) * A./A2 AC100/127V AC200/240V A2 C ON-delay and OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage (t=tan=tab) 25/28 25/26 NSB00897 A1 A3 NSB00901 B OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage Function diagram AC/DC24V AC100/127V AC200/240V 16 18 NSB00902 A ON-delay Device circuit diagrams 15/18 15/16 25/28 25/26 * AC/DC24V A./A2 AC100/127V AC200/240V A1 B1 A3 B3 A2 15 16 18 NSB00903 Identifying letter B./A2 15/18 15/16 25/28 25/26 * AC/DC24V A./A2 AC100/127V AC200/240V B./A2 15/18 15/16 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 A2 16 18 NSB00904 Function diagrams Circuit diagrams 21/24 21/22 Table 7-6: Function diagrams (3RP15) SIRIUS System Manual 7-16 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RP20, 3RP15 Solid-state time relays AC/DC24V AC100/127V AC200/240V A./A2 21 A2 16 18 22 24 E* Passing make contact and instantaneous contact AC/DC24V A./A2 B./A2 16 18 AC/DC24V 15/18 15/16 21/24 21/22 A./A2 B./A2 A2 16 18 21 NSB00919 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 22 24 15/18 15/16 21/24 21/22 AC/DC24V AC100/127V AC200/240V A./A2 15 15/18 15/16 21 A2 16 18 22 24 NSB00920 A1 A3 21/24 21/22 AC/DC24V AC100/127V AC200/240V A./A2 15/18 15/16 15 21 16 18 22 24 21/24 21/22 AC/DC24V A./A2 AC100/127V AC200/240V B./A2 A1 B1 A3 B3 A2 *d Wye-delta function 22 24 AC100/127V AC200/240V A2 G* Pulse shaping with auxiliary voltage and instantaneous contact (creates a pulse at the output irrespective of the length of excitation) 21 NSB00918 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 A1 A3 F* Passing break contact with auxiliary voltage and instantaneous contact 21/24 21/22 AC100/127V AC200/240V ~ D* Flashing, start with break (pulse/break 1:1) and instantaneous contact NSB00917 15 A2 C* ON-delay and OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage and instantaneous contact (t=tan=tab) 15/18 15/16 A1 A3 NSB00921 B* OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage and instantaneous contact Function diagram 15 16 18 15/18 15/16 21 22 24 NSB00922 A* ON-delay and instantaneous contact Device circuit diagrams 21/24 21/22 AC/DC24V A./A2 AC100/127V AC200/240V 15 A1 B1 A3 B3 A2 16 18 B./A2 15/18 15/16 21 22 24 NSB00923 Identifying letter 21/24 21/22 AC/DC24V AC100/127V AC200/240V A./A2 17 27 A2 Y18 d28 NSB00924 17/18 A1 A3 27/28 Table 7-6: (cont.) Function diagrams (3RP15) * Only with devices with 2 changeover contacts SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 7-17 3RP20, 3RP15 Solid-state time relays 7.3.3 On-delay 3RP20 25 solid-state time relay The time relay contains 1 changeover contact. Time ranges 15 time ranges can be set by means of a rotary switch. Important Changes to the time range are only effective if they are made in a deenergized state. Function diagram ansprechverzogert ON DELAY A./A2 15/18 15/16 Fig. 7-6: 3RP20 25 function diagram The 3RP15 11/12/13 solid-state time relay The time relay contains 1 changeover contact. Time ranges Fixed time ranges are offered: 10 s, 30 s, 100 s Function diagram ansprechverzogert ON DELAY A./A2 15/18 15/16 Fig. 7-7: 3RP15 1. function diagram The 3RP15 25 solid-state time relay The time relay is available with either 1 or 2 changeover contacts. Time ranges Fifteen time ranges can be set by means of a rotary switch. Important Changes to the time range are only effective if they are made in a deenergized state. SIRIUS System Manual 7-18 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RP20, 3RP15 Solid-state time relays Function diagrams The function diagram for the time relay with 1 changeover contact and with 2 changeover contacts: ansprechverzogert ON DELAY ansprechverzogert ON DELAY A./A2 A./A2 15/18 15/16 15/18 15/16 25/28 25/26 1 SPDT 2 SPDT Fig. 7-8: 3RP15 25 function diagram The 3RP15 27 solid-state time relay (two-wire time relay) The two-wire time relay is connected in series with the load. The timing period begins after the control supply voltage has been applied. The semiconductor output then becomes live, and voltage is applied to the load. Time ranges Four time ranges can be set by means of a rotary switch. Important Attention must be paid to the rated operational current, residual current with unswitched output, and voltage drop in the case of a switched output. ansprechverzogert ON DELAY Function diagram A1/A2 Fig. 7-9: 3RP15 27 Function diagram 7.3.4 Off-delay The 3RP15 31/32/33 solid-state time relay with auxiliary supply The time relay contains 1 changeover contact. Time ranges Fixed time ranges are offered: 10 s, 30 s, 100 s ruckfallverzogert OFF DELAY Function diagram A./A2 B./A2 15/18 15/16 Fig. 7-10: 3RP15 3. function diagram There is continuous auxiliary voltage (A./A2) at the time relay. If a control supply voltage is applied to the start contact, the output relay switches over. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 7-19 3RP20, 3RP15 Solid-state time relays After the start contact is disconnected, the set runtime starts. The minimum on-time of 35 ms must be adhered to. The 3RP15 40 solid-state time relay without auxiliary supply The time relay is available with either 1 or 2 changeover contacts. Time ranges Seven time ranges can be set by means of a rotary switch. Times ranging from 0.05 to 100 s are possible. Important Changes to the time range are only effective if they are made in a deenergized state. The function diagram for the time relay with 1 changeover contact and with 2 changeover contacts: Function diagrams ruckfallverzogert OFF DELAY ruckfallverzogert OFF DELAY 2 A1/A2 2 A1/A2 15/18 15/16 15/18 15/16 25/28 25/26 1 SPDT 2 SPDT Fig. 7-11: 3RP15 40 Function diagram Mode of operation When the rated control supply voltage is applied, the time relay switches over. After the rated control supply voltage has been disconnected, the runtime t starts. After t has finished, the relay switches back to the quiet state. If the minimum on-time is not adhered to, it is ensured that either the timing period will not start or that a started timing period will always be properly completed. Intermediate states in the function process, such as the relay getting stuck, are successfully prevented. 7.3.5 Clock pulse generator (3RP15 55 solid-state time relay) Description The idle time and the pulse time of the clock pulse generator and the time ranges must be set separately. The pulsing function begins with the break. The time relay contains a changeover contact. Time ranges Fifteen time ranges can be set by means of a rotary switch. Important Changes to the time range are only effective if they are made in a deenergized state. A pulse, for example, can be output cyclically for 1 second after a break of 1 hour. SIRIUS System Manual 7-20 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RP20, 3RP15 Solid-state time relays Function diagram Taktgeber CLOCK PULSE A./A2 15/18 15/16 Pausenzeit Impulszeit Interval time Impuls time Fig. 7-12: 3RP15 55 function diagram 7.3.6 Wye-delta function (3RP15 74/76 solid-state time relay) Description The instantaneous star contact and the time-delayed delta contact have a shared contact root. To avoid phase short circuits, the switch-over break from star to delta is 50 ms. Time ranges The time relay offers a fixed time range: 20 s, 60 s Function diagram Stern/Dreieck STAR/DELTA A./A2 17/18 17/28 Fig. 7-13: 3RP15 7. function diagram 7.3.7 Wye-delta function with overtravel (3RP15 60 solid-state time relay) Description Supply voltage is applied to A./A2 and there is no control signal at B./A2. This starts the *d timing period. By applying the control signal to B./A2, the idling time (overtravel time) is started. When the set time tIdling (30 s to 600 s) is completed, the output relays (17/16 and 17/28) are reset. If the control signal is switched off at B./A2 (minimum off-time 270 ms), a new timing period is started. Time ranges Star-delta time 1 s to 20 s Overtravel time: 30 s to 600 s Function diagram Stern/Dreieck mit Nachlauf STAR/DELTA with idling A./A2 B./A2 17/18 50 ms 17/28 17/16 t t * Idling Fig. 7-14: 3RP15 60 function diagram SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 7-21 3RP20, 3RP15 Solid-state time relays 7.4 Accessories 7.4.1 Accessories for 3RP15 05, 3RP20 05 Label Sets Two label sets are available to the 3RP15 05 and 3RP20 05 solid-state time relay, multifunction device for labeling, depending on the version (8 functions with 1 changeover contact, 16 functions with 2 changeover contacts: * 3RP19 01-0A for the 3RP15 05-1A, 3RP20 05-.A, electronic relays, 1 SPDT * 3RP19 01-0B for the 3RP15 05-1B, 3RP20 05-.B, electronic relays, 2 SPDT The following table shows you how to set the function on the time relay and put on the label: Illustration Step Procedure 1 The desired function is set on the potentiometer of the time relay using a screwdriver. 2 The corresponding label identifying the set function is clipped on. 1 2 3RP19 01-0A (3RP15 05-.A) 3RP19 01-0B (3RP15 05-.B) Table 7-7: Label set (3RP15, 3RP20 05) SIRIUS System Manual 7-22 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RP20, 3RP15 Solid-state time relays Sealable cover All 3RP15 solid-state time relays can be secured against unauthorized adjustment by means of a sealable cover (3RP19 02). The following table and illustration explain how to do this: Illustration Step 1 Break off the key for interlocking from the upper edge of the cover. 2 Use the hook to put the cover in the openings to the side of the device identification label. 3 Move the cover toward the time relay. 4 Hook the key onto the time relay through the slit in the cover to attach the cover to the time relay. 5/6 Pull the seal through the opening of the key. 3 1 Procedure 2 3RP19 02 5 4 6 Table 7-8: Sealable cover Push-in lugs for screwtype attachment Push-in lugs (3RP19 03) are available for panel mounting: 3RP19 03 Fig. 7-15: Panel mounting SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 7-23 3RP20, 3RP15 Solid-state time relays 7.5 Mounting and connection 7.5.1 Mounting DIN rail mounting 3RP20 The 3RP20 time relays can be snapped onto the 35 mm DIN rails and removed without tools in acc. with EN 50 022. Place the time relay on the upper edge of the rail, and press it downward until it snaps onto the lower edge of the rail. To remove the time relay, press it downward to release the tension of the spring, and the time relay can be removed. Fig. 7-16: 3RP20: mounting on and removal from a 35 mm rail Panel mounting DIN rail mounting The following is required for panel mounting of the 3RP20 time relay: * 2 M4 screws, diagonal * Maximum tightening torque of 10.5 Nm * Washers and spring lock washers must always be used * The distance to grounded parts at the side must be more than 6 mm 3RP15 The 3RP15 time relays can be snapped onto the 35 mm DIN rails and removed without tools in acc. with EN 50 022. Place the time relay on the upper edge of the rail, and press it downward until it snaps onto the lower edge of the rail. To remove the time relay, press it downward to release the tension of the spring, and the time relay can be removed. Fig. 7-17: DIN rail mounting SIRIUS System Manual 7-24 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RP20, 3RP15 Solid-state time relays Panel mounting Panel mounting is possible by means of push-in lugs for M4 screws (application, see under Section 7.4 "Accessories)" 7.5.2 Connection The 3RP20 solid-state time relays are available with SIGUT terminals with plus/minus Pozidriv 2 screws and also with Cage Clamp terminals. The 3RP15 solid-state time relays are available: * With SIGUT terminals with plus/minus Pozidriv 2 screws * With Cage Clamp terminals Conductor cross-sections The following table lists the permissible conductor cross-sections for the 3RP1 solid-state time relays. The specifications apply to control and load current connections. 5 ... 6 mm / PZ2 3RP20.5-1 3RP20.5-2 (springloaded terminal) 3RP15 3RP15..-2 (springloaded terminal) 0.8 to 1.2 Nm 7 to 10.3 lb*in -- 0.8 to 1.2 Nm 7 to 10.3 lb*in -- 10 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm) 1 x (0.5 to 4 mm) 2 x (0.25 to 2.5 mm) 2 x (0.25 to 1.5 mm) 2 x (0.75 to 4 mm) 2 x (0.5 to 2.5 mm) 10 2 x (0.5 to 2.5 mm) 2 x (0.25 to 1 mm) 1 x (0.5 to 2.5 mm) 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm) 2 x (0.25 to 1 mm) -- 2 x (0.25 to 1.5 mm) -- 2 x (0.25 to 1.5 mm) 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (24 to 14) 2 x (20 to 14) 2 x (24 to 16) 10 AWG Table 7-9: Permissible conductor cross-sections for control and load current connections The following illustration shows you the springloaded terminal: 2 3 1 Fig. 7-18: Connection of the springloaded terminal SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 7-25 3RP20, 3RP15 Solid-state time relays 7.5.3 Circuit diagrams 3RP20 L1(+) Us = AC/DC 24 V Us = AC 100/127 V Us = AC 200/240 V L1 B3 A3 B1 A1 A2 A2 16 18 N(-) 16 18 N L1 L1 K1 S1 S1 A1 B1 (A3+) (B3+) A1 B1 (A3+) (B3+) K1 K1 N 15 B3 A3 B1 A1 15 A2 N A2 3RP20 circuit diagrams 3RP15 L1(+) Us = AC/DC 24 V Us = AC/DC 42 ... 48 V L1 Us = AC/DC 60 V Us = AC 100 ... 127 V Us = AC 200 ... 240 V Us = AC/DC 24 ... 240 V B3 A3 B1 A1 B3 A3 B1 A1 A2 A2 N(-) N L1 L1 A1 B1 (A3+) (B3+) A1 B1 (A3+) (B3+) K1 K1 N S1 K1 S1 A2 N A2 3RP15 circuit diagrams SIRIUS System Manual 7-26 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RP20, 3RP15 Solid-state time relays 7.6 Dimensional drawings (dimensions in mm) 3RP1/2 time relay 5 5.3 67 35 5 36 55 58 2) 51 3) 50 8.6 4) NSB00978 7.5 45 3RP20 80 73.5 62 90 1) 5 15 22.5 ca. 65 (Terminal) 86 NSB00980 4) 3RP15, 1 changeover contact without auxiliary supply5) , clock pulse generator, wye-delta function 80 100 73.5 62 82 110 1) 15 22.5 5 ca. 37 (Terminal) ca. 65 (Terminal) 86 NSB00981 4) 3RP15, 1 and 2 changeover contact devices with auxiliary supply 1) Push-in lug for screw-type attachment 3) Coding plug (with 3RP10) or identification label 4) Drilling pattern 5) Except 3RP15 05-1A.30 two-wire design 6) Identification label SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 7-27 3RP20, 3RP15 Solid-state time relays 7.7 Technical Data Technical Data according to IEC 61812-1/DIN VDE 0435 part 2021 Type 3RP20 05 3RP15 05 3RP15 11 3RP20 25 3RP15 31 3RP15 12 3RP15 32 3RP15 13 3RP15 33 3RP15 25 3RP15 40 3RP15 60 3RP15 74 3RP15 27 3RP15 76 3RP15 55 Rated insulation voltage AC V 300; 500 with 3RP1505-1BT20 Pollution degree 3 Overvoltage category III in acc. with DIN VDE 0110 Excitation operating range 1) 0.85 to 1.1 x Us with AC; 0.8 to 1.25 x Us with DC 0.95 to 1.05 times the rated frequency Rated power W 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 Power input at 230 V AC, 50 Hz VA 4 6 6 2 2) 6 6 1 Rated operational currents Ie 33 ) -- AC-14; DC-13 -- 0.01 to 0.6 DC-13 at 24 V 1 -- DC-13 at 48 V 0.45 -- DC-13 at 60 V 0.35 -- DC-13 at 110 V 0.2 -- DC-13 at 230 V 0.1 -- A 4 -- * Loaded with Ie 230 VAC 1/h 2500 5000 * Loaded with 3RT10 16 contactor, 230 V AC 1/h 5000 Recovery time ms 150 5) Minimum on-time ms 35 Residual current mA 5 V 3.5 A 10 (to 10 ms) AC-15 at 230 V AC, 50 Hz A DIAZED fuse 4) Performance class gL/Gg Switching frequency 5000 300 35 6) -- 200 7) 150 50 -- With output not switched through Voltage drop Switched through Short-term current-carrying capacity Setting accuracy typical 5 % Related to the end of scale value 1 % Repeatability 30 x 106 Mechanical service life Operating cycles Permissible ambient temperature In operation C During storage C Degree of protection -25 to +60 -40 to +85 IP40 Deckel In acc. with EN 60 529 Shock resistance 100 x 106 IP20 terminals g/ms 15/11 Half-sine in acc. with IEC 60 068-2-27 Vibration resistance in acc. with IEC 60 068-2-6 Hz/mm 10-55 / 0.35 EMC tests IEC 61 000-6-2 / EN 50 081-1 In acc. with the basic specification 1) If not specified otherwise 2) Maximum making current peak 1 A/100 ms 3) With 3RP15 05-.R: NC contact -> Ie = 1 A 4) Without any welding in acc. with IEC 60 947-5-1. 5) With 3RP15 05.-BW30/ .AW30/ .RW30 and 3RP15 25-.BW30 voltage-dependent 10 to 250 ms. 6) Minimum on-time with 3RP15 00-. BW30 150 ms until instantaneous contact is switched. 7) Adhere to minimum on-time for problem-free functioning. SIRIUS System Manual 7-28 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 8 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit (soft starter) Section Subject Page 8.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals 8-3 8.2 Device description 8-5 8.2.1 Physical principles 8-6 8.2.2 General device description 8-10 8.2.3 Comparison of the 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit (soft starter) with the SIKOSTART 3RW22 and 8-14 SIKOSTART 3RW34 motor control units 8.2.4 Comparison of the 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit (soft starter) with the 3RA star-delta combina- 8-16 tion 8.2.5 Notes on configuration 8-16 8.3 Application and use 8-18 8.3.1 Areas of application and criteria for selection 8-18 8.3.2 Installation guidelines 8-18 8.3.3 Overview tables: correction factors 8-21 8.3.3.1 3RW30/31 soft starters in a stand-alone installation 8-21 8.3.3.2 3RW30/31 soft starters in combination with the 3RV1 8-22 circuit breaker 8.3.3.3 Combining the 3RT contactor with the 3RU1 thermal overload relay and 3RW3 soft starter 8-24 8.3.3.4 Combining the 3RT contactor with the 3RB10 electronic overload relay and 3RW3 soft starter 8-26 8.3.4 Circuit example 8-29 8.3.5 Commissioning 8-30 8.3.6 Event messages and diagnostics 8-32 8.3.7 Timing diagram 8-33 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 8-1 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit Section Subject Page 8.4 Accessories 8-35 8.5 Mounting and connection 8-37 8.5.1 Mounting 8-37 8.5.2 Connection 8-37 8.5.3 Circuit diagrams 8-38 8.6 Dimensional drawings (dimensions in mm) 8-41 8.7 Technical specifications 8-42 8.7.1 Control electronics/power electronics 8-42 8.7.2 Short-circuit protection and fuse coordination 8-45 8.7.3 Site altitude 8-50 8.7.4 Specifications in acc. with IEC 8-51 8.7.5 Specifications in acc. with NEMA 8-52 SIRIUS System Manual 8-2 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit 8.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals The 3RW3 semiconductor motor control units, referred to below more succinctly as soft starters, meet the UL and CSA requirements. UL/CSA UL 508 Degrees of protection offered by housings EN DIN standard rail EN 50 022 Electronic Motor control units IEC 60947-4-2 Shock protection IEC 60947-1 and DIN 40050 EMC IEC 60801-4-2 (draft) General specifications EN 602 69-1A1 Control devices and switching elements EN 602 69-1A1 Gost Approved by Gost CTic EMC compliance marking for Australia (similar to CE marking) Table 8-1: Standards, certificates, and approvals, 3RW3 Normal switching duty The 3RW3 soft starters can be used for normal switching duty in acc. with DIN VDE 0100 Part 460: A switch for normal switching duty must be provided for all circuits that are to be switched independently of other parts. Switches for normal switching duty do not necessarily all switch active conductors of a circuit. Isolation The soft starters do not meet the requirements for isolation in acc. with DIN VDE 0100 Part 460 and EN 60 947-1: Every circuit must be capable of being isolated from the active conductors of the power supply. Circuit groups can be isolated by a common device if this is permitted by the operating conditions. In the open position, devices with an isolating function must have a corresponding isolating distance and an indicator showing the positions of the moving contacts. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 8-3 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit Warnings Caution Important The devices are all carefully tested at the factory and are not shipped unless they are found to be in proper working order. However, they may be subjected to stresses during transportation over which we have no control. The 3RW3...-1.B1. soft starter was built as a class A device. Using this product in residential buildings could cause radio interference. Consequently, the impulse series relays in the main circuit may be in an undefined switching state. In the interests of complete safety, the following procedure should be used at commissioning or after the replacement of the SIRIUS soft starter: First, apply the supply voltage in order to put the impulse series relays in a defined switching state. Then, switch the main circuit on. If you deviate from this procedure, the motor can be switched on inadvertently and cause damage to people or parts of the system. SIRIUS System Manual 8-4 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit 8.2 Device description The SIRIUS 3RW3 soft starters are part of the SIRIUS modular system. They are compatible with the other SIRIUS switching devices. The possible combinations are: * 3RW3 soft starter + 3RV circuit breaker * 3RW3 soft starter + 3RU/3RB overload relay + 3RT contactor The link modules used for combinations of contactors and circuit breakers are used for this (see Section 8.3.2, "Installation guidelines"). Fig. 8-1: 3RW3 soft starter 3RW30/31 frame sizes The 3RW30 soft starter is available in four frame sizes: S00, S0, S2, and S3. The 3RW31 soft starter is available in frame size S0. The following table contains the power ranges of the various frame sizes (all specifications apply to UN = 400 V and 40 C ambient temperature): Frame size S00 Frame size S0 Frame size S2 Frame size S3 1.1 - 4 kW 5.5 - 11 kW 15 - 22 kW 30 - 55 kW 6-9A 12.5 - 25 A 32 - 45 A 63 - 100 A (W x H x D) (mm) 45 x 97.5 x 93 (W x H x D) (mm) 45 x 125 x 119 (W x H x D) (mm) 55 x 160 x 143 (W x H x D) (mm) 70 x 170 x 178 Table 8-2: 3RW3, frame sizes SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 8-5 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit 8.2.1 Physical principles Starting current Three-phase current asynchronous motors have a high inrush current I(starting). This inrush current can be between three and fifteen times as high as the rated operational current, depending on the type of motor. A figure between seven and eight times the rated operational current can be postulated as typical. I Istarting Irated I0 (no-load) nrated nsyn n Mcusp M Mmotor Mstarting Mload Msaddle Maccel Mrated Mmotor Mload nrated nsyn n Fig. 8-2: Typical current and torque curve of a three-phase asynchronous motor Important This starting current must be taken into consideration in the design of the supply network, among other things by adapting the supply (high heat development) and the fusing (inadvertent tripping of the fuses). Reducing the starting current There are various ways of reducing the starting current: * By star-delta starter * By frequency converter * By soft starter SIRIUS System Manual 8-6 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit Star-delta starter After a delay, the motor windings are switched from a star to a delta configuration. The motor current for star starting is only about 1/3 of that required for delta starting (motor torque, too, is reduced to approximately 1/3 of the delta torque). Disadvantages: * 6 motor cables are necessary * Switching surges occur (in the current and torque transients) * The startup cannot be adapted to the system environment * Installation is relatively complicated and time-consuming * More space is needed in the cubicle I IAd M Starting current for d MAd Mmotor ford Mload Starting current for */d-start IA*= 1/3 IA d Mmotor for* =1/3 MAd MA* n n nsyn *nrated n n nsyn *nrated Fig. 8-3: Current and torque curves for star-delta starting SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 8-7 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit Frequency converter A frequency converter converts the AC voltage from the grid to direct voltage, which can then be converted to any voltage and frequency. The illustration below shows how a frequency converter works: U 0V t Fig. 8-4: Method of operation of a frequency converter Disadvantages: * Relatively complicated wiring needed in order to meet radio interference suppression requirements; filters are often essential. * Line capacitances limit the lengths of motor feeder cables; it may be necessary to use chokes, sinus filters, or even dV/dt filters. * Expensive * System startup is complex and time-consuming on account of the multiplicity of operating parameters. * It can be necessary to use shielded motor feeder cables. Advantages: * Motor speed is variable; speed can be accurately pegged at constant levels. The U/f ratio remains virtually constant. It is therefore possible to achieve high torques at relatively low currents. SIRIUS System Manual 8-8 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit Soft starter With a soft starter, motor voltage is increased from a selectable starting voltage to the rated voltage by phase firing within a defined starting time. Motor current is proportional to the motor voltage, so the starting current is reduced by the factor of the defined starting voltage. The illustration below shows how the 3RW3 soft starter works: UL1- L3 L1 UL1- L3 M 3~ L2 L3 G1 Fig. 8-5: Phase firing of the supply voltage by semiconductor elements in the 3RW3 soft starter Example: Starting voltage 50 % of Ue => starting current equals 50 % of the motor starting current for direct-on-line starting. A soft starter also reduces motor torque. This is the reason why a softstarted motor does not jerk into action. The relationship is as follows: The motor torque is proportional to the square of the motor voltage. Example: Starting voltage 50 % of Ue => starting torque 25 % of the starting torque for direct-on-line starting. Advantages: * Less space needed in the cubicle * No protective circuits (e.g. filters) necessary to comply with the radio interference suppression specifications (class A; in 24 V UC control voltage version also class B) * Lower installation costs * Straightforward system startup * Only 3 motor feeder cables, half as many as are needed for a star-delta starter * Adjustment options permit adaptation to the system Disadvantages: * Long-term speed settings not possible * Lower torque at reduced voltage SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 8-9 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit I M 100% Ugrid Istarting Istarting 0.7 x Istarting 0.5 x 100% Ugrid Mstarting 70% Ugrid 70% Ugrid 50% Ugrid Mstarting 0.49 x 50% Ugrid Mstarting 0.25 x nsyn n nsyn n Fig. 8-6: Current and torque curves for a soft starter 8.2.2 General device description The SIRIUS modular system offers a variety of alternatives for load feeders. In addition to the star-delta starters (see Chapter 5, "3RA fuseless load feeders"), the SIRIUS 3RW3 soft starters are also available. The 3RW3 soft starters can be combined with the following SIRIUS devices: * 3RT contactors * 3RV circuit breakers * 3RU thermal overload relays * 3RB10 electronic overload relays They are all mounted and connected up in the same way. Please note the relevant guidelines in Section 8.3.2. Functions of the load feeder Normal switching duty Normal switching duty of a circuit can, according to the definitions of isolation and normal switching data in DIN VDE 0100 (see Section 8.1), be implemented with a contactor or a soft starter alone. SIRIUS System Manual 8-10 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit Isolation According to DIN VDE 0100, isolation from the supplying network cannot be provided by a semiconductor element (i.e. soft starter, frequency converter, contactor, or similar). To implement isolation from the supplying network, a 3RV circuit breaker (or another isolating device that fulfills the requirements of DIN VDE 0100) must be used in addition to the contactor or soft starter. A contactor alone in combination with the soft starter is not enough. Both isolation and normal switching duty can be implemented quickly and easily with the 3RW3 soft starter in combination with the modules from the SIRIUS modular system. Variants The electronic soft starters are available in two variants: Standard 3RW30 variant The standard 3RW30 variant is used for single-speed motors. This variant is available in all four frame sizes. The starting voltage Us, starting time tRon, and coasting-down time tRoff can be set independently of each other on the device. The device is switched on by means of a cycling contact IN. 3RW31 special variant The 3RW31 special variant cycles pole-changing motors (Dahlander winding). The following can be set independently of each other: * Starting voltage Us * Starting time of initial speed tR1 * Starting time of second speed tR2 The device does not have a coasting-down function. The set starting voltage applies to both ramp times tR1 and tR2. The ramp time is selected by means of two inputs, IN1 and IN2, that switch the soft starter on. The devices of the 3RW31 series are only available in frame size S0. Settings The devices can be set as follows: 3RW30 By means of 3 potentiometers for setting: * Starting time in the range from 0 to 20 seconds * Starting voltage in the range from approx. 30 to 100 % of the rated voltage of the motor * Coasting-down time in the range from 0 to 20 seconds 3RW31 By means of 3 potentiometers for setting: * Starting time 1 in the range from 0 to 20 seconds * Starting voltage in the range from approx. 30 to 100 % of the rated voltage of the motor * Starting time 2 in the range from 0 to 20 seconds A special software program ensures that progressive ramp times are set. Short times of up to 5 seconds can thus be set very precisely. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 8-11 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit Auxiliary contacts 3RW30 In the case of frame sizes S0 to S3, the following auxiliary contacts are integrated: * "ON": When triggered, the latching signal is used for locking by means of a simple on/off pushbutton (contact designation 13/14). * "BYPASSED": With the end-of-startup signal, control valves can be addressed after soft starting of a pump, for example, in order to enable pumping (contact designation 23/24). The devices of frame size S00 do not have any auxiliary switches. 3RW31 The 3RW31 does not have any auxiliary contacts. Soft starting function Torque-reduced start for three-phase asynchronous motors: Triggering is two-phase, which means that the current is kept low throughout the run-up phase. Current peaks such as those that occur in a star-delta start at the changeover from star to delta are prevented by continuous voltage management. Transient current peaks (inrush peaks) are automatically avoided in each switch-on procedure by a special control function of the power semiconductors. Soft coasting-down function The integrated soft coasting-down function prevents the drive coming to an abrupt halt when the motor is switched off. 3RW30 time ramps The following graphics show the time ramp of the 3RW30 and the timing diagram of the auxiliary contacts: U UN ON 13/14 Us BYPASSED 23/24 tR on tR off t tR on 3RW30: Time ramp tR off Timing diagram of the auxiliary contacts Fig. 8-7: Time ramp/timing diagram, 3RW30 The graphic below shows the time ramp of the 3RW3: U UN Us tR1 tR2 t Fig. 8-8: Time ramp, 3RW31 SIRIUS System Manual 8-12 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit Accessories A fan can be snapped into the soft starter housing of frame sizes S0 to S3 from below. This brings the following benefits: * Improved range of options for the installation position * Increase in the switching frequency (see Section 8.3.2, "Installation guidelines") In the case of frame sizes S0 and S2, extended terminal covers can be mounted on the box covers in order to cover the cable ends and keep them safe from fingers. These are identical to the extended terminal covers of the SIRIUS 3RT contactors of the same frame sizes. In the case of frame size S3, terminal covers are available for lug connection or bar connection. These, too, are identical to the accessory parts of the corresponding SIRIUS contactor size. See Section 8.4 for details of other accessories. Mounting The devices are attached to the 3RV circuit breakers by means of a link module and are thus connected mechanically and electrically. This link module is identical to the one that is used for the corresponding contactor/circuitbreaker combinations. This installation variant offers all the advantages of a fuseless load feeder. Link modules The following link modules are used to combine 3RW3 soft starters and 3RV1 circuit breakers: Frame size Link module S00 3RA1911-1A S0 3RA1921-1A S2 3RA1931-1A S3 3RA1941-1A Table 8-3: Link modules Connection The 3RW3 electronic soft starters are available with screw-type terminals. Plus-minus POZIDRIV 2 screws are used. The SIGUT terminal system is used (captive screws, contacts open on delivery, etc.). SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 8-13 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit 8.2.3 Comparison of the 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit (soft starter) with the SIKOSTART 3RW22 and SIKOSTART 3RW34 motor control units Soft starters are available for different applications. The following graphic provides an overview of the different soft starters: Functions High End SIKOSTART 3RW22 Low End 12/16/25A SIKOSTART 3RW34 2 phase in-line only S0 S3 S2 + 575V+ auxiliary contacts SIRIUS 3RW30/31 soft starters S00 6/9A 5.5 11 22 45 710 1000 Power in kW at 400 V Fig. 8-9: Overview of soft starters SIKOSTART 3RW22 The SIKOSTART 3RW22 is suitable for drives that place high demands on the functionality of the starter. It covers a power range from 3 kW to 710 kW (at 400 V). SIKOSTART 3RW22 offers the following: * Soft starting and soft coasting down * Break-loose torque * DC brakes * Energy-saving operation * Temperature monitoring * Operation using a PC and an RS232 interface * Selection and configuration program * Current and voltage limitation * Pump functionalities (e.g. pump coasting down) * Startup detection * Three parameter sets * Different coasting-down types * Electronic device overload protection The SIKOSTART 3RW22 application manual presents the various application areas and circuit variants (order no. E20001-P285-A484-V3). SIRIUS System Manual 8-14 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit SIKOSTART 3RW34 The SIKOSTART 3RW34 is suitable for drives with low demands in terms of the functionality of the soft starter. The SIKOSTART 3RW34 is very similar to the SIRIUS 3RW3 soft starter in terms of its operation and configuration. It covers a power range of up to 1000 kW (400 V). The functions of the 3RW34 are as follows: * Soft starting and soft coasting down * 2 circuit variants: standard and root 3 circuits * Three-phase control * Optional AS-Interface bus control You will find the technical specifications and a detailed description of the 3RW34 in the document describing SIKOSTART 3RW22/3RW34 solid-state motor controllers (order no.: E20001-A200-P302). SIRIUS 3RW3 soft starter The SIRIUS 3RW3 soft starter covers the power range from 1.5 kW to 45 kW. Power semiconductors always exhibit power loss. This manifests itself in heat generation. In order to keep this power loss as low as possible, the semiconductors are bypassed by relay contacts after the motor has started up. The device's heat sink and its dimensions can thus be smaller than they otherwise would be. In addition, it is necessary to use a bypass contactor, which bypasses the line semiconductors in the conventional configuration. For further processing in the system controller, the device offers two relay outputs: * "ON" contact (terminals 13/14), which can be used, for example, to control the soft starter by button (locking) * "BYPASSED" contact (terminals 23/24), which signals the completion of startup (e.g. in order to switch a solenoid valve after a soft-started pump has started up) For drives in this power range, good motor startups can be achieved with a two-phase controller. In the case of a two-phase controller, semiconductor elements are only used in two phases in order to reduce motor current and motor voltage in all three phases. The third phase is bypassed internally in the soft starter. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 8-15 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit 8.2.4 Comparison of the 3RW3 semiconductor motor control unit (soft starter) with the 3RA star-delta combination The comparison of soft starter and star-delta combinations shows that the 3RW3 has the following advantages (example here 22 kW): 3RW3 soft starter 3RA star-delta starter Width: 55 mm Width: 165 mm Wiring: 3 motor supply leads Wiring: 6 motor supply leads Selectable startup parameters None Minimum current values at startup Fixed current ratios (I* = 1/3Id) No dangerous switchover current peaks Switchover current peaks when switching from star to delta Special variant for Dahlander motors -- Soft coasting-down function -- Table 8-4: Comparison of 3RW3/3RA 8.2.5 Notes on configuration In order for a motor to reach its rated speed, motor torque at any given time during startup must be greater than the torque needed by the load, since otherwise a stable operating point would be reached before the motor achieved its rated speed (the motor would "drag to a stop"). The difference between motor torque and load torque is the accelerating torque that is responsible for the increase in the speed of the drive. The lower the accelerating torque, the longer the motor needs to run up to its operating speed. Starting torque Reducing the terminal voltage of a three-phase asynchronous motor reduces the motor's starting current and the starting torque. Current is directly proportional to voltage, whereas voltage is proportional to the square root of motor torque. Example: Motor = 55 kW, rated current = 100 A, starting current = 7 x rating current, motor torque = 355 Nm, starting torque = 2.4 x rated torque Settings for the soft starter: starting voltage 50 % of rated voltage for motor The reductions are thus as follows: * The starting current is reduced to half the starting current for a direct start: 50 % of (7 x 100 A) = 350 A * Starting torque is reduced to 0.5 x 0.5 = 25 % of the starting torque for a direct start: 25 % of 2.4 x 355 Nm = 213 Nm SIRIUS System Manual 8-16 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit Note On account of the fact that the starting voltage is proportional to the square root of the motor torque, it is important to ensure that the starting voltage is not too low. This applies particularly for a pronounced saddle torque, the lowest motor torque that occurs during run-up to rated speed. Mmotor M Mstarting Mmotor with SIRIUS soft starter Mload MB MB = accelerating torque of the motor Mstarting with SIRIUS Soft starter n U Ue US tR t Fig. 8-10: Load and motor torques and motor terminal voltage for operation with soft starter Criteria for selection Note In the case of the SIRIUS 3RW30/31 soft starters, the corresponding soft starter must be selected on the basis of the rated current for the motor (the rated current of the soft starter must be the rated current for the motor). The 3 potentiometers on the starter are for setting the starting voltage, the starting time, and the coasting-down time. The soft starter is correctly set when the motor starts smoothly and runs up rapidly to its rated speed. Ramp times of up to 20 seconds can be set. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 8-17 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit 8.3 Application and use 8.3.1 Areas of application and criteria for selection The SIRIUS 3RW3 soft starters offer an alternative to star-delta starters (see Section 8.2.4 for a comparison and the advantages). The most important advantages are soft starting and soft coasting-down, interruption-free switching without current spikes that could interfere with the supply system, and compact dimensions. Many drives that needed frequency converters in the past can be changed to soft-start operation with the 3RW3, if the applications do not call for variations in speed. Applications Typical applications include, for example: Conveyor belts, conveyor systems: * Smooth starting * Smooth slowing * Use of better-value conveyor material Rotary pumps, piston-type pumps: * Avoidance of pressure surges * Extended service life of the piping system Agitators, mixers: * Reduced starting current Fans: * Less strain on gearing and drive belts Cooling time Note The cooling time must be taken into consideration in the starting frequency. 8.3.2 Installation guidelines On account of the heat generated, certain installation guidelines must be adhered to when combining 3RW30/31 soft starters with other SIRIUS switching devices. Stand-alone installation Stand-alone installation is when minimum vertical and lateral clearances between the mounted devices are not violated. This applies both to individual devices and complete load feeders. The following minimum clearances must be adhered to in stand-alone installation (these minimum clearances depend on the frame size): SIRIUS System Manual 8-18 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit Frame size Minimum clearance on both sides in mm S00 15 S0 20 S2 30 S3 40 3RW30 Table 8-5: Stand-alone installation, minimum clearances at the side, 3RW3 Frame size Vertical Vertical clearance a clearance b S00 50 50 S0 60 40 S2 50 30 S3 60 30 a 3RW30 b Table 8-6: Stand-alone installation, minimum clearances at the side, 3RW3 Line lengths for the drive circuit The control inputs for starting and stopping are not rated for longer distances. This means: * In the case of a drive circuit that goes beyond the control cubicle, coupling relays must be used. * The control cables in the cubicle should not be laid together with main circuit cables. When electronic output modules are used in the drive circuit (e.g. Triac outputs at 230 V AC), RC elements (e.g. 3TX7462-3T or similar with C > 100 nF) may be required at the control inputs under certain circumstances. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 8-19 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit Correction factors If the minimum clearances are violated, in a combination of a soft starter with a circuit breaker, fixed correction factors must be used to determine the rated current for the device and the switching frequency. The following variables can be modified by means of correction factors: * Rated current for the device * Switching frequency * Current setting of the circuit breaker * Current setting of the overload relay Correction factor for the rated current of the device A factor is specified by which the device rated current of the soft starter is reduced. Correction factor for switching frequency The switching frequency is the maximum permissible number of starts per hour. This value must be adjusted by the specified correction factor. The number of permissible starts per hour is given in Section 8.7.1, "Control electronics/power electronics", in Section 8.7, "Technical specifications". The specified correction factors refer to the following operating conditions: S4 operation, 40 C ambient temperature, 30 % duty cycle Example: Correction factor for the rated current of the device = 0.9 Selected device = 3RW3014-1CB14 (under normal conditions at 40 C a device rated current of 6 A) This results in an actual device rated current of: 0.9 x 6 A = 5.4 A Example: Correction factor for the switching frequency = 1.5 Selected device = 3RW3014-1CB14 (has a maximum switching frequency of 30 starts per hour under the conditions specified above) This results in a corrected switching frequency of: 1.5 x 30 = 45 starts per hour To increase the switching frequency, it is also possible to use a larger device. Correction factor for the current setting of the circuit breaker In combinations of a 3RW30 soft starter and a 3RV1 circuit breaker, the set value of the circuit breaker may have to be corrected appropriately. The correction factor specifies the extent of the change. Example: Correction for the current setting of the circuit breaker: 1.1 Selected device = 3RW3014-1CB14 The connected motor has a motor rated current of 5 A. The set value of the circuit breaker must be changed to: 1.1 x 5 A = 5.5 A SIRIUS System Manual 8-20 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit Correction factor for the current setting of the overload relay In combinations of a 3RW30 soft starter + 3RU1 thermal overload relay or 3RW30 software starter + 3RB10 electronic overload relay, the set value of the overload relay must be corrected appropriately. The correction factor specifies the extent of the change. Example: Correction factor for the current setting of the overload relay 0.9 Selected device = 3RW3014-1CB14 The connected motor has a motor rated current of 5 A. The set value of the overload relay now has to be changed to: 0.9 x 5 A = 4.5 A 8.3.3 Overview tables: correction factors The tables below give the correction factors for the circuit-breaker current setting, the device rated current, and the switching frequency. The values indicate the difference between use with a fan (accessory) and use without a fan. All correction fans apply throughout the entire temperature range (i.e. for 40 C, 50 C, and 60 C). The various tables specify the values in turn for the following: 3RW30/31 soft starters in a stand-alone installation 3RW30/31 soft starter + 3RV1 circuit breaker 3RW30/31 soft starter + 3RT1 contactor + 3RU1 thermal overload relay 3RW30/31 soft starter + 3RT1 contactor + 3RB10 electronic overload relay 8.3.3.1 3RW30/31 soft starters in a stand-alone installation Minimum clearance In the case of frame size S00 (3RW301..), the following applies to standalone, vertical installation without directly attached switching devices: In order to maintain the required space above the arc chute, clearance of at least 50 mm must be maintained to grounded parts above and below. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 8-21 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit 3RW30/31 correction factors 3RW30/31 soft starters not combined with any other switching devices: Without fan With fan Stand-alone installation Stand-alone Installed side by side installation or side by side Correction factor Correction factor Correction factor Order number Frame size Device Rated cur- Switching Rated cur- Switching Rated cur- Switching rated cur- rent for frequency rent for frequency rent for frequency rent in A at the device the device the device 40 C 3RW3014-1CB.. S00 6 1 1 1 0.75 - 1) 3RW3016-1CB.. S00 9 1 1 1 0.75 - 1) - 1) 3RW3.24-1AB.. S0 12.5 1 1 1 0.65 1 1.8 3RW3.25-1AB.. S0 16 1 1 1 0.65 1 1.8 3RW3.26-1AB.. S0 25 1 1 1 0.65 1 1.8 3RW3034-1AB.. S2 32 1 1 1 0.65 1 1.8 3RW3035-1AB.. S2 38 1 1 1 0.65 1 1.8 3RW3036-1AB.. S2 45 1 1 1 0.65 1 1.8 3RW3044-1AB.. S3 63 1 1 1 0.8 1 1.6 3RW3045-1AB.. S3 75 1 1 1 0.75 1 1.6 3RW3046-1AB.. S3 100 1 1 1 0.7 1 1.6 - 1) Table 8-7: Correction factors, 3RW30/31 1) The SIRIUS 3RW301.. soft starters cannot be operated with a fan. 8.3.3.2 3RW30/31 soft starters in combination with the 3RV1 circuit breaker 3RV Link module 3RW 3k M Fig. 8-11: 3RW3 soft starter + 3RV1 circuit breaker Dimensioning of the circuit breaker The frame size selected for the circuit breaker should be large enough so that the current value calculated can just be set. In the event of current values that are lower than can be set for the specified circuit breaker, the next smaller circuit breaker must be used. SIRIUS System Manual 8-22 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 Order number 63 75 100 32 38 45 3RV1041-4JA10 3RV1041-4KA10 3RV1041-4MA10 3RV1031-4EA10 3RV1031-4FA10 3RV1031-4GA10 (45 - 63) A (57 - 75) A (80 - 100) A (22 - 32) A (28 - 40) A (36 - 45) A (9 - 12.) A (11 - 16) A (20 - 25) A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.85 0.8 0.75 0.65 0.85 0.85 0.5 0.5 0.75 1) = SIRIUS 3RW301 .. soft starters cannot be used with a fan S3 S3 S3 Frame size 3RW3044-1AB.. 3RW3045-1AB.. 3RW3046-1AB.. Device rated current in A at an ambient temperature of 40 C S2 S2 S2 Order number Circuit breaker 3RW3034-1AB.. 3RW3035-1AB.. 3RW3036-1AB.. Adjustment range Circuit breaker 3RV1021-1KA10 3RV1021-4AA10 3RV1021-4DA10 Correction factor Rated current for the device 12. 16 25 Correction factor Switching frequency S0 S0 S0 Correction factor Current setting of the circuit breaker 3RW3.24-1AB.. 3RW3.25-1AB.. 3RW3.26-1AB.. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Correction factor Rated current for the device 0.95 0.9 0.85 0.9 0.95 0.9 1 1 0. 0.6 0.5 0.55 0.45 0.35 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Correction factor Switching frequency 1 1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. Correction factor Current setting of the circuit breaker 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -- 1) -- 1) Correction factor Rated current for the device 0.9 0.9 1.6 1.6 1.6 2.2 1.8 1.8 1. 1. 1. -- 1) --1) Correction factor Switching frequency 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -- 1) -- 1) Correction factor Current setting of the circuit breaker (4.5 - 6.3) A (7 - 10) A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -- -- 1) 1) Correction factor Rated current for the device 3RV1011-1GA10 3RV1011-1JA10 1.3 1.3 1.2 1.9 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 -- 1) -- 1) Correction factor Switching frequency 6 9 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 -- -- 1) 1) Correction factor Current setting of the circuit breaker S00 S00 With fan With fan Stand-alone installation Installed side by side Correction factors: 3RV1 + 3RW30/31 3RW3014-1CB.. 3RW3016-1CB.. Without fan Without fan Stand-alone installation Installed side by side 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit Combination of a 3RV1 circuit breaker + 3RW30/31 soft starter: Table 8-8: Correction factors: 3RV1 circuit breaker + 3RW3 soft starter SIRIUS System Manual 8-23 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit 8.3.3.3 Combining the 3RT contactor with the 3RU1 thermal overload relay and 3RW3 soft starter Frame size of the overload relay The frame size selected for the overload relay should be large enough so that it is just possible to set the current value calculated. In the event of current values that are lower than can be set for the specified overload relay, the next smaller overload relay must be used. Important It is not permissible to mount the thermal overload relay under the contactor/connecting lead/soft starter combination. The overload relay must be integrated in the feeder before the contractor/ connecting lead/soft starter combination. The specified correction factors apply only to this permissible mounting sequence. Rail 1: Combination of 3RT1 contactor and 3RU1 thermal overload relay 3RT 3RT 3RU1 Rail 2: 3RW3 soft starter Connecting lead 3RW 3RW 3RU1 Fig. 8-12: 3RT+3RU1+3RW3 combination Minimum clearance For thermal reasons, a minimum clearance is necessary between the contactor/overload relay combination and the soft starter, as is a minimum length of the connecting leads. The following table specifies the minimum clearances and minimum lengths of the connecting leads for the various frame sizes: Frame size Minimum clearance between Minimum length of the rail 1 and rail 2 connecting lead (center to center) in mm in mm S00 160 100 S0 200 150 S2 240 200 S3 300 250 Table 8-9: 3RW3 installation guidelines, minimum clearances/lengths SIRIUS System Manual 8-24 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 S0 S0 S0 S2 S2 S2 S3 S3 S3 Order number 3RW3.24-1AB.. 3RW3.25-1AB.. 3RW3.26-1AB.. 3RW3034-1AB.. 3RW3035-1AB.. 3RW3036-1AB.. 3RW3044-1AB.. 3RW3045-1AB.. 3RW3046-1AB.. Setting range of the overload relay Order number Therm. overload relay Contactor order number Device rated current in A at an ambient temperature of 40 C 63 75 100 (22-32)A (28-40)A (36-45)A 3RT1044-1A.. 3RU1146-4JBO (45-63) A 3RT1045-1A.. 3RU1146-4KBO (57-75) A 3RT1046-1A.. 3RU1146-1MBO (80-100) A 3RT1034-1A.. 3RU1136-4EBO 3RT1035-1A.. 3RU1136-4FBO 3RT1036-1A.. 3RU1136-4HBO Correction factor Rated current for the device 32 38 45 0.95 0.95 0.9 0.95 0.95 0.9 Correction factor for switching frequency 0.95 0.95 0.9 0.9 0.85 0.8 0.7 0.9 0.95 0.9 0.9 0.8 Correction factor Set value for th. overload relay 12.5 3RT1024-1A.. 3RU1126-1KBO (9-12.5)A 16 3RT1025-1A.. 3RU1126-4ABO (11-16)A 25 3RT1026-1A.. 3RU1126-4DBO (22-25)A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Correction factor Rated current for the device 0.9 0.9 0.8 0.9 0.9 0.8 0.9 0.9 0.8 0.65 0.5 0.55 0.45 0.35 0.45 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.75 0.8 Correction factor for switching frequency 0.9 0.8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Correction factor Set value for th. overload relay 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -- -- 1) 1) Correction factor Rated current for the device 1 0.95 1.6 1.6 1.6 2.2 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 -- 1) --1) Correction factor for switching frequency 0.95 0.9 1) 1) 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.95 0.95 0.95 -- -- Correction factor Current setting of the circuit breaker 3RU1116-1GBO (4.5 - 6.3) 3RU1116-1JBO A (7 - 10) A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -- -- 1) 1) Correction factor Rated current for the device 3RT1015-1A.. 3RT1016-1A.. 1) 1) 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.9 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 -- -- Correction factor for switching frequency 6 9 1) 1) 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.95 0.95 0.95 -- -- Correction factor Set value for th. overload relay 1) = SIRIUS 3RW301 .. soft starters cannot be used with a fan. Frame size S00 S00 Correction factors: 3RT + 3RU1 + 3RW30/31 3RW3014-1CB.. 3RW3016-1CB.. Without fan Without fan With fan With fan Stand-alone installation Installed side by side Stand-alone installation Installed side by side 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit Combination of the 3RT1 contactor with an attached 3RU1 thermal overload relay/connecting lead/3RW30/31 soft starter: Table 8-10: Correction factors, 3RT contactor + 3RU therm. overload relay + 3RW soft starter SIRIUS System Manual 8-25 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit 8.3.3.4 Combining the 3RT contactor with the 3RB10 electronic overload relay and 3RW3 soft starter The contactor, electronic overload relay, and soft starter can be connected in two ways: * Combining a 3RT1 contactor with an attached 3RB10 electronic overload relay, a connecting lead, and a 3RW30/31 soft starter * Combining a 3RT1 contactor with a connecting lead and a combination of a 3RW30/01 soft starter with an attached 3RB10 electronic overload relay 3RT + 3RB10 + connecting lead + 3RW3 Rail 1: Combination of a 3RT1 contactor and a 3RB10 electronic overload relay 3RT 3RB10 Connecting lead Rail 2: 3RW30/31 soft starter 3RW Fig. 8-13: 3RT+3RB10+3RW3 combination Minimum clearance For thermal reasons, a minimum clearance is necessary between the contactor/overload relay combination and the soft starter, as is a minimum length of the connecting leads. The following table specifies the minimum clearances and minimum lengths of the connecting leads for the various frame sizes: Frame size Minimum clearance between Minimum length of the rail 1 and rail 2 connecting lead (center to center) in mm in mm S00 160 100 S0 200 150 S2 240 200 S3 300 250 Table 8-11: 3RT + 3RB10 + 3RW3 installation guidelines, minimum clearances/minimum lengths SIRIUS System Manual 8-26 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit 3RT + connecting lead + 3RB10 + 3RW3 Rail 1: 3RT1 contactor Rail 2: Combination of 3RW30/31 soft starter and 3RB10 electronic overload relay 3RT 3RW 3RB10 Fig. 8-14: 3RT+3RW3+3RB10 combination Minimum clearances Frame size Minimum clearance between Minimum length of the rail 1 and rail 2 connecting lead (center to center) in mm in mm S00 100 100 S0 140 150 S2 180 200 S3 240 250 Table 8-12: 3RT1 + 3RW30/31 + 3RB10 installation guidelines, minimum clearances/minimum lengths SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 8-27 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit 1 1 1 1.5 1.5 1.5 1 1 1 1.9 1.7 1.7 1 1 1 -- -- 1.7 1.7 1.7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -- 1 1 1 1.6 1.6 1.6 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.6 0.5 0.55 1 1 1 1 1 1 S00 S00 S0 S0 S0 S2 S2 S2 S3 S3 S3 Order number 3RW3.24-1AB.. 3RW3.25-1AB.. 3RW3.26-1AB.. 3RW3034-1AB.. 3RW3035-1AB.. 3RW3036-1AB.. 3RW3044-1AB.. 3RW3045-1AB.. 3RW3046-1AB.. 1) = SIRIUS 3RW301 .. soft starters cannot be used with a fan. 0.85 0.8 0.75 1 1 1 3RT1044-1A.. 3RB1046-1EBO (25-100)A 3RT1045-1A.. 3RB1046-1EBO (25-100)A 3RT1046-1A.. 3RB1046-1EBO (25-100)A 1 1 1 2.2 1.8 1.8 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.4 0.35 0.35 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.65 0.85 0.85 1 1 1 (15-50)A (15-50)A (15-50)A -- 1 1 1 1.8 1.8 1.8 -- -- 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.5 0.5 0.45 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.85 0.85 0.75 1 1 ? ? 1 1 1 1 0.95 0.95 Frame size 3RW3014-1CB.. 3RW3016-1CB.. Device rated current in A at an ambient temperature of 40 C 63 75 100 Contactor order number 3RT1034-1A.. 3RB1036-1UBO 3RT1035-1A.. 3RB1036-1UBO 3RT1036-1A.. 3RB1036-1UBO Order number of electronic overload relay 32 38 45 Setting range of the overload relay 1 1 1 1) 1) Correction factor Rated current for the device 1 1 Correction factor for switching frequency (3-12)A (3-12)A Correction factor Set value of the el. overload relay 3RB1016-1SBO 3RB1016-1SBO Correction factor Rated current for the device 3RT1015-1A.. 3RT1016-1A.. Correction factor for switching frequency 6 9 Correction factor Set value of the el. overload relay (6-25)A (6-25)A (6-25)A -- 1) Correction factor Rated current for the device 12.5 3RT1024-1A.. 3RB1026-1QBO 16 3RT1025-1A.. 3RB1026-1QBO 25 3RT1026-1A.. 3RB1026-1QBO 1) -- 1) -- 1) 1) 1) -- Correction factor for switching frequency -- 1) Correction factor Current setting of the circuit breaker 1) Correction factor Rated current for the device 1) Correction factor for switching frequency -- Correction factor Set value of the el. overload relay 1) Combining a 3RT1 contactor with an attached 3RB10 electronic overload relay, a connecting lead, and a 3RW30/31 soft starter Without fan Without fan With fan With fan Stand-alone installation Installed side by side Stand-alone installation Installed side by side Correction factors: 3RT + 3RB10 + 3RW3 Table 8-13: Correction factors, 3RT contactor + 3RB10 electronic overload relay + 3RW soft starter SIRIUS System Manual 8-28 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit 8.3.4 Circuit example Circuit example with 3RW30 frame size S0, S2, S3 (variant with 110-230 V UC): L N L1 L2 L3 A2 A1 110...230V UC End of startup IN1 T1 T2 T3 13 14/23 24 On Off L 13 G1 ON 14 STOP 1 IN A1 A2 N Fig. 8-15: Circuit example, 3RW3 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 8-29 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit 8.3.5 Commissioning Every SIRIUS 3RW soft starter comes with the following warning, which it is imperative to heed: Caution This device has been tested carefully at the factory and found to be in working order. During transportation, however, it may have been subject to stresses over which we have no control. The bypass relays in the main circuit may be in an undefined state. In the interests of complete safety, the following procedure should be used at commissioning or after the replacement of the SIRIUS soft starter: First, apply the supply voltage to A1/A2 in order to put the impulse series relays in a defined switching state. Then, switch on the main circuit (L1/L2/L3). If you do not do this, the motor can be switched on inadvertently and cause damage to people or parts of the system. Settings 3RW31 3RW30 t R on t R1 uS uS t R off t R2 Fig. 8-16: Settings, 3RW3 Note At commissioning, the settings of the potentiometers for the ramp time and the starting voltage should remain unchanged. These set values must be obtained in a trial. SIRIUS System Manual 8-30 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit Changing settings The potentiometer settings are scanned before each switching operation ("ON" or "OFF"). If, for example, the setting of the potentiometer for starting time is changed while the motor is running up, the change does not come into effect until the next start. Starting voltage The starting voltage should be set to a value at which the motor starts rapidly. Ramp time The ramp time should be set such that the motor can run up within the time defined in this way. If the star time for star-delta starting is known, the ramp time can be set to this value. Coasting-down time The potentiometer for the coasting-down time is for setting the duration of the voltage ramp for coasting down. This parameter can be used to make the motor run-down longer than it would be if the motor were merely to coast to a stop. The motor coasts to a stop on its own if this potentiometer is set to a value of 0. Switching frequency To prevent thermal overloading of the devices, the maximum permissible switching frequency must be adhered to and the correction factor tables must be used (see the installation guidelines in Section 8.3.2). Starting time In order to obtain optimum operating conditions for the 3RW3 soft starter, the setting for the starting time should be approx. 1 second longer than the resultant motor run-up time, in order to ensure that the internal jumpering contacts do not have to carry the starting current. This protects the internal jumpering contacts and increases their service life. Longer starting times increase the thermal load on the devices and the motor unnecessarily and lead to a reduction in the permissible switching frequency. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 8-31 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit Position of the terminals 3RW30 The following graphic illustrates the position of the terminals and the potentiometers for adjustment. Frame size S00 Frame size S0 to S3 3RW301. 3RW302./303./304. 1 L1 1 L1 3 L2 5 L3 IN1 3 L2 5 L3 A1 A2 A1 1 3RW 5 5 10 10 20s 0 min min 20s 0 5 5 max 10 max 0 20s 10 0 2 T1 4 T2 13 14/23 24 20s 6 T3 2 T1 A2 4 T2 6 T3 Fig. 8-17: Position of the terminals and the potentiometers for adjustment 3RW31 The 3RW31 soft starters are available in frame size S0. Outwardly, they differ from the 3RW30 in the labeling of the contacts and the terminals: * There is no BYPASSED auxiliary contact. The free contact is used to enable the necessary drive contact IN2 to switch between the ramp times tR1 and tR2. * The 3RW31 does not have a coasting-down ramp. The potentiometer with which the coasting-down time is adjusted on the 3RW30 is used here to set the second ramp time tR2. * There is no ON auxiliary contact. Line length of the control cable To eliminate problems with the cable coupler capacitances, the control cable should be shorter than 15 m. (This is based on devices with a rated control supply voltage of 24 V UC to 50 m.) To eliminate problems in control cables that are fed out of the cubicle, coupling links must be used. 8.3.6 Event messages and diagnostics Event messages READY LED Continuous Flashing Ready for operation while starting up or coasting down BYPASSED LED Continuous Bypassed Table 8-14: 3RW30/31 event messages SIRIUS System Manual 8-32 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit Diagnostics Malfunction READY LED off Possible cause Remedy * Supply voltage too low * Check and adapt the supply voltage at A1, A2 * No supply voltage * Check fuses/line contactor No reaction to control * Phase loss input IN (READY LED on) * Wrong cable connected to IN * No load Start the motor directly (BYPASSED LED on) * Check fuses/line contactor * Check voltages at L1 to L3 * Connect to IN as shown in the graphic of the terminals * Connect the motor * The line voltage is switched off and on in continuous operation * Always switch the line contactor off and without operation of the conon in conjunction with control input IN trol input IN Table 8-15: 3RW30/31 diagnostics 8.3.7 Timing diagram Starting and coastingdown behavior The following timing diagram shows the switchover times when the device is switched on/off: L1-L2-L3 A1-A2 IN Bypass T1-T2-T3 UN US Switchover delay approx. 30 ms On-delay approx. 80 ms ON command OFF command Switchover Switchover delay delay approx. approx. 30 30 ms ms ON command Fig. 8-18: Starting and coasting-down behavior SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 8-33 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit Supply interruption in bypassed state If the load voltage is switched off in the bypassed state while the auxiliary supply continues to be applied at terminals A1/A2, the soft starter performs a direct start of the motor after the load voltage is switched on again. To prevent this, the "on" command must be removed in the event of the loss of the main voltage. The following graphic illustrates what happens when the supply is interrupted in the bypassed state: L1-L2-L3 A1-A2 IN Bypass T1-T2-T3 UN Direct start US Control supply voltage on Startup completed Bypass closes Main voltage on Start command Failure of the main voltage To avoid a direct start after the return of the main voltage, the ON command must be removed in the event of the failure failure of the main voltage (Toff>= xx ms) Main voltage returns Fig. 8-19: Supply interruption in the bypassed state SIRIUS System Manual 8-34 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit 8.4 Accessories The following accessories are available for the 3RW3 soft starters: Description Order number Fan for 3RW3.2.. 3RW3926-8A Fan for 3RW303.. and 3RW304.. 3RW3936-8A Terminal covers for box covers for 3RW303.. 3RT1936-4EA2 Terminal covers for box covers for 3RW304.. 3RT1946-4EA2 Terminal cover for bar connection for 3RW304.. 3RT1946-4EA1 Link modules for combination with 3RV1 circuit breaker 3RA19.1-1A (frame sizes S00 to S3) RC element for control from PLC 3TX7462-3T Table 8-16: Accessories, 3RW30/31 Control of the fan The fan is controlled by the control electronics of the soft starter. It runs at the following times: * When the fan is switched on: approx. 0.5 seconds after the bypass contacts close (end-of-startup signal) * When the fan is switched off: approx. 0.5 hours after the soft starter is switched off Attachment of the fan The fan is snapped into the recess provided on the underside of the soft starter, and the plug-in cable is inserted in the corresponding connector. The direction of installation is indicated on the fan by an arrow. Additional parameter assignment is not necessary. These fan modules mean that the starter can be installed in any position. The only exception to this is when the fan cannot blow against the convection downward from above. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 8-35 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit Attachment of the fan 1 2 Fig. 8-20: Accessories: attachment of the fan Terminal covers To provide additional finger protection, for frame sizes S2 and S3 the terminal covers of the 3RT1 contactors of the same frame sizes can be used. Installation on the soft starter is analogous to that on the contactors. Link modules The same link modules are available for building fuseless feeders (soft starter + 3RV circuit breaker) as are used for the 3RT contactor + 3RV circuit breaker combinations. Refer to the information and assignment tables in Section 8.3.2, "Installation guidelines". RC element If the 3RW30/31 soft starter is to be controlled from a PLC with a Triac or thyristor output, malfunctioning can be avoided with an RC element. If there is leakage current of more than 1 mA, without an RC element the soft starter may interpret the drop in voltage that occurs at the input as an "ON" command. Connection example for an RC element Auxiliary supply PLC control contact RC element A2 A1 IN1 3RW30/31... Fig. 8-21: Connection example with an RC element SIRIUS System Manual 8-36 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit 8.5 Mounting and connection 8.5.1 Mounting Snap-on attachment The 3RW30 soft starters are snapped onto 35 mm rails in acc. with EN 50 022 without a tool. The starter is placed on the upper edge of the rail and pressed downward until it snaps onto the lower edge of the rail. Frame sizes S00 and S0 can be removed just as easily: The starters are pressed downward so that the tension of the attachment springs is loosened, and the starters can be removed. In the case of frame sizes S2 and S3, these attachment springs are released by a lug on the underside of the starter that can be moved using a screwdriver. 8.5.2 Connection Screw-type terminals The 3RW3 electronic soft starters are available with the SIGUT terminal system and plus-minus POZIDRIV 2 screws. Conductor cross-sections The following table shows the permissible conductor cross-sections for the 3RW30 electronic soft starters: 3RW301. L1 L2 L3 A1/A2; NO/NC 3RW302. 3RW312. L1 L2 L3 0.8 to 1.2 Nm 7 to 10.3 lb.in 2 to 2.5 Nm 18 to 22 lb.in 10 2 x (0.5 to 1.5 mm) 2 x (0.75 to 2.5 mm) 2 x (1 to 2.5 mm) 2 x (2.5 to 6 mm) 13 2 x (0.75 to 16 mm) 17 2 x (2.5 to 16 mm) 10 2 x (0.5 to 2.5 mm) 2 x (1 to 2.5 mm) 2 x (2.5 to 6 mm) 13 2 x (0.75 to 16 mm) 1 x (0.75 to 25 mm) 17 2 x (2.5 to 35 mm) 1 x (2.5 to 50 mm) -- -- -- 13 AWG 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (14 to 10) 5 ... 6 mm / PZ2 3RW303. L1 L2 L3 5 ... 6 mm / PZ2 AWG 3 to 4.5 Nm 27 to 40 lb.in 2 x (0.75 to 25 mm) 1 x (0.75 to 35 mm) 2 x (18 to 3) 1 x (18 to 2) 3RW304.. L1 L2 L3 min 22 4 to 6 Nm 35 to 53 lb.in 4 17 AWG 2 x (10 to 50 mm) 1 x (10 to 70 mm) 2 x (10 to 1/0) 1 x (10 to 2/0) Table 8-17: Conductor cross-sections, 3RW30/31 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 8-37 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit 8.5.3 Circuit diagrams There are two ways to connect up the 3RW3 soft starter: * Control by button and locking of the ON button via the "ON" auxiliary contact of the 3RW3 * Control by switch L1 (L+) N (L-) L1 (L+) ON/OFF K1 OFF A2 A1 IN1 1 A1 K1 ON K1 A2 N (L-) Fig. 8-22: Circuit diagrams, 3RW3 3RW30 3RW302. 3RW303./3RW304 N (L-) L1 (L+) F1 OFF 3RT K1 A2 A1 3RV 1 3RU/3RB10 I> 3RW30 3RW30 13 14/23 24 ON M 3~ M 3~ Fig. 8-23: Circuit diagrams, 3RW30 SIRIUS System Manual 8-38 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit 3RW31 N (L-) L1 (L+) N (L-) L1 (L+) ON/OFF Ramp 1 A2 1 A1 K1 ON/OFF Ramp 2 K2 A2 A1 1 2 2 OFF F1 F2 3RW31 F3 ON Ramp 1 K1 ON Ramp 2 K2 K1 3RT K1 K2 3RT 3RU/3RB10 F2 F3 3RU/3RB10 K2 K1 K2 M 3~ . /.P Fig. 8-24: Circuit diagrams, 3RW31 Automatic operation Direct starting of the soft starter is possible as long as the auxiliary supply is applied at terminals A1 and A2. To this end, a jumper is required between the auxiliary supply contact A1 and the control contact IN. The following must be taken into consideration: * An on delay of up to 4 seconds can occur, depending on the frame size. * Soft coasting down is no longer possible after the auxiliary supply is switched off. Control via PLC The 3RW3 soft starter can be controlled by means of a programmable controller (PLC). It is connected up in the same way as for control via switch. Important Always ensure that A1 and A2 are connected up correctly. Although polarity reversal cannot damage the device, it can lead to malfunctioning. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 8-39 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit Control of a motor with an electromechanical brake An electromechanical brake with infeed from the main voltage (L1/L2/L3) should not be connected directly to the output of the soft starter. An electromechanical brake should be controlled by means of a separate contactor (K1 in the circuit diagram below): L1 L2 Ue L3 Q1 I>> I>> I>> L+ L- Us F STOP K1 L1 L2 L3 G1 A2 A1 T1 T2 T3 IN BYPASSED ON 3RW30 ON 13 14 23 24 A1 K1 BR BR2 U V W M 3k K1 A2 Fig. 8-25: Motor control with an electromechanical brake SIRIUS System Manual 8-40 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit 8.6 Dimensional drawings (dimensions in mm) g k i 5 j 5 f a m d e l h b n c mm 3RW301. 3RW302./3RW312. 3RW303. 3RW304. a 97.5 125 160 170 b 45 45 55 70 c 93 119 143 183 d 95 125 141 162 e 66 81 95 108 f 51 63 63 87 g -- 96 115 156 h 7.5 7 8 8 i 76 101 119 132 j -- 63 77 87 k 86 14 18 22.5 l -- 7 7 7 m 90 115 150 160 n 35 35 30 60 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 8-41 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit 8.7 Technical specifications 8.7.1 Control electronics/power electronics Control electronics Type 3RW3. ..-1.B0. 3RW3. ..-1.B1. 24 UC 110 to 230 UC mA Approx. 50 Approx. 25 to 20 Hz 50/60 10 % Rated control supply voltage V Rated control supply current Rated frequency at AC Power electronics Type Voltage operating range Rated frequency Permissible site altitude Installation position 3RW3. ..-1.B.4 3RW3. ..-1.B.5 3RW30 ..1AA12 V 200 AC to 460 AC, three-phase ( 10 %) 460 AC to 575 AC, three phase ( 10 % - 15 %) 115 AC to 240 AC, singlephase (10 %) Hz 50/60 10 % Reduction of IE Up to 1000 m above sea level Up to 2000 m above sea level Up to 3000 m above sea level Up to 4000 m ab. sea level1) 100 % 92 % 85 % 78 % Without additional fan With additional fan 3) The soft starters are designed for operation when mounted in a vertical position. Any installation position (except vertical rotated by 180 ) Type 3RW30 1. 3RW3. 2. 3RW30 3. 3RW30 4. Frame size S00 S0 S2 S3 Continuous operation (% of Ie) % 100 Minimum load2) (% of Ie); At 40 C % Permissible ambient temperature C -25 to +60 (derating as of 40 C, see below) A A A 4 ) 4) 4 3 0.1 1 3 0.1 1 3 0.1 1 3RW30 14 3RW30 16 3RW30 24 3RW30 25 3RW30 26 A 6/5/4 9/8/7 12.5/11/9 16/14/12 25/21/18 25/21/18 Switching capacity of the auxiliary contacts 230 V/AC-15 230 V/DC-13 24 V/DC-13 Type 4 ) Current-carrying capacity Rated operational current Ie in acc. with IEC At 40/50/60 C, AC-53b Rated operational current Ie in acc. with UL/CSA At 40/50/60 C, AC-53b A 4.8/4.8/4 7.8/7.8/7 11/11/9 17.5/14/12 Power loss at continuous rated operational current (40 C) approx. W 5 7 7 9 13 Power loss when the max. switching frequency is exploited W 5 6 7 8 9 Given intermittent duty S4, Tu = 40 C 1/h 60 40 30 Duty cycle = 30%; stand-alone installation % 250 x Ie, 2 s 300 x Ie, 2 s 1/h --3) 54 Permissible starts per hour without the use of a fan 12 Permissible starts per hour with the use of a fan Given intermittent duty S4, Tu = 40 C 21 Duty cycle = 30%; stand-alone installation Idle time after continuous operation s 0 200 With Ie before a new start Degree of protection In acc. with IEC 60 529 IP20 (terminal housing IP00) SIRIUS System Manual 8-42 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit Conductor cross-sections Screw-type terminals Auxiliary conductors: (1 or 2 conductors connectable) Single-core mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5); 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) in acc. with IEC 60 947; max. 2 x (0.75 to 4) for standard screwdrivers Finely stranded with wire end ferrule mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5); 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) AWG cables, single- or multi-core AWG 2 x (18 to 14) - Terminal screws Nm lb.in size 2 and Pozidriv 2 M 3, PZ2 - Tightening torque 0.8 to 1.0 7.1 to 8.9 0.8 to 1.0 7.1 to 8.9 Main conductors: Single-core mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5); 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) 2 x (1 to 2.5) 2 x (2.5 to 6) Finely stranded with wire end ferrule mm2 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) 2 x (1 to 2.5) 2 x (2.5 to 6) Multi-core mm2 Type -- -- 3RW30 14 AWG cables, single- or multi-core 3RW30 16 3RW30 24 AWG 2 x (18 to 14) - Terminal screws - Tightening torque Nm lb.in 3RW30 25 3RW30 26 2 x (14 to 10) M 3, PZ2 M 4, PZ2 0.8 to 1.2 7 to 10.3 2 to 2.2 18 to 22 1)Over 4000 m on request 2)The rated current for the motor (specified on the motor's type plate) should amount at least to the specified percentage of the SIRIUS soft starter's device rated current Ie. 3)In the case of frame size S00, it is not possible to install the fan provided as an accessory. 4)Frame size S00 does not have any auxiliary contacts. Power electronics Type 3RW30 34 3RW30 35 3RW30 36 3RW30 44 3RW30 45 3RW30 46 100/85/72 Current-carrying capacity Rated operational current Ie in acc. with IEC At 40/50/60 C, AC-53b A 32/27/23 38/32/27 45/38/32 63/54/46 75/64/54 Rated operational current Ie in acc. with UL/CSA At 40/50/60 C, AC-53b A 27/27/23 34/32/27 42/38/32 62/54/46 68/64/54 10 13 17 13 16 26 15 5 20 30 15 48 24 Power loss at continuous rated operational current (40 C) approx. W 99/85/72 Permissible starts per hour Given interm. duty S4, Tu = 40 C 1/h 20 Duty cycle = 30 % % 300 x Ie, 3 s 1/h 44 s 0 300 x Ie, 4s Permissible starts per hour with the use of a fan Given interm. duty S4, Tu = 40 C 27 9 32 400 0 Duty cycle = 30 %; stand-alone installation Idle time after cont. operation with Ie before a new start Degree of protection In acc. with IEC 60 529 IP20 (terminal housing IP00) IP201) SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 8-43 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit Conductor cross-sections Screw-type terminals Auxiliary conductors: (1 or 2 conductors connectable) Single-core mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5); 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) in acc. with IEC 60 947; max. 2 x (0.75 to 4) for standard screwdrivers Finely stranded with wire end ferrule mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5); 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) size 2 and Pozidriv 2 AWG cables, single- or multi-core AWG - Terminal screws - Tightening torque 2 x (18 to 14) M3 Nm lb.in 0.8 to 1.0 7.1 to 8.9 Single-core mm2 2 x (0.75 to 16) Finely stranded with wire end ferrule mm2 2 x (0.75 to 16) 1 x (0.75 to 25) Multi-core mm2 2 x (0.75 to 25) 1 x (0.75 to 35) 2 x (10 to 50) 1 x (10 to 70) AWG cables, single- or multi-core AWG 2 x (18 to 3) 1 x (18 to 2) 2 x (10 to 1/0) 1 x (10 to 2/0) M 6, box terminal, PZ2 M6 (Allan screw) 3 to 4.5 27 to 40 4 to 6 35 to 53 Main conductors: - Terminal screws - Tightening torque Nm lb.in General specifications Standard Parameters Electrostatic discharge (ESD) IEC 1000-4-2, Severity 3: 6/8 kV El. magn. RF fields IEC 1000-4-3 Frequency range: 80 to 1000 MHz with 80 % at 1 kHz Severity 3, 10 V/m Conducted RF disturbance IEC 61000-4-6 EN 60 947-4-2 SN-IACS Frequency range: 80 MHz to 1000 MHz with 80 % at 1 kHz 10 V at 0.15 MHz to 80 MHz 3 V at 10 kHz to 80 MHz Burst IEC 1000-4-4 Severity 3: 1/2 kV Surge IEC 1000-4-5 Severity 3: 1/2 kV EMC radio interference intensity CISPR 11/09.1990 Limit value of class B at 30 MHz to 1000 MHz Radio interference voltage CISPR 11/09.1990 EN 60 947-4-2 (0.15 MHz to 30 MHz): device class A (industry) EMC noise immunity EMC emitted interference 1 ) IP20 only with attached box terminal (delivery state). Without box terminal IP00. 2) Device class B (public power supply networks) is complied with only in the case of variants 3RW3.-1AB0. with control supply voltage UC of 24 V. For the 3RW3.-1A.1. variants with a control supply voltage UC of 110 V to 230 V, single-stage filters (e.g. type B84143-A...) must be connected upstream. SIRIUS System Manual 8-44 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit 8.7.2 Short-circuit protection and fuse coordination IEC 60947-4-1/DIN VDE 0660 Part 102 draws a distinction between two coordination types, known as coordination type 1 and coordination type 2. In both coordination types, the short circuit to be dealt with is reliably disconnected. The differences lie only in the degree to which the device is damaged after a short circuit. Coordination type 1 The motor feeder can be operable after each short-circuit disconnection. Damage to the soft starter is possible. The circuit breaker itself always attains coordination type 1. Coordination type 2 After a short-circuit event there must be no damage to the soft starter or any other switching device; only the backup fuse may be destroyed. The actual motor feeder can be put into operation again immediately once the short circuit fuse has been replaced. Maximum short-circuit current All the specified fuse configurations are designed for a maximum shortcircuit current of 50 kA. This ensures that short circuits of 50 kA can be disconnected without posing a threat to persons or the system. Motor feeder: coordination type 1 Note on configuration: A fuseless configuration is recommended for motor feeders (i.e. the combination of a 3RV circuit breakers and a 3RW30 soft starter). Coordination type 1 is thus attained. Motor feeder: coordination type 2 To set up a motor feeder of coordination type 2, the feeder must be fused (i.e. the motor must be provided with overload protection). The following can be used: * The 3NE1 all-range fuse, which unifies line protection and semiconductor protection * The 3NE8 semiconductor protection fuse, in which case additional protection must be provided for the line Comparison of coordination types 1 and 2 The configuration variant on the basis of coordination type 2 is associated with higher costs than that of coordination type 1, which is why the fuseless configuration (coordination type 1) is recommended. The advantages are: * Fewer components in the cubicle * Less effort required for wiring * Less cubicle space required * Lower price SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 8-45 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit Fuse configurations with SITOR 3NE1..-0 The following table specifies the fuse configuration (coordination type 2) for 3RW30/31 with SITOR fuses 3NE1..-0 (short-circuit and line protection); max. short-circuit current 50 kA: Order number of the soft starter Order number of the fuse Rated current of the fuse Frame size of the fuse MLFB MLFB A 3RW30 14 3NE1814-01) 20 000 3RW30 16 3NE1815-01) 25 000 3RW30 24/3RW31 24 3NE1815-02) 25 000 3RW30 25/3RW31 25 3NE1815-02) 25 000 3RW30 26/3RW31 26 3NE1802-02) 40 000 3RW30 34 3NE1818-02) 63 000 3RW30 35 3NE1820-02) 80 000 3RW30 36 3NE1820-02) 80 000 3RW30 44 3NE1820-02) 80 000 3RW30 45 3NE1021-02) 100 00 3RW30 46 -- 3) -- -- Table 8-18: Fuse configurations (SITOR) 1)Fuse coordination for max. 400 V 2)Fuse coordination for max. 500 V 3)Fuse coordination with all-range fuses not possible; pure semiconductor protection fuses plus circuit breakers can be used instead (see following table) SIRIUS System Manual 8-46 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit Fuse configurations with SITOR 3NE8 The following table specifies the fuse configuration (coordination type 2) for 3RW30/31 with SITOR fuses 3NE8 (semiconductor protection is provided by the fuse; line protection and overload protection are provided by the circuit breaker); max. short-circuit current 50 kA/400 V: Order Rated cur- Frame Link module number rent of the size of of the circuit 3RW - 3RV fuse the fuse breaker2) Order number of the soft starter Order number of the fuse MLFB MLFB A Size MLFB MLFB3) 3RW30 14 3NE80 03 35 00 3RV10 11 3RA19 11-1A 3RW30 16 3NE80 03 35 00 3RV10 11 3RA19 11-1A 3RW30 24/ 3RW31 24 3NE80 03 35 00 3RV10 21 3RA19 21-1A 3RW30 25/ 3RW31 25 3NE80 03 35 00 3RV10 21 3RA19 21-1A 3RW30 26/ 3RW31 26 --1) -- -- -- -- 3RW30 34 3NE80 22 125 00 3RV10 31 3RA19 31-1A 3RW30 35 3NE80 24 160 00 3RV10 31 3RA19 31-1A 3RW30 36 3NE80 24 160 00 3RV10 31 3RA19 31-1A 3RW30 44 3NE80 24 160 00 3RV10 41 3RA19 41-1A 3RW30 45 3NE80 24 160 00 3RV10 41 3RA19 41-1A 3RW30 46 3NE80 24 160 00 3RV10 41 3RA19 41-1A Table 8-19: Fuse configurations (SITOR) 1) Coordination with pure semiconductor protection fuses is not possible; all-range fuses 3NE1..-0 can be used (see the table above) 2) The selection and setting of the circuit breaker is based on the rated current for the motor 3) Note the unit of quantity If the motor is to be configured to meet UL requirements, the order number of the fuse must be specified (3NE80..-1). SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 8-47 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit Fuseless configuration The following table specifies the components of the fuseless configuration (coordination type 1) for 3RW30/31; short-circuit current of 50 kA/400 V: Order number of the soft starter Order number of the circuit breaker1) Link module MLFB MLFB MLFB3) 2) 3RW30 14 3RV10 11 3RW30 16 3RV10 112) 3RA19 11-1A 3RA19 11-1A 3RW30 24/3RW31 24 3RV10 21 3RA19 21-1A 3RW30 25/3RW31 25 3RV10 21 3RA19 21-1A 3RW30 26/3RW31 26 3RV10 21 3RA19 21-1A 3RW30 34 3RV10 31 3RA19 31-1A 3RW30 35 3RV10 31 3RA19 31-1A 3RW30 36 3RV10 31 3RA19 31-1A 3RW30 44 3RV10 41 3RA19 41-1A 3RW30 45 3RV10 41 3RA19 41-1A 3RW30 46 3RV10 41 3RA19 41-1A Table 8-20: Motor feeder: fuseless configuration 1) The selection and setting of the circuit breaker is based on the rated current for the motor 2) 50 mm clearance is required above and below between the 3RW and grounded parts 3) Note the unit of quantity SIRIUS System Manual 8-48 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit Fused configuration The following table specifies the components of the fused configuration (coordination type 1) for 3RW30/31; short-circuit current of 50 kA/400 V: Order number of the soft starter Order number of the fuse Fuse rated current/ frame size Order Order number number of the therm. of the elecoverload tron. over1) relay load relay1) Order number of the contactor MLFB MLFB A / size MLFB MLFB MLFB 3RW30 14 3NA38 10 25 / 00 3RU11 162)4) 3RB10 162)4) 3RT10 15 3RW30 16 3NA38 10 25 / 00 3RU11 162)4) 3RB10 162)4) 3RT10 16 3RW30 24/ 3RW31 24 3NA38 22 63 / 00 3RU11 263) 3RB10 263) 3RT10 24 3RW30 25/ 3RW31 25 3NA38 22 63 / 00 3RU11 263) 3RB10 263) 3RT10 25 3RW30 26/ 3RW31 26 3NA38 24 80 / 00 3RU11 263) 3RB10 263) 3RT10 26 3RW30 34 3NA38 30 100 / 00 3RU11 363) 3RT10 34 363) 3RT10 35 3RW30 35 3NA38 30 100 / 00 3RU11 3RW30 36 3NA38 30 100 / 00 3RU11 363) 3RT10 36 463) 3RT10 44 3RW30 44 3NA31 44 250 / 1 3RU11 3RW30 45 3NA31 44 250 / 1 3RU11 463) 3RT10 45 250 / 1 463) 3RT10 46 3RW30 46 3NA31 44 3RU11 Table 8-21: Motor feeder: fused configuration 1) The selection and setting of the overload relay is based on the rated current for the motor 2) Short-circuit current of 50 kA to max. 400 V 3) Short-circuit current of 50 kA to max. 500 V 4) 50 mm clearance is required above and below between the 3RW and grounded parts SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 8-49 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit 8.7.3 Site altitude If the site altitude is above 1000 m, the following are necessary: * A reduction in the rated current for thermal reasons * A reduction in the rated voltage on account of the diminished dielectric strength Reductions as a function of site altitude The diagram below plots the reductions in rated current and rated operating voltage as a function of site altitude: 105 100 95 90 85 80 75 70 Ue reduction Ie reduction 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 Site altitude in m Fig. 8-26: Reductions as a function of site altitude SIRIUS System Manual 8-50 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit 8.7.4 Specifications in acc. with IEC The specified motor ratings are guide values. The soft starter must be selected on the basis of the rated current Ie. The motor ratings are based on the values specified in DIN 42 973 (kW) and NEC 96 / UL 508 (hp). Ambient temperature = 40 C 230 V 400 V Ie Order number 500 V Ie Order number Pe in kW Pe in kW In A MLFB Pe in kW In A MLFB 1.5 3 6 3RW30 14-1CB.4 -- -- -- 2.2 4 9 3RW30 16-1CB.4 -- -- -- 3 5.5 12.5 3RW30 24-1AB.4 7.5 12.5 3RW30 24-1AB.5 4 7.5 16 3RW30 25-1AB.4 7.5 16 3RW30 25-1AB.5 5.5 11 25 3RW30 26-1AB.4 15 25 3RW30 26-1AB.5 7.5 15 32 3RW30 34-1AB.4 18.5 32 3RW30 34-1AB.5 11 18.5 38 3RW30 35-1AB.4 22 38 3RW30 35-1AB.5 11 22 45 3RW30 36-1AB.4 30 45 3RW30 36-1AB.5 19 30 63 3RW30 44-1AB.4 37 63 3RW30 44-1AB.5 22 37 75 3RW30 45-1AB.4 45 75 3RW30 45-1AB.5 30 55 100 3RW30 46-1AB.4 70 100 3RW30 46-1AB.5 Table 8-22: 3RW3 motor ratings in acc. with IEC at 40 C Ambient temperature = 50 C 230 V 400V Ie Order number 500 V Ie Order number Pe in kW Pe in kW In A MLFB Pe in kW In A MLFB 1.1 2.2 5 3RW30 14-1CB.4 -- -- -- 1.5 4 8 3RW30 16-1CB.4 -- -- -- 3 5.5 11 3RW30 24-1AB.4 5.5 11 3RW30 24-1AB.5 4 5-5 14 3RW30 25-1AB.4 7.5 14 3RW30 25-1AB.5 5.5 11 21 3RW30 26-1AB.4 11 21 3RW30 26-1AB.5 7.5 11 27 3RW30 34-1AB.4 15 27 3RW30 34-1AB.5 7.5 15 32 3RW30 35-1AB.4 18.5 32 3RW30 35-1AB.5 11 18.5 38 3RW30 36-1AB.4 22 38 3RW30 36-1AB.5 15 22 54 3RW30 44-1AB.4 30 54 3RW30 44-1AB.5 18.5 30 64 3RW30 45-1AB.4 37 64 3RW30 45-1AB.5 22 45 85 3RW30 46-1AB-4 55 85 3RW30 46-1AB.5 Table 8-23: 3RW3 motor ratings in acc. with IEC at 50 C Ambient temperature = 60 C 230 V 400 V Ie Order number 500 V Ie Order number Pe in kW Pe in kW In A MLFB Pe in kW In A MLFB 0.75 1.5 4 3RW30 14-1CB.4 -- -- -- 1.5 3 7 3RW30 16-1CB.4 -- -- -- 2.2 4 9 3RW30 24-1AB.4 5.5 9 3RW30 24-1AB.5 3 5.5 12 3RW30 25-1AB.4 7.5 12 3RW30 25-1AB.5 4 7.5 18 3RW30 26-1AB.4 11 18 3RW30 26-1AB.5 5.5 11 23 3RW30 34-1AB.4 15 23 3RW30 34-1AB.5 7.5 11 27 3RW30 35-1AB.4 15 27 3RW30 35-1AB.5 7.5 15 32 3RW30 36-1AB.4 18.45 32 3RW30 36-1AB.5 11 22 46 3RW30 44-1AB.4 30 46 3RW30 44-1AB.5 15 22 54 3RW30 45-1AB.4 30 54 3RW30 45-1AB.5 18.5 37 72 3RW30 46-1AB.4 45 72 3RW30 46-1AB.5 Table 8-24: 3RW3 motor ratings in acc. with IEC at 60 C SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 8-51 3RW3 Semiconductor motor control unit 8.7.5 Specifications in acc. with NEMA The specified motor ratings are guide values. The soft starter must be selected on the basis of the rated current Ie. The motor ratings are based on the values specified in DIN 42 973 (kW) and NEC 96 / UL 508 (hp). Ambient temperature = 40 C 200V 230 V 460V Ie Order number 460V 575V Ie Order number Pe in hp Pe in hp Pe in hp In A MLFB Pe in hp Pe in hp In A MLFB 1 1 3 4.8 3RW30 14-1CB.4 -- -- -- -- 2 2 5 7.8 3RW30 16-1CB.4 -- -- -- -- 3 3 7.5 11 3RW30 24-1AB.4 7.5 10 11 3RW30 24-1AB.5 3RW30 25-1AB.5 5 5 10 17.5 3RW30 25-1AB.4 10 15 17.5 7.5 7.5 15 25.3 3RW30 26-1AB.4 15 20 25.3 3RW30 26-1AB.5 7.5 7.5 20 27 3RW30 34-1AB.4 20 25 27 3RW30 34-1AB.5 10 10 25 34 3RW30 35-1AB.4 25 30 34 3RW30 35-1AB.5 10 15 30 42 3RW30 36-1AB.4 30 40 42 3RW30 36-1AB.5 20 20 40 62.1 3RW30 44-1AB.4 40 60 62.1 3RW30 44-1AB.5 20 25 50 68 3RW30 45-1AB.4 50 60 68 3RW30 45-1AB.5 30 30 75 99 3RW30 46-1AB.4 75 100 99 3RW30 46-1AB.5 Table 8-25: 3RW3 motor ratings in acc. with NEMA at 40 C Ambient temperature = 50 C 200V 230 V 460V Ie Order number 460V 575V Ie Order number Pe in hp Pe in hp Pe in hp In A MLFB Pe in hp Pe in hp In A MLFB 1 1 3 4.8 3RW30 14-1CB.4 -- -- -- -- 2 2 5 7.8 3RW30 16-1CB.4 -- -- -- -- 3 3 7.5 11 3RW30 24-1AB.4 7.5 10 11 3RW30 24-1AB.5 3 3 10 14 3RW30 25-1AB.4 10 10 14 3RW30 25-1AB.5 5 5 15 21 3RW30 26-1AB.4 15 15 21 3RW30 26-1AB.5 7.5 7.5 20 27 3RW30 34-1AB.4 20 25 27 3RW30 34-1AB.5 7.5 10 20 32 3RW30 35-1AB.4 20 30 32 3RW30 35-1AB.5 10 10 25 38 3RW30 36-1AB.4 25 30 38 3RW30 36-1AB.5 15 20 40 54 3RW30 44-1AB.4 40 50 54 3RW30 44-1AB.5 20 20 40 64 3RW30 45-1AB.4 40 60 64 3RW30 45-1AB.5 25 30 60 85 3RW30 46-1AB.4 60 75 85 3RW30 46-1AB.5 Table 8-26: 3RW3 motor ratings in acc. with NEMA at 50 C Ambient temperature = 60 C 200 V 230 V 460 V Ie Order number 460 V 575 V Ie Order number Pe in hp Pe in hp Pe in hp In A MLFB Pe in hp Pe in hp In A MLFB 0.75 0.75 2 4 3RW30 14-1CB.4 -- -- -- -- 1.5 1.5 3 7 3RW30 16-1CB.4 -- -- -- -- 2 2 5 9 3RW30 24-1AB.4 5 7.5 9 3RW30 24-1AB.5 3 3 7.5 12 3RW30 25-1AB-4 7.5 10 12 3RW30 25-1AB.5 5 5 10 18 3RW30 26-1AB.4 10 15 18 3RW30 26-1AB.5 5 7.5 15 23 3RW30 34-1AB.4 15 20 23 3RW30 34-1AB.5 7.5 7.5 20 27 3RW30 35-1AB.4 20 25 27 3RW30 35-1AB.5 7.5 10 20 32 3RW30 36-1AB.4 20 30 32 3RW30 36-1AB.5 10 15 30 46 3RW30 44-1AB.4 30 40 46 3RW30 44-1AB.5 15 20 40 54 3RW30 45-1AB.4 40 50 54 3RW30 45-1AB.5 20 25 50 72 3RW30 46-1AB.4 50 60 72 3RW30 46-1AB.5 Table 8-27: 3RW3 motor ratings in acc. with NEMA at 60 C SIRIUS System Manual 8-52 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 9 3RE Enclosed starter Section Subject Page 9.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals 9-2 9.2 Device description 9-3 9.3 Application and areas of use 9-5 9.3.1 The enclosed starter in motor branches 9-5 9.3.2 Planning and operation 9-5 9.4 Accessories 9-6 9.5 Mounting and connection 9-7 9.5.1 Mounting 9-7 9.5.2 Connection 9-7 9.5.3 Circuit diagrams 9-8 9.6 Dimensional drawings 9-9 9.7 Technical Data 9-10 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 9-1 3RE Enclosed starter 9.1 Specifications/regulations/approvals Standards IEC 60 947-1, EN 60 947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100) IEC 60 947-5, EN 60 947-5 (VDE 0660 Part 200) IEC 60 947-2, EN 60 947-2 (VDE 0660 Part 102) The 3RE enclosed starter does not meet UL standards required for use in the United States. Protection against electrical shock The 3RE enclosed starters are touch safe according to DIN VDE 0106, Part 100. SIRIUS System Manual 9-2 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RE Enclosed starter 9.2 Device description Functions The 3RE enclosed starters are available as direct starters or reversing starters that are used for both the switching of motors and the current dependent protection of motors. The switching of the motors is done by the 3RT10 contactor. The current dependent protection is achieved by using either the 3RU11 thermal overload relays or 3RB10 the electronic overload relays with the wide adjustment range. These combination starters of contactor(s) and overload relay are mounted in a molded plastic enclosure which has the IP65 degree of protection rating thus provides protection against dust and spraying water. The operating device, that preforms the local manual on and off switching also fulfills this high degree of protection. Device designs The 3RE enclosed starters are available as a direct starter in three frame sizes for motors with one direction of rotation up to 22 kW at 400 V. * The frame size S00 is suitable for three phase motors up to 5.5 kW at 400 V AC and a maximum motor current of 12 A. The starters are available in the following two variants: - Molded plastic enclosure for a direct starter including the contactor - the thermal or electronic overload relay needs to be selected according to the rated motor current and ordered separately. - Molded plastic enclosure for a direct starter (without the contactor) - the contactor as well as the thermal or electronic overload relay need to be selected according to the rated motor current and ordered separately. * The frame size S0 is suitable for three phase motors up to 11 kW at 400 V AC and a maximum motor current of 25 A. The starters are available in the following two variants: - Molded plastic enclosure for a direct starter including the contactor - the thermal or electronic overload relay needs to be selected according to the rated motor current and ordered separately. - Molded plastic enclosure for a direct starter (without the contactor) - the contactor as well as the thermal or electronic overload relay need to be selected according to the rated motor current and ordered separately. * The frame size S2 is suitable for three phase motors up to 22 kW at 400 V AC and a maximum motor current of 50 A. The starters are available in the following variant: - Molded plastic enclosure for a direct starter (without the contactor) - the contactor as well as the thermal or electronic overload relay need to be selected according to the rated motor current and ordered separately. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 9-3 3RE Enclosed starter The 3RE enclosed starters are available as reversing starters in two frame sizes for motors with two directions of rotation up to 11 kW at 400 V. * The frame size S00 is suitable for three phase motors up to 5.5 kW at 400 V AC and a maximum motor current of 12 A. The starters are available in the following two variants: - Molded plastic enclosure for a reversing starter including the contactor combination - the thermal or electronic overload relay needs to be selected according to the rated motor current and ordered separately. - Molded plastic enclosure for a reversing starter (without the contactor combination) - the contactor combination as well as the thermal or electronic overload relay need to be selected according to the rated motor current and ordered separately. * The frame size S0 is suitable for three phase motors up to 11 kW at 400 V AC and a maximum motor current of 25 A. The starters are available in the following variant: - Molded plastic enclosure for a reversing starter (without the contactor combination) - the contactor combination as well as the thermal or electronic overload relay need to be selected according to the rated motor current and ordered separately. Detailed information More detailed technical data on the 3RE enclosed starters can be found in Section 9.7 "Technical data". Furthermore detailed information regarding the contactors can be found in Chapter 3 and for the overload relays in Chapter 4. SIRIUS System Manual 9-4 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RE Enclosed starter 9.3 Application and areas of use 9.3.1 The enclosed starter in motor branches Enclosed starter: Enclosure + contactor(s) + overload relay The enclosed starters, which consist of a contactor (combination) and a thermal or electronic overload that are protected against dust and spraying water by the molded plastic enclosure, serve to switch the motor and provide current dependent protection for the motor. Short-circuit protection must be provided by fuses or circuit breakers (see short-circuit protection). Short-circuit protection Short-circuit protection needs to be provided by either fuses (fused method) or circuit breakers (fuseless method). The coordination of corresponding short-circuit protection devices for the combinations of contactor and overload can be found in Section 4.7 "Technical data". When selecting the load feeders from the table the types of coordination need to be taken into consideration. Types of coordination The types of coordination (DIN EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 part 102)) describe how the devices perform after a short-circuit. They are broken down into two types: With type of coordination 1: In the event of a short-circuit, persons and equipment must not be in danger from the contactor or starter. These do not have to be suitable for subsequent operation (without repair and replacement of parts). With type of coordination 2: In the event of a short-circuit, persons and equipment must not be in danger from the contactor or starter. These must be suitable for subsequent operation. There is a risk of welding of the contacts. 9.3.2 Planning and operation Areas of use The 3RE enclosed starters serve to switch the motor and provide current dependent protection for the motor up to 22 kW at 400 V AC. Supply voltage The starters including the contactor come with the following rated control voltages: Frame size S00: 230 V, 50/60 Hz and 400 V, 50/60 Hz Frame size S0: 230 V, 50 Hz and 400 V, 50 Hz The 3RU11 thermal overload relay and the 3RB10 electronic overload relay do not require any special supply voltage. Setting The 3RU11 thermal overload relay and the 3RB10 electronic overload relay are to be set for the rated motor current corresponding to the instructions for the overload relays. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 9-5 3RE Enclosed starter Environmental requirements The enclosed starters can be operated without being derated in the temperature range of 0 C to +35 C. At temperatures over 35 C the highest current setting value of the setting range needs to be derated by a certain factor: Ambient temperature in C Derating factor for the highest current setting value +35 +45 1.0 0.87 The corresponding table shows that 45 C has a derating factor of 13 %. Switching ON/OFF The direct starter switches on the load by means of the white button (I). The black button (O) is used to switch off the load. The reversing starter can start the motor in the corresponding rotation by turning the upper switch clockwise- or counter clockwise. A change in the rotation of the motor is possible by pressing the black button (O). Manual and automatic RESET On the direct starter for the frame sizes S00 and S0 you can choose either automatic or manual reset of the overload relay. When using manual reset the black button (O) is the RESET button. This button must be actuated after an overload trip before it is possible to restart the motor. The other starters come only with the automatic-RESET function. Information regarding the setting of either automatic or manual reset on the overload relay can be found in chapter 4 for overload relays under the corresponding topic. Recovery time The recovery time for the overload relays after tripping due to an overload, phase imbalance, or phase loss can be found in chapter 4 for overload relays under the corresponding topic. Tripping characteristics/phase loss protection Information regarding tripping characteristics as a result of overload, phase imbalance, or phase loss can be found in chapter 4 for overload relays under the corresponding topic. Enclosure The enclosure comes with an IP65 degree of protection rating with grounding terminals, operating device and metric knockouts. 9.4 Accessories There are no accessories for the 3RE enclosed starter. SIRIUS System Manual 9-6 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RE Enclosed starter 9.5 Mounting and connection 9.5.1 Mounting Mounting options There are two options when mounting the 3RE enclosed starter: * The first option is to use the 3RE10 direct starter or 3RE13 reversing starter. These consist of a molded plastic enclosure with operating device and integrated contactor or integrated contactor combination. All that needs to be done is to mount the overload relay (to be ordered separately) to the integrated contactor or integrated contactor combination in accordance with the installation instructions of the overload relay. The wiring is quick and easy with the prefabricated wiring (for related connection notes see section 9.5.2). * The second option is to use the 3RE19 molded plastic enclosure with integrated operating device. The contactor/contactor combination and overload relay, can be bought separately as pre-assembled combinations or as individual components for self assembly (see note regarding various designs and the Mounting/Connection in Chapter 3 "Contactor combinations for reversing"). The overload relay needs to be installed according to the note regarding the direct mounting of the overload to the contactor or contactor combination. The self assembled or pre-assembled combination is snapped on to the DIN rail in the molded plastic housing. Mounting position When considering the mounting position of the starter, the allowable mounting position of the overload relay needs to be observed. 9.5.2 Connection Connection options The method of conductor connection as well as the type of screw driver, bit size, tightening torque and conductor cross-section (min.; max.) can be taken from the individual devices from sections 3.5 and 4.7. Protection against electrical shock The 3RE enclosed starters are touch safe according to DIN VDE 0106, part 100. SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 9-7 3RE Enclosed starter 9.5.3 Circuit diagrams The following shows the proper wiring of the 3RE enclosed starter. L1 L1 L2 L2 L3 N L3 N PE PE F1 F1 1 3 5 .3 A1(A2) 1 3 5 .3 A2 2 4 6 .4 A1 K1 K1 A2(A1) .4 2 4 6 S1 I S1 .3 (96) 95 97 .4 .1 O S2 1 3 5 .3 I .4 .2 1 3 5 95 97 2 4 6 96 F2 F2 2 4 6 98 TEST RESET STOP 96 98 (95) TEST RESET/ 0 U V W U V W M 3~ M 3~ Direct starter, frame size S00 and S0 Direct starter, frame size S2 L1 L2 L3 N PE L1 L2 L3 N PE F1 K1 1 3 5 1 3 5 2 4 6 2 4 6 K2 F1 .1 S0 II 0 I S2 K1 2 4 6 U V W M 3~ 96 53 53 22 A2 (F2 A2) Reversing starter, frame size S00 1 3 5 2 4 6 .3 K2 54 K1 F2 (22) 22 21 A1 21 A1 K1 1 3 5 2 4 6 K2 K2 .1 S0 II 0 I A2 F2 96 .4 .3 1 3 5 K1 2 4 6 U V W M 3~ .4 K2 K1 112 111 A1 A2 .4 .3 .3 K2 95 F2 .2 .4 .3 S2 54 K2 K1 .4 .4 .3 1 3 5 F2 95 F2 .2 K1 K2 121 122 A1 A2 Reversing starter, frame size S0 SIRIUS System Manual 9-8 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 3RE Enclosed starter 9.6 Dimensional drawings e a b d c e Fig. 9-1: Dimensions of the 3RE enclosed starter mm O a b c d e (3RE1...-..B..) Direct starter S00 4.5 150 160 85 98 2xM25 Direct starter S0 4.5 180 190 105 118 2xM25 Direct starter S2 7 240 250 160 160 2xM32 Reversing starter S00/S0 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 9-9 3RE Enclosed starter 9.7 Technical Data 3RE Enclosed starter General data Type 3RE1. 10, 3RE19 13 Specifications IEC 60 947-1, EN 60 947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100) IEC 60 947-5, EN 60 947-5 (VDE 0660 Part 200) IEC 60 947-2, EN 60 947-2 (VDE 0660 Part 102) 3RE1. 20, 3RE19 23 3RE10 30, 3RE19 33 Yes Yes Yes Frame size S00 S0 S2 Max. rated current IN max (= max. rated operational current Ie) A 12 25 50 Rated insulation voltage Ue (Pollution degree 3) V 400 Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 4 Permissible ambient temperature In operation In storage C C -20 to +35 (over + 35 C derating required) -55 to +80 Permissible rated current of the overload relay with an ambient temperature: + 35 C + 45 C % % 100 87 Degree of protection according to IEC 60 947-1 IP65 Shock-hazard protection according to VDE 0106 part 100 Touch safe Installation altitude Conductor cross-sections m up to 2000 over sea level; exceeding that level on request see section 4.7 "Technical Data" Short circuit protection Main power circuit see section 4.7 "Technical Data" Auxiliary circuit see section 4.7 "Technical Data" Note: Further technical data for the individual devices can be found in Chapter 3 for contactors and Chapter 4 for overload relays. SIRIUS System Manual 9-10 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 Index Numerics 35 mm rail 6-14 3-phase busbar system 2-43 3-phase busbars 2-43, 2-44 3RW3 soft starter 8-15 3RW31 special variant 8-11 4-pole contactor 3-25, 3-42, 3-110 4-pole contactor combination for reversing Auxiliary Auxiliary Auxiliary Auxiliary Auxiliary 3-42 A A/B-Technique 1-28 Accessories 1-10, 3-54, 5-8 Actuator-sensor interface (AS-Interface) 1-22 Adapters for individual installation 4-33 Adding to the auxiliary contacts 3-58 Additional load module 3-75 Address 1-25 Addressing socket 1-25 Advantages of load feeders/combination starters with overload relays 4-14 Alarm switch 2-17 ALPHA/LOVAG 1-3 Ambient requirements 4-17, 4-24, 9-6 Ambient temperature 3-20 Analog modules 1-25 Analog output 4-7, 4-27 Application notes for the use of 3RV1 downstream from frequency converters 2-72 Approvals/test reports 4-2 Areas of use 4-16, 4-23, 9-5 AS-Interface compact starter 1-30 AS-Interface load feeder 1-29 AS-Interface SaW 1-27 Assembly kits for reversing combinations 3-39 Assembly kits for star-delta combinations 3-50, 3-51 ATEX-Approval 2-4 Auxiliary conducting path, integrated 3-57 Auxiliary connecting lead terminal, 3-pole 3-83 Auxiliary contact 3-25, 3-57, 3-58 Auxiliary contact elements with make-beforebreak contacting 3-61 Auxiliary contact repeat terminal 4-41 Auxiliary contact, BYPASSED 8-32 Auxiliary contactors 3-32 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 contacts 2-6, 2-17, 4-19, 5-6, 8-12 release 2-6, 2-17 switch blocks 3-57 switch, at side 3-60 switch, at the front 3-59 B Banks of capacitors 3-26 Base plate 2-47 Bay 2-34 Bistable 4-26 Box terminal blocks 4-33 Box terminal construction type Break-loose torque 8-14 Busbar adapter 2-39 Busbar mounting 5-14, 5-20 Busbar systems 2-39 6-5 C Cable coupler capacitances 8-32 Cable release 4-32 Cage Clamp terminal 1-19, 3-32, 3-94 Cage Clamp-Technology 4-41 Cage-type clamping unit 1-19 Capacitor contactors 3-112 Capacitor switching capacity 3-27 Capacitor-switching contactors 3-26 Changing the contact pieces 3-103 Changing the magnetic coils 3-98 Characteristics 2-11 Circuit breaker 3RV1 2-5 Circuit diagrams 4-43, 5-23, 8-38, 9-8 Circuit example 8-29 Coasting-down time 8-31 Coding plug set (7PX9904) 7-8 Coding system 1-25 Coil voltage tolerance 3-21 Combination and wide-range voltages 7-6 Combination voltage 7-6 Combinations for reversing 3-118 Commissioning 8-30 Communication 1-10 Communication-capable motor starter 1-29 Compact modules 1-26 Compensating for different depths 3-52 Index-1 Index Complete devices 5-5 Components 1-12 Conductor cross-sections 3-96, 5-21, 6-15 Conductor cross-sections for main and auxiliary connections 3-96 Connected in parallel 3-87 Connecting lead 6-12 Connection 3-94 Connection comb 6-12 Connection cross-sections 1-21 Connection module 1-31 Connection of the main conducting path 3-84 Connection options 4-41, 4-42, 9-7 Connection tool 1-18 Constant operation 3-21 Contact pieces 3-105 Contact reliability 3-15, 3-33 Contactor combinations for reversing 3-35, 3-118 Contactor combinations for wye-delta starting 3-120 Contactor relays 1-12, 3-110, 6-3 Contactors - 4-pole 3-110 Contactors with 4 main contacts 3-25, 3-42, 3-110 Contactors with an extended operating range 3-28, 3-113 Continuous loading when connected in 3-87 Control relays 1-12 Control supply voltage 5-6 Control supply voltage, failure 4-26 Control using PLC 3-76 Coordination type 4-12 Coordination type 1 3-13, 5-2 Coordination type 2 3-13, 5-2 Coordination types 5-2, 9-5 Correction factors 8-20 Coupling element 3-76 Coupling links 6-3 Coupling links for direct attachment 6-7 Cover 7-23 Current and voltage limitation 8-14 Current gain 6-10 Current setting 2-7, 8-20 D DC brakes 8-14 DC power supply 4-33 Degree of protection 1-24, 2-3, 3-14 Device circuit diagrams 2-50 Device combinations 1-14 Device designs 4-8, 9-3 Device holder 2-42 Device variants 5-3 Diagnostics 8-33 Digital modules 1-25 Dimensional drawings 2-52, 5-24 DIN rail mounting 3-92, 5-18 Diode 3-80 Diode combination 3-80 Direct attachment 6-7 Direct current loads 2-10 Direct mounting 4-34, 4-40 Direct starters 5-14 Disconnector specifications 2-3 Display system 1-25 Disturbances 3-84 E Electrical isolation 6-9 Electrical remote RESET 4-30 Electrical service life 3-4 Electromagnetic compatibility 7-2 Electromagnetic overcurrent release 2-12 Electromechanical remote reset 4-30 Electromotive force 3-84 Electronic device overload protection 8-14 Electronically optimized auxiliary switch blocks 3-58 EMC interference suppression module 3-84 EMC suppression module 3-84 Emergency-Stop 1-27 Emergency-Stop button 2-37 Emergency-Stop devices 1-27 EN 50 005 3-3 EN 50 011 3-3 EN 50 012 3-3 Enclosed starter Enclosure + contactor(s) + overload relay 9-5 Enclosure 2-34, 9-6 End holder 6-13 End plate, coupling links 6-13 Energy-saving operation 8-14 Environmental protection 1-11 Environmental requirements 1-11 ET 200S 1-30 ET 200X 1-30 Event messages 8-32 Explosion protection 1-3, 2-10 Explosion-proof motors 4-3, 4-13 Extended operating range 3-28 Extended terminal covers 8-13 F Failsafe motor starter 1-32 Fan 8-13, 8-35 Features/Customer benefits 4-6 Feeder lugs 2-44 Feed-in terminal block 3-49 F-Kit 1-31 Frequency converter 8-8 Frequency sensitivity of the short-circuit releases 2-12 SIRIUS System Manual Index-2 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 Index Front plates 2-35, 2-36 Function diagrams 7-16 Function setting 7-14 Functional extra-low voltage (FELV) 3-9 Functions 4-15, 4-22, 7-13 Fuseless load feeder for rail mounting 5-9 Fuseless load feeders/combination starters for busbar mounting 5-14 Load feeders 1-13 Load feeders (combination starters) with communication capability 1-13 Locking device 2-37 Locking during maintenance work 2-30 Looping of the cables 4-42 Low ambient temperatures 3-22 Lugs and connecting bars 1-18 G Galvanic isolation 6-10 Ground fault protection 4-28 M Main and emergency stop switches 2-15 Making/ breaking capacity 3-87 Manual Motor Starter 2-66 Manual/auto RESET 4-15 Manual/automatic switchover 4-18 Manual-automatic RESET 4-18, 4-24, 9-6 Maximum number of auxiliary contacts 3-60 Mechanical interlock 3-119 Mechanical interlocking 3-25 Mechanical life 3-14 Mechanical thru-the-door reset 4-31 Minimal clearance 4-39, 4-40 Minimal power losses 4-7 Modular system 1-10 Mono- and bistable output relays 4-25 Monostable 4-26 Motor contactors 1-12 Motor protection 2-13 Motor protection with overload relay function 2-14 Motorized remote-control mechanism 2-22 Mounting 9-7 Mounting kits 5-5 Mounting options 3-91, 4-34, 4-40 Mounting plate 1-25 Mounting position 3-92, 4-39, 4-40, 9-7 Mounting systems 5-4 H Hand-held controller 1-30 High Feature motor starter 1-31 High long-term stability 4-7 Higher ambient temperature 3-20 Housing 2-10, 2-34 I Identifying letters 7-15 Indicator lights 2-37 Individual installation 4-37, 4-40 Input modules 6-5 Inrush currents 2-13 Installation guidelines 8-18 Installation on horizontal surfaces 3-93 Installation/Removal 4-30 Installing in series 3-31 Insulation displacement method 1-26 Integrated auxiliary contacts 4-6 Interface modules 6-3 Interference 6-10 Internal power supply 4-7 Isolating distance 8-3 Isolation 8-3, 8-11 K Kits 5-5 KTA certificate 2-4 L Label set 7-14, 7-22 Large current setting knob 4-6 Laser scanners 1-27 Latched auxiliary contactors 3-33 LED module 3-83 Level adaptation 6-10 Light curtains 1-27 Limit the residual voltage 3-75 Limiter function 2-70 Limiting tripping current 4-20 Line lengths 8-19 Link modules 5-8 Load control 7-6 Load feeder 3RA5 1-29 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 N NC contact interlock 3-35 Network structures 1-24 No load 8-33 Nodes 1-24, 1-28 Normal and heavy starting 4-12 Normal switching duty 8-3, 8-11 Number of auxiliary switches, maximum O Operating limits 4-2 Operating time adjustment 7-8 Operation with Frequency converters Optocoupler 6-2 Outgoing terminal rail 2-42 Output modules 6-5 Overload protection 3-48 Overload relay function 2-14 Overload relays 1-12, 1-13 3-60 4-12 Index-3 Index Overload relays in star-delta combinations Overload release 2-6 Overload warning 4-7, 4-28 Overvoltage 3-78 4-11 P Panel mounting 1-16, 3-91, 5-19 Paralleling links 3-87 PELV 3-9 Permissible residual current 3-75 Phase firing 8-9 Phase loss 8-33 Phase loss protection 4-21, 4-29 Phase loss sensitivity 2-10, 2-13 Plug-in relay coupling links 6-6 Pole-changing motors 8-11 Positively driven contacts 3-7 Positively driven operation 3-7 Potentiometers 8-17 Power gain 6-10 Precharging resistors 3-26, 3-27 Procedure 1-20 PROFIBUS 1-22 PROFIsafe 1-23 R Railway vehicles 2-4 Ramp time 8-31 Ramp times 8-17 RC-Element 3-79 Reactive-current compensation 3-26 Recovery time 4-19, 4-24, 9-6 Reduction in starting current 8-6 Reductions 8-16 Relay 6-2 Relay coupling modules 6-4 Remote-controlled mechanism 2-22 Removal 4-31, 4-32 Repeatability 7-7 RESET-Function 4-6 Resetting plunger 4-31 Resistance to extreme climates 4-3 Response threshold 2-15 Retainer, coupling links 6-13 Reversing 3-35 Reversing combination 3-35 Root 3 circuits 8-15 Rules for installing Circuit breakers/MSPs S Safe isolation 3-7, 3-8, 6-9 Safety at Work 1-27 Safety extra-low voltage (SELV) Safety modules 1-27 Safety monitors 1-27 Safety technology 1-10 Screw terminals 3-94 3-9 2-71 Screw-type terminals 1-18, 6-8, 7-5 Sealing 2-8 Sealing cover 3-88, 4-16, 4-17, 4-23, 4-33 Second ramp time 8-32 Self-assembly kits 3-39 Self-monitoring 4-28 Semiconductor coupling links 6-22 Semiconductor coupling modules 6-4 Service life 3-22 Setting 4-16, 4-23, 8-11, 8-41, 9-5 Setting accuracy 7-7 Shielding 1-24 Shipbuilding certificates 2-4 Ships' systems 4-3 Shock protection 2-3, 3-3, 3-89, 4-3, 4-41, 4-42, 9-2, 9-7 Short time operation 3-20 Short-circuit breaking capacity 2-10, 2-68 Short-circuit protection 2-10, 3-13, 4-12, 9-5 Short-circuit release 2-6, 2-11 Shunt release 2-19 Side module 2-42 Signal transmission 6-10 SIGUARD power modules 1-31 SIKOSTART 3RW22 8-14 SIKOSTART 3RW34 8-15 Single-phase loads 2-10 SIRIUS NET 1-29 SIRIUS system 1-5 Snap-on attachment 3-92, 6-7, 6-14, 8-37 Snap-on mounting 1-16, 5-18 Soft coasting-down function 8-12 Soft starter 1-13, 8-3, 8-9 Soft starting function 8-12 Soldering pin adapter 3-85 Soldering pin connector 2-48, 3-32, 3-85 Solid-state time relay blocks with semiconductor output 3-72 Solid-state time relays 1-13 Stand-alone installation 8-18 Standard 3RW30 variant 8-11 Standard motor starter 1-31 Standards 2-3, 4-2, 7-2 Star starting 8-7 Star-delta combinations 3-46, 8-16 Star-delta starter 8-7 Star-delta starting 3-48 Start contact 7-5 Starter Contactor + overload relay 4-10 Starter protection 2-13 Starting current 8-6 Starting current ratio 3-48 Starting time 8-31 Starting torque 8-16 Starting voltage 8-17, 8-31 SIRIUS System Manual Index-4 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 Index Status display 4-6 Status indication 4-19, 4-25 STOP-Function 4-19, 4-25 Straight-through current transformer 4-6, 4-41, 4-42 Summation current transformer 4-33 Supply interruption in the bypassed state 8-34 Supply power 4-16, 4-23, 9-5 Supply voltage 8-33 Surface casing 2-34 Surge suppressor 3-80 Switch ES motor starter 1-32 Switching capacitive loads 6-8 Switching capacity 3-4, 3-5, 3-6, 7-2 Switching direct current 2-15 Switching frequency 8-20, 8-31 Switching inductive loads 6-8 Switching ON/OFF 9-6 Switch-over pause 3-35, 3-48 Switch-over time 3-35 Two-wire time relay Type E 2-66 7-6, 7-19 U UL/CSA 1-4 Undervoltage release 2-19 Uniformity 1-10 Unwanted signals 3-78 Utilization categories 3-3 V Vacuum-switching tubes 3-103 Variable setting of the trip classes Varistor 3-79 Voltage ranges 3-34 W Weld free 3-13 Wide current adjustment ranges Wide-range voltage 7-5 Wiring kits 5-8 4-7 4-7 T Technical specifications 2-63, 8-41 Temperature compensation 4-7 Temperature monitoring 8-14 Terminal covers 3-89, 4-33, 8-13 Terminal for contactor coils 3-49, 4-41 Terminal markings 3-3 Terminals for contactor coils 3-49 Terminating resistors 1-24 TEST-Function 4-6, 4-19, 4-25 Testing overload tripping 2-9 Thermal load carrying capacity 3-21 Thermal overload release 2-11, 2-13 Thermistor motor protection-Function 4-27 Thermistor-Motorschutz-Funktion 4-27 Three-phase current asynchronous motors 8-6 Three-phase induction motors 2-13 Three-pole load 2-10 Time ramps 8-12 Time-current characteristics 2-3 Time-delay auxiliary contact block 3-116 Time-delay auxiliary switch 3-69 Time-delay time relay blocks, on-delay 3-116 Time-delayed overload release 4-2 Time-delayed overload releases 4-2 Timing diagram 8-33 Tool 1-20 Transformer protection 2-13 Trip classes > CLASS 10 4-7 Tripping characteristics 2-13, 4-20, 4-28 Tripping characteristics/Phase loss protection 9-6 Tripping classes 2-6, 4-2 Two-conductor connection 3-95 Two-tier construction type 6-5 SIRIUS System Manual A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001 Index-5 Index SIRIUS System Manual Index-6 A5E40534713002A/RS-AA/001